JP2019081040A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine that can suitably recognize players' actions and modes in a non-contact manner.SOLUTION: When an image command signal is sent from a sound-light side MPU 93 to a control circuit 74, projection light is emitted from a light-emitting device 72, and reflected light to the projection light is received by an image device 73. Due to an execution of a prescribed calculation processing in a signal processing circuit 75 to the image signal received by the imaging device 73, distance data is lead out corresponding to each pixel on a pixel array part 73c of the imaging device 73. The distance data thus lead out is sent from the signal processing circuit 75 to the sound-light side MPU 93, then in the sound-light side MPU 93, performance controls for various kinds of monitoring and various kinds of presentations are executed by using the distance data. When these are executed, if a player performs a presentation operation, a position of the player's hand in a virtual two-dimensional plane is adjusted on the basis of the distance data of the hand.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 16

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  Pachinko machines, slot machines and the like are known as a type of gaming machine. In these gaming machines, it is known that an internal lottery is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, and a bonus is provided to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. In addition, it is general that an effect for causing a player to predict or recognize the result of the internal lottery is performed.

  Specifically, for the pachinko machine, for example, a lottery is performed based on the game ball entering the ball entry portion provided in the game area, and the variation display of the pattern is performed on the display surface of the display device. It is known that when the winning result is obtained, the combination of the specific pattern etc. is displayed on the display surface as a final stop, and the configuration shifts to a special gaming state advantageous to the player. And when it shifts to the special game state, for example opening and closing of the ball entry device etc which are provided in the game territory is started, due to the ball entry to the said ball entry device and the like the payout etc of the game sphere comes to be done (See, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP, 2009-261415, A

  Here, in the case of providing a configuration capable of non-contact recognition of the player's operation and state, etc., it is necessary to be able to suitably perform non-contact type recognition of the player's operation and state. There is still room for improvement.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances and the like, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably performing non-contact type recognition of a player's action or appearance. It is a thing.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problems, the invention according to claim 1 is an information deriving means capable of deriving position information corresponding to a distance to a monitoring target existing ahead of a game machine based on a light receiving result in a light receiving portion;
Operation specifying means for specifying whether or not the recognition target region of the player is included in the operation effective range using the position information derived by the information deriving means;
Specific execution means for executing specific processing corresponding to the recognition target portion being specified by the operation specifying means as being included in the operation effective range;
Equipped with
The operation specifying means is
A specific adjustment unit that executes a specific adjustment process for adjusting the positional relationship between the recognition target site and the operation effective range based on position information of the recognition target site;
The recognition target region corresponding to the position information corresponding to the position where the distance from the distance measurement standard to the front of the gaming machine is out of the specific range is excluded from the identification target whether or not it is included in the operation effective range;
It is characterized by having.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to preferably perform non-contact type recognition of the player's action or appearance.

It is a front view showing a pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the main composition of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the main composition of a pachinko machine. It is a front view which shows the structure of a game board. (A)-(j) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content in the display surface of a symbol display apparatus. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content in the display surface of a symbol display apparatus. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the said imaging substrate and its periphery for demonstrating the imaging substrate. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the various counters used for the etc. lottery. It is a flowchart which shows the main process in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure special electric power control processing in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure change start process in main side MPU. It is a flow chart which shows timer interruption processing in sound side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the main side command corresponding | compatible process in sound light side MPU. FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration for performing imaging control of an imaging substrate and various controls using imaging results. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the reference | standard in the case of determining whether the signal light-received with the imaging device of the board | substrate for imagings is used for calculation of distance data in a signal processing circuit. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a mode when the sheet | seat for radio wave goth prevention is not stuck, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a mode when the sheet for radio wave goth prevention is stuck FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the reference | standard switch monitoring process in sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the signal processing in a signal processing circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the imaging control processing in sound light side MPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the distance image storage area of sound side RAM. It is an explanatory view for explaining recognition corresponding distance. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the phenomenon of the monitoring object in the monitoring process for cancellation. It is a flowchart which shows the monitoring processing for cancellation in sound light side MPU. (A) It is an explanatory view for explaining the state where distance data less than the distance for surveillance was stored in a plurality of unit storage areas of distance image storage area, (b) explanation of history data storage area of sound light side RAM FIG. It is a time chart which shows a mode that abnormality alerting | reporting is performed based on the monitoring process for cancellation. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the height position of the face of the player who is sitting on the chair arrange | positioned ahead of a pachinko machine in a game hall, and is playing a game. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a mode that rendering operation which selects the image currently displayed with the symbol display apparatus is performed. It is a flowchart which shows height position monitoring processing in sound side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for face recognition in sound light side MPU. It is a flow chart which shows attestation processing at the time of return operation in sound side MPU. It is a time chart which shows a situation that face recognition is performed. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st condition monitoring process in sound light side MPU. It is a time chart which shows a mode that 1st condition monitoring is performed. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd condition monitoring process in sound light side MPU. (A)-(c) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the mode of operation | movement of the movable body unit which operate | moves in the case of notification production | presentation. It is a flow chart which shows notice production setting processing in sound side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st notification production control processing in sound light side MPU. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a mode that rendering operation is performed, (b-1), (b-2) The content of the image for one frame based on the distance data stored in the distance image storage area It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a mode that rendering operation is performed, (b-1), (b-2) The content of the image for one frame based on the distance data stored in the distance image storage area It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a mode that rendering operation is performed, (b-1), (b-2) The content of the image for one frame based on the distance data stored in the distance image storage area It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd notification production control processing in sound light side MPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a mode that operation for 2nd notification effects is performed. (A-1), (a-2) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of a division | segmentation effect, It is a time chart which shows the flow of the division | segmentation effect (b). It is a flow chart which shows a division production setting processing in sound light side MPU. It is a flow chart which shows division production control processing in sound side MPU. (A), (b) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the image for 1 frame based on the distance data stored in the distance image storage area. It is a time chart which shows a mode that operation for 1st notification production is given priority over operation for division production. (A)-(d) It is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of stop operation production. (A), (b) is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of the stop operation effect. It is a flowchart which shows stop operation production setting processing in sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows stop operation production control processing in sound light side MPU. (A), (b) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the image for 1 frame based on the distance data stored in the distance image storage area. It is an explanatory view for explaining stop priority data. (A), (b) is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of the fish school effect. It is a time chart which shows the flow of continuous production. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the pending | holding command in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the continuous production | presentation setting process in sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the continuous production control processing in sound light side MPU. It is an explanatory view for explaining a situation that advance notice production is performed using an imaging result of a substrate for imaging. It is a flowchart which shows the final production control processing in sound light side MPU. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a mode that confrontation production | presentation is performed. It is a flowchart which shows the confrontation production setting process in sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the forced presentation control processing in sound light side MPU. It is a time chart which shows the flow of forced presentation. It is a time chart which shows a mode that forced presentation is performed. It is a flowchart which shows the backout possible control processing in sound side MPU. It is a time chart which shows the flow of a backout possible presentation. It is a time chart which shows a mode that a backout possible presentation is performed. It is a flowchart which shows the backout impossible control processing in sound side MPU. It is a time chart which shows a mode that a backout impossible production is performed. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical configuration for performing various control using the imaging control of the board | substrate for imaging in 2nd Embodiment, and an imaging result. It is a flowchart which shows the process for face recognition in main side MPU. It is a flow chart which shows attestation processing at the time of return operation in main side MPU. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the board | substrate for imaging in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the division | segmentation production setting process performed by the sound side MPU in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the height position monitoring process performed by the sound side MPU in 5th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the imaging range of the board | substrate for imaging in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the monitoring processing for cancellation in sound light side MPU. (A), (b) is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of effects in a modification.

First Embodiment
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as "pachinko machine"), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail based on the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10, and FIGS. 2 and 3 are perspective views showing the main components of the pachinko machine 10 in an expanded manner. In addition, in FIG. 2, the structure in the game area of the pachinko machine 10 is abbreviate | omitted for convenience.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10 and a gaming machine main body 12 rotatably attached to the outer frame 11 in the forward direction. . The outer frame 11 is configured by connecting wooden plate members to four sides, and has a rectangular frame shape. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall by fixing the outer frame 11 to the island facility.

  As shown in FIG. 1, a ball lending device (for example, a CR unit) Y is provided on the side of the outer frame 11. A bill inlet H1 and a medium inlet / outlet H2 are provided on the front side of the ball lending device Y. By inserting a bill into the bill inlet H1, it becomes possible to receive a loan of the number of gaming balls corresponding to the bill. Further, by inserting a card-type storage medium into the medium entrance H, it is possible to receive a loan of a number of game balls corresponding to the information stored in the storage medium. In addition, what is inserted in the ball lending device Y in order to receive the game ball lending is not limited to a card, and may be a coin in which cash information is stored. In addition, the storage medium is returned through the medium entrance H by performing the return operation in a situation where the information on the number of usable gaming balls remains. By inserting the storage medium into the medium entrance H of the ball lending device Y provided in the pachinko machine 10 or the other pachinko machine 10, a number of game balls corresponding to the information stored in the storage medium are lent It becomes possible.

  As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the gaming machine main body 12 includes a main body frame 13, a front door frame 14 disposed in front of the main body frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 disposed behind the main body frame 13. And have. The main body frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is rotatably supported relative to the outer frame 11. In detail, the main body frame 13 is pivotable forward with the left side as a pivoting base end and the right side as a pivoting tip side in a front view.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the main body frame 13, and can be rotated forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip end side in front view It is assumed. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported by the main body frame 13, and the front side views the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip end side. It is made movable.

  In addition, the gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device at its rotating tip, and has a function to lock the gaming machine main body 12 against the outer frame 11 so as not to be opened, and The door frame 14 has a function to lock the main body frame 13 in an unopenable manner. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation on the cylinder lock 17 provided exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 using an unlocking key.

  Next, the front door frame 14 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front side of the main body frame 13. The front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 21 which enables the player to visually recognize substantially the entire game area, which will be described later, from the front. The window portion 21 has a substantially elliptical shape, and a transparent window panel 22 is fitted therein. The window panel 22 is unitized in a state in which two sheets of colorless and transparent glass are disposed to be opposed to each other. Instead of the colorless and transparent glass as the window panel 22, a colorless and transparent synthetic resin plate may be used.

  A display light emitting unit 23 is provided above the window 21 in the front door frame 14. A light emitting body such as an LED is incorporated in the display light emitting unit 23, and lighting or blinking is performed according to the contents of the effect at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, etc. Lighting or blinking is performed in the above manner. A pair of left and right speaker portions 24 is provided on the left and right corner sides in the upper side area of the front door frame 14. The speaker unit 24 outputs a sound or a sound corresponding to the contents of the effect at the time of a big hit, a predetermined reach, or the like, and a sound or a sound corresponding to the occurrence of an abnormality at a predetermined abnormality.

  Below the window portion 21 of the front door frame 14, an upper bulging portion 31 and a lower bulging portion 32 bulging toward the front side are vertically arranged in parallel. An upper plate 33 opened upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 31, and a lower plate 34 opening similarly upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 32. The upper tray 33 has a function for temporarily storing game balls paid out from the later described payout device and guiding the game balls to the game ball launch mechanism side described later while aligning them in a line. The lower tray 34 has a function of storing the game balls surplus in the upper tray 33.

  A ball lending operating device 26 is provided in the upper bulging portion 31. The ball lending operating device 26 is provided with a ball lending button 27, a return button 28, and a frequency display unit 29. In a situation where information of usable gaming balls is stored based on insertion of a bill or storage medium into the ball lending device Y, information of ball lending operation, return operation and usable gaming ball number through the ball lending operating device 26 The corresponding frequency can be confirmed. That is, the ball lending button 27 is operated to obtain a rental ball, and the lending ball is paid out as long as the information on the number of usable gaming balls is present. The return button 28 is operated to request return of the storage medium storing information corresponding to the number of usable gaming balls. The frequency display unit 29 displays a frequency that is information corresponding to the number of usable gaming balls.

  The lower bulging portion 32 is a discharge operation portion 35 operated to discharge gaming balls stored in the lower plate 34 into a ball receiving box (not shown) disposed below the lower bulging portion 32. Is provided. The discharge operation unit 35 is provided so as to be able to open and close the ball removal hole 36 formed in the bottom portion of the lower plate 34. In the situation where the discharge operation part 35 is disposed in the closed position, the ball extraction hole 36 is in the closed state, the discharge of gaming balls from the lower tray 34 is prevented, and in the situation where the discharge operation part 35 is disposed in the open position. The ball removal hole 36 is opened, and the discharge of the game balls from the lower tray 34 is permitted. An electric actuator is not provided for the discharge operation unit 35, and in order to move the discharge operation unit 35 between the closed position and the open position, it is necessary to manually operate the discharge operation unit 35. Moreover, although the discharge operation unit 35 is biased toward the closed position, the discharge operation unit 35 is opened by utilizing the engagement relationship between the discharge operation unit 35 and the lower bulging portion 32. Can be held by the When the holding state is released, the discharge operation unit 35 returns to the closed position.

  A firing operation device 37 is provided on the right side of the lower side bulging portion 32 so as to protrude to the front side. By operating the launch operation device 37, the game ball launch mechanism described later is driven and controlled, and the game balls stored in the upper tray 33 are launched. The firing operation device 37 includes an operation base 37a provided so as to project forward and an operation handle 37b provided so as to be rotatably supported by the operation base 37a, and the operation handle 37b is operated so as to rotate. As a result, the launch intensity of the gaming ball from the gaming ball launch mechanism is adjusted. Further, the launch operation device 37 includes a touch sensor 37c for detecting that the operation handle 37b is touched by the player, and a variable resistor 37d for detecting the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 37b. A stop switch 37e is provided which is operated to stop the firing of the game balls even when the operation handle 37b is being operated by the player. When the operating handle 37b is disposed at the initial position, the stop switch 37e is naturally turned on by the operating handle 37b. It is detected through the variable resistor 37d when both conditions that the operation handle 37b is touched is detected by the touch sensor 37c and that the stop switch 37e is not ON are satisfied. The game ball is fired at a firing intensity corresponding to the amount of pivotal operation.

  Next, the main body frame 13 will be described in detail.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the main body frame 13 mainly includes a resin base 41 whose outer shape is substantially the same as the outer frame 11. A substantially elliptical window hole 43 is formed in the central portion of the resin base 41. A game board 51 is removably attached to the resin base 41. The game board 51 is made of plywood, and the game area formed on the front surface of the game board 51 is exposed to the front side of the main body frame 13 through the window hole 43 of the resin base 41.

  The configuration of the game board 51 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 4 is a front view of the game board 51. As shown in FIG.

  The inner rail portion 51a and the outer rail portion 51b are attached to the game board 51 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA, and the guiding means is provided by the inner rail portion 51a and the outer rail portion 51b. Guide rails are configured as. The game balls fired from the game ball launch mechanism 45 (see FIG. 2) attached below the window holes 43 in the resin base 41 are guided to the top of the game area PA by the guide rails.

  The game ball firing mechanism 45 is provided on the firing rail 46 with a firing rail 46 extending toward the guide rail, a ball feeding device 47 for feeding the gaming balls stored in the upper plate 33 onto the firing rail 46, and And a solenoid 48, which is an electric actuator that causes the game ball to be emitted toward the guide rail. As the firing operation device 37 provided on the front door frame 14 is turned, the ball feeding device 47 is driven and controlled to supply one gaming ball on the firing rail 46, and the solenoid 48 is also driven. As a result, the game ball is launched toward the game area PA.

  The game board 51 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. In each opening, a general winning opening 52, a special electric winning device 53, a first operation opening 54, a second operation opening 55, a through gate 56, a symbol display unit 60, a special drawing unit 62, a drawing unit 63, etc. ing.

  Even if the ball enters the through gate 56, the payout of the game ball is not executed. On the other hand, when entry to any of the general winning opening 52, the special power winning device 53, the first operation opening 54 and the second operation opening 55 occurs, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Specifically, regarding the number of winning balls, the payout of 10 winning balls is executed when entering the general winning opening 52, and 15 when entering the special power winning device 53. When the payout of individual winning balls is executed and the entry to the first operation port 54 occurs, the payout of three winning balls is executed and the entry of the second operation port 55 occurs. The payout of one prize ball is executed.

  The number of prize balls is arbitrary. For example, although the number of prize balls in the second operation port 55 is smaller than that in the first operation port 54, the number of prize balls may be different from the above. The second operating port 55 may have a larger number of winning balls than the first operating port 54.

  In addition, an out port 58 is provided at the lowermost portion of the game board 51, and game balls which have not entered the various winning ports etc. are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 58. Further, on the game board 51, a large number of nails 59 are implanted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball, and various members such as a windmill are disposed.

  Here, entering the ball means that the gaming ball passes through the predetermined opening, and not only the aspect of being ejected from the gaming area PA after passing through the opening, but also from the gaming area PA after passing through the opening Also included is an aspect of continuing the flow of the game area PA without being discharged. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish the game ball from entering the out port 58, the general winning port 52, the special power winning device 53, the first operating port 54, the second operating port 55, and the through gate 56 The entry of the game ball to the is also expressed as a winning.

  The first operating port 54 and the second operating port 55 are unitized as an operating port device and installed on the game board 51. The first operating port 54 and the second operating port 55 are both open upward. Further, both operation ports 54 and 55 are aligned in the vertical direction so that the first operation port 54 is on the upper side. The second operating port 55 is provided with a universal plug 55a as a guide piece including a pair of left and right movable pieces. In the closed state of the commercial electric utility 55a, the gaming ball can not win a prize in the second operation opening 55, and the commercial electric utility 55a is opened so that a winning in the second operating opening 55 is possible.

  A through gate 56 is provided upstream of the second operation port 55 in the flow direction of the gaming ball. The through gate 56 has a through hole (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction, and the gaming ball that has won the through gate 56 flows down the gaming area PA after winning. Thereby, it is possible for the game ball that has won the through gate 56 to win the second operation port 55.

  Based on the winning on the through gate 56, the utility power 55a of the second operation port 55 is switched from the closed state to the open state. Specifically, the internal lottery is performed triggered by the winning on the through gate 56, and a common drawing display of the drawing unit 63 provided in the lower right corner which is a region where the gaming ball does not pass in the gaming region PA Variation display of the pattern is performed in the section 63a. Then, when the result of the internal lottery is the electronic combination open winning, the result of the stop corresponding to the result is displayed, and the variable display of the spread map display portion 63a is ended, the state shifts to the general power transmission open state. In the general-purpose open state, the general-purpose utility 55a is open in a predetermined manner.

  In addition, although the common view display part 63a is comprised by the segment display in which several segment light emission parts are arranged in a predetermined | prescribed aspect, it is not limited to this, A liquid crystal display device, an organic electroluminescence display , Or a display device such as a CRT or dot matrix display. Moreover, as a pattern that is variably displayed in the common view display unit 63a, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed A configuration in which a plurality of colors are switched and displayed may be considered.

  In the common drawing unit 63, a common drawing reserve display unit 63b is provided at a position adjacent to the common drawing display unit 63a. The number of game balls winning through the through gate 56 is held up to a maximum of four, and the number of held balls is displayed by lighting of the common drawing hold display section 63b.

  A lottery is performed with a winning of the first operation port 54 or the second operation port 55 as a trigger. Then, the lottery result is clearly indicated through the display effects on the special display unit 62 and the symbol display device 61 of the symbol display unit 60.

  More specifically, the special drawing unit 62 is provided with a special drawing display unit 62 a. The display area of the special view display unit 62 a is narrower than the display surface of the symbol display device 61. In the special view display portion 62a, the winning of the first operation port 54 or the winning of the second operation port 55 is a trigger, and a lottery is performed, whereby a variable display of symbols or a predetermined display is performed. Then, the result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. In addition, although the special view display part 62a is comprised by the segment display in which several segment light emission parts are arranged in a predetermined | prescribed aspect, it is not limited to this, A liquid crystal display device, an organic electroluminescence display , Or a display device such as a CRT or dot matrix display. Moreover, as a pattern displayed on the special view display unit 62a, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, or a plurality of colors May be displayed.

  In the special drawing unit 62, a special drawing reservation display part 62b is provided at a position adjacent to the special drawing display part 62a. The number of game balls played in the first operation opening 54 or the second operation opening 55 is held up to a maximum of four, and the number of holdings is displayed by turning on the special view holding display portion 62b.

  In detail about the symbol display device 61, the symbol display device 61 is configured as a liquid crystal display device provided with a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device described later. The symbol display device 61 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device having a display screen such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device or a CRT, and is a dot matrix display. May be

  In the symbol display device 61, when variation display or predetermined display of the symbol is performed in the special view display portion 62a based on the winning of the first operation opening 54 or the winning of the second operation opening 55, the symbol is displayed accordingly. Variable display or predetermined display is performed. In the symbol display device 61, not only display effects triggered by winning in the first operation port 54 or the second operation port 55, but also display effects in the open / close execution mode described later, etc., which are shifted after winning. Is done.

  The display contents in the case where the variable display of the symbol is performed by the symbol display device 61 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 5 and 6. FIG. 5 is a view individually showing the symbols variably displayed by the symbol display device 61, and FIG. 6 is a view showing the display surface of the symbol display device 61. As shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 5 (a) to 5 (j), a pattern which is a kind of pattern consists of nine types of main designs to which numerals "1" to "9" are respectively attached and a shell-shaped picture pattern It is constituted by the sub pattern. More specifically, the main symbols are configured by attaching numbers of "1" to "9" to nine types of character symbols such as octopus.

  As shown in FIG. 6A, on the display surface of the symbol display device 61, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 in the upper, middle, and lower positions are set as a plurality of display areas. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the main symbols and the sub symbols are arranged in a predetermined order. Specifically, in the upper symbol row Z1, nine types of main symbols from "1" to "9" are arranged in descending numerical order, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each main symbol. . In the lower figure pattern row Z3, nine types of main symbols of "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers and one sub-symbol is arranged between each main symbol.

  That is, the upper pattern row Z1 and the lower pattern row Z3 are formed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine main symbols of "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and then between the main symbol of "9" and the main symbol of "1" The main symbols of "4" are additionally arranged in each, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each of these main symbols. That is, only in the middle symbol row Z2, ten main symbols are arranged and are configured by twenty symbols. Then, on the display surface of the symbol display device 61, the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed so as to scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity.

  As shown in FIG. 6 (b), on the display surface of the symbol display device 61, three symbols are stop-displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of nine symbols of 3 × 3 are displayed. It is supposed to be stopped. Further, as shown in FIG. 6A, on the display surface of the symbol display device 61, five effective lines, ie, the left line L1, the middle line L2, the right line L3, the right downward line L4, and the right upward line L5 It is set.

  When variable display of symbols is performed on the display surface of the symbol display device 61 based on winning on the first operation port 54 or the second operation port 55, the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 have predetermined periodicity. The variable display is started to scroll in the direction. Then, it is switched from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2 and finally the predetermined symbol is displayed in a stationary display in each symbol row Z1 to Z3 and is ended. . In addition, when the variation display of symbols ends, when the result of the internal lottery is either the low probability jackpot result or the most advantageous jackpot result described later, the combination of the same symbol on any valid line is It is formed. Further, in the case of the explicit high probability jackpot result described later, although the same symbol combination is not formed on any of the effective lines, a predetermined symbol combination is formed on any of the effective lines.

  In addition, based on winning in any operation opening 54, 55, the display is started by the special view display unit 62a and the symbol display device 61, and a predetermined result is displayed until it is ended. It corresponds to the number of times. In addition, the aspect of the variation display of the symbols in the symbol display device 61 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary, the number of symbol rows, the direction of the variation display of symbols in the symbol row, the number of symbols in each symbol row, etc. Can be changed as appropriate. Further, the pattern variably displayed by the symbol display device 61 is not limited to the above-described symbol. For example, only numbers may be variably displayed as a pattern.

  Returning to the explanation of FIG. 4, when the jackpot is won by the winning lottery based on the winning of the first operation opening 54 or the winning of the second operation opening 55, the winning of the special power winning device 53 becomes possible. Switch to open / close execution mode. The special power winning device 53 has a large winning opening (not shown) leading to the back side of the game board 51, and an open / close door 53a for opening and closing the large winning opening. The open / close door 53a is disposed in either the closed state or the open state. Specifically, the open / close door 53a is normally in a closed state in which the game ball can not be won, and is switched to an open state in which the game ball can be won if the shift to the open / close execution mode is won in the internal lottery. It has become. By the way, the open / close execution mode is a mode in which transition is made when a hit result is obtained. In the closed state, although it is not impossible to win, it may be in a state in which the winning is less likely to occur than in the open state.

  Next, the center frame 65 of the symbol display unit 60 will be described.

  The center frame 65 includes a roof unit 66 surrounding the upper side and the left and right sides of the symbol display device 61, and a stage unit 67 disposed below the symbol display device 61. A ball inlet 66a is formed in the left frame portion of the roof unit 66, and the gaming ball having entered the ball inlet 66a is guided onto the stage unit 67 through a warp passage (not shown).

  The stage unit 67 has a rolling surface 67a on which the game ball can roll. The rolling surface 67a has a width dimension in the front-rear direction of about two game balls, and has a smooth streamline shape substantially symmetrical in the lateral direction about the central portion. Specifically, the rolling surface 67a is a peak portion 67b in which the central portion bulges upward, the left and right are valley portions 67c recessed downward, and the left and right ends are above the central portion Located in

  The valley portion 67c has a shape inclined downward toward the front. The gaming ball having reached the valley 67c in a sufficiently decelerated state is guided by the inclination of the valley 67c and discharged from the front edge of the valley 67c to the lower side of the stage unit 67. At the top of the mountain portion 67b, a front guide path is integrally formed which extends in the front-rear direction and has a shape inclined downward toward the front. The gaming ball that has reached the top of the mountain portion 67 b in a sufficiently decelerated state is guided by the inclination of the front guideway, and discharged from the front edge of the rolling surface 67 a to below the stage unit 67. And since the mountain portion 67 b exists vertically above the first operation port 54, the gaming ball discharged downward from the front guideway of the mountain portion 67 b can easily enter the first operation port 54. .

  A movable object unit 38 is provided at the upper portion of the center frame 65, that is, at the upper portion of the game area PA. The movable object unit 38 operates at the time of the notification effect described later. The contents of the movable object unit 38 will be described in detail later.

  Below the center frame 65, an imaging substrate 71 is provided. Incidentally, since the lower portion of the center frame 65 exists at or near the longitudinal center of the pachinko machine 10, the imaging substrate 71 is located at the longitudinal center or near the center of the pachinko machine 10 It becomes. FIG. 7 is a longitudinal sectional view of the imaging substrate 71 and the periphery thereof for explaining the imaging substrate 71. As shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 7, a light emitting device 72 and an imaging device 73 are provided on one plate surface of the imaging substrate 71. A plurality of light emitting devices 72 are provided side by side in the lateral direction, and each light emitting device 72 can emit near infrared rays as projection light toward the object to be measured. The imaging device 73 can receive the reflected light of the near infrared light with each of a large number of pixels provided as a large number of light receiving units, and outputs an imaging signal of an intensity according to the light reception result using the photoelectric effect. Then, the imaging substrate 71 derives the distance from the imaging device 73 to the measurement target based on the imaging signal using a so-called TOF (time of flight) technique. Specifically, based on the information of the projection light irradiated from the light emitting device 72 and the information of the reflected light received by the imaging device 73, the propagation time of the light to the measuring object is calculated, and the calculation result and the known result The distance from the imaging device 73 to the object to be measured is derived by using the speed of light of Further, since the derivation of this distance is performed for each of a large number of pixels of the imaging device 73, it is possible to derive the distance to the measurement object for each of the pixels. Incidentally, in the case of such an imaging method, since the optical property of the surface of the object to be measured is hardly affected, the applicable range of the object to be measured for which distance data can be acquired is wide.

  The imaging substrate 71 is disposed on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 of the stage member 68 that generates the rolling surface 67 a in the stage unit 67. In detail, the stage member 68 is formed by bulging toward the front of the pachinko machine 10 so that an internal space is generated, and the internal space is opened toward the rear of the pachinko machine 10. The opening 68 a opened toward the rear is closed from the back of the pachinko machine 10 by the substrate pedestal 69 in which the imaging substrate 71 is integrated. The substrate pedestal 69 is screwed from the rear of the pachinko machine 10 to the peripheral edge of the opening 68 a in the stage member 68. Such screwing is performed so as to be detachable using a fixing tool. Therefore, the substrate pedestal 69 integrated with the imaging substrate 71 can be removed from the stage member 68 by nondestructively releasing the screwed state, and imaging is performed after, for example, maintenance or replacement of the imaging substrate 71. It becomes possible to fix the substrate pedestal 69 integrated with the substrate 71 to the stage member 68 again.

  The substrate pedestal 69 includes a support plate portion 69a for supporting the imaging substrate 71. The support surface 69b facing the front of the pachinko machine 10 in the support plate portion 69a is inclined downward toward the front of the pachinko machine 10. The imaging substrate 71 is fixed on the support surface 69b. The imaging substrate 71 is disposed such that the surface opposite to the mounting surface 71a on which the light emitting device 72 and the imaging device 73 are mounted overlaps the support surface 69b, and the light emitting device 72 and the imaging device 73 are mounted. The mounting surface 71a faces obliquely upward.

  By providing the imaging substrate 71 as described above, the imaging substrate 71 is accommodated in the space partitioned by the stage member 68 and the substrate pedestal 69. The light emitting device 72 and the imaging device 73 face the stage member 68. In this case, the stage member 68 is formed of a material capable of transmitting light. Specifically, it is formed using a colorless and transparent acrylic resin.

  On the acrylic plate of the stage member 68, a beam splitter function is imparted by plating or vapor deposition of tin or silver and laminating a thin reflective film. Specifically, the stage member 68 is formed as a half mirror (magic mirror). Since the pachinko machine 10 is installed and used in the game hall and there is no light source other than the light emitting device 72 for emitting near infrared rays in the internal space of the stage member 68, the internal space side of the stage member 68 is a stage The space is darker than the member 68 in the front side of the pachinko machine 10. Then, even if the stage member 68 is viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10 relative to the stage member 68, the imaging substrate 71, the light emitting device 72, and the imaging device 73 can not be viewed visually. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing that imaging is performed using the imaging substrate 71.

  In addition, even when the front door frame 14 is opened forward of the pachinko machine 10 and the stage member 68 can be directly viewed, the stage member 68 functions as a half mirror, so the imaging substrate 71 and the light emitting device 72 And the imaging device 73 can not be viewed. As a result, even when it is necessary to open the front door frame 14 in order to eliminate ball clogging etc. in the game area PA, imaging is performed using the imaging substrate 71. It is possible to prevent the player from recognizing.

  Furthermore, not only the stage member 68 is formed as a half mirror, but the substrate pedestal 69 is formed to be colored and opaque. Then, even if the gaming machine body 12 is opened forward of the pachinko machine 10 and the back pack unit 15 is separated from the body frame 13 to expose the back face of the game board 51, the imaging substrate 71, the light emitting device 72 and the imaging device 73 can not be viewed. Therefore, even an employee of the game hall can be prevented from recognizing that imaging is performed using the imaging substrate 71.

  On the other hand, since the stage member 68 is formed as a half mirror, the projection light emitted from the light emitting device 72 can transmit through the stage member 68 and the imaging device 73 can receive light transmitted through the stage member 68. is there. Also, only the window panel 22 is present in front of the stage member 68. The window panel 22 is unitized by opposingly arranging two colorless and transparent glasses in the front and back direction, and can transmit light. Therefore, even if the light emitting device 72 and the imaging device 73 are provided on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 of the stage member 68, the projection light emitted from the light emitting device 72 propagates to the front of the pachinko machine 10 more than the window panel 22. It is possible for the imaging device 73 to receive the reflected light reflected by the object to be measured that is present in front of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the window panel 22.

  The imaging range toward the front of the pachinko machine 10 by the imaging device 73 is a range including the rear of the player who is sitting in the chair arranged in the front of the pachinko machine 10 in the game hall and playing a game There is. In addition, the imaging range in the horizontal direction by the imaging device 73 is IAX as shown in FIG. 1 and the imaging range in the vertical direction is IAY, and the window provided in the front door frame 14 is in this imaging range. The entire panel 22 is included. By setting the imaging range in this manner, in the imaging device 73, the chest portion of the player playing a game while sitting on a chair arranged in front of the pachinko machine 10 in the gaming hall and the upper portion thereof Can be taken.

  As shown in FIG. 7, a rolling surface 67 a formed on the stage member 68 is included in the imaging range of the imaging device 73. Therefore, the game ball rolling on the rolling surface 67a can be imaged by the imaging device 73. In addition, a game ball flowing down between the stage member 68 and the window panel 22 can also be imaged by the imaging device 73.

  On the other hand, in a configuration in which the display surface of the symbol display device 61 is located at the back of the pachinko machine 10 from the board surface of the game board 51, the stage member 68 plays the game from the display surface of the symbol display device 61 below the symbol display device 61. It is provided to extend in the front-rear direction across the board surface of the board 51, and the imaging substrate 71 is provided on the back side of the stage member 68. The imaging substrate 71 is provided so that the surface on which the imaging device 73 is mounted is inclined downward toward the front of the pachinko machine 10 on the back side of the stage member 68. Therefore, the imaging range of the imaging device 73 does not include the obstacle member of the game area PA, such as the nail 59 for changing the flowing direction of the game ball.

  As shown in FIG. 3, a main control device 81 is mounted on the back of the main body frame 13. The main control device 81 is configured such that a main control board that centrally manages the progress of the game is accommodated in a board box. The substrate box may be provided with a trace means for leaving a trace of the opening or a trace structure for leaving a trace of the opening. As the trace means, a plurality of case bodies constituting the substrate box can not be separably joined, and the structure of the joining portion which requires destruction of a predetermined portion at the time of the separation, and peeling by the adhesive layer remaining at the adhesion target at peeling A configuration is conceivable in which a seal seal that leaves a trace of what has been done is applied across the boundaries between multiple case bodies. Moreover, as a trace structure, the structure which apply | coats an adhesive agent with respect to the boundary between several case bodies which comprise a board | substrate box can be considered.

  An audio light emission control device 91 is provided on the back of the main body frame 13 above the main control device 81. The sound emission control device 91 includes a sound emission control board that executes sound output control, light emission control, and control of the display control device according to an instruction from the main control device 81, and the sound emission control board is accommodated in a substrate box. .

  A back pack unit 15 is installed to cover the back side of the main body frame 13 including the main control device 81. The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 101 formed of a synthetic resin having transparency, and the payout mechanism portion 102 and the control device assembly unit 103 are attached to the back pack 101.

  The payout mechanism section 102 is provided with a tank 105 to which game balls supplied from an island facility of the game hall are successively replenished, and a payout device 106 for paying out the game balls stored in the tank 105. The game balls paid out from the payout device 106 are discharged to the upper tray 33 or the lower tray 34 through the payout path provided on the downstream side of the payout device 106. In addition, for example, a main pack power of, for example, 24 AC, is supplied to the dispensing mechanism portion 102, and a back pack substrate having a power switch for performing an ON operation and an OFF operation of the power is mounted.

  The control device set unit 103 generates a payout control device 111 having a function of controlling the payout device 106 and predetermined power required by various control devices and the like, and outputs it along with the operation of the firing operation device 37 by the player. It has a power supply and launch control device 108 which controls the launch of the game balls. The payout control device 111 and the power supply / discharge control device 108 are disposed so as to be stacked back and forth so that the payout control device 111 is located behind the pachinko machine 10.

  In the back pack 101, an external terminal plate 109 is provided in addition to the dispensing mechanism portion 102 and the control device assembly unit 103. The external terminal plate 109 is installed at the base end side of the back pack unit 15 on the rear surface of the pachinko machine 10 and at an upper corner portion. The external terminal board 109 is a board for performing a predetermined signal output in order to make the management computer of the gaming hall recognize the state of the pachinko machine 10.

<Electric Configuration of Pachinko Machine 10>
FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main control device 81 comprises a main control board 82 which controls the main control of the game, and a power failure monitoring board 86 which monitors the power supply. An MPU 83 is mounted on the main control board 82. The MPU 83 is a ROM 84 storing various control programs to be executed by the MPU 83 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when the control program stored in the ROM 84 is executed. A RAM 85, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, etc. are incorporated. The fact that the ROM 84 and the RAM 85 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 83 is not an essential configuration, and each may be configured as an individual chip. The same applies to the MPUs of control devices other than the main control device 81.

  The MPU 83 is provided with an input port and an output port. The power failure monitoring board 86 provided in the main control device 81 is connected to the input side of the MPU 83, and the payout control device 111 is connected. The power and emission control device 108 having a function of supplying operating power is connected to the power failure monitoring substrate 86, and power is supplied to the MPU 83 through the power failure monitoring substrate 86.

  Various sensors such as various winning detection sensors 87 a to 87 e are connected to the input side of the MPU 83. The various winning detection sensors 87a to 87e are provided in a one-to-one correspondence with the winning support entry portion such as the general winning opening 52, the special power winning device 53, the first operation opening 54, the second operation opening 55 and the through gate 56. A detection sensor is included, and the MPU 83 makes a winning determination on each ball entry unit. Further, the MPU 83 executes various lottery based on the winning on the first operation port 54 and the second operation port 55.

  The power failure monitoring board 86, the payout control device 111, and the sound emission control device 91 are connected to the output side of the MPU 83. For example, a winning ball command is output to the payout control device 111 based on the result of the winning determination on the winning correspondence ball entry unit. The voice light emission control device 91 outputs various commands such as a variation command, a type command, and an opening command. Details of these various commands will be described later.

  On the output side of the MPU 83, a drive unit 53c for special power, which opens and closes the open / close door 53a of the special power winning device 53, a drive unit 55c for generality, which opens and operates the common electric utility 55a of the second operation opening 55; The drawing unit 62 and the drawing unit 63 are connected. Incidentally, the special view unit 62 is provided with a special view display unit 62a and a special view suspension display unit 62b, all of which are connected to the output side of the MPU 83. Similarly, although the common drawing unit 63 is provided with a common drawing display unit 63 a and a common drawing reservation display unit 63 b, all of these are connected to the output side of the MPU 83. The main control board 82 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 83 executes drive control of various driving units and various display units through the driver circuits.

  That is, in the open / close execution mode, the drive control of the drive unit 53c for special power is executed in the MPU 83 so that the special power prize device 53 is opened and closed. In addition, when the open state of the portable power product 55a is won, the MPU 83 executes drive control of the drive unit 55c for the power transmission so that the portable power product 55a is opened and closed. Further, in the game time and opening / closing execution mode, display control of the special drawing unit 62 is executed in the MPU 83. Further, when the lottery result indicating whether or not to set the universal plug product 55a in the open state is specified, the display control of the common drawing unit 63 is executed in the MPU 83.

  The power failure monitoring board 86 relays the main control board 82 and the power supply and emission control device 108, and also monitors the voltage of the DC stable 24 volts which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply and emission control device 108.

  The payout control device 111 performs payout control of the winning balls and the rental balls by the payout device 106 based on the winning ball command input from the main control device 81. The payout control device 111 includes a payout control board 112, and the MPU 113 is mounted on the payout control board 112. The MPU 113 includes a ROM 114 storing a control program executed by the MPU 113, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 115 used as a work memory or the like.

  The MPU 113 is provided with an input / output port. To the input side of the MPU 113, a main control board 82, a power / emission control device 108, a ball lending operating device 26, and a ball lending device Y are connected. In addition to the above, a sensor for detecting the game ball paid out from the payout device 106 and a sensor for detecting that the game ball is not stored in the tank 105 are provided on the input side of the MPU 113. , And a sensor for detecting that the lower plate 34 is full of game balls is electrically connected. On the other hand, the main control board 82 and the ball lending device Y are connected to the output side of the MPU 113. Further, the payout motor of the payout device 106 is electrically connected to the output side of the MPU 113.

  The MPU 113 drives and controls the payout motor of the payout device 106 by receiving a winning ball command from the main control board 82, and causes the number of gaming balls instructed by the winning ball command to be paid downstream. Further, by driving and controlling the payout motor of the payout device 106 based on that the ball lending operation device 26 performs the ball lending operation, the number of gaming balls set by the ball lending operation is directed downstream. Let me pay it out. In this case, by using the detection results of the above-described sensors, when the game balls of the instructed number have been paid out, the payout of the game balls is stopped and the tank 105 is in a state without balls. Also, even when the lower plate 34 is full, the payout of the game balls is stopped.

  The power supply and emission control device 108 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game hall or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source, necessary operation power is generated for each of the main control device 81, the payout control device 111, and the like, and the generated operation power is supplied.

  Specifically, the power supply and emission control device 108 is provided with a power-on power supply unit 108 a and a power-off power supply unit 108 b for the configuration for supplying the operation power. The power-on power-up unit 108a is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply in a game hall or the like, and functions to generate operating power and supply the generated operating power when external power is supplied from the commercial power supply. Have. The power-off power supply unit 108b is a capacitor, and the power supplied from the power-on power supply unit 108a when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is in the ON state (when the external power supply supplies power). Be charged. In addition, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is off or when the power is cut off in the commercial power supply (when the power supply from the external power supply is cut off), the power is cut off from the power supply unit 108b. Backup power is supplied to the RAM 85 of the control device 81 and the RAM 115 of the payout control device 111. Therefore, even in this situation, the information stored in the RAM 85 of the main control device 81 and the RAM 115 of the payout control device 111 is not erased while the backup power is supplied from the power-off power supply unit 108b. It is kept in memory.

  A relatively large capacity of the power-off power supply unit 108b is secured, and the information stored in the main RAM 85 before power-off is held within a predetermined period (for example, one day or two days). The power interruption during power supply unit 108b is not limited to a capacitor, and may be a battery, a non-rechargeable battery, or the like. In the case of a non-rechargeable battery, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, it is not necessary to store power in the power-off power supply unit 108b, but it needs to be replaced periodically.

  Note that the power supply and emission control device 108 is provided with a power supply unit for power failure (not shown) which is different from the power supply unit for power interruption 108 b. The power supply and emission control device 108 discharges from the power supply for power failure even after the DC stable 24 volt power supply is less than 22 volts, for a sufficient time for execution of the power failure process described later. The output of 5 volts, which is the drive power supply of the control system, is maintained at a normal value. As a result, the main control device 81 or the like can execute and complete the power failure process normally.

  The power supply and emission control device 108 is provided with a emission control unit 108c in addition to the various power supply units 108a and 108b. A touch sensor 37 c, a variable resistor 37 d, and a stop switch 37 e built in the emission control device 37 are electrically connected to the emission control unit 108 c.

  The touch sensor 37c has a built-in capacitor, and when the player's hand comes in contact with the outer surface of the operating handle to change the capacitance of the capacitor, the control unit 108c emits a predetermined electric signal corresponding to the handle operation detection. Output to The launch control unit 108c recognizes that the player's hand is in contact with the outer surface of the operation handle by receiving the predetermined electrical signal. In addition, the emission control unit 108c recognizes the presence or absence of the emission stop operation of the emission control device 37 according to the electrical signal received from the stop switch 37e, and rotates the operation handle according to the electrical signal received through the variable resistor 37d. Understand the amount of operation.

  The launch control unit 108 c transmits a condition satisfaction signal of a predetermined signal form to the MPU 83 when a predetermined game ball firing condition is satisfied. Specifically, the emission control unit 108c receives a signal indicating that the operation handle is touched by the player from the touch sensor 37c, and a signal indicating that the emission stopping operation is not performed from the stop switch 37e. Under the condition of reception, the condition satisfaction signal of HI level (a signal corresponding to the condition satisfaction) is continuously transmitted to the MPU 83. When any of the above signals is not received, a low level condition satisfaction signal (a signal not corresponding to the condition satisfaction) is transmitted to the MPU 83. However, the relationship between the LOW level and the HI level may be reversed. In addition to the above conditions, the condition that the ball lending device Y is connected to the pachinko machine 10 may be added as a condition for transmitting a condition satisfaction signal corresponding to the condition satisfaction.

  In the situation where the MPU 83 receives the HI level condition establishment signal and is permitted to launch the game ball, the launch control unit 108c sends the HI level launch permission signal (a signal corresponding to the launch permission). Continue to send. Note that the MPU 83 transmits a LOW level emission permission signal (a signal not corresponding to emission permission) when the HI level condition satisfaction signal is not received from the emission control unit 108c, but the emission permission signal is LOW. The relationship between levels and HI levels may be reversed.

  When the game ball launch mechanism 45 is electrically connected and the launch control unit 108 c receives a launch permission signal of HI level from the MPU 83, the launch control unit 108 c periodically controls the game ball launch mechanism 45. In this case, if the gaming ball is continuously supplied to the gaming ball firing mechanism 45, one gaming ball is fired in the gaming area PA in a specific firing cycle (specifically, 0.6 sec). . Further, since the firing intensity is adjusted based on the signal received from the variable resistor 37d at the time of firing, the gaming ball is fired at a strength corresponding to the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle.

  The sound emission control device 91 includes a sound emission control substrate 92 on which the MPU 93 is mounted. The MPU 93 is a ROM 94 storing various control programs to be executed by the MPU 93 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when the control program stored in the ROM 94 is executed. A certain RAM 95 and an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, etc. are incorporated.

  In the following description, for convenience of explanation, the MPU 83, the ROM 84 and the RAM 85 of the main control board 82 are referred to as the main MPU 83, the main ROM 84 and the main RAM 85, and the MPU 93, the ROM 94 and the RAM 95 of the sound emission control board 92 are The sound side MPU 93, the sound side ROM 94, and the sound side RAM 95 are referred to.

  The display light emitting unit 23, the speaker unit 24, the effect driving unit 38c, and the display control device 96 are electrically connected to the output side of the sound light side MPU 93, and the display light emission is performed based on the command received from the main side MPU 83. The drive control of the unit 23, the speaker unit 24 and the effect drive unit 38 c is performed, and a command is transmitted to the display control device 96. The display control device 96 is electrically connected to the symbol display device 61, and executes display control of the symbol display device 61 based on a command received from the sound light side MPU 93. Various effects are performed using the display light emitting unit 23, the speaker unit 24, the effect driving unit 38c, and the symbol display device 61, and an abnormality notification using the display light emitting unit 23, the speaker unit 24 and the symbol display device 61 Notification of the state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed. Further, the imaging substrate 71 is electrically connected to the input side and the output side of the sound light side MPU 93, and the image pickup substrate 71 is imaged according to the signal output from the sound light side MPU 93 The imaging result is received by the sound light side MPU 93.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lottery in main side MPU 83>
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lottery in the main MPU 83 will be described with reference to FIG.

  During the game, the main MPU 83 uses various counter information to set winning display lottery, display setting of the special view display unit 62a, setting of symbol display of the symbol display device 61, setting of display of the common drawing display unit 63a, etc. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9, the per random number counter C1 used for lottery of occurrence of hit, the big hit type counter C2 used when determining the big hit type, and the symbol display device 61 is out of variation The reach random number counter C3 used for the reach occurrence lottery when doing, the random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the per random number counter C1, and the display continuation time in the special view display 62a and the symbol display 61 The variation type counter CS is used. Further, a general-purpose random number counter C4 used for lottery whether or not the common-purpose utility 55a of the second operation port 55 is in the open state is used. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in the lottery counter area 85a of the RAM 85.

  Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and reaches a maximum value and returns to 0. Each counter is updated at short intervals. Each numerical value information of the per random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the special view reserve area 85b when a winning on the first operation port 54 or the second operation port 55 occurs.

  The special drawing reserve area 85b includes a reserve area RE and an execution area AE. The reserve area RE includes a first reserve area RE1, a second reserve area RE2, a third reserve area RE3 and a fourth reserve area RE4, and the winning history to the first operation port 54 or the second operation port 55 In addition, the combination of each numerical information of the per-random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored as one of the holding areas RE1 to RE4 as holding information.

  In this case, if winnings to the first operation port 54 or the second operation port 55 occur a plurality of times consecutively in the first holding area RE1 to the fourth holding area RE4, the first holding area RE1 → second Each numerical value information is stored in chronological order in the order of reserved area RE2, third reserved area RE3, and fourth reserved area RE4. By providing four reserve areas RE1 to RE4 as described above, the prize balls of the game balls to the first operation opening 54 or the second operation opening 55 are reserved and stored up to four at maximum. .

  The number that can be reserved and stored is not limited to four and is arbitrary, and may be other plural such as two, three, five or more, or may be singular.

  The execution area AE is an area for moving each numerical information stored in the first holding area RE1 of the holding area RE when the variable display of the special view display unit 62a is started, and the start of one game cycle is started On the occasion of the above, on the basis of various numerical value information stored in the execution area AE, a judgment of success or failure is performed.

  The respective counters will be described in detail.

  First, the common charge random number counter C4 will be described. For example, the common charge random number counter C4 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 250, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The common charge random number counter C4 is periodically updated, and is stored in the common drawing reservation area 85c of the main side RAM 85 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 56. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not the general-purpose utility 55a is controlled to the open state by the value of the stored general-purpose random number counter C4.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of support modes are set such that the modes of support by the power control unit 55a differ from one another. In detail, in the support mode, when compared in the situation where the firing of the game ball is continued in the same manner with respect to the game area PA, the commercial electric utility 55a of the second operation opening 55 per unit time The high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode are set such that the frequency of the open state is relatively high and low.

  In the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning the common power open status in the common power open lottery using the common power random number counter C4 is the same (for example, both are 4/5), but high In the frequency support mode, the number of times the general power utility 55a becomes open when the general power release state is won is set to a greater number than in the low frequency support mode, and one open time is set longer. There is. In this case, when the general electric power release state is won in the high frequency support mode and the open state of the general power utility 55a occurs a plurality of times, it is from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state. The closing time is set to be shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high frequency support mode, the securing time minimumly secured in performing the next public power release lottery after the first public power release lottery is performed rather than the low frequency support mode The one display continuation time in the display part 63a is set short.

  As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability of winning in the second operation port 55 is higher than in the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning in the first operation port 54 is higher than that of the second operation port 55, but in the high frequency support mode, the second operation is higher than the first operation port 54. There is a high probability that a winning on the mouth 55 will occur.

  Note that the configuration for increasing the frequency at which the common power release state occurs per unit time in the high-frequency support mode rather than the low-frequency support mode is not limited to the above-described one. It is good also as composition which makes high the probability of being in a state where the general public is released. In addition, a securement time (for example, based on winning on the through gate 56) is performed in the generalization display portion 63a, which is secured when the next general public open lottery is performed after one public open public lottery is performed. In the configuration in which multiple types of variable display time) are prepared, the high frequency support mode is set so that the short securing time is easier to be selected or the average securing time is shorter than the low frequency support mode. It is also good. Furthermore, the number of opening times is increased, the opening time is extended, and the securing time secured in performing the next public power release lottery after the one public power opening lottery is performed, the securing time to be related, The advantage of the high frequency support mode over the low frequency support mode may be enhanced by applying any one condition or any combination of conditions among shortening the average time of and increasing the probability of winning.

  When the general electric power is released in the general electric power opening lottery using the general electric power number counter C4, the general electric power is released. The routine power release state ends when the number of times the common power utility 55a is opened and closed a predetermined number of times, or when a predetermined upper limit number of gaming balls wins the second operation opening 55. Do. More specifically, the upper limit number is 10 in common in both the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode. On the other hand, the number of times of switching on and off of the general public utility 55a is one in the low-frequency support mode, whereas in the high-frequency support mode, it is multiple times more than in the low-frequency support mode. It has been three times. Moreover, one open continuation time of the commercial power commercial product 55a is 1 sec in the low frequency support mode, and is 2 sec in the high frequency support mode.

  Next, the per-random number counter C1 will be described. The per-random number counter C1 is, for example, sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 599, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the per-random number counter C1 makes one revolution, the value of the random-number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the per-random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the per random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The random number counter C1 is updated periodically, and is stored in the reserve area RE of the special view reserve area 85b at the timing when the gaming ball has won the first operation port 54 or the second operation port 55. Then, the determination of success or failure is performed using the value of the stored random number counter C1.

  The value of the random number to be won in the determination of the success or failure is stored in the main ROM 84 as a success or failure table. In the success or failure table, a jackpot result and an outlier result are set as the success or failure results. The jackpot result is a success / failure result that can be a transition trigger to the opening / closing execution mode in which the special power prize device 53 is controlled to open / close, and can be a transition trigger of at least one of the lottery mode and the support mode. The out result is a success / failure result that does not become a transition trigger for the success / failure lottery mode and the support mode without becoming a transition trigger to the open / close execution mode.

  As the pass / fail table, a pass / fail table for the low probability mode and a pass / fail table for the high probability mode are set. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, the low probability mode and the high probability mode are set as the lottery mode in the hit / fall lottery means. Under the gaming state in which the low probability mode success / failure table is referred to at the time of the lottery, the value of the random number to be a big hit is two. On the other hand, under gaming conditions in which the high probability mode pass / fail table is referred to at the time of the lottery, the number of random numbers for winning a big hit is set larger than when the low probability mode pass / fail table is referred to Specifically, it is 20 pieces. In this case, the value group of the per-random number counter C1 that is a big hit in the low probability mode is included in the value group of the per random number counters C1 that is the big hit in the high probability mode.

  It should be noted that the number and the value of the random numbers to be won are arbitrary if the probability that the high probability mode will be the big hit is higher than the low probability mode, and the big hit will be made in the low probability mode. The value group of the per-random-number counter C1 may be configured to be partially included or not included in the value group of the per-random-number counter C1 that will be a big hit in the high probability mode. .

  Next, the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 29 and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and is stored in the reserve area RE of the special view reserve area 85b at the timing when the gaming ball has won the first operation port 54 or the second operation port 55. Then, distribution determination is performed using the value of the stored jackpot type counter C2.

  Here, in the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of jackpot results are set, but each of the jackpot results are (1) the contents of the opening / closing execution mode, (2) the contents of the chance lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends, 3) At least one of the three contents of the support mode after the opening / closing execution mode is different.

  The opening / closing execution mode executed when the jackpot is won is a round number defining mode which is executed with the predetermined number of round games as the upper limit. A round game is a game that continues until either a predetermined open continuation time elapses or a predetermined upper limit number of gaming balls wins the special power prize device 53. It is. Further, the number of round games executed in the number-of-rounds regulation mode is the same as the number of fixed rounds regardless of the type of the jackpot result which has triggered the transition. Specifically, the upper limit number of round games is set to 15 rounds regardless of which jackpot result.

  In the number-of-rounds defining mode, the high frequency winning mode and the low frequency winning mode are performed such that the frequency of occurrence of winning to the special power winning device 53 becomes relatively high and low between the start of the open / close execution mode and the end. And is set. Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10, a single opening mode of the special electric winning device 53 is set to a plurality of types, with the opening continuation time from opening of the special electric winning device 53 to closing being different. There is. Specifically, a long-time mode in which the opening continuation time is set to 29 sec, which is a long time, and a short-time mode in which the opening continuation time is set to 0.05 sec, which is a time shorter than the long time, are set. ing. In the pachinko machine 10, in the situation where the player 37 is operated by the player, the game ball firing mechanism 45 controls the drive so that one game ball is fired toward the game area PA in 0.6 sec. Be done. In addition, the upper limit number of end conditions of the round game is set to ten. Then, in the long time mode among the above-mentioned open modes, the open continuation time of a time longer than the product of the firing cycle of the game balls and the upper limit number of one round game is set. On the other hand, in the short-time mode, the opening duration of a time shorter than the product of the game ball firing cycle and the upper limit number of one round game, more specifically, the time shorter than the game ball firing cycle is set. ing. Therefore, when the special power winning device 53 is opened once in the long time mode, it is expected that the special electric number winning device 53 will generate winnings for the upper limit number in one round game, and the short time When the special power prize device 53 is opened once in a mode, it is expected that the special power prize device 53 will not be winning.

  In the high frequency winning mode, the special power winning device 53 is opened once in a long time mode in each round game. That is, the special power winning device 53 is opened 15 times in the long time mode. On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, the special power winning device 53 is opened once in a short time mode in each round game. That is, the special power prize device 53 is opened 15 times in a short time mode.

  In addition, the number of times of opening and closing of special power prize device 53 in high frequency winning mode and low frequency winning mode, the number of round games, opening continuation time for 1 opening and the upper limit number in 1 round game, those of high frequency winning mode If the frequency of occurrence of winning to the special power winning device 53 in the period from when the opening / closing execution mode is started to the end is higher than in the low frequency winning mode, it is not limited to the above value and it is optional It is.

  The distribution destination of the type of jackpot result for the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the main ROM 84 as a distribution table. In the sorting table, as the types of jackpot results, low probability jackpot results, explicit high probability jackpot results, and most advantageous jackpot results are set.

  The low probability jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the open / close execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode, and further, after the open / close execution mode ends, the low probability mode becomes the low probability mode regardless of the acceptance lottery mode before switching to the open / close execution mode. This low probability mode will be the next big hit result, and will continue at least until it shifts to the open / close execution mode. Further, after the end of the open / close execution mode, the jackpot result is the high-frequency support mode regardless of the support mode before transition to the open / close execution mode. This high frequency support mode shifts to the low frequency support mode when the number of games has reached the end reference frequency (specifically, 100 times) set as one or more after transition, and the high frequency support mode The low frequency support mode shifted after the end of the next becomes the jackpot result next, and continues at least until it shifts to the open / close execution mode.

  In the result of the explicit high probability jackpot, the open / close execution mode is the low frequency winning mode, and after the open / close execution mode is ended, the high probability mode is set regardless of the acceptance lottery mode before switching to the open / close execution mode It is a jackpot result that becomes a frequent support mode regardless of the support mode before the mode transition. The high probability mode and the high frequency support mode become the jackpot result next, and at least continue until transition to the open / close execution mode.

  In the most advantageous jackpot result, the open / close execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode, and after the open / close execution mode is ended, the high probability mode is set regardless of the acceptance lottery mode before switching to the open / close execution mode, and the open / close execution mode It is a jackpot result that becomes frequent support mode regardless of the support mode before migration. The high probability mode and the high frequency support mode become the jackpot result next, and at least continue until transition to the open / close execution mode.

  In the sorting table, among the "0 to 29" jackpot type counters C2, "0 to 9" correspond to the low probability jackpot result, and "10 to 14" correspond to the explicitly high probability jackpot result , "15-29" correspond to the most advantageous jackpot result.

  Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be described. For example, the reach random number counter C3 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 238, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Here, in the pachinko machine 10, an expected effect is set as a type of display effect on the symbol display device 61. An expected effect includes the symbol display device 61 capable of performing variable display of symbols, and in the gaming machine that results in a predetermined jackpot, the symbol display device 61 in the gaming machine in which the final stop result is the corresponding result. Before the stop result is derived and displayed after the variable display of the symbol in is started, it means the display state for making the player think that it is a variable display state in which the above-mentioned correspondence with correspondence result is likely to be obtained. In addition, specifically, about the provision corresponding | compatible result, the combination of the symbol in which the same number was attached | subjected on one effective line is stopped-displayed.

  In the expectation effect, two types of reach display and advance notice display for expecting the occurrence of reach display and the occurrence of the response to an assignment in a stage before the reach display and the like are set.

  In the reach display, a combination of reach symbols is displayed by stopping the symbols of some of the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the symbol display device 61, and the symbols in the remaining symbol rows are displayed in that state. The display state which performs the variable display of is included. Also, while displaying combinations of reach symbols as described above, while performing variable display of symbols in the remaining symbol rows, and performing reach effects by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on the background screen, or Also, it is possible to perform reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image in substantially the entire symbol display device 61 after reducing or displaying a combination of reach symbols in reduced size or non-display.

  In the advance notice display, after the variable display of symbols is started in the symbol display device 61, the symbols are variably displayed in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, or some symbol rows are plural symbols. In a situation where symbols are variably displayed in the symbol row, a mode is included in which characters are displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In addition, the background screen is a predetermined mode different from the previous modes, and the pattern on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is the predetermined mode different from the previous modes. Such preliminary display may occur at any game times when reach display is performed and when reach display is not performed, but when reach display is performed is higher probability than when reach display is not performed. Is set to occur on

  The reach display is executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the game times in which the combination of the same symbols is finally stopped and displayed. Moreover, in the game time corresponding to the big hit result in which the combination of the same symbol is not stopped and displayed, it is not performed irrespective of the value of the reach random number counter C3. In addition, in game times corresponding to the disconnection result, the reach random number counter C3 acquired at a predetermined timing with reference to the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the main ROM 84 corresponds to the occurrence of reach display. Will be executed if

  On the other hand, the determination as to whether or not to display the advance notice is not performed by the main MPU 83 but by the sound light MPU 93. In this case, in the sound and light MPU 93, the game times corresponding to any of the big hit results are more likely to be displayed prior to the game times corresponding to the lost result, and the notice display having a lower appearance rate is generated. In order to satisfy at least one of the conditions that it is easy to do, a lottery process for displaying a notice is performed. By the way, the lottery result is reflected when the effect for the game round is executed by the symbol display device 61.

  Next, the variation type counter CS will be described. For example, the fluctuation type counter CS is sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The fluctuation type counter CS is used when the main MPU 83 determines the display continuation time in the special view display unit 62 a and the display continuation time of the symbol in the symbol display device 61. Specifically, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired at the time of the start of the fluctuation display in the special view display portion 62a and the time of the fluctuation pattern determination at the start of the fluctuation of the symbol by the symbol display device 61.

<About various processes executed by main side MPU 83>
Next, various processes executed by the main MPU 83 to advance a game will be described. The processes of the main side MPU 83 are roughly classified into a main process activated upon power-on and a timer interrupt process activated periodically (with a cycle of 4 msec in the pachinko machine 10).

<Main processing>
First, main processing in the main MPU 83 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  In step S101, the main power on wait process is executed. In the power-on wait process on the main side, for example, the process waits until 1 sec elapses from the start of the main process without progressing to the next process. In the following step S102, access to the main RAM 85 is permitted, and in step S103, the internal function register of the main MPU 83 is set.

  Thereafter, in step S104, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch provided in the power / emission control device 108 is manually operated, and in the subsequent step S105, the power failure flag of the main RAM 85 is set to "1". Determine if there is. In step S106, a checksum calculation process is performed to calculate a checksum. In the subsequent step S107, it is determined whether the checksum matches the checksum stored at the time of power shutdown, that is, the validity of stored data. judge.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when initializing the RAM data at the time of power on, for example, at the start of business operation of the game hall, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch is pressed, the process proceeds to step S108. In addition, when the occurrence information of the power-off is not set, or when the abnormality of the data stored and held is confirmed by the checksum, the process similarly shifts to the process of step S108. In step S108, the main RAM 85 is cleared as initialization of the main RAM 85. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S109. On the other hand, when the RAM erase switch is not pressed, the process in step S108 is not performed under the condition that the power failure flag is set to “1” and the checksum is normal. Go to

  In step S109, power on setting processing is performed. In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the main RAM 85 such as initialization of a power failure flag is set to an initial value, and a command corresponding to the current game state is recognized to recognize the current game state. Send to

  Thereafter, the process proceeds to the remaining process of step S110 to step S113. That is, although the MPU 83 is configured to periodically execute the timer interrupt process, a remaining time is generated between one timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process. Although this remaining time fluctuates in accordance with the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, the remaining process of step S110 to step S113 is repeatedly executed using such irregular time. In this regard, it can be said that the remaining process of the step S110 to the step S113 is a non-periodic process which is executed irregularly.

  In the remaining process, first, in step S110, in order to inhibit the generation of the timer interrupt process, the interrupt disable setting is performed. In the following step S111, the random number initial value updating process for updating the random number initial value counter CINI is executed, and in step S112, the variation counter updating process for updating the variation type counter CS is executed. In these update processes, the present numerical value information is read out from the corresponding counter of the main RAM 85, and the process of adding one to the read out numerical value information is executed, and then the process of overwriting the read source counter is executed. In this case, when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to "0". After that, in step S113, interrupt permission setting is performed to switch from the state where the generation of the timer interrupt processing is prohibited to the state where it is permitted. If the process of step S113 is performed, it will return to step S110 and will repeat the process of step S110-step S113.

<Timer interrupt processing>
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  Here, a hardware configuration for periodically executing timer interrupt processing in the main MPU 83 will be described. The main control board 82 is provided with a clock circuit as pulse signal output means for outputting a pulse signal at a predetermined cycle, and the clock circuit is further provided at an intermediate position of the signal path between the clock circuit and the main MPU 83. A circuit is provided.

  The divider circuit functions as frequency changing means for changing the cycle of the pulse signal from the clock circuit, and is configured to output a pulse signal for specifying the start timing of the timer interrupt processing by the main MPU 83. . That is, pulse signals are supplied from the divider circuit to the main MPU 83 at intervals of 4 msec which is a specific cycle. The main MPU 83 executes processing to confirm the occurrence of a specific signal form such as rising or falling of the pulse signal, and starts timer interrupt processing under at least one condition that the occurrence of the specific signal form is confirmed. Run.

  In this case, when the generation of the specific signal form is confirmed in a state where activation of the timer interrupt processing is prohibited, the timer is changed to a state where the interrupt is permitted from the state where the interrupt is prohibited. Interrupt processing is started. That is, depending on the execution status of the processing in the main MPU 83, there may be a case where the next timer interrupt processing is started 4.1 msec after the previous timer interrupt processing is started, and such an event occurs. The next timer interrupt process is started 3.9 msec after the previous timer interrupt process is started.

  However, since the output of the pulse signal from the frequency dividing circuit is performed at a specific cycle such as 4 msec regardless of the progress of the process in the main MPU 83, the timer interrupt process is basically started at the specific cycle. Furthermore, the processing configuration of the main MPU 83 follows the predetermined timing even if the timer interrupt processing at the predetermined timing is started after the period exceeding the specific cycle has elapsed since the previous timer interrupt processing was started. The timer interrupt process at timing is absorbed by an amount exceeding that specific period, and the timer interrupt process at the next timing is set to be activated at the timing at which the input of the pulse signal is confirmed.

  Now, in the timer interrupt process, first, in step S201, a power failure information storage process is executed. In the power failure information storage processing, it is monitored whether or not a power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of the power supply interruption is received from the power failure monitoring board, and when the occurrence of the power failure is specified, the power failure processing is executed. In the power failure process, various data settings are made in order to enable recovery to the state before power shutoff at the next power on, and the process waits until the supply of operating power to the main MPU 83 is completely shut off.

  In the subsequent step S202, a lottery random number update process is executed. In the random number updating process for drawing, the update of the per random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general electric random number counter C4 is executed. Specifically, after the current numerical information is sequentially read out from the per random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the general electric random number counter C4, and the read out numerical information is added one by one. Execute processing to overwrite the counter of reading source. In this case, when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to "0".

  Thereafter, in step S203, the random number initial value updating process is performed as in step S111, and in step S204, the variation counter updating process is performed as in step S112. In the following step S205, a game stop determination process is executed. In the game stop determination process, it is monitored whether or not the progress of the game is to be stopped, and if the progress of the game is to be stopped, the execution of the process for advancing the game is stopped. Specifically, by making an affirmative determination in step S206, the process for advancing the game in step S207 to step S218 is not executed. Further, when the progress of the game is to be stopped, a command is transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 93 so as to execute a notification corresponding to an event that is a trigger for stopping the progress of the game. The state in which the progress of the game is stopped and the notification corresponding thereto are restarted when the power is turned on only by stopping the supply of the operation power to the main MPU 83, and the operation power to the main MPU 83 is After the supply is stopped, the operation power supply is started while pressing the RAM erase switch of the power and emission control device 108 so that the initialization of the main RAM 85 is not performed along with the execution of the initialization.

  Thereafter, in step S206, it is determined whether or not the progress of the game is stopped, and the processes after step S207 are executed on the condition that the progress of the game is not stopped.

  In step S207, port output processing is performed. In the port output process, when output information is set in the previous timer interrupt process, a process for performing an output corresponding to the output information to the various drive units 53c and 55c is executed. For example, when the information to switch the special power winning device 53 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 53c for the special power is started, and the information to switch to the closed state is set. Stops the output of the drive signal.

  In addition, when the information to switch the common use utility 55a in the second operation port 55 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 55c for the common use is started to switch to the closed state. When the information is set, the output of the drive signal is stopped.

  In the following step S208, a reading process is performed. In the reading process, reading of signals other than the power failure signal and the winning signal is executed, and the read information is stored for use in future processing.

  In the subsequent step S209, a winning detection process is executed. In the winning detection process, the signals received from the winning detection sensors 87a to 87e are read, and the general winning opening 52, the special power winning device 53, the first operation opening 54, the second operation opening 55, and the through gate 56 are received. Execute processing to specify presence or absence of ball entry.

  In the following step S210, a timer update process for collectively updating numerical information of a plurality of types of timer counters provided in the main RAM 85 is executed. In this case, the timer counter is stored in which the stored numerical information is subtracted and updated, but both the update of the subtraction type timer counter and the update of the addition type timer counter are collectively performed. It is good also as composition.

  In the subsequent step S211, a fraud detection process is performed to monitor whether or not a predetermined event set as a fraud monitoring target has occurred. In the fraud detection process, the generation of any of magnetism, radio waves, and vibrations is confirmed using detection results of detection sensors respectively corresponding to the generation. Then, when the occurrence of any of the fraudulent response events is confirmed, the setting for stopping the game is performed in the above-mentioned step S205 in the next timer interrupt processing, and the affirmative determination is made in step S206.

  In the following step S212, a launch control process is performed to control the launch of the gaming ball. In the situation where the firing operation is continued to the firing operation device 37, as described above, one gaming ball is fired in 0.6 sec which is a predetermined firing cycle.

  In the subsequent step S213, as input state monitoring processing, confirmation of disconnection of each of the winning detection sensors 87a to 87e and confirmation of opening of the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 based on the information read in the reading processing of step S208. Do.

  In the following step S214, the special figure special power control process for performing execution control of the game run and execution control of the open / close execution mode is executed. The processing content of the special figure special power control process will be described in detail later.

  In the following step S215, a general-purpose general control process is performed. In the common control common control process, when winning through the through gate 56 occurs, processing for obtaining numerical information of the common random number counter C4 is executed, and the numerical information is stored. The open determination is performed on the numerical information, and further, the open determination is triggered by the open determination to execute processing for producing an effect for common use in the common view display unit 63a. Also, based on the result of the open determination, processing is performed to open and close the general purpose utility 55 a of the second operation port 55.

  In the following step S216, setting of output information for reflecting the increase / decrease number of the hold information concerning the special view display unit 62a on the special view hold display unit 62b based on the processing results of the immediately preceding step S214 and step S215 The output information for reflecting the increase / decrease number of the hold information related to the figure display unit 63a on the common view hold display unit 63b is set. In step S216, based on the processing results of the immediately preceding step S214 and step S215, setting of output information for updating the display content of the special view display unit 62a is performed, and the display content of the common view display unit 63a is set. Set the output information for updating.

  In the subsequent step S217, the content of the command received from the payout control device 111 is confirmed, and a payout state reception process for performing a process corresponding to the confirmation result is executed. In step S218, a payout output process for setting a winning ball command as an output target is executed.

<Special figure special power control process>
Next, the special figure electric power control process executed in step S214 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) of the main MPU 83 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the special figure special power control process, the process for acquiring the hold information is executed when the first operation port 54 or the second operation port 55 has a winning, and the hold information is stored. Judgment determination is performed on the hold information, and further, processing for producing effects for the game cycle is executed triggered by the judgment. Further, based on the result of the success or failure determination, the processing to shift to the opening / closing execution mode after the presentation for the game cycle is executed, and the processing in the opening / closing execution mode and the end of the opening / closing execution mode is executed.

  Specifically, first, in step S301, a process of acquiring pending information is executed. In the acquisition process, when the winning of the gaming ball to the first operation opening 54 occurs or when the winning of the gaming ball to the second operation opening 55 occurs, for the reserve of the special view reservation area 85b Under the condition that the number of pending information stored in the area RE is less than the upper limit (specifically, "4"), each value of the per random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is Of the holding area RE, it is stored in the highest area where holding information is not stored.

  In the acquisition process, when the hold information is obtained, the hold command is transmitted to the sound side MPU 93. The sound light side MPU 93 transmits a command corresponding to the received hold command to the display control device 96. In the display control device 96, the reception of the hold command causes the display of the number of the hold information in the symbol display device 61 to be changed in correspondence with the increase of the hold number. In addition, when the number of pending information increases as described above, the display control process of step S216 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) displays so as to be changed to the display content corresponding to the increase in the pending number. Control is performed.

  In the following step S302, the information of the special view special charge counter provided in the main side RAM 85 is read out, and in step S303, the special view special charge address table stored in the main side ROM 84 is read out. Then, in step S304, the start address corresponding to the information of the special figure special charge counter is acquired from the special figure special charge address table.

  Here, the processing content of step S302 to step S304 will be described.

  As described above, the special view special power control process includes a process for controlling an effect for game circulation and a process for controlling the open / close execution mode. In this case, as a process for controlling the effects for the game use, in order to advance special effects variation start processing (step S306), which is a process for starting the effect for the game use, and the effect for the game use. A special figure variation process (step S307), which is a process of (1), and a special figure determination process (step S308), which is a process for ending an effect for game circulation, are set.

  Also, as a process for controlling the open / close execution mode, a special power start process (step S309) which is a process for controlling the opening of the open / close execution mode and a process for controlling the open state of the special electric winning device 53 The special electric power open process (step S310) and the special electric power close process (step S311) for controlling the closed state of the special electric winning device 53, and the ending of the open / close execution mode and the end of the open / close execution mode In the special power termination process (step S312), which is a process for controlling the transition of the gaming state, is set.

  In such a processing configuration, the special figure special charge counter is a counter for the main MPU 83 to grasp which of the plurality of types of processes should be executed, and the special figure special charge address table contains A start address of a program for executing the plurality of types of processing is set corresponding to the numerical information of the special drawing special power counter.

  In this case, the start address SA0 is a start address of a program for executing the special figure change start process (step S306), and the start address SA1 is a program for performing the special figure change in process (step S307). The start address SA2 is a start address of a program for executing the special figure determination process (step S308). The start address SA3 is a program for performing a special power start process (step S309). The start address SA4 is a start address of a program for executing the special power release process (step S310). The start address SA5 is a program for performing the special power close process (step S311). Start address, start address SA6 A start address of a program for executing (step S312).

  The special figure special power counter performs special figure special power control in the next processing cycle when the condition for updating the numerical value information is satisfied when the process corresponding to the currently stored numerical information is finished. In accordance with the process executed in the process, one is added, one is subtracted, or "0" is cleared. Therefore, in the special figure special power control process in each processing cycle, the process according to the numerical information set in the special figure special power counter may be executed. The special drawing special charge counter is set to 0 as an initial value.

  After the process of step S304 is performed, in step S305, a process of jumping to the process indicated by the start address acquired in step S304 is performed. Specifically, if the acquired start address is SA0, the process jumps to the special map change start process of step S306, and if the acquired start address is SA1, the process jumps to the special map change processing of step S307. If the acquired start address is SA2, the process jumps to the processing during special image determination in step S308, and if the acquired start address is SA3, the process jumps to the specific power start process in step S309, and the acquired start address is If it is SA4, the process jumps to the processing during the release of special power in step S310, and if the acquired start address is SA5, the process jumps to the processing during the closing of special power in step S311. If the acquired start address is SA6 The process jumps to the special power termination process of step S312. When one of the processes in step S306 to step S312 is executed, the present special figure special power control process ends. The processes in steps S306 to S312 will be individually described below.

<Special chart change start process>
First, the special view change start process of step S306 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S401, it is determined whether or not hold information is stored in the special map hold area 85b. When a negative determination is made in step S401, the present special map change start process is ended as it is, and when a positive determination is made in step S401, the process proceeds to step S402.

  In step S402, data setting processing is performed. In the data setting process, the data stored in the first holding area RE1 of the holding area RE is moved to the execution area AE. Thereafter, a process of shifting data stored in the respective reserve areas RE1 to RE4 of the reserve area RE is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first reserve area RE1 to the fourth reserve area RE4 to the lower area side, and clears the data of the first reserve area RE1, and Data in each area is shifted in such a manner as reserve area RE2 → first reserve area RE1, third reserve area RE3 → second reserve area RE2, fourth reserve area RE4 → third reserve area RE3. At this time, a configuration may be adopted in which a shift command for causing the sound emission control device 91 to recognize that data in the hold area has been shifted is set as an output target and transmitted.

  In the following step S403, a success or failure determination process is performed. In the success or failure determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the success or failure lottery mode is the high probability mode. In the case of the high probability mode, the main ROM 84 refers to the high / low probability table for the high probability mode, and the information stored in the execution area AE is obtained from the information for high / low determination among the information stored in the execution area AE. It is determined whether the calculated numerical information matches the jackpot numerical information for high probability. Also, in the case of the low probability mode, referring to the success / failure table for the low probability mode provided in the main side ROM 84, the numerical information acquired from the per random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is for low probability It is determined whether or not it matches the jackpot numerical information of.

  In the following step S404, it is determined whether or not the result of the success or failure determination process in step S403 is a jackpot winning result. If it is the jackpot winning result, the distribution determination process is executed in step S405. In the distribution determination process, among the information stored in the execution area AE, information for distribution determination, that is, numerical information acquired from the jackpot type counter C2 is grasped. Then, with reference to the distribution table provided in the main ROM 84, it is specified which of the jackpot results the numerical information of the jackpot type counter C2 grasped above corresponds. Specifically, it is specified which of the jackpot results among the low probability jackpot result, the explicit high probability jackpot result and the most advantageous jackpot result.

  In the following step S406, a stop result setting process for the jackpot result is executed. Specifically, from the stop result table for the jackpot result stored in advance in the main side ROM 84, information of the aspect of the pattern to be finally displayed on the special view display unit 62a in the game round relating to the start of fluctuation this time. The identification information is stored in the main RAM 85. In the stop result table for the jackpot result, information of the pattern aspect stopped and displayed on the special view display unit 62a is set to be different for each type of the jackpot result.

  In addition, the information of the kind of pattern to be stopped and displayed is determined according to the value of the jackpot type counter C2. In this case, the aspect of the pattern may be set corresponding to each jackpot result on a one-to-one basis, and the aspect of a plurality of types of patterns may be set for each jackpot result.

  In the subsequent step S407, a flag setting process corresponding to the distribution determination result is executed. Specifically, the main RAM 85 is provided with a flag corresponding to the type of each jackpot result, and in step S407, among the flags corresponding to the type of each jackpot result, the distribution determination result in step S405 is obtained. Set "1" to the corresponding flag.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S404 that the result is not the jackpot winning result, in step S408, stop result setting processing for the outlier is executed. Specifically, stop result table for deviation result stored in advance in the main ROM 84 in advance in the main ROM 84, information of the pattern to be finally displayed on the special view display unit 62a in the game round corresponding to the start of the change. And the identified information is stored in the main RAM 85. The information of the pattern aspect selected in this case is different from the information of the pattern aspect selected in the case of the jackpot result.

  After one of the processes in step S407 and step S408 is performed, in step S409, an acquisition process of the display continuation time is performed. In the acquisition processing, according to the current gaming state, the result of the qualification determination processing, the result of the distribution determination processing, the presence or absence of the reach display, the number of suspension information, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS, display in the current game Get duration information.

  After the display duration acquisition process is performed in step S409, the process proceeds to step S410, and the information of the display duration obtained in step S409 is set in the special figure special power timer counter. The update of the numerical information set in the timer counter is executed in the timer update process (FIG. 11) described above. By the way, although the variation display of the pattern in the special figure display unit 62a and the variation display of the symbol in the symbol display device 61 are performed as the effect for the game use, when each of these variation displays is finished, In the state where the stop result is displayed (in the symbol display device 61, the combination of the predetermined symbols is displayed stationary on the effective line), the final stop is displayed over the final stop time. In this case, the display continuation time acquired in step S409 is the time obtained by subtracting the final stop time from the total time for one game cycle.

  In the subsequent step S411, the variation command and the type command are transmitted to the sound side MPU 93. The fluctuation command has a 2-byte data configuration, and in the 2-byte data, data corresponding to the result of the yes / no determination process, data corresponding to the result of the distribution determination process, and display duration time It contains the corresponding data. Specifically, identification data for indicating that the command is a variation command is set by the upper 4 bits of data of 2 bytes, and the process of judging whether to pass or fail according to the next 4 bits of data The data for the drawing result corresponding to the result of the distribution determination process is set, and the data for the time corresponding to the display continuation time is set by the remaining 8-bit data. Therefore, when the sounding side MPU 93 receives the fluctuation command, it recognizes from the identification data that it is the fluctuation command, and based on the lottery result data, the result of the acceptance / rejection determination processing and the result of the distribution determination processing It recognizes and recognizes the display continuation time of this game time from the data for said time. Here, since the main MPU 83 selects a different display continuation time depending on whether or not the reach occurs, the sound light side MPU 93 displays even if the change command does not include the information about the presence or absence of the reach occurrence. It is possible to identify the presence or absence of reach from the information of duration. In this regard, it can be said that the change command includes information indicating the presence or absence of the reach occurrence. Note that the change command may include information directly indicating the presence or absence of reach.

  The type command has a 2-byte data configuration, and the 2-byte data includes data corresponding to the result of the yes / no determination process, data corresponding to the result of the distribution determination process, and the type of the lottery mode. And data corresponding to the remaining number of continuations of the high frequency support mode. Specifically, identification data for indicating that the device itself is a type command is set by high-order 4 bits of 2 bytes of data, and the next 4 bits of data indicate a decision processing of success or failure and Data for lottery results corresponding to the result of the distribution determination process is set, and the remaining 8 bits of data indicate the data corresponding to the type of the lottery mode and the number of continuations corresponding to the number of remaining continuations of the high frequency support mode. Data is set. Therefore, when the type command is received, the sound-side MPU 93 recognizes that the type command is the type command from the identification data, and recognizes the result of the yes / no determination processing and the result of the distribution determination processing from the lottery result data. The controller recognizes the type of the pass / fail lottery mode and the remaining continuation number of the high-frequency support mode from the continuation number data.

  Here, data corresponding to the result of the success / failure determination process and the result of the distribution determination process are included in both the variation command and the type command. Therefore, the sound-side MPU 93 collates the data for the lottery result included in the command for variation with the data for the lottery result included in the type command, so that noise or the like is received for the reception of the variation command and the type command. It becomes possible to specify whether or not a communication error has occurred. Then, if both of the lottery result data match, control for effect corresponding to the contents of the variable command and the type command is executed, and if both of the lottery result data do not match. Can be informed of it. By the way, in the latter case, the sound-light side MPU 93 may execute the game use effect corresponding to the communication abnormality in the game turn, and for example, in the game use effect, the pass / fail judgment processing and the distribution judgment Regardless of the result of the processing, the symbol display device 61 may be configured to stop and display a combination of symbols corresponding to complete detachment. In this case, the game circulation effect may be performed over the display continuation time corresponding to the time data included in the fluctuation command, or may be continued until the next fluctuation command and type command are received. It is also good.

  After the process of step S411 is performed, in step S412, the variation display of the pattern on the special view display unit 62a is started. In the subsequent step S413, the special figure special charge counter is incremented by one. In this case, since the numeric information of the special figure special power counter is "0" when the special figure variation start process is executed, the numerical information of the special figure special power counter is "1" when the process of step S413 is executed. It becomes ". After that, this special view fluctuation start process is ended.

<Process during special map change>
Next, the special figure changing processing in step S307 in the special figure special power control process (FIG. 12) will be described.

  In the special figure changing process, it is determined whether it is the continuation time of the game times and it is the timing before the final stop display, and if it is before the final stop display, the display mode of the pattern in the special view display portion 62a Execute processing to change regularly. This regular change is continued until it is time to start the final stop display. Also, this regular change is performed in a certain manner regardless of whether a hit result is generated and whether a reach indication is generated.

  Moreover, this special drawing is performed after the processing for regularly changing is not performed when waiting for the final stop display timing, but is not waiting for the special stop display processing until the final stop display timing is reached. Finish the process during fluctuation. Therefore, after the effect for the game circulation is started, the special figure variation in progress process is activated every time the special figure electric power control process is activated until the final stop display timing is reached. Also, when it is time to make the final stop display, the final display command is sent to the sound side MPU 93 to display the final stop result of the current game run on the symbol display device 61, and the special view The display mode of the pattern on the display unit 62a is set as the display mode corresponding to the lottery result of the current game run. Further, information on the final stop time (0.5 sec) of the game play is read out from the main ROM 84, and is set in the special figure special power timer counter. Then, the value of the special figure special power counter is incremented by one to update the value of the counter from the one corresponding to the special figure variation processing to the one corresponding to the special figure determination processing.

<Processing during special feature confirmation>
Next, the special figure determination process of step S308 in the special figure special power control process (FIG. 12) will be described.

  In the special figure finalization process, when the final stop time of the current game number has not elapsed, the special figure finalization process is ended as it is, and the final stop time of the current game number has elapsed. If the result of the success or failure judgment that triggered the current game run is a deviating result, the processing of this special view finalization process is ended after clearing the value of the special view special power counter to "0", and the trigger for the current game run If the result of the judgment of success or failure is any of the jackpot results, processing for switching to the open / close execution mode is executed.

  In the process for switching to the open / close execution mode, the information of the opening time (for example, 4 sec) stored in advance in the main ROM 84 is read, and the information of the opening time is set in the special drawing special power timer counter. Incidentally, the opening time is constant regardless of the type of the game result that has triggered the transition to the open / close execution mode. Also, the opening command is sent to the sound side MPU 93. The opening command is a command for causing the sound light side MPU 93 to recognize that it is the timing for starting the effect for the opening / closing execution mode. The opening command also includes information indicating which of the various jackpot results is the game result that is the trigger of the open / close execution mode. Therefore, the sound light side MPU 93 can execute the effect of the open / close execution mode in a mode corresponding to the game result triggered by the open / close execution mode. Furthermore, the special drawing special charge counter is incremented by one. In this case, since the value of the special view special charge counter is “2” when the process is executed during special view determination, the value of the special view special charge counter is “3”. Thereafter, the processing is ended while this special view is determined.

<Special power start processing>
Next, the special power start process of step S309 in the special figure special power control process (FIG. 12) will be described.

  In the special power start process, it is determined whether or not the opening time in the current opening / closing execution mode has elapsed, and if it has, the round counter provided in the main RAM 85 is set to 15 and the main RAM 85 Set 10 to the winning counter provided in. The round counter is a counter for specifying the number of remaining round games in the opening / closing execution mode by the main MPU 83, and the winning counter is the upper limit number of gaming balls in one round game or one opening / closing number regulation mode The main MPU 83 is a counter for specifying whether or not a winning has occurred. And while setting the open continuation time corresponding to a big hit result to a special figure special electric power timer counter, special electric special winning device 53 is made open state. Also, when the special power prize device 53 is in the open state, an open command is transmitted to the sound side MPU 93. By receiving the release command, the sound light side MPU 93 executes control for switching the effect in the open / close execution mode accordingly. After the special electric power winning device 53 is opened, the special electric special electric power counter is incremented by 1, and the special electric power start process is ended. In this case, since the value of the special view special charge counter is “3” when the special charge start process is executed, it becomes “4” after one addition.

<Processing during special power release>
Next, the special power on process in step S310 in the special figure special power control process (FIG. 12) will be described.

  In the special power release process, it is determined whether or not the end condition of one round game is satisfied, and when the end condition is satisfied, the special power prize device 53 is closed and the close command is sounded. It transmits to light side MPU93. Further, it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter after one subtraction is "0", and if it is not "0", the closing time is set in the special figure special power timer counter. The closing time is constant regardless of the type of the game result that has triggered the transition to the open / close execution mode, and specifically is 1 sec longer than the firing cycle of the game ball. Further, when the special power winning device 53 is in the closed state, the special figure special power counter is incremented by one regardless of whether the value of the round counter is "0" or not. In this case, since the value of the special figure special charge counter is “4” when the special charge open process is executed, the value after adding 1 becomes “5”.

<Processing during special power closing>
Next, the processing during special power closure in step S311 in the special figure special power control process (FIG. 12) will be described.

  In the special power closed process, it is determined whether the round counter is "0". If it is not "0", it is determined whether the closing time has elapsed. If the closing time has not elapsed, the processing during the special electric power closing is ended as it is, and if the closing time has elapsed, the special electric power winning device 53 is opened and the execution trigger of the present opening / closing execution mode The open duration time corresponding to the hit result is set in the special signal special power timer counter. Also, when the special power prize device 53 is in the open state, an open command is transmitted to the sound side MPU 93. Thereafter, after the special drawing special charge counter is decremented by 1, the processing is ended during the special charge closing. In this case, since the value of the special view special charge counter is “5” when the special charge closed process is executed, the value after the subtraction of 1 becomes “4”.

  On the other hand, when the round counter is “0”, the ending command is transmitted to the sound side MPU 93. The ending command is a command for causing the sound light side MPU 93 to recognize that it is a timing to start an effect for ending. The ending command also includes information indicating which of the various jackpot results is the game result that is the trigger of the open / close execution mode. Therefore, the sound light side MPU 93 can execute the ending effect in a mode corresponding to the game result that is the trigger of the open / close execution mode. Further, the information of the ending time (for example, 6 seconds) stored in advance in the main ROM 84 is read, and the information of the ending time is set in the special figure special power timer counter. Incidentally, the ending time is constant regardless of the type of the game result triggered to shift to the open / close execution mode. Thereafter, after the special drawing special charge counter is incremented by one, the processing is finished during the special charge closing. In this case, since the value of the special figure special charge counter is “5” when the special charge closed process is executed, the value after adding 1 becomes “6”.

<Special power termination processing>
Next, the special power termination process of step S312 in the special figure special power control process (FIG. 12) will be described.

  In the special power termination process, it is determined whether the ending time has elapsed, and when the ending time has not elapsed, the special power termination process is ended as it is. If the ending time has elapsed, the contents of the lottery mode and support mode after the opening and closing execution mode are set to the contents corresponding to the type of the jackpot result that has triggered the transition to the opening and closing execution mode this time, Furthermore, after clearing the special figure special power counter to "0", the special power termination process is finished.

<About timer interrupt processing executed by sound side MPU 93>
Next, the timer interrupt process repeatedly executed by the sound light side MPU 93 in a relatively short cycle (for example, 4 msec) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the timer interrupt process, first, in step S501, a main-side command storage process is executed. The main command storage process is a process for storing the command in the sound light side RAM 95 when the command is received from the main MPU 83. The sound light side RAM 95 is provided with a ring buffer for enabling storage and readout of commands received from the main MPU 83. Commands received from the main MPU 83 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer and stored. It is read out in order according to the order.

  In the following step S502, main-side command response processing for performing processing corresponding to the command received from the main MPU 83 is executed. In the main-side command handling process, a data table for enabling rendering and notification according to the command received from the main MPU 83 is read out. Thereafter, in step S503, light emission control processing for controlling the light emission of the display light emitting unit 23 is executed according to the data table read in step S502 or the data table read in other processing, and in step S504 The sound output control process for controlling the sound output of the speaker unit 24 is executed in accordance with the data table read in step S502 or the data table read in another process, and in step S505, the sound output control process is performed. A movable object control process for driving and controlling the effect drive unit 38c of the movable object unit 38 is executed in accordance with the data table output or the data table read in another process.

  After the process of step S505 is performed, the process of steps S506 to S513 for performing the imaging control of the imaging substrate 71 and the use of the imaging result is performed, and then the timer interrupt process ends.

<Main side command corresponding process>
FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing main-side command handling processing in step S502 in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14).

  First, in step S601, it is determined whether or not the variation command and type command have been received from the main MPU 83. When these commands are received, storage processing of the game result is executed in step S602. Specifically, from the information included in the type command, information indicating which is the result of the acceptance lottery and the distribution lottery determined by the main MPU 83 at the start of the current game run, ie, the current game Information on which the game result of the game is the most advantageous jackpot result, the explicit high probability jackpot result, the low probability jackpot result or the outlier result is specified, and the specified information is written in the sound side RAM 95.

  In the subsequent step S603, the advance lottery process is executed. In the advance lottery process, it is determined by lottery whether or not the advance notice display is to be performed by the symbol display device 61 in the current game run. As the advance notice display, as described above, after the variable display of the symbols is started on the symbol display device 61, in a situation where the symbols are variably displayed in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, In a situation where symbols are displayed in a variable pattern row in a plurality of symbol rows, the character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, or the background screen is displayed so far These include those having a different predetermined aspect and those having a pattern on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 as a predetermined aspect different from the previous aspects. The advance notice may occur any of the game times when the reach display is performed and when the reach display is not performed, but the probability when the reach display is performed is higher than that when the reach display is not performed. Is set to occur on Further, in the advance lottery process, the game times corresponding to any of the big hit results are more likely to generate a notice display than the game times corresponding to the out result, and a notice display having a lower appearance rate is more likely to occur. Make a advance notice lottery.

  In the subsequent step S604, stop symbol determination processing is executed. In the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of the current game round is the most advantageous big hit result, the information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination of the same symbol is established on one valid line L1 to L5 is the current stop result Determined as the information of In this case, the types of the same symbols and the effective lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like. However, an odd-numbered symbol is easy to be selected as a symbol which forms the combination of the same symbol. Further, in the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of the current game is a low probability jackpot result, information corresponding to the stop result in which the same even symbol combination is established on one of the valid lines L1 to L5, We decide as information of this stop result. In this case, the types of the same symbols and the effective lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like. Further, in the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of the current game round is an explicit high probability jackpot result, it is different from the combination of the same symbols on one valid line L1 to L5 and different from the combination of reach symbols The information corresponding to the stop result in which the symbol combination of is established is determined as the information of the present stop result. Further, in the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of the current game run is an out result, the presence / absence of the reach display is specified from the contents of the variation command. And when reach display occurs, it is a stop result in which the combination of the same symbol is not established on all the effective lines L1 to L5, and the combination of reach symbols is established on one or two effective lines L1 to L5. The information corresponding to the stopping result is determined as the information of the stopping result this time. On the other hand, when reach display does not occur, it is a stop result in which the combination of the same symbol is not established on all the effective lines L1 to L5, and the combination of reach symbols is not established on all the effective lines L1 to L5 The information corresponding to the result is determined as the information of the current stop result.

  In the following step S605, processing for determining an effect pattern of the current game run is executed. In the processing, the information of the display continuation time of the game times is specified from the content of the variable command and the type command received this time, the information of the display continuation time, the information of the game result specified in the step S602, And the effect pattern corresponding to the combination of the information of the lottery result of the advance lottery process in step S603 is selected.

  In the following step S606, a data table corresponding to the type of effect pattern selected in step S605 and the type of stop symbol determined in step S604 is read out from the sound side ROM 94 to the sound side RAM 95. In the light emission control process (step S503) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14), the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 23 is performed according to the data table, and in the sound output control process (step S504) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) The sound output control of the speaker unit 24 is performed in accordance with the above, and in the movable object control process (step S505) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14), the drive control of the effect drive unit 38c is performed in accordance with the data table.

  In the subsequent step S 607, a stop result command corresponding to the processing result of step S 604 and a pattern command corresponding to the processing result of step S 605 are transmitted to the display control device 96. When the display control device 96 receives the stop result command and the pattern command, the display control of the symbol display device 61 is performed so that the display effect corresponding to the effect pattern is performed, and the game effect is ended. The display control of the symbol display device 61 is performed so that the stop symbol determined in the above-mentioned stop symbol determination processing is stopped on the effective lines L1 to L5.

  If a negative determination is made in step S601, or after the process of step S607 is performed, it is determined in step S608 whether or not a final stop command has been received. If the final stop command has been received, the symbol stop command is transmitted to the display control device 96 in step S609. The symbol stop command is a command for instructing the display control device 96 to cause the stop symbol corresponding to the current game round to stand by on the effective lines L1 to L5 and maintain the state for the final stop time. .

  If a negative determination is made in step S608, or after the process of step S609 has been performed, it is determined in step S610 whether or not an open / close execution mode command has been received. As commands in the open / close execution mode system, an open command transmitted from the main MPU 83 when the open / close execution mode is started, and an open command transmitted from the main MPU 83 when the opening of the special power winning device 53 is started There are a closing command sent from the main MPU 83 when the closing of the special power prize device 53 is started, and an ending command sent from the main MPU 83 when the open / close execution mode is ended.

  When a command of the open / close execution mode system is received, the data table corresponding to the command is read out from the sound side ROM 94 to the sound side RAM 95 in step S611. Thereby, in the light emission control process (step S503) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14), the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 23 is performed according to the data table, and in the sound output control process (step S504) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14). The sound output control of the speaker unit 24 is performed according to the data table, and in the movable object control process (step S505) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14), the drive control of the effect drive unit 38c is performed according to the data table.

  In the subsequent step S612, a command corresponding to the command of the open / close execution mode system received this time is transmitted to the display control device 96. The display control device 96 controls the display of the symbol display device 61 so that the display effect corresponding to the command of the open / close execution mode system is performed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S610, or if the process of step S612 is performed, it is determined in step S613 whether a notification command is received from the main MPU 83 or not. The notification command is transmitted from the main side MPU 83 when an event that should execute notification such as an abnormality or a change in the state of the pachinko machine 10 has occurred in the pachinko machine 10. If a notification command has been received, in order to perform notification corresponding to the notification command, read processing of light emission data is executed in step S614, and read processing of sound output data is performed in step S615. Run. Thereby, in the light emission control process (step S503) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14), the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 23 is performed so that the light emission according to the light emission data is performed. In the output control process (step S504), the sound output control of the speaker unit 24 is performed so that the sound output corresponding to the sound output data is performed. Thereafter, in step S616, a notification command corresponding to the content of the notification command received this time is transmitted to the display control device 96. When the display control device 96 receives the command, the display control device 96 performs display control of the symbol display device 61 so that notification corresponding to the notification command is performed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S613, or if the process of step S616 is performed, it is determined in step S617 whether a release command has been received. The cancellation command is transmitted from the main MPU 83 when the event that triggered the transmission of the notification command is cancelled. If the release command has been received, the release setting process is executed in step S618 to release the notification that has already been made. Thereafter, in step S619, a release command corresponding to the content of the release command received this time is transmitted to the display control device 96. When the display control device 96 receives the command, the display control device 96 performs display control of the symbol display device 61 so as to end the notification execution corresponding to the release command.

  If a negative determination is made in step S617, or if the process of step S619 is performed, the other handling process is performed in step S620, and the handling process ends. In the other handling processing, for example, it is determined whether or not the demo start command is received, and when the demo start command is received, the demo start command is transmitted to the display control device 96. Thereby, the demonstration display is started in the symbol display device 61.

<Various processing for performing imaging control of imaging substrate 71 and various control using imaging result>
Next, imaging control of the imaging substrate 71 and various processes for performing various controls using imaging results will be described. Prior to describing the processing contents of various processes, an electrical configuration for executing these various processes will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

  The imaging substrate 71 includes the light emitting device 72 and the imaging device 73 as described above. The light emitting device 72 has an LED driver 72a whose emission timing of projection light is controlled by a control circuit 74 provided on the imaging substrate 71, and an LED capable of emitting near infrared rays, and is driven by the LED driver 72a to emit projection light And an emission angle adjustment lens 72c disposed on the tip side of the emission direction of the light of the LED module 72b with respect to the LED module 72b and capable of adjusting the emission angle of the projection light to the measurement object. Have. A signal indicating that the projection light is to be emitted is transmitted from the sound light side MPU 93 to the imaging substrate 71, and the LED driver 72a operates based on the control of the control circuit 74, and accordingly, the LED module 72b gets closer. Infrared radiation is emitted. In this case, the near-infrared light is irradiated as pulse light at a constant cycle so that the emission intensity of the near-infrared light emitted toward the measurement object is modulated at a constant cycle. Two light emitting devices 72 are provided, and the electrical configuration of each light emitting device 72 is the same as that described above.

  The imaging device 73 receives the reflected light emitted from the light emitting device 72 and reflected by the measurement object, and the imaging sensor 73a detects an imaging signal according to the distance from the imaging device 73 to the measurement object with a plurality of pixels. And a viewing angle adjusting lens 73b disposed on the side of the irradiation source of the reflected light with respect to the imaging sensor 73a and capable of adjusting the viewing angle at which the reflected light from the measurement object is incident. Although a CMOS image sensor is used as the imaging sensor 73a, another imaging sensor such as a MOS sensor may be used.

  The imaging sensor 73a includes a pixel array unit 73c having a large number of pixels (for example, 1000 pixels) in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction as light receiving units, and the pixels in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction, respectively. The pixel driver unit 73d scans the signal and reads out the signal from each pixel, and the signal read by the pixel driver unit 73d is A / D converted after noise cancellation processing is performed. The converted output signal is received by the signal processing circuit 75 provided on the imaging substrate 71.

  The signal processing circuit 75 derives the distance from the imaging device 73 to the measurement object using a so-called TOF (time of flight) technique. Specifically, based on the information of the projection light irradiated from the light emitting device 72 and the information of the reflected light received by the imaging device 73, the propagation time of the light to the measuring object is calculated, and the calculation result and the known result The distance from the imaging device 73 to the object to be measured is derived by using the speed of light of Further, since the derivation of the distance is performed for each of a large number of pixels of the imaging sensor, it is possible to derive the distance to the measurement target for each of the pixels.

  The reference flag 75a provided in the signal processing circuit 75 stores reference data serving as a reference when determining whether the received light signal is to be used for distance data calculation. If the intensity of the received signal is equal to or higher than the intensity corresponding to the reference data stored in the reference flag 75a, the signal processing circuit 75 uses the received signal for distance data calculation.

  The imaging substrate 71 configured as described above performs irradiation of projection light from the light emitting device 72 and derivation of distance data using an imaging result of the imaging device 73 based on receiving a signal from the sound light side MPU 93. Specifically, when executing a predetermined effect based on a command received from the main MPU 83, the sound light side MPU 93 transmits a signal to the imaging substrate 71 to cause projection light irradiation and distance data derivation. . Further, the sound light side MPU 93 transmits a signal to the imaging substrate 71 to execute various monitoring in a situation where the imaging substrate 71 is not used for effect, and emits projection light and derives distance data. Let it go. The timing at which this monitoring is performed includes the timing at which the game ball is not fired, and it is determined based on the signal transmitted from the power / fire control device 108 in determining whether or not such timing is reached. The command transmitted from the side MPU 83 is referred to. Further, the timing at which the monitoring is performed includes the timing at which the return operation for returning the storage medium from the ball lending device Y is performed, and the payout control device 111 determines whether the timing is the timing or not. The command transmitted from the main MPU 83 is referred to based on the signal transmitted from the MPU 113 of FIG.

  The distance data acquired by the imaging substrate 71 based on the instruction from the sound light side MPU 93 is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93. At the time of transmission of the distance data, address data indicating which pixel in the pixel array unit 73c the distance data corresponds to is also added and transmitted. These distance data are written in the distance image storage area 95 a provided in the sound light side RAM 95. In this case, in the distance image storage area 95a, a unit storage area is provided in a one-to-one correspondence with a large number of pixels provided in the pixel array section 73c of the imaging device 73, and transmitted from the imaging substrate 71. The distance data is individually written in unit storage areas corresponding to the pixels that enable derivation of the distance data. The sound light side MPU 93 utilizes the distance data written in the distance image storage area 95a to use the player's hand, finger, face, body as well as the respective distances of the individual images included in the image for one frame. It is possible to recognize the shapes and sizes of the hands, fingers, face and body. The image for one frame means that all the pixels of the pixel array unit 73c in the imaging device 73 have received the reflected light while the irradiation instruction of the projection light is generated once to the light emitting device 72. Is an image that can be grasped from distance data derived based on

  The distance data is derived as a value corresponding to the distance from the distance data reference position individually set for each pixel of the pixel array unit 73c. In this case, assuming that the distance data reference position is “0”, the value of the distance data becomes smaller as it is closer to the reference position, and the value of the distance data becomes larger as it is farther from the reference position. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the distance data reference position is set as a value other than “0”, and the value of distance data decreases in a range larger than the value of the reference position as it is closer to the reference position. The value of the distance data may increase as the distance from the reference position increases. In addition, the distance data reference position may be set as “0”, and may be a negative value with a larger absolute value as it is farther from the reference position.

<Reference switch monitoring process>
Next, the reference switch monitoring process executed in step S506 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) will be described.

  Prior to the description of the reference switch monitoring process, the reference switch 91a will be described. As shown in FIG. 3, in the voice light emission control device 91, the reference switch 91a is manually opened when the gaming machine body 12 is opened forward of the pachinko machine 10 and the back pack unit 15 is opened rearward of the gaming machine body 12. It is provided at a position where it can be operated. The reference switch 91a is movable between two positions, an ON position and an OFF position.

  The reference switch 91a is an operation means operated to set a reference when determining whether the signal received by the imaging device 73 of the imaging substrate 71 is to be used for calculation of distance data in the signal processing circuit 75. It is. The contents of the reference will be described with reference to the explanatory view of FIG.

  As a reference of the signal strength, as shown in FIG. 17A, the first reference strength and the second reference strength are prepared in advance at the design stage of the pachinko machine 10. The first reference intensity is set to have a higher signal intensity as a reference than the second reference intensity. When the first reference intensity is set as the reference intensity, when the maximum intensity of the intensity of the received signal is equal to or greater than the first reference intensity, the received signal is used for calculation of distance data. When the second reference intensity is set as the reference intensity, the received signal is used for distance data calculation when the maximum intensity of the received signal intensity is equal to or greater than the second reference intensity. Do. Therefore, when a signal as shown in FIG. 17A is received, the signal is used for distance data calculation regardless of whether the first reference intensity or the second reference intensity is set. Be done. On the other hand, when a signal as shown in FIG. 17B is received, the signal is not used for calculating distance data in the situation where the first reference intensity is set, and the second reference intensity is set. In the current situation, the signal is used for computing distance data.

  When the first reference intensity is set, only signals of relatively large signal intensity are used in computing distance data, so that the influence of noise can be reduced when deriving distance data. Is possible. On the other hand, when the second reference intensity is set, a signal having a relatively small signal intensity is also used when calculating distance data, and thus the signal becomes susceptible to noise, but on the other hand, Even when the intensity is low, it is possible to derive distance data.

  The first reference intensity and the second reference intensity are in the design stage of the pachinko machine 10 in relation to the light transmission of members such as the window panel 22 and the stage member 68 present on the propagation path of the light emitted from the light emitting device 72 Is determined by In this case, the first reference intensity is set to be higher than the signal intensity of the reflected light reflected by the stage member 68 and the signal intensity of the reflected light reflected by the window panel 22. On the other hand, although the second reference intensity is set to be higher than the signal intensity of the reflected light reflected by the window panel 22, the signal intensity of the reflected light reflected by the stage member 68 having a half mirror function is set. Is also set to be low strength. On the other hand, although the details will be described later, in the imaging substrate 71, processing for preventing the use of the reflected light reflected by the stage member 68 in the calculation of the distance data is executed.

  Here, in the pachinko machine 10, an irregular radio wave is irradiated to the general winning opening 52, the special power winning device 53, the first operation opening 54, the second operation opening 55, and the through gate 56 provided in the game area PA, An act to gain illegally is assumed. On the other hand, depending on the game hall, sticking a radio wave goth prevention sheet to the window panel 22 of the pachinko machine 10 may be performed. FIG. 18 (a) is an explanatory view for explaining the situation when the radio wave goth prevention sheet PS is not attached, and FIG. 18 (b) is the case where the radio wave goth prevention sheet PS is attached. It is an explanatory view for explaining a situation of.

  As shown in FIG. 18A, when the radio wave goth prevention sheet PS is not attached to the window panel 22, the projection light emitted from the light emitting device 72 and the reflection light reflected by the measurement object MO are the window panel. Although they are reflected by the stage member 22 and the stage member 68, they are within the range experimentally determined at the design stage of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, even if the reference intensity is set to the first reference intensity, the distance data can be derived as designed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 18B, when the radio wave goth prevention sheet PS is attached to the back surface of the window panel 22, the reflection light reflected by the projection light emitted from the light emitting device 72 and the measurement object MO The light is reflected not only by the window panel 22 and the stage member 68 but also by the radio wave goth prevention sheet PS. In this case, the signal intensity of the reflected light reflected by the measurement object MO becomes so weak. Then, if the reference strength is set to the first reference strength, it may be impossible to derive the distance data as designed. On the other hand, distance data can be derived by setting the reference intensity to the second reference intensity which is lower than the first reference intensity.

  By setting the first reference intensity and the second reference intensity as described above, it is possible to derive distance data on the basis of the first reference intensity that is basically not susceptible to noise. When the radio wave goth prevention sheet PS is used, the distance data can be derived on the basis of the second reference intensity in response to the decrease in the signal intensity of the reflected light. When the reference switch 91a is provided and the reference switch 91a is disposed at the OFF position, the first reference strength is set as the reference strength, and when the reference switch 91a is disposed at the ON position. The second reference strength is set as the reference strength.

  The reference switch 91a is electrically connected to the sound side MPU 93 as shown in FIG. 16, and when the reference switch 91a is disposed at the OFF position, the reference signal of the LOW level is transmitted to the sound side MPU 93. When the reference switch 91a is placed in the ON position, a HI-level reference signal is sent to the sound-side MPU 93. The relationship between HI and LOW may be reversed. When the reference switch 91a is disposed at the OFF position, a signal corresponding to that is transmitted from the sound light side MPU 93 to the imaging substrate 71, whereby the first reference strength is set as a reference, and the reference switch 91a is turned on. In the case where they are arranged in the above, the second reference intensity is set as a reference by transmitting a signal corresponding to that from the sound light side MPU 93 to the imaging substrate 71.

  FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the reference switch monitoring process executed by the sound light side MPU 93.

  First, in step S701, based on the signal received from the reference switch 91a, it is determined whether the reference switch 91a is disposed at the ON position. When the reference switch 91a is disposed at the OFF position, the first reference signal is transmitted to the signal processing circuit 75 of the imaging substrate 71 in step S702. Thereafter, in step S703, the reference flag provided in the sound light side RAM 95 is cleared to “0”, and then the present reference switch monitoring process is ended. The reference flag is a flag for specifying in the sound light side MPU 93 whether or not the reference switch 91a is disposed at the ON position.

  On the other hand, when the reference switch 91a is disposed at the OFF position (step S701: YES), the second reference signal is transmitted to the signal processing circuit 75 in step S704. Thereafter, in step S705, after setting "1" to the reference flag provided in the sound light side RAM 95, the present reference switch monitoring processing is ended.

  FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the flow of the signal processing operation performed by the signal processing circuit 75.

  The signal processing circuit 75 changes the reception state of the reference signal, that is, changes the state of receiving the first reference signal to the state of receiving the second reference signal or receives the second reference signal. If the first reference signal is received from the present state (step S801: YES), the state of the reference flag 75a provided in the signal processing circuit 75 is determined according to the type of the reference signal received this time. It changes (step S802). Specifically, when the first reference signal is received, the value of the reference flag 75a is "0", and when the second reference signal is received, the state of the reference flag 75a is "1". Ru.

  The signal processing circuit 75 calculates distance data according to the state of the reference flag 75a when the reflected light is received by the imaging device 73 and the imaging signal corresponding thereto is transmitted from the imaging device 73 (step S803: YES). Then, the distance data of the calculation result is transmitted to the sound side MPU 93.

  Specifically, when the value of the reference flag 75a is “0” (step S804: NO), the condition that the maximum value of the signal strength of the imaging signal received this time is equal to or more than the first reference strength Step S805: YES), using the image pickup signal, the distance data calculation processing (Step S806) is executed, and the distance data of the calculation result is transmitted to the sound side MPU 93 (Step S807). At the time of transmission of the distance data, address data corresponding to the pixel of the pixel array unit 73c that has received the present imaging signal is transmitted together. As a result, the sound-side MPU 93 writes the received distance data in the unit image storage area corresponding to the address data transmitted along with the distance data in the distance image storage area 95a.

  When the signal processing circuit 75 receives a plurality of types of imaging signals corresponding to the first reference intensity or more from one pixel, the signal processing circuit 75 derives distance data for each of the respective imaging signals, and the distance data is It transmits to sound light side MPU93 as distance data derived | led-out from the pixel of. When the sound light side MPU 93 receives a plurality of distance data for one pixel, the sound light side MPU 93 writes all the distance data in the corresponding unit storage area. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the signal processing circuit 75 receives a plurality of types of imaging signals corresponding to the first reference intensity or more from one pixel, the signal strength is the highest among the respective imaging signals. The distance data may be derived for a high value, and only the distance data may be transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93 as distance data derived from one pixel.

  On the other hand, when the value of the reference flag 75a is "1" (step S804: YES), on the condition that the maximum value of the signal strength of the imaging signal received this time is equal to or more than the second reference strength (step S808). YES), the arithmetic processing of distance data (step S809) is executed using the imaging signal. After the calculation processing of the distance data is performed, the distance data is transmitted to the sound side MPU 93 on condition that the distance data of the calculation result corresponds to the data of the reference distance or more (step S810: YES). (Step S811). At the time of transmission of the distance data, address data corresponding to the pixel of the pixel array unit 73c that has received the present imaging signal is transmitted together. As a result, the sound-side MPU 93 writes the received distance data in the unit image storage area corresponding to the address data transmitted along with the distance data in the distance image storage area 95a.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 18B, the reference distance is set as a distance farther from the imaging device 73 than the back surface 22b of the window panel 22 and closer to the imaging device 73 than the front surface 22a of the window panel 22. It is done. The pixel array portion of the imaging device 73 corresponds to the fact that the virtual reference plane corresponding to the position that becomes the reference distance is set vertically while the imaging surface of the imaging device 73 is directed obliquely upward. The value of the distance data corresponding to the reference distance is different for each pixel 73c. The same applies to the recognition corresponding distance, the monitoring distance, and the reference target distance described later.

  When the reference intensity is set to the second reference intensity, it is assumed that the intensity of the reflected light reflected by the radio wave goth prevention sheet PS becomes higher than the second reference intensity. Further, since the second reference intensity is lower than the first reference intensity, it is assumed that the intensity of the reflected light on the stage member 68 functioning as a half mirror is higher than the second reference intensity. On the other hand, only the distance data corresponding to the reference distance or more is to be transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93, so that the distance data derived from the reflected light is not used by the sound light side MPU 93. It becomes possible. By the way, in the situation where "1" is set to the reference flag 75a, there may occur a situation where the imaging signal corresponding to the distance data which becomes equal to or more than the reference distance from one pixel remains undetected. The transmission of distance data to the sound light side MPU 93 is not performed for the pixel.

  When the signal processing circuit 75 receives a plurality of types of imaging signals corresponding to the second reference intensity or more from one pixel, the signal processing circuit 75 derives distance data for each of the respective imaging signals, and among the distance data All the distance data corresponding to the reference distance or more are transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93 as distance data derived from one pixel. When the sound light side MPU 93 receives a plurality of distance data for one pixel, the sound light side MPU 93 writes all the distance data in the corresponding unit storage area. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the signal processing circuit 75 receives a plurality of types of imaging signals corresponding to the second reference intensity or more from one pixel, the signal strength is the highest among the respective imaging signals. The distance data may be derived for a high value, and when the distance data corresponds to the reference distance or more, the distance data may be transmitted to the sound side MPU 93 as distance data derived from one pixel.

  When the imaging permission period (for example, 5 msec) has elapsed since the projection light is irradiated from the light emitting device 72, the signal processing circuit 75 receives imaging signals from all the pixels of the pixel array unit 73c and also based on those imaging signals. When the distance data is transmitted, it is assumed that the imaging is completed (step S812: YES), and an imaging completion signal is transmitted to the sound side MPU 93.

<Imaging control processing>
Next, the imaging control process executed in step S513 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S 901, it is determined whether “1” is set in the reception standby flag provided in the sound light side RAM 95. The reception standby flag is a flag for specifying by the sound light side MPU 93 whether or not it is in a state of waiting for distance data acquisition after the projection light is irradiated from the light emitting device 72.

  If “1” is not set in the reception standby flag, it is determined in step S 902 whether “1” is set in any of the imaging command flags provided in the sound light side RAM 95. The imaging command flag is provided in a one-to-one correspondence with the cancel monitoring processing, height position monitoring processing, face authentication processing, first situation monitoring processing, second situation monitoring processing, and operation effect control processing described later. It is a flag for specifying by the sound light side MPU 93 whether derivation of distance data by the imaging substrate 71 is instructed in any of these processes.

  If “1” is not set in all the imaging command flags, the imaging control process is ended as it is, and if “1” is set in any of the imaging command flags, the process proceeds to step S 903. In step S 903, an irradiation instruction signal is transmitted to the control circuit 74 of the imaging substrate 71. Thereby, projection light is emitted from the light emitting device 72. In the following step S904, "1" is set in the reception standby flag provided in the sound light side RAM 95.

  After that, in step S905, it is determined whether the imaging command flag triggered to make a positive determination in step S902 is the imaging command flag of the effect system or the imaging command flag corresponding to the authentication at return. The imaging command flag of the effect system is an imaging command flag in which “1” is set in the operation effect control process. The imaging command flag corresponding to the authentication on return is a flag for which “1” is set in the authentication process at the time of return operation described later. If it is the imaging command flag of the effect system or the imaging command flag corresponding to the authentication at return, the present imaging control processing is ended as it is. If it is not the imaging command flag of the effect system or the imaging command flag corresponding to the authentication at return, in step S906, after clearing the imaging command flag that triggered the positive determination in step S902, "0" is cleared. This imaging control process ends. As a result, when the imaging result of the imaging substrate 71 is used as an effect or when it is used as return authentication, the imaging in the imaging substrate 71, that is, the derivation of distance data is repeatedly performed. When the imaging result in the imaging substrate 71 is used for purposes other than presentation or authentication at return, imaging is performed on the imaging substrate 71 only once for one imaging instruction unless the imaging retry is performed. To be executed.

  On the other hand, if “1” is set in the reception standby flag, it is determined in step S 907 whether or not imaging has been completed in response to the current imaging command in the imaging substrate 71. The sound light side MPU 93 determines that the imaging is completed when the imaging completion signal is received from the signal processing circuit 75. Incidentally, the longest time required from the transmission of the irradiation instruction signal to the imaging substrate 71 in step S903 to the determination of imaging completion in step S907 is about 10 msec.

  If the imaging has not been completed, the present imaging control process ends, and if the imaging is completed, the process proceeds to step S908. In step S 908, it is determined whether “1” is set in the cancellation monitoring flag provided in the sound light side RAM 95. The cancellation monitoring flag indicates that the imaging instruction is issued to use an image for one frame in the cancellation monitoring process to be described later and that the imaging standby condition for the imaging instruction is either It is a flag for specifying in the side MPU 93. If “1” is set in the cancel monitoring flag, the process of step S915 described later is executed, and the present imaging control process ends.

  If "1" is not set in the cancel monitoring flag, in step S909, the search counter setting process is executed. Here, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 22, the distance image storage area 95a of the sound light side RAM 95 is made to correspond to the pixels of the pixel array portion 73c in the imaging substrate 71 one to one to store a large number of unit storage areas. U1 is provided, and distance data derived from the reflected light received by the corresponding pixel is written in each unit memory area U1. Incidentally, the unit storage area U1 corresponding to the pixel to which the distance data has not been transmitted from the signal processing circuit 75 is set as a blank area, and the blank area is not referred to when grasping the image in the sound side MPU 93. The search counter is provided in the sound light side RAM 95, and in order to specify, among the unit storage areas U1 of the distance image storage area 95a, an area to be subjected to the determination of whether or not adjustment of distance data is necessary. It is referred to by the sound light side MPU 93. In the search counter setting process, a value corresponding to the number of unit storage areas U1 is set in the search counter.

  In the following step S910, it is determined whether the distance data stored in the unit storage area U1 corresponding to the current value of the search counter is data corresponding to the recognition corresponding distance or more. The recognition corresponding distance is set as a distance farther from the imaging device 73 than the surface 22a of the window panel 22, as shown in the explanatory view of FIG. If a negative determination is made in step S910, unit storage area U1 corresponding to the current value of the search counter is set as a blank area in step S911. That is, the value of the unit storage area U1 is cleared to "0" in order to set the area not holding the distance data. The unit storage area U1 set as the blank area is treated as an area where no distance data exists when the sound light side MPU 93 recognizes an image of one frame.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S910, or if the process of step S911 is performed, the value of the search counter of the sound light side RAM 95 is decremented by 1 in step S912. Thereafter, in step S913, it is determined whether or not the value of the search counter after the one subtraction is “0” to determine whether the process of step S910 has been performed for all unit storage areas U1. judge. If a negative determination is made in step S913, this means that there is a unit storage area U1 for which the process of step S910 is to be performed, so the distance data stored in unit storage area U1 in the next order is The process of step S910 is performed. On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S913, it means that the process of step S910 is completed for all unit storage areas U1, so the process proceeds to step S914.

  In step S914, it is determined whether the number of unit storage areas U1 for which the setting of the blank area has been performed in step S911 is equal to or greater than a reference number. The reference number is arbitrary as long as recognition of an image for one frame can be appropriately performed, but it is preferable that the reference number is set as a plurality of numbers, specifically, set to “50”. There is.

  If a negative determination is made in step S914, the reception standby flag of the sound light side RAM 95 is cleared to "0" and the imaging completion flag provided in the sound light side RAM 95 is set to "1" in step S915. After that, the present imaging control process ends. The imaging completion flag specifies by the sound light side MPU 93 that the acquisition of the image for one frame is completed with respect to the generation of the imaging instruction and the image can be used in the process in which the imaging instruction is generated. It is a flag for

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S914, it is determined in step S916 whether or not the value of the retry number counter provided in the sound light side RAM 95 is equal to or more than the upper limit number. The retry number counter is a counter for specifying the number of times the imaging is performed again by the sound-light side MPU 93 when the number of blank areas is equal to or more than the reference number. Further, the upper limit number of times is set as a plurality of times, and specifically, is set to “3”.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S916, the process of step S915 described above is performed, and then the imaging control process ends. If a negative determination is made in step S916, the reception standby flag of the sound light side RAM 95 is cleared to "0" in step S917, and the type of image pickup control processing in the sound light side RAM 95 is triggered. Set “1” to the imaging command flag. Thereafter, in step S918, the value of the retry count counter of the sound light side RAM 95 is incremented by 1, and the present imaging control process is ended.

  As described above, by setting the blank area for the distance data corresponding to the distance closer to the imaging device 73 than the surface 22 a of the window panel 22, as shown in FIG. 23, between the imaging device 73 and the window panel 22 If the game ball B accidentally exists in the meantime, it is possible to prevent the distance data derived based on the reflected light in the game ball B from being used in the processing for monitoring or the processing for effect. Therefore, it is possible to use only distance data derived on the basis of the reflected light of the measuring object MO present at a distance farther than the surface 22 a of the window panel 22 with respect to the imaging device 73 in subsequent processing. .

  In addition, when the number of unit storage areas U1 for which the setting of the blank area is performed is equal to or more than the reference number, the irradiation of the projection light from the light emitting device 72 is performed again, and imaging of one frame is performed again. Be done. Thereby, for example, even when the game ball B flowing down the game area PA is imaged as shown in FIG. 23, one frame worth of the game ball B does not exist by performing imaging again. It is possible to create an opportunity to acquire an image. Thus, the opportunity to obtain an image of one frame obtained by imaging only the measurement object MO present in front of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the surface 22 a of the window panel 22 is enhanced.

  In addition, an event of capturing an image of one frame again is performed within the upper limit number of times. This makes it possible to limit the maximum time required to complete acquisition of an image for one frame for one imaging command. The longest time required from the transmission of the irradiation instruction signal to the imaging substrate 71 in step S903 to the determination of the imaging completion in step S907 is about 10 msec, and the upper limit number of times for performing imaging again is set. Is set to three times, the maximum time required to complete acquisition of an image for one frame in response to one imaging command is about 35 msec, taking into consideration the processing time from step S908 to step S918. .

<Monitoring process for cancellation>
Next, the cancellation monitoring process executed in step S507 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) will be described.

  In the cancel monitoring process, it is determined whether or not a situation where the imaging of the image for one frame can not be normally performed in the imaging substrate 71 has occurred, or whether the fraudulent jig D is inserted in the game area PA. And the process for monitoring whether ball clogging has generate | occur | produced in the game area PA using the imaging result of the board | substrate 71 for imaging is performed. The event to be monitored will be described with reference to the explanatory views of FIG. 24 (a) and FIG. 24 (b).

  As shown in FIG. 24A, when monitoring processing other than the main cancellation monitoring processing is executed using the imaging result of the imaging substrate 71 or when using the imaging result of the imaging substrate 71 as an effect The measurement object MO is present in front of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the surface 22 a of the window panel 22. In this case, since the surface 22 a of the window panel 22 is exposed to the player side, the surface 22 a may be touched by the player. Then, a soiled portion A such as a fingerprint may be generated on the surface 22a. When such a dirty portion A occurs, the projection light emitted from the light emitting device 72 is reflected by the dirty portion A, which may make it impossible to normally perform imaging of the measurement target MO. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. 24 (b), it is assumed that the fraudulent jig D is inserted into the gaming area PA and an action for obtaining a fraudulent profit is performed. In addition to these events, in the pachinko machine 10, ball clogging may occur in the gaming area PA, and in this case, many gaming balls will remain in the gaming area PA. On the other hand, in the cancellation monitoring process, the occurrence of the event to be monitored for cancellation such as the occurrence of the dirty portion A, the insertion of the fraudulent jig D into the gaming area PA, or the ball clogging in the gaming area PA. When identified, the processing corresponding to that is executed.

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the cancellation monitoring process.

  First, in step S1001, it is determined whether or not a priority event has occurred by confirming the states of various flags of the sound light side RAM 95. The priority event refers to a situation in which an imaging command is generated on the imaging substrate 71 in order to use an image for one frame in effect and an imaging substrate 71 in order to use an image for one frame in return authentication described later. It is a situation where an imaging command has been generated.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1001, the cancel monitoring flag provided in the sound light side RAM 95 is cleared to “0” in step S1002, and the cancel monitoring process ends. The cancellation monitoring flag is a flag for specifying by the sound light side MPU 93 that the imaging substrate 71 is capturing an image of one frame in order to perform cancellation monitoring. Then, as described above, the cancellation monitoring flag is forcibly cleared to “0” during occurrence of the priority event, thereby using the image for one frame, on the priority event side rather than the cancellation monitoring. It becomes possible to give priority to usage.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1001, it is determined in step S1003 whether "1" is set in the cancellation monitoring flag of the sound light side RAM 95 or not. If "1" is not set in the cancellation monitoring flag, it is determined in step S1004 whether "1" is set in the other monitoring flag of the sound light side RAM 95 or not. The other monitoring flag is one of height position monitoring processing (step S508), face authentication processing (step S509), first status monitoring processing (step S510), and second status monitoring processing (step S511). This is a flag in which “1” is set when an imaging command of an image for one frame is issued to the imaging substrate 71. When an affirmative determination is made in step S1004, the present cancellation monitoring process is ended as it is, and when a negative determination is made in step S1004, the process proceeds to step S1005.

  In step S1005, it is determined whether the standby time for cancellation monitoring has elapsed. The standby time for cancellation monitoring is set to 200 msec, and when the execution of cancellation monitoring is completed for the image for one frame acquired in response to the imaging command being issued in the cancellation monitoring process, Measurement of the waiting time is started. The measurement of the standby time is also started immediately after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on.

  If the standby time for cancellation monitoring has not elapsed, the present cancellation monitoring process is ended as it is. If the standby time for cancellation monitoring has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S1006. In step S1006, the imaging command flag corresponding to the cancellation monitoring in the sound light side RAM 95 is set to "1", and the cancellation monitoring flag in the sound light side RAM 95 is set to "1". Thereafter, the cancellation monitoring process is ended. As described above by setting the imaging command flag to “1”, the irradiation control signal (FIG. 21) transmits an irradiation instruction signal to the imaging substrate 71 and imaging is started in the imaging substrate 71. .

  When “1” is set in the cancel monitoring flag, an affirmative determination is made in step S1003, and the process proceeds to step S1007. In step S1007, it is determined whether "1" is set in the imaging completion flag of the sound light side RAM 95 or not. That is, it is determined whether imaging of an image for one frame for monitoring for cancellation has been completed. If a negative determination is made in step S1007, the cancellation monitoring process is terminated, and if a positive determination is made in step S1007, the process proceeds to step S1008.

  In step S1008, the cancellation monitoring flag and the imaging completion flag in the sound light side RAM 95 are cleared to "0". In the following step S1009, it is determined whether unit storage areas U1 in which distance data equal to or less than the monitoring distance are stored in the distance image storage area 95a are collectively collected in a predetermined range.

  As shown in FIGS. 24A and 24B, the monitoring distance is set as a distance from the position in front of the pachinko machine 10 by about 1 cm from the surface 22a of the window panel 22 to the imaging device 73. Distance data derived on the window panel 22 based on the reflected light reflected by the dirty portion A, distance data derived based on the reflected light reflected on the fraudulent jig D inserted into the game area PA, and the game The distance data derived based on the gaming ball causing the ball clogging in the area PA corresponds to the data equal to or less than the monitoring distance.

  In the case where a dirty portion A occurs, in the case where a fraudulent jig D is present, or in the case where a ball jam occurs, a predetermined range adjacent in the vertical direction and in the horizontal direction in the pixel array portion 73c of the imaging device 73 The reflected light reflected by the dirty portion A, the fraudulent jig D, or the game ball is received by the pixel. Then, as indicated by black areas in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 26A, distance data equal to or less than the monitoring distance is stored in the plurality of unit storage areas U1 present in the predetermined range in the distance image storage area 95a. The Rukoto. In this case, it is treated that there is a high possibility that the dirty portion A, the fraudulent jig D or the ball clogged ball is present.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1009, the distance data currently stored in the distance image storage area 95a is overwritten in the history data storage area 95b provided in the sound side RAM 95 in step S1016, and this cancellation is performed. End the monitoring process for The history data storage area 95b has the same number of unit storage areas U2 as the distance image storage area 95a as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 26 (b), and data stored in the distance image storage area 95a Can be stored as it is.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1009, in step S1010, unit storage of distance image storage area 95a corresponding to unit storage area U2 of history data storage area 95b in which distance data less than or equal to the monitoring distance is stored. It is determined whether the same or substantially the same distance data as the distance data exists in the area U1. That is, it is determined whether a data range which is distance data equal to or less than the monitoring distance in the history data is present in the data of the image acquired for one frame. As a result, even if the history data and the image data for one frame do not completely match, an affirmative determination will be made in step S1010, and the data range having distance data longer than the monitoring distance is the history. Even when the data of the image of one frame acquired this time is wider than the data, the positive determination is made in step S1010.

  It should be noted that the history corresponding to the unit storage area U1 of the distance image storage area 95a where distance data equal to or less than the monitoring distance is stored instead of determining whether the same or substantially the same distance data exists. It may be determined whether or not the distance data corresponding to the monitoring distance or less is stored in the unit storage area U2 of the data storage area 95b.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1010, the history data update process is performed in step S1016, and the cancel monitoring process ends. When an affirmative determination is made in step S1010, the value of the coincidence counter provided in the sound light side RAM 95 is incremented by one in step S1011. The coincidence counter is the same as or substantially the same distance as the distance data in unit storage area U2 of history data storage area 95b corresponding to unit storage area U1 of distance image storage area 95a where distance data less than the monitoring distance is stored. It is a counter for specifying the number of times of confirming that the data exists by the sound side MPU 93. The coincidence counter is cleared to “0” when a negative determination is made in step S1010 or when an affirmative determination is made in step S1012.

  Thereafter, in step S1012, it is determined whether the value of the coincidence counter is equal to or greater than the abnormality reference value. The abnormality reference value is set as a value of 2 or more, and specifically, is set to "20". Here, as described above, since the standby time for cancellation monitoring is set to 200 msec, in step S1012, the situation in which distance data less than the monitoring distance is acquired by the same pixel continues for 4 seconds or more. It is judged whether or not it is done. In this abnormal reference period, a standard assumed as the rendering operation when a rendering operation is performed in which the player takes his hand in the predetermined mode toward the window panel 22 during the rendering using the imaging result of the imaging substrate 71 It is set as a period longer than the typical period, and longer than the longest period assumed as the period of stay at a predetermined location when the game ball flows down the game area PA without occurrence of the ball clogging It is set.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1012, the history data update process is performed in step S1016, and the cancel monitoring process ends. When an affirmative determination is made in step S1012, in step S1013, "1" is set in the restriction flag provided in the sound light side RAM 95.

  The restriction flag is a flag for specifying in the sound light side MPU 93 whether or not the imaging result on the imaging substrate 71 is used as an effect. Then, when “1” is set in the restriction flag, the sound light side MPU 93 does not execute the effect of using the imaging result in the imaging substrate 71. As a result, in a situation where the imaging result of the imaging substrate 71 can not be normally used as an effect due to the occurrence of the dirty portion A, the effect utilizing the imaging result can be prevented from being executed.

  In the subsequent step S1014, the process of reading out the data for error notification is executed. In the reading process, light emission data and sound output data for causing the display light emitting unit 23 and the speaker unit 24 to perform abnormality notification corresponding to the result of the cancellation monitoring process are read out from the sound light ROM 94 to the sound light RAM 95. As a result, the error notification corresponding to the result of the cancellation monitoring process is performed by the display light emitting unit 23 and the speaker unit 24. In step S1015, a command for error notification is transmitted to the display control device 96. The display control device 96 displays and controls the symbol display device 61 so as to execute the abnormality notification corresponding to the result of the cancellation monitoring process by receiving the abnormality notification command. As described above, it is possible that the occurrence of the monitoring target event in the cancellation monitoring process can be clearly recognized not only by the game hall manager but also the player by executing various abnormality notifications. Become. After the process of step S1015 is performed, the update process of history data is performed in step S1016, and the cancel monitoring process is ended.

  Note that the state where the restriction flag is set to “1” and the state where the above-mentioned abnormality notification is being executed are canceled by turning the pachinko machine 10 off, and then the power is turned on. The restriction flag is “0” and the abnormal notification is not resumed.

  The manner in which abnormality notification is executed based on the cancellation monitoring process will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. Although the case where a dirt portion A is generated on the surface 22a of the window panel 22 will be described as an example, the same applies to the case where a fraudulent jig D is present or a case where a ball jam occurs.

  FIG. 27 (a) shows a period in which a player performs a rendering operation, FIG. 27 (b) shows a period in which a dirty portion A is generated, and FIG. FIG. 27 (d) shows an execution period of effect, and FIG. 27 (e) shows a period during which it is specified that a cancellation monitoring target is generated. 27 (f) shows the execution period of the anomaly notification. Here, the effect operation of the player means that the player brings his hand toward the window panel 22 in a predetermined manner.

  First, the case where the dirty portion A does not occur will be described.

  By performing the effect operation of the player as shown in FIG. 27A at the timing of t1 during which the effect corresponding to the effect operation is performed when the effect operation of the player is performed, as shown in FIG. At the timing of t2, as shown in FIG. 27C, the sound light side MPU 93 specifies the generation of the effect operation by the player. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 27 (d), at the timing of t2, an effect corresponding to the effect operation is started.

  Next, problems that occur when the cancellation monitoring process is not executed will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 27 (b), the soiled portion A is formed on the surface 22a of the window panel 22 at the timing of t3 during which the effect corresponding to the effect operation is performed when the effect operation is performed by the player. It occurs. Then, as shown in FIG. 27 (c), as shown in FIG. 27 (c), at the timing of t4, which is the timing prior to the timing of t5 when the effect operation of the player is started as shown in FIG. 27 (a). It is identified that the rendering operation has occurred due to the reflected light in the part A, and the rendering is started as shown in FIG. 27 (d). In this case, although the player does not perform the rendering operation, the rendering corresponding to the rendering operation is started, giving the player a sense of discomfort.

  Next, the case where the cancellation monitoring process is executed will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 27B, a dirty portion A is generated on the surface 22a of the window panel 22 at the timing of t6. Thereafter, when the waiting time for monitoring for cancellation elapses at the timing of t7, it is specified that the monitoring object for cancellation is generated as shown in FIG. 27 (e). Then, at the timing of t8, when the period for continuously specifying that the cancellation monitoring target is generated becomes the abnormality reference period T1 or more, the abnormality notification is started as shown in FIG. 27 (f). Ru. Thereafter, the dirty portion A is removed from the surface 22a of the window panel 22 at time t9, and the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on again, whereby the abnormality notification is ended.

  As described above, when the monitoring target for cancellation is generated, the notification of abnormality is executed, thereby enabling the game hall manager to be prompted to cope with the occurrence of the event for monitoring the cancellation. . For example, there is a possibility that the presence or absence of the rendering operation of the player can not be accurately specified if the dirty portion A is generated on the surface 22a of the window panel 22, but the abnormal notification is executed for this. It is possible to urge the game hall manager to remove the dirty portion A. Further, for example, when the fraudulent jig D is inserted in the game area PA, by performing the abnormality notification, it is possible to prevent the fraudulent behavior from being continued further. Further, for example, when the ball clogging occurs in the game area PA, by performing the abnormality notification, it is possible to prompt the manager of the game hall to eliminate the ball clogging.

  Also, the monitoring distance is set as the distance from the position ahead of the pachinko machine 10 about 1 cm from the surface 22a of the window panel 22 to the imaging device 73, and the monitoring object for cancellation is when the distance data is less than the monitoring distance. By specifying that the occurrence of the event is generated, it becomes possible to collectively monitor the monitoring of the cancellation monitoring targets existing in plural types by a predetermined process.

  In addition, for example, when the unit storage area U1 in which distance data equal to or less than the monitoring distance is stored collectively in a predetermined range, the cancellation monitoring target is identified as being generated, for example, It is possible to prevent the abnormality notification from being executed even when a minute dirt portion is generated on the surface 22 a of the window panel 22.

<Height position monitoring process>
Next, the height position monitoring process executed in step S508 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) will be described.

  In the height position monitoring process, as shown in the explanatory views of FIG. 28 (a) and FIG. 28 (b), the player who is playing a game while sitting in a chair arranged in front of the pachinko machine 10 in the gaming hall The height position of the face of the player may differ depending on the player's sitting height. Also, since the height position of the chair may differ depending on the game hall, this also changes the height position of the face. On the other hand, when the effect is performed using the imaging result of the imaging substrate 71, the player moves his hand in a predetermined manner toward the window panel 22 at a position forward of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the window panel 22. Perform the rendering operation. In this case, as shown in the explanatory view of FIG. 29, when a rendering operation is performed to select an image displayed on the symbol display device 61, the player F1 is selected even when the same image is selected. In the case of performing the rendering operation toward the point P1 of the window panel 22, in the case of the player F2 whose face height position is lower than the player F1, toward the point P2 of the window panel 22 Perform the rendering operation. Then, even in the situation where the same rendering operation is performed, the height position at which the imaging device 73 recognizes the hand performing the rendering operation is different. On the other hand, when the height position of the player's face is grasped in advance by the height position monitoring process, the height position of the player's hand when the rendering operation is performed is grasped 1 The data of the image of the frame can be corrected according to the height position of the face.

  FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing height position monitoring processing.

  First, in step S1101, it is determined whether or not a priority event has occurred by confirming the state of various flags of the sound light side RAM 95. The contents of the priority event are the same as in the case of step S1001 in the cancellation monitoring process (FIG. 25).

  If the determination in step S1101 is affirmative, the height position monitoring flag provided in the sound light side RAM 95 is cleared to “0” in step S1103, and then the height position monitoring process ends. The height position monitoring flag is a flag for specifying by the sound light side MPU 93 that the image pickup substrate 71 is performing image pickup for one frame in order to perform height position monitoring. Then, as described above, in the situation where the priority event occurs, the height position monitoring flag is forcibly cleared to “0”, thereby making it possible to use the image for one frame as compared to the height position monitoring. It is also possible to prioritize the use on the priority event side.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1101, it is determined in step S1102 whether or not the operation handle 37b of the firing operation device 37 is operated. Specifically, as described above, the power / emission control device 108 receives a signal indicating that the operation handle 37b is touched by the player from the touch sensor 37c, and the operation for stopping the emission is not performed. On the condition that the signal indicating that is received from the stop switch 37e, the condition fulfillment signal of HI level is continuously transmitted to the main MPU 83. When reception of the condition satisfaction signal of the HI level is started, the main side MPU 83 transmits a firing operation start command to the sound side MPU 93, and when reception of the condition satisfaction signal of the HI level is ended, the sound side MPU 93 Send launch operation end command to. In step S1102, it is determined that the firing operation is being performed in the situation where the firing operation end command has not been received after the firing operation start command has been received.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1102, that is, if the firing operation is not in progress, the height position monitoring flag of the sound light side RAM 95 is cleared to “0” in step S1103, and then the height position monitoring process is performed. finish. As a result, height position monitoring can be performed only in the situation where the launch operation is being performed, and the height is set in a situation where the player is not seated in the chair arranged in front of the pachinko machine 10 It is possible to prevent position monitoring from being performed.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1102, it is determined in step S1104 whether "1" is set in the height position monitoring flag of the sound light side RAM 95 or not. If “1” is not set in the height position monitoring flag, it is determined in step S1105 whether “1” is set in the restriction flag of the sound light side RAM 95 or not.

  When the restriction flag is set to “1”, the height position monitoring process is terminated. As described above, the restriction flag is set to “1” when it is specified that the cancellation monitoring target is generated in the cancellation monitoring process (FIG. 25). Then, the situation where the restriction flag is set to “1” may be a situation where the imaging substrate 71 can not normally capture an image of one frame. In this case, by making an affirmative determination in step S1105 and terminating the height position monitoring process as it is, it is possible to prevent height position monitoring from being performed in a situation where imaging can not be normally performed. It becomes.

  If "1" is not set in the restriction flag, it is determined in step S1106 whether "1" is set in the other monitoring flag of the sound light side RAM 95 or not. The other monitoring flag is captured in any of the cancellation monitoring process (step S507), the face authentication process (step S509), the first situation monitoring process (step S510), and the second situation monitoring process (step S511). This is a flag in which “1” is set when an imaging command of an image for one frame is issued to the substrate 71. When an affirmative determination is made in step S1106, the book height position monitoring process is ended as it is, and when a negative determination is made in step S1106, the process proceeds to step S1107.

  In step S1107, it is determined whether the standby time for height position monitoring has elapsed. The waiting time for height position monitoring is set as a waiting time different from the waiting time for cancellation monitoring, and is specifically set to 500 msec. When execution of height position monitoring is completed with respect to the image for one frame acquired with respect to having performed imaging command in height position monitoring processing, measurement of the said waiting time is started. The measurement of the standby time is also started immediately after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on.

  If the height position monitoring standby time has not elapsed, the main height position monitoring process is ended as it is, and if the height position monitoring standby time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S1108. In step S1108, the imaging command flag corresponding to height position monitoring in the sound side RAM 95 is set to "1", and the height position monitoring flag of the sound side RAM 95 is set to "1". Thereafter, the height position monitoring process ends. By setting “1” to the imaging command flag, as described above, the irradiation instruction signal is transmitted toward the imaging substrate 71 in the imaging control process (FIG. 21), and imaging is started in the imaging substrate 71. Ru.

  When the height position monitoring flag is set to “1”, an affirmative determination is made in step S1104, and the process proceeds to step S1109. In step S1109, it is determined whether "1" is set in the imaging completion flag of the sound light side RAM 95 or not. That is, it is determined whether imaging of an image for one frame for performing height position monitoring is completed. If a negative determination is made in step S1109, the book height position monitoring process is ended as it is, and if a positive determination is made in step S1109, the process proceeds to step S1110.

  In step S 1110, the height position monitoring flag and the imaging completion flag of the sound light side RAM 95 are cleared to “0”. In the following step S1111, a target extraction process of height position is executed. In the target extraction process, the image data of one frame is grasped based on the distance data stored in the distance image storage area 95a of the sound light side RAM 95, and the data of the grasped image is a human face portion. It is determined whether or not corresponding image data exists. In the determination, a range corresponding to the outline of the face corresponding to an elliptical shape, a circular shape, an elliptical shape or the like is extracted, and a range corresponding to the eyes, nose, mouth or ear exists in the extracted range. In the case, the extracted range is recognized as a face. Then, as shown in FIGS. 28A and 28B, the central position in the height direction of the range recognized as the face is extracted as the current height position.

  Thereafter, in step S1112, it is determined whether the target extraction has been completed. If the extraction of the height position is completed in the target extraction process of step S1111, an affirmative determination is made in step S1112. In this case, group identification processing of height position is executed in step S1113. Specifically, in the present pachinko machine 10, three levels of groups are set as the height position groups, and as shown in FIGS. 28 (a) and 28 (b), the height is equal to or higher than the first height reference. Height group corresponding to the first height group, a second height group corresponding to a height position less than the first height reference and equal to or higher than the second height reference, and height less than the second height reference There is a third height group corresponding to the position. In step S1113, the height position extracted in step S1111 is compared with the first height reference and the second height reference, and which one of the first to third height groups falls under is specified.

  Thereafter, in step S1114, the value corresponding to the height group identified in step S1113 is set in the height position group counter 95c provided in the sound light side RAM 95, and the height position monitoring process is ended. Specifically, "1" is set in the case of the first height group, "2" is set in the case of the second height group, and "3" in the case of the third height group. set. By referring to the height position group counter 95c, the sound light side MPU 93 can recognize the current height position, and corresponds to the height position when using the imaging result of the imaging substrate 71 as an effect Can be adjusted.

  On the other hand, if it is not possible to specify the range corresponding to the outline of the face in the target extraction process of step S1111, a negative determination is made in step S1112, and the process proceeds to step S1115. In step S1115, "2" is set to the height position group counter 95c of the sound light side RAM 95 as setting processing at the time of non-extraction. That is, the second height group corresponding to the most standard height position is set as the current height group.

<Process for face recognition>
Next, the process for face authentication executed in step S509 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) will be described.

  In the face authentication process, when the return button 28 of the ball lending operating device 26 is operated and the storage medium is returned from the ball lending device Y, the face of the player who performed the operation is imaged, and If the matching result between the image and the image of the player's face picked up in advance does not match, the abnormality notification is performed. As a result, when an act of illegally acquiring a storage medium is performed, it becomes possible to make the administrator of the game hall recognize it and to cope with it.

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing face authentication processing.

  First, in step S 1201, it is determined whether “1” is set in the post-return operation flag provided in the sound light side RAM 95. Here, when the return button 28 of the ball lending operating device 26 is operated in a situation where the information corresponding to the number of usable gaming balls is stored in the ball lending device Y or the storage medium, the payout control device 111 A return instruction signal indicating that the storage medium storing the information should be discharged is transmitted to the ball lending device Y. When the payout control device 111 transmits the return instruction signal to the ball lending device Y, the payout control device 111 transmits a return instruction generation command to the main MPU 83. When the main MPU 83 receives the return instruction generation command, the main MPU 83 transmits the corresponding return operation generation command to the sound light MPU 93. When receiving the return operation generation command, the sound side MPU 93 sets “1” in the flag after the return operation.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1201, that is, if a return operation is not performed, whether or not a priority event has occurred by confirming the states of various flags in the sound light side RAM 95 in step S1202 Determine if The contents of the priority event are the same as in the case of step S1001 in the cancellation monitoring process (FIG. 25).

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1202, the face authentication monitoring flag provided in the sound light side RAM 95 is cleared to “0” in step S1203, and the process for real face authentication is ended. The face authentication monitoring flag is used to capture an image of one frame on the imaging substrate 71 in order to obtain an image of the player's face when information for allowing game balls to be borrowed is newly added. Is a flag for specifying in the sound-light side MPU 93 that it is in a situation where Then, in the situation where the priority event occurs as described above, the face authentication monitoring flag is forcibly cleared to “0”, thereby obtaining the face image in advance regarding the use of the image for one frame. It becomes possible to give priority to the use on the priority event side rather than the priority event side.

  If a negative determination is made in step S 1202, it is determined in step S 1204 whether “1” is set in the face authentication monitoring flag of the sound light side RAM 95. If "1" is not set in the face authentication monitoring flag, it is determined in step S1205 whether "1" is set in the restriction flag of the sound light side RAM 95 or not.

  If “1” is set in the restriction flag, the present face authentication process is ended. As described above, the restriction flag is set to “1” when it is specified that the cancellation monitoring target is generated in the cancellation monitoring process (FIG. 25). Then, the situation where the restriction flag is set to “1” may be a situation where the imaging substrate 71 can not normally capture an image of one frame. In this case, by performing an affirmative determination in step S1205 and ending face authentication as it is, it is possible to prevent an image of the player's face from being acquired in a situation where imaging can not be normally performed. Become.

  If "1" is not set in the restriction flag, it is determined in step S1206 whether "1" is set in the other monitoring flag of the sound light side RAM 95 or not. The other monitoring flag is one of the cancellation monitoring process (step S507), the height position monitoring process (step S508), the first condition monitoring process (step S510), and the second condition monitoring process (step S511). This is a flag in which “1” is set when an imaging command of an image for one frame is issued to the imaging substrate 71. When an affirmative determination is made in step S1206, the main height position monitoring process is ended as it is, and when a negative determination is made in step S1206, the process proceeds to step S1207.

  In step S 1207, it is determined whether “1” is set in the face authentication request flag provided in the sound light side RAM 95. Here, as a result of the insertion of the bill into the ball lending device Y and the insertion of the storage medium, the payout control device 111 newly adds information corresponding to the number of gaming balls usable in the ball lending device Y or the storage medium. When set or increased, a lending information addition command is sent to the main MPU 83. When the main MPU 83 receives the lending information addition command, the main MPU 83 transmits the corresponding lending information addition command to the sound-side MPU 93. When the sound source MPU 93 receives the lending information addition command, it sets the face authentication request flag to “1”. If a negative determination is made in step S1207, the real face authentication process ends, and if a positive determination is made in step S1207, the process proceeds to step S1208.

  In step S1208, it is determined whether the waiting time for face authentication monitoring has elapsed. The standby time for face authentication monitoring is set as a standby time different from the standby time for cancellation monitoring and the standby time for height position monitoring, and is specifically set to 300 msec. When execution of the face authentication monitoring is completed on the image for one frame acquired in response to the imaging command being issued in the face authentication process, the measurement of the standby time is started. The measurement of the standby time is also started immediately after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on.

  If the waiting time for face authentication monitoring has not elapsed, the present face authentication processing ends, and if the waiting time for face authentication monitoring has elapsed, the process advances to step S1209. In step S1209, the imaging command flag corresponding to the face authentication monitoring in the sound light side RAM 95 is set to “1”, and the face authentication monitoring flag in the sound light side RAM 95 is set to “1”. Thereafter, the face authentication process ends. By setting “1” to the imaging command flag, as described above, the irradiation instruction signal is transmitted toward the imaging substrate 71 in the imaging control process (FIG. 21), and imaging is started in the imaging substrate 71. Ru.

  By setting “1” to the face authentication monitoring flag, an affirmative determination is made in step S 1204, and the process proceeds to step S 1210. In step S1210, it is determined whether "1" is set in the imaging completion flag of the sound light side RAM 95 or not. That is, it is determined whether or not imaging of an image for one frame for acquiring a face image in advance is completed. If a negative determination is made in step S1210, the real face authentication process ends, and if a positive determination is made in step S1210, the process proceeds to step S1211.

  In step S1211, the face authentication monitoring flag and the imaging completion flag in the sound light side RAM 95 are cleared to “0”. In the following step S1212, face data extraction processing is executed. In the face data extraction process, the image data of one frame is grasped based on the distance data stored in the distance image storage area 95a of the sound light side RAM 95, and the human face is included in the grasped image data. It is determined whether image data corresponding to a part exists. In the determination, a range corresponding to the outline of the face corresponding to an elliptical shape, a circular shape, an elliptical shape or the like is extracted, and a range corresponding to the eyes, nose, mouth or ear exists in the extracted range. In the case, the extracted range is recognized as a face.

  Thereafter, in step S1213, it is determined whether or not extraction of face data has been completed. If face data extraction has not been completed, the real face authentication process ends. If face data extraction has been completed, the extracted face data is stored in the prior data storage area 95 d provided in the sound light side RAM 95 in step S 1214. Thereafter, the face authentication request flag of the sound light side RAM 95 is cleared to “0” in step S1215, and the real face authentication process is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1201 that the return operation is being performed, the authentication process at the time of the return operation is performed in step S1216, and the process for real face authentication is ended. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing an authentication process at the time of the return operation.

  In step S1301, it is determined whether “1” is set in the return time authentication monitoring flag provided in the sound light side RAM 95. The return-time authentication monitoring flag sounds that one frame of image is being captured by the imaging substrate 71 in order to obtain an image of the player's face when the return operation is performed. It is a flag for specifying in the light side MPU 93. If a negative determination is made in step S1301, it is determined in step S1302 whether "1" is set in the restriction flag of the sound light side RAM 95 or not.

  If “1” is set in the restriction flag, the post-return operation flag is cleared to “0” in step S1303, and the present authentication process ends. As described above, the restriction flag is set to “1” when it is specified that the cancellation monitoring target is generated in the cancellation monitoring process (FIG. 25). Then, the situation where the restriction flag is set to “1” may be a situation where the imaging substrate 71 can not normally capture an image of one frame. In this case, it is possible to prevent the face authentication of the player from being performed in a situation where imaging can not normally be performed by clearing the flag after return operation to “0” without performing face authentication. .

  If "1" is not set in the restriction flag, then in step S1304, the imaging command flag corresponding to the return authentication in the sound light side RAM 95 is set to "1" and the sound light side RAM 95 is returned. After “1” is set in the authentication monitoring flag, the present authentication process is ended. By setting “1” to the imaging command flag, as described above, the irradiation instruction signal is transmitted toward the imaging substrate 71 in the imaging control process (FIG. 21), and imaging is started in the imaging substrate 71. Ru.

  Here, in the authentication process, other monitoring flags are “1” before setting “1” to the corresponding imaging command flag and the corresponding monitoring flag as in the face authentication process (FIG. 31) and the like. It is not determined whether or not it is set, and whether the waiting time has elapsed. As a result, when a return operation is performed, acquisition of an image for face authentication can be started early.

  When “1” is set in the return authentication verification flag, an affirmative determination is made in step S1301, and the process advances to step S1305. In step S1305, it is determined whether "1" is set in the imaging completion flag of the sound light side RAM 95 or not. That is, it is determined whether imaging of an image for one frame for performing face authentication has been completed. If a negative determination is made in step S1305, the present authentication processing is ended as it is, and if a positive determination is made in step S1305, the process proceeds to step S1306.

  In step S1306, the imaging completion flag of the sound light side RAM 95 is cleared to "0". In the following step S1307, face data extraction processing is executed. The contents of the extraction process are the same as the extraction process of step S1212 in the face authentication process (FIG. 31).

  Thereafter, in step S1308, it is determined whether extraction of face data is completed. If face data extraction has not been completed, the present authentication process ends. If face data extraction has been completed, the extracted face data is stored in the collation data storage area 95 e provided in the sound light side RAM 95 in step S 1309.

  In the following step S1310, all corresponding imaging command flags in the sound light side RAM 95, the flag after return operation, and the return time authentication monitoring flag are cleared to "0". Here, when “1” is set in the imaging command flag in the authentication process at the time of return operation, the imaging command flag is not cleared “0” only when the imaging on the imaging substrate 71 is completed. When face data is stored in the comparison data storage area 95 e, “0” is cleared. Thus, imaging is repeated on the imaging substrate 71 until face data for matching is obtained, and face data for matching can be reliably obtained. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when face data can not be extracted before the face authentication monitoring period has elapsed since the corresponding imaging command flag was set to “1” in step S1304. As in step S1310, various flags may be cleared to "0" and a process for alarming may be executed in step S1313 described later.

  Thereafter, in step S1311, the face data stored in the prior data storage area 95d of the sound side RAM 95 and the face data stored in the comparison data storage area 95e of the sound side RAM 95 are collated. In this case, the line of the jaw is extracted in each face data, and the relative position of the eye, nose, mouth or ear with respect to the line of the jaw, and the outer shape of the eye, nose, mouth or ear are 90% or more in both face data. If yes, it is determined that the face data match. In addition, as long as authentication of face data can be performed, the specific method of authentication of these face data is arbitrary.

  In the following step S1312, it is determined whether the result of the matching process in step S1311 is a match result. When face data is not stored in the preliminary data storage area 95d, it is treated that the face data do not match. When an affirmative determination is made in step S1312, the present authentication process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1312, the light emission data for alarm is read out from the sound side ROM 94 to the sound side RAM 95 in step S1313, and the present authentication process is ended.

  By reading out the alarm light emission data, the alarm light emission data is referred to in the light emission control process (step S503) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14), and it is indicated that face authentication can not be normally performed. Light emission of the display light emitting unit 23 is performed. This makes it possible to prompt the manager of the game hall to check whether the storage medium has been returned to the authorized player. For example, in a game hall where a surveillance camera is installed in units of island facilities in which a plurality of pachinko machines 10 are installed, whether or not an unauthorized acquisition act of a storage medium has been performed by referring to shooting results of the surveillance camera It becomes possible to identify.

  If the face data do not match, an alarm using the display light emitting unit 23 is issued, and the process for stopping the progress of the game is not executed. Further, the alarm is not performed in the speaker unit 24 and the symbol display device 61. As a result, even if face data is not correctly collated, it is possible to prevent a legitimate player from having a disadvantage or a sense of incongruity.

  Next, how face authentication is performed will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG.

  FIG. 33 (a) shows the addition timing of the lendable information, FIG. 33 (b) shows the execution period of the process of storing face data in the advance data storage area 95d, and FIG. 33 (c) shows the advance data storage area 95d. 33 (d) shows the execution timing of the return operation, and FIG. 33 (e) shows the completion of the return of the storage medium after the processing for returning the storage medium is started. FIG. 33 (f) shows the execution period of the storing process of face data in the collation data storage area 95e and the authentication process using the face data, and FIG. 33 (g) shows the execution of an alarm. Indicates the period that is being

  As a bill or storage medium is inserted into the ball lending device Y at the timing of t1, information corresponding to the number of usable gaming balls is newly added as shown in FIG. 33 (a). Then, in order to obtain face data in advance, the process for pre-storing face data is executed as shown in FIG. 33 (b), and at the timing of t2, as shown in FIG. 33 (c), the prior data storage area The face data is stored in 95d. Note that, whenever information corresponding to the number of usable gaming balls is newly added, storage of face data in the advance data storage area 95d is newly performed.

  Thereafter, at time t3, a return operation is performed as shown in FIG. Then, the return of the storage medium is started as shown in FIG. 33 (e), and the face authentication process is started as shown in FIG. 33 (f). Thereafter, the face data is completely stored in the comparison data storage area 95e at time t4, which is a timing before time t5 at which the return operation is completed, and is stored in the prior data storage area 95d. The collation between the face data and the face data stored in the collation data storage area 95e is completed. In this case, since the face data match, no alarm is generated as shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, in the face authentication process for the return operation performed at the timing of t6, both face data do not match. In this case, an alarm is generated as shown in FIG. 33 (g) at timing t7, which is a timing before timing t8 when the return of the storage medium is completed, to alert the game hall manager It becomes possible.

<First status monitoring process>
Next, the first condition monitoring process executed in step S510 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) will be described.

  In the first situation monitoring process, when it is grasped based on the imaging result of the imaging substrate 71 that a person may be seated in a chair provided in front of the pachinko machine 10 without playing a game The first confirmation notification is performed. As a result, it becomes possible to make the administrator of the game hall recognize that the event has occurred, and it is possible to cope with it.

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the first situation monitoring process.

  First, in step S1401, it is determined whether or not a priority event has occurred by confirming the states of various flags of the sound light side RAM 95. The priority event is a situation in which an imaging command is generated on the imaging substrate 71 in order to use an image for one frame in return authentication.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1401, the first situation monitoring flag and the seating presence counter provided in the sound light side RAM 95 are cleared to “0” in step S1403, and then the first situation monitoring process is performed. finish. The first status monitoring flag is a flag for identifying the sound-light side MPU 93 that the image capturing substrate 71 is capturing an image for one frame in order to perform the first status monitoring. . Then, during the occurrence of the priority event as described above, the first status monitoring flag is forcibly cleared to “0”, whereby the use of the image for one frame is prioritized over the first status monitoring. It is possible to prioritize the use on the event side. In addition, the seating presence counter sounds the number of times that a person is seated on a chair provided in front of the pachinko machine 10 in a state where a game is not being executed and the number of times specified based on the imaging result of the imaging substrate 71 It is a counter for the side MPU 93 to grasp.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1401, it is determined in step S1402 whether or not a game is being executed. Specifically, as in the case of step S1102 in the height position monitoring process (FIG. 30), it is determined whether or not the firing operation is performed. If the shooting operation is being performed, it is determined that the game is being executed, and a positive determination is made in step S1402.

  In addition, when the firing operation is not performed, it is determined whether or not the effect for the game cycle is being executed and the opening / closing execution mode is being performed. This determination is performed by referring to the contents of the effect data table read out to the sound light side RAM 95. That is, it is determined whether the data table corresponding to the effect for the game use or the data table corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode is read out to the sound light side RAM 95 or not. When it is either during execution of the effect for game circulation or during the open / close execution mode, it is determined that the game is under execution, and an affirmative determination is made in step S1402.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1402, the first situation monitoring process is ended after clearing the first situation monitoring flag in the sound light side RAM 95 to "0" in step S1403. This makes it possible to prevent the first situation monitoring from being performed during the execution of a game.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1402, it is determined in step S1404 whether or not "1" is set in the first status monitoring flag of the sound light side RAM 95. If “1” is not set in the first status monitoring flag, it is determined in step S1405 whether “1” is set in the restriction flag of the sound light side RAM 95 or not.

  If the restriction flag is set to “1”, the first situation monitoring process is ended. As described above, the restriction flag is set to “1” when it is specified that the cancellation monitoring target is generated in the cancellation monitoring process (FIG. 25). Then, the situation where the restriction flag is set to “1” may be a situation where the imaging substrate 71 can not normally capture an image of one frame. In this case, by making an affirmative determination in step S1405 and terminating the first situation monitoring process as it is, it is possible to prevent the first situation monitoring from being executed in a situation where imaging can not be normally performed. It becomes.

  If "1" is not set in the restriction flag, it is determined in step S1406 whether "1" is set in the other monitoring flag of the sound light side RAM 95 or not. The other monitoring flag is captured by any of the cancellation monitoring process (step S507), the height position monitoring process (step S508), the face authentication process (step S509), and the second situation monitoring process (step S511). This is a flag in which “1” is set when an imaging command of an image for one frame is issued to the substrate 71. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1406, the present first situation monitoring process is ended as it is, and if a negative determination is made in step S1406, the process proceeds to step S1407.

  In step S1407, the waiting time for the first situation monitoring elapses in a state where the game is not being executed, that is, the game ball firing operation is not performed and the game cycle presentation and opening / closing execution mode are not executed. It is determined whether it has been done. The standby time for the first situation monitoring is set as a standby time different from the standby time for cancellation monitoring, the standby time for height position monitoring, and the standby time for face authentication monitoring, and is specifically set to 5 sec. ing. When the execution of the first situation monitoring is completed for the image for one frame acquired based on the imaging command issued in the first situation monitoring process, or when the game is not executed Measurement of time is started. The measurement of the standby time is also started immediately after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on.

  If the waiting time for the first situation monitoring has not elapsed, the present first situation monitoring process is ended as it is, and if the waiting time for the first situation monitoring has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S1408. In step S1408, the imaging command flag corresponding to the first condition monitoring in the sound light side RAM 95 is set to "1", and the first condition monitoring flag in the sound light side RAM 95 is set to "1". Thereafter, the present first situation monitoring process is ended. By setting “1” to the imaging command flag, as described above, the irradiation instruction signal is transmitted toward the imaging substrate 71 in the imaging control process (FIG. 21), and imaging is started in the imaging substrate 71. Ru.

  By setting “1” to the first status monitoring flag, an affirmative determination is made in step S1404 and the process proceeds to step S1409. In step S1409, it is determined whether "1" is set in the imaging completion flag of the sound light side RAM 95 or not. That is, it is determined whether imaging of an image for one frame for performing the first situation monitoring has been completed. If a negative determination is made in step S1409, the present first status monitoring process is ended as it is, and if a positive determination is made in step S1409, the process proceeds to step S1410.

  In step S1410, the first situation monitoring flag and the imaging completion flag in the sound light side RAM 95 are cleared to "0". In the following step S1411, it is determined whether or not seating on a chair provided in front of the pachinko machine 10 has occurred in a state where a game is not being executed. Specifically, based on the distance data stored in the distance image storage area 95a of the sound side RAM 95, the image data of one frame is grasped, and the data of the grasped image is seated in the front chair It is determined whether data of an image corresponding to the person who is In the determination, the same processing as the face data extraction process (step S1212) in the face authentication process (FIG. 31) is executed to determine whether or not there is a seat based on whether or not face data can be extracted. Alternatively, whether or not there is a seat may be determined based on whether or not shoulder data can be extracted. If a negative determination is made in step S1411, the present first situation monitoring process is ended as it is, and if a positive determination is made in step S1411, the process proceeds to step S1412.

  In step S1412, the value of the seating presence counter of the sound light side RAM 95 is incremented by one. In the following step S1413, it is determined whether the value of the seating presence counter is equal to or greater than the notification reference value. Although the specific value of the notification reference value is arbitrary, the pachinko machine 10 is set to "10". Then, as described above, since the standby time of the first situation monitoring is set to 5 seconds, it is determined in step S1413 whether the period of sitting without playing a game continued for 50 seconds or more. It will be.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1413, the present first situation monitoring process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1413, the first confirmation notification light emission data is read out from the sound light side ROM 94 to the sound light side RAM 95 in step S1414, and then the first condition monitoring process is ended. . When an affirmative determination is made in step S 1413, the seating presence counter is cleared to “0”.

  By reading out the first confirmation notification light emission data, the first confirmation notification light emission data is referred to in the light emission control processing (step S503) in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14), and the display light emission unit 23 plays a game Light emission is performed in a manner that indicates that there may be a person who is seated despite being absent.

  Next, how the first situation monitoring is performed will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 35 (a) shows a period in which a person is seated in a chair provided in front of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 35 (b) shows a period in which a game is played on the pachinko machine 10, FIG. (C) shows the start timing of 1st confirmation alerting | reporting, FIG.35 (d) shows the execution period of 1st confirmation alerting | reporting.

  As shown in FIG. 35B at time t1, the game is ended, and at time t2, the player leaves the seat as shown in FIG. 35A. Thereafter, a new person is seated in front of the pachinko machine 10 as shown in FIG. However, the person remains seated without playing a game on the pachinko machine 10. Then, the first confirmation notification starts as shown in FIG. 35 (d) as the execution start period of the first confirmation notification elapses while the game is not performed as shown in FIG. 35 (c) at the timing of t4. Be done. The first confirmation notification is released by turning off the power of the pachinko machine 10, and the first confirmation notification is released simply by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 without the need to clear the main RAM 85. It is possible to resume the game in a quiet state.

  As described above, in the case where the state of being seated in front of the pachinko machine 10 is continued without playing a game, the first confirmation notification is performed. This makes it possible to urge the game hall manager to confirm whether the person should be left. If there is a person sitting without playing a game, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 decreases accordingly, which is an undesirable event for the game hall, and such an event has occurred In some cases, it is preferable to prompt leaving.

  When the determination in step S1413 is affirmative, notification is performed using the display light emitting unit 23, and the notification is not performed by the speaker unit 24 and the symbol display device 61. This makes it possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the authorized player is merely resting between games.

<Second status monitoring process>
Next, the second condition monitoring process executed in step S511 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) will be described.

  In the second situation monitoring process, the second confirmation and notification is performed when an operation that may be fraudulent to the pachinko machine 10 is grasped based on the imaging result of the imaging substrate 71. As a result, it becomes possible to make the administrator of the game hall recognize that the event has occurred, and it is possible to cope with it.

  FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the second situation monitoring process.

  First, in step S1501, it is determined whether or not a priority event has occurred by confirming the states of various flags of the sound light side RAM 95. The contents of the priority event are the same as in the case of step S1001 in the cancellation monitoring process (FIG. 25).

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1501, the second situation monitoring processing is performed after clearing the second situation monitoring flag and the operation abnormality counter provided in the sound light side RAM 95 in step S1502. finish. The second status monitoring flag is a flag for identifying the sound-light side MPU 93 that the image capturing substrate 71 is capturing an image for one frame in order to perform the second status monitoring. . Then, during the occurrence of the priority event as described above, the second status monitoring flag is forcibly cleared to “0”, whereby the use of the image for one frame is prioritized over the second status monitoring. It is possible to prioritize the use on the event side. In addition, the operation abnormality counter is a counter for grasping the number of times that the operation having the possibility of fraudulent action on the pachinko machine 10 is specified based on the imaging result of the imaging substrate 71 by the sound side MPU 93 is there.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1501, it is determined in step S1503 whether "1" is set in the second situation monitoring flag of the sound light side RAM 95 or not. If "1" is not set in the second status monitoring flag, it is determined in step S1504 whether "1" is set in the restriction flag of the sound light side RAM 95 or not.

  If “1” is set in the restriction flag, the second situation monitoring process is ended. As described above, the restriction flag is set to “1” when it is specified that the cancellation monitoring target is generated in the cancellation monitoring process (FIG. 25). Then, the situation where the restriction flag is set to “1” may be a situation where the imaging substrate 71 can not normally capture an image of one frame. In this case, the second situation monitoring can be prevented from being performed in a situation where imaging can not be normally performed by making an affirmative determination in step S1504 and ending the second situation monitoring process as it is. It becomes.

  If "1" is not set in the restriction flag, it is determined in step S1505 whether "1" is set in the other monitoring flag of the sound light side RAM 95 or not. The other monitoring flag is captured in any of the cancellation monitoring process (step S507), the height position monitoring process (step S508), the face authentication process (step S509), and the first situation monitoring process (step S510). This is a flag in which “1” is set when an imaging command of an image for one frame is issued to the substrate 71. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1505, the present second situation monitoring process is ended as it is, and if a negative determination is made in step S1505, the process proceeds to step S1506.

  In step S1506, it is determined whether the waiting time for second status monitoring has elapsed. The waiting time for the second situation monitoring is set as a waiting time different from the waiting time for canceling monitoring, the waiting time for height position monitoring, the waiting time for face authentication monitoring, and the waiting time for the first situation monitoring. Specifically, it is set to 3 seconds. The measurement of the standby time is started when the execution of the second situation monitoring is completed with respect to the image for one frame acquired in response to the imaging command being issued in the second situation monitoring process. The measurement of the standby time is also started immediately after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on.

  If the waiting time for the second situation monitoring has not elapsed, the second situation monitoring processing is ended as it is, and if the waiting time for the second situation monitoring has elapsed, the process advances to step S1507. In step S1507, the imaging command flag corresponding to the second situation monitoring in the sound side RAM 95 is set to "1", and the second state monitoring flag in the sound side RAM 95 is set to "1". Thereafter, the second situation monitoring process is ended. By setting “1” to the imaging command flag, as described above, the irradiation instruction signal is transmitted toward the imaging substrate 71 in the imaging control process (FIG. 21), and imaging is started in the imaging substrate 71. Ru.

  By setting “1” to the second status monitoring flag, an affirmative determination is made in step S1503, and the process proceeds to step S1508. In step S 1508, it is determined whether “1” is set in the imaging completion flag of the sound light side RAM 95. That is, it is determined whether imaging of an image for one frame for performing the second situation monitoring has been completed. If a negative determination is made in step S1508, the present second situation monitoring process is ended as it is, and if a positive determination is made in step S1508, the process proceeds to step S1509. In step S1509, the second situation monitoring flag and the imaging completion flag in the sound light side RAM 95 are cleared to "0".

  In the following step S1510, operation data extraction processing is executed. In the operation data extraction processing, the image data of one frame is grasped based on the distance data stored in the distance image storage area 95a of the sound light side RAM 95, and the data of the grasped image is displayed in front of the pachinko machine 10. Extract the data of the arm of the person seated in the provided chair. In the extraction, the position of the shoulder is grasped based on the recognition of the outer shape of the neck and shoulder in relation to the distance data, and the portion of the arm extending to both sides from the shoulder is grasped from the distance data and the outer shape . Then, the position of the grasped arm portion is grasped in relation to the window panel 22.

  Then, in step S1511, it is determined whether the operation data grasped in step S1510 corresponds to the abnormality correspondence data of the sound light side ROM 94 or not. Specifically, the hand of a person seated in front of the pachinko machine 10 is located on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 rather than the shoulder portion and outside the left edge, the right edge and the upper edge of the window panel 22 The operation that has been performed is stored in advance in the sound light side ROM 94 as abnormality correspondence data. When a legitimate player plays a game, the above operation is difficult to be continued. If a negative determination is made in step S1511, the present second situation monitoring process is ended as it is, and if a positive determination is made in step S1511, the process proceeds to step S1512.

  In step S1512, the value of the operation abnormality counter of the sound light side RAM 95 is incremented by one. In the following step S1513, it is determined whether the value of the operation abnormality counter is equal to or more than the operation abnormality reference value. Although the specific value of the operation abnormality reference value is arbitrary, the pachinko machine 10 is set to “40”. Then, as described above, since the second state monitoring standby time is set to 3 seconds, it is determined in step S1513 whether the operation corresponding to the operation abnormality handling data has continued for 120 seconds or more. It will be.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1513, the second situation monitoring process is immediately ended. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1513, the light emission data for second confirmation notification is read out from the sound side ROM 94 to the sound side RAM 95 in step S1514, and then the second condition monitoring process is ended. . When the determination in step S1513 is affirmative, the operation abnormality counter is cleared to “0”.

  By reading out the second confirmation notification light emission data, the light emission control process (step S503) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) refers to the second confirmation notification light emission data in the display light emitting unit 23. Light emission is performed in a mode that indicates that the operation corresponding to the abnormality correspondence data is continuously performed. This makes it possible to prompt the manager of the game hall to check whether or not the cheating machine 10 has been tampered with.

  When the determination in step S1513 is affirmative, notification is performed using the display light emitting unit 23, and the notification is not performed by the speaker unit 24 and the symbol display device 61. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the authorized player is merely performing the operation corresponding to the abnormal response data for a reason different from the cheating. Become.

<Operation presentation control processing>
Next, the operation effect control process executed in step S512 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) will be described.

  In the operation effect control process, whether or not the player has performed the effect operation is specified using the imaging result of the imaging substrate 71, and the effect corresponding to that is performed when it is specified that the effect operation is performed. Control to make it As the operation effects, in the present pachinko machine 10, notification effects, division effects, stop operation effects, continuous effects, and confrontation effects are present. Hereinafter, the content of these effects and the control content for enabling the execution of these effects will be described.

<Notice production>
First, the contents of the notice effect and the control contents for enabling the execution of the notice effect will be described. FIGS. 37 (a) to 37 (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the operation of the movable object unit 38 operating at the time of the notification effect.

  The movable object unit 38 is provided on the upper portion of the center frame 65 installed in the game area PA as described above (see FIG. 4). As shown in FIG. 37A, the movable object unit 38 includes a pair of upper and lower effect movable objects 38a and 38b, and an effect drive unit 38c such as a rotary motor for operating the effect movable objects 38a and 38b. Is equipped.

  In a situation where the effect drive 38c is not in the drive state, the effect movable members 38a and 38b are arranged in the vertical direction by the urging force of the urging means (not shown) such as a spring, and these effect movable objects 38a and 38b The movable objects 38a and 38b for effect are arranged at initial positions where the enclosed space is not visible or difficult to see from the front of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, when the effect driving portion 38c is in the driving state, as shown in FIGS. 37 (b) and 37 (c), the movable members 38a, 38b for both effects are resisted against the urging force of the urging means. Each of the effect movable objects 38a and 38b moves to an open position where one of the upper and the other is displaced downward and the enclosed space is opened forward.

  A decoration member 38d is disposed in a space surrounded by the effect movable objects 38a and 38b. When each of the effect movable objects 38a and 38b is disposed at the initial position, as shown in FIG. 37A, the decorative member 38d is invisible or hard to see from the front of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, when each of the effect movable objects 38a and 38b moves toward the open position, as shown in FIGS. 37 (b) and 37 (c), the decorative member 38d can be easily viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10 It is possible to

  At the open position of each effect movable object 38a, 38b, as shown in FIG. 37 (c), and as shown in FIG. 37 (b), the separation of each effect movable object 38a, 38b from the limit open position There is a halfway open position where the distance is short. Each of the effect movable objects 38a and 38b is disposed at the midway open position by the effect drive unit 38c being in the first drive state, and each effect movable object 38a is due to the effect drive unit 38c being in the second drive state. , 38b are placed in the limit open position.

  There are two types of notification effects performed using the movable object unit 38 as described above, a first notification effect and a second notification effect. The first notification effect is generated with a predetermined probability in the game round that results in the jackpot. That is, the first notification effect occurs only in the game round where the jackpot result is obtained. When the first notification effect is generated, each effect movable object 38a, 38b of the movable object unit 38 is provided on the condition that the generation of the first notification effect operation of the player is specified based on the imaging result of the imaging substrate 71. Are placed in the limit open position.

  On the other hand, the second notification effect is generated with a predetermined probability in a game round in which a jackpot result is obtained or a game round in which an off reach display occurs. That is, the second notification effect is generated not only at the game times for the big hit result but also at the game times for the off reach display. Then, when the second notification effect is generated in the game turn to be a big hit result, the movable object is movable on condition that the generation of the second notification effect operation of the player is specified based on the imaging result of the imaging substrate 71. Each effect movable object 38a, 38b of the unit 38 is disposed at the limit open position. On the other hand, when the second notification effect is generated in the game turn where the outreach display is performed, the movable objects 38a and 38b for effect are in the limit open position even if the second notification effect operation is performed. Not placed.

  The first notification effect and the second notification effect may occur at any timing as long as the effects for the game are being performed. Specifically, the variation display of symbols is stopped in upper symbol row Z1 during the period from when the variation display of symbols in all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is started until the variation display of symbols in upper symbol row Z1 is stopped. Then, until the variation display of the symbols is stopped in the lower row design row Z3, the variation display of the symbols is stopped in the upper row Z1 and the lower row design row Z3 and then the variation display of the symbols is performed in the middle row Z2 The reach effect is being performed while the reach effect using a predetermined character different from the variable display of the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is occurring, and until the reach effect is generated. Notification effect occurs even in any period of period and period from the time when the fluctuation display of the symbols in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is stopped and the finalized display of the symbols is performed. Is obtained structure, the generation period is determined in determining performance pattern in sound light side MPU93.

  In addition, it is not limited to this, the timing when the notification effect is generated may be configured as a specific period of the above period, and is generated in the effect for the opening / closing execution mode, not the effect for the game time It may be configured to When it occurs in the effect for opening and closing execution mode, when the effect for the game turn to be a big hit is finished, it is unclear which of the high probability mode and the low probability mode will be the lottery mode after the opening and closing execution mode In such a state, the notification effect is generated during the open / close execution mode, so that the effect movable objects 38a and 38b are finally arranged at the limit open position whenever or when the high probability mode is reached, or with a predetermined probability. The configuration to be

  Next, a notification effect setting process for causing notification effect to be started will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The notification effect setting process is performed each time the operation effect control process (step S512) is executed once in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14).

  First, in step S 1601, it is determined whether “1” is set in the restriction flag of the sound light side RAM 95. When the restriction flag is set to “1”, the present notification effect setting process is ended as it is. As described above, the restriction flag is set to “1” when it is specified that the cancellation monitoring target is generated in the cancellation monitoring process (FIG. 25). Then, the situation where the restriction flag is set to “1” may be a situation where the imaging substrate 71 can not normally capture an image of one frame. In this case, by making an affirmative determination in step S1601 and terminating the notification effect setting process as it is, it is possible to prevent the notification effect from being executed in a situation where imaging can not be normally performed. In addition, even if the notification effect is not executed, the display continuation time of the game routine determined by the main MPU 83 is not changed.

  If “1” is not set in the restriction flag, it is determined in step S1602 whether the start condition of the notification effect is satisfied. The start condition of the notification effect is the case where the sound data side RAM 95 reads out the data table of the effect for game circulation, and the pointer data indicating the content of the control object in the data table is the first notification effect or the first (2) It is established when it corresponds to the data indicating the start of the notice effect. If a negative determination is made in step S1602, the main processing for setting an announcement effect is ended. If a positive determination is made in step S1602, the process proceeds to step S1603.

  In step S1603, it is determined whether the present notification effect is the first notification effect. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1603, the first notification effect flag provided in the sound light side RAM 95 is set to "1" in step S1604. The first notification effect flag is a flag for specifying in the sound light side MPU 93 that the situation is after the imaging command for performing the first notification effect is issued. If a negative determination is made in step S1603, a "1" is set in the second notification effect flag provided in the sound light side RAM 95 in step S1605. The second notification effect flag is a flag for specifying in the sound light side MPU 93 that the situation is after the imaging command for performing the second notification effect is issued.

  When the process of step S1604 is performed or when the process of step S1605 is performed, after setting “1” to the imaging command flag corresponding to the notification effect in the sound light side RAM 95 in step S1606, the main notification effect End the setting process. By setting “1” to the imaging command flag, as described above, the irradiation instruction signal is transmitted toward the imaging substrate 71 in the imaging control process (FIG. 21), and imaging is started in the imaging substrate 71. Ru.

<First notice effect>
Next, the first notification effect control process for performing the execution control of the first notification effect will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The first notification effect control process is executed each time the operation effect control process (step S512) is executed once in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14).

  When “1” is set in both the first notification effect flag and the imaging completion flag of the sound light side RAM 95 (step S1701 and step S1702: YES), an image of one frame for use in the first notification effect It means that the imaging of has been completed. In this case, the process proceeds to the image use processing for the first notification effect after step S1703.

  In the image use processing for the first notification effect, first, at step S1703, the imaging completion flag of the sound light side RAM 95 is cleared to "0". In the following step S1704, a hand data extraction process is executed. In the hand data extraction process, the image data of one frame is grasped based on the distance data stored in the distance image storage area 95a of the sound light side RAM 95, and the hand portion of the grasped image data It is determined whether there is data of an image corresponding to. At the time of the determination, it is determined whether or not there is a range in which a plurality of finger portions are continuous in the shape portion of the palm or the back of the hand, and if the portion is present, the extracted range is Recognize it as a hand.

  Thereafter, in step S1705, it is determined whether extraction of hand data is completed. If extraction of hand data is completed, it is determined in step S1706 whether the distance of the hand data corresponds to the reference target distance or more. Specifically, it is determined whether distance data corresponding to the closest distance among distance data groups recognized as hand data corresponds to the reference target distance or more.

  Here, in the first notification effect, the movable object unit 38 is specified when it is specified based on the imaging result of the imaging substrate 71 that the player performed the first notification effect operation in the game turn to be the big hit result. An effect is produced in which the movable objects 38a and 38b for effect of are arranged at the limit open position. Then, in the first notification effect operation, an operation of holding the hand so as to cover the movable object unit 38 from the front of the pachinko machine 10 is performed.

  Incidentally, when the first notification effect occurs, the symbol display device 61 performs the first notification effect operation and when the effect movable objects 38a and 38b are arranged at the limit opening position, the jackpot result occurs in the game round It is configured to be described.

  As described above, when the first notification effect operation is performed, it is necessary for the player to recognize that the effect movable objects 38a and 38b are disposed at the limit open position by performing the first notification effect operation. It is necessary to limit the range of the position of the hand recognized as effective for the first notification effect operation in the sound light side MPU 93 to the range corresponding to the front of the movable object unit 38. In this case, as shown in the explanatory view of FIG. 40 (a), even if the height positions of the hands H1 and H2 of the player are the same, according to the distance of the hands H1 and H2 to the surface 22a of the window panel 22. 40 (b-1) and 40 (b-2), the hand H1 in the image G for one frame based on the distance data stored in the distance image storage area 95a of the sound light side RAM 95. , H2, the height positions of the image portions HG1, HG2 are different. Then, when trying to recognize the presence of a hand existing at a predetermined height position as the first notification rendering operation regardless of the distance from the surface 22 a of the window panel 22, an image of the hand is displayed on the image G of one frame When a portion exists, it is difficult to identify whether it is the first notification effect operation.

  Therefore, if the distance of the hand data extracted in step S1704 is greater than the reference target distance from the imaging device 73, an affirmative determination is made in step S1706 and the processing of steps S1707 to S1711 is not performed. . As a result, it becomes possible to exclude a hand away to some extent from the window panel 22 from the determination targets of whether or not it is the operation for the first notification effect, and it is discriminated whether or not it is the operation for the first notification effect. It is easy. In particular, when the first notification effect operation is performed, an operation for extending the hand toward the movable object unit 38 is performed. Therefore, when the first notification effect operation is performed, the hand is present at a position away from the reference target distance It is hard to think of what you are doing. On the other hand, the player performs the operation for the first notification effect by excluding the hand away from the window panel 22 to some extent as described above from the determination target of whether or not it is the operation for the first notification effect. The possibility of determining that the first notification effect operation has been performed despite the absence is reduced. Note that the processing corresponding to step S1706 is similarly executed when determining the execution of the second notification effect operation, the split effect operation, and the stop operation described later, so the operation and effect of the execution of the processing Can be generated similarly.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1706, in step S1707, processing for setting an operation effective range corresponding to the height position group is executed. Here, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 41 (a), when the player reaches for the movable object unit 38, in the case of the player F1, it extends for the point P1 of the window panel 22. On the other hand, in the case of the player F2 whose face height position is lower than that of the player F1, the player reaches out to a point P2 of the window panel 22. Then, the height positions at which the imaging device 73 recognizes the hands are different.

  On the other hand, in the height position monitoring process (FIG. 30), as described above, by specifying the height position of the player's face, any one of a plurality of height position groups exists. The height positions of the player's face are sorted into height position groups. Therefore, in step S1707, the height position group of the current player is grasped by reading out the value of the height position group counter 95c of the sound side RAM 95, and the operation for the first notification effect is performed according to the grasp result. Adjust the range of hand positions that are recognized as valid.

  For example, when it is grasped from the value of the height position group counter 95c that the height position is the first height group which is the upper group, as shown in the explanatory view of FIG. 41 (b-1) The operation effective range EA is set at a position near the upper edge of the image G for one frame which is a virtual two-dimensional plane based on the distance data stored in the distance image storage area 95a of the sound light side RAM 95. On the other hand, when it is understood from the value of the height position group counter 95c that the height position is the second height group lower than the first height group, as shown in FIG. As shown in the illustration of 2), the image G for one frame based on the distance data stored in the distance image storage area 95a of the sound side RAM 95 is lower than the case of FIG. 41 (b-1). Set the operation effective range EA at the position on the side. When the sound light side MPU 93 specifies that a hand is present in the set operation effective range EA, it specifies that the first notification effect operation has been performed.

  Returning to the description of the first notification effect control process (FIG. 39), after the process of step S1707 is performed, in step S1708, the position correction process according to the distance data is performed. As already described, as shown in the explanatory view of FIG. 40A, even if the height positions of the hands H1 and H2 of the player are the same, the distance between the hands H1 and H2 with respect to the surface 22a of the window panel 22 is Accordingly, as shown in FIGS. 40 (b-1) and 40 (b-2), an image G for one frame based on the distance data stored in the distance image storage area 95a of the sound light side RAM 95 (ie, The height positions of the image portions HG1 and HG2 of the hands H1 and H2 in the virtual two-dimensional plane are different. Similarly, as shown in the explanatory view of FIG. 42A, even if the horizontal positions of the hands H1 and H2 of the player are the same, the distances of the hands H1 and H2 to the surface 22a of the window panel 22 Accordingly, as shown in FIGS. 42 (b-1) and 42 (b-2), in the image G for one frame based on the distance data stored in the distance image storage area 95a of the sound light side RAM 95. The lateral positions of the image portions HG1 and HG2 of the hands H1 and H2 are different.

  That is, the imaging device 73 of the imaging substrate 71 is lower than the area set as the operation effective range (specifically, the front area of the movable object unit 38 and the front area of the display surface of the symbol display device 61) (See FIG. 4), even if the height position of the player's hand is the same, it is represented by a virtual two-dimensional plane as it is further from the surface 22a of the window panel 22 to the front of the pachinko machine 10 The image G for one frame is expressed as an image present on the side close to the imaging device 73, that is, the lower side. The imaging device 73 is disposed at the center of the display surface of the symbol display device 61 in the lateral direction, and the lateral dimension is shorter than the lateral dimension of the display surface of the symbol display device 61. Then, part or all of the area set as the operation effective range may exist on the right side and the left side of the imaging device 73. Therefore, when the player's hand exists at the horizontal position The image G for one frame represented by a two-dimensional plane is farther from the surface 22a of the window panel 22 toward the front of the pachinko machine 10 and is closer to the imaging device 73, that is, on the center side in the lateral direction of the display surface. Is represented as an image.

  Therefore, in step S1708, correction processing according to the distance data with respect to the height position and the position in the lateral direction is performed on all distance data of the hand image portions HG1 and HG2 included in the image for one frame. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 40 (a) and 42 (a) for the correction process, the image portion to be corrected is temporarily set at the position of the surface 22a of the window panel 22 based on the distance data. Correction for height position and lateral position assuming that it will be present in the image G of one frame which is a virtual two-dimensional plane if it is assumed to be present in I do. At the time of correction in the height direction, the angle of the correction object with respect to the reference viewpoint corresponding to the position of the imaging device 73 is calculated based on the distance data of the correction object and the position data of the height direction. The position in the height direction in the two-dimensional plane is corrected. Further, at the time of correction in the lateral direction, the angle of the correction object with respect to the reference viewpoint corresponding to the position of the imaging device 73 is calculated based on the distance data of the correction object and the position data of the horizontal direction. The lateral position in the two-dimensional plane is corrected. At the time of actual calculation, a mathematical expression acquired by experiment at the design stage of the pachinko machine 10 is used.

  For example, when the hand is present at the position of H1 in FIG. 40 (a), the height position is corrected on the assumption that it is present at the position of H2, and the hand of FIG. When a hand is present at the position, the horizontal position correction is performed on the assumption that the hand is present at the position H2. More specifically, in the case of FIG. 40A, when the hand H1 is imaged in FIG. 40A, the image portion HG1 of the hand corresponding to the hand H1 is corrected based on the distance data of the imaging result. If it is before, as shown in FIG. 40 (b-1), it exists below the operation effective range EA, but if it is the image part HG2 after correction, it is shown in FIG. 40 (b-2) As such, it exists in the operation effective range EA. More specifically, in the case of FIG. 42A, when the hand H1 is imaged in FIG. 42A, an image portion HG1 of the hand corresponding to the hand H1 is obtained based on the distance data of the imaging result. Before the correction, as shown in FIG. 42 (b-1), to the right of the operation effective range EA, whereas when the image portion HG2 after the correction, as shown in FIG. As shown in 2), it exists in the operation effective range EA.

  Here, distance data corresponding to existing at the position of the surface 22 a of the window panel 22 is excluded from correction in both the height direction and the lateral direction. Further, even if the distance data does not exist on the surface 22 a of the window panel 22, since the imaging device 73 is included in the lateral range in the operation effective range, the distance data whose lateral direction matches the imaging device 73. Are excluded from horizontal correction. On the other hand, since the imaging device 73 is disposed below the operation effective range set in the pachinko machine 10 and the imaging surface faces obliquely upward, the imaging device 73 exists at the position of the surface 22 a of the window panel 22. Other than the distance data corresponding to that, it is the target of correction in the height direction.

  Returning to the description of the first notification effect control process (FIG. 39), after executing the process of step S1708, it is determined in step S1709 whether or not the first notification effect operation has occurred. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 40 (b-2), the operation effective range EA set to the image G for one frame based on the distance data stored in the distance image storage area 95 a of the sound light side RAM 95 It is determined whether or not the image portion HG2 of the hand is included. In this case, it is determined that the first notification effect operation has been performed by including a part of the hand image portion HG2 in the operation effective range EA. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be determined that the first notification effect operation is performed by including a predetermined ratio or more such as 50% of the hand image portion HG2. It may be determined that the first notification effect operation has been performed by including the entire image portion HG2.

  If it is determined that the first notification effect operation is occurring, then in step S1710, both the corresponding imaging command flag of the sound light side RAM 95 and the first notification effect flag are cleared to “0”. Thereafter, in step S1711, various data at the time of notification occurrence are read out, and then the first notification effect control processing ends.

  Various data at the time of notification occurrence includes movable object data at the time of notification occurrence. The movable object data is read out from the sound light side ROM 94 to the sound light side RAM 95, whereby the movable object data is referred to in the movable object control process (step S505) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14). The movable objects 38a, 38b for rendering move to the limit open position. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that a jackpot result will occur in the gaming round before the stop result corresponding to the gaming round is displayed on the symbol display device 61 and the special drawing unit 62. In addition, various data at the time of notice occurrence includes light emission data and sound output data at the time of notice occurrence, and the light emission control process and the light output data of the light emission control process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) (step S503) By referring to the sound output control process (step S504), the light emitting unit 23 emits light when the notification is generated, and the speaker unit 24 outputs the sound when the notification is generated. Furthermore, in step S1711, a display command at the time of notification occurrence is transmitted to the display control device 96. By receiving the display command, the display control device 96 causes the symbol display device 61 to perform display effects at the time of notification occurrence.

  On the other hand, if the negative determination is made in step S1702, the negative determination is made in step S1705, the positive determination is made in step S1706, or the negative determination is made in step S1709, the process proceeds to step S1712. It is determined whether the operation effective period of the first notification effect operation has passed. In the operation effective period, measurement is started when “1” is set in the first notification effect flag of the sound light side RAM 95 in step S1604 in the notification effect setting process (FIG. 38). The operation valid period is optional, but is set to, for example, 60 seconds.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1712, the first notification effect control processing is ended as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1712, both the imaging command flag and the first notification effect flag corresponding to the sound and light side RAM 95 are cleared to “0” in step S1713, and then the first notification effect control process is performed. finish.

  As described above, when the first notification effect control process is executed, when the hand is extended toward the movable object unit 38, the effect movable objects 38a and 38b of the movable object unit 38 are directed to the limit open position. It is possible to create an opportunity to move. As a result, it becomes possible to impart unexpectedness to the contents of the game, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, in the first notification effect control process, the setting process of the operation effective range corresponding to the height position group (step S1707) is performed, so using an image of one frame based on the imaging result of the imaging substrate 71 In the configuration for determining the presence / absence of the first notification effect operation, it is possible to absorb the difference in the height position of the hand at the time of operation due to the difference in the height position of the face. Therefore, it is possible to accurately determine the presence or absence of the first notification effect operation.

  Further, in the first notification effect control processing, position correction processing (step S1708) according to the distance data is executed, so for the first notification effect using an image of one frame based on the imaging result of the imaging substrate 71 In the configuration for determining the presence or absence of an operation, it is possible to absorb the difference in the distance of the hand relative to the window panel 22, and the difference in the height position of the hand during the operation recognized in the image due to the difference in the distance of the hand It is possible to absorb Therefore, it is possible to accurately determine the presence or absence of the first notification effect operation.

<Second notice effect>
Next, a second notification effect control process for performing execution control of the second notification effect will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The second notification effect control process is executed each time the operation effect control process (step S512) is executed once in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14).

  When “1” is set in both the second notification effect flag and the imaging completion flag of the sound light side RAM 95 (step S1801 and step S1802: YES), an image of one frame for use in the second notification effect It means that the imaging of has been completed. In this case, the process proceeds to the image use processing for the second notification effect in step S1803 and thereafter.

  In the image use processing for the second notification effect, first, in step S1803, the imaging completion flag of the sound light side RAM 95 is cleared to “0”. In the subsequent step S1804, the hand data extraction process is executed as in step S1704 of the first notification effect control process (FIG. 39).

  Thereafter, in step S1805, it is determined whether extraction of hand data is completed. When extraction of hand data is completed, whether or not the distance of hand data corresponds to the reference target distance or more in step S1806 as in step S1706 of the first notification effect control process (FIG. 39) Determine

  If a negative determination is made in step S1806, in step S1807, similarly to step S1707 of the first notification effect control process (FIG. 39), the setting process of the operation effective range corresponding to the height position group is performed. At the same time, in step S1808, position correction processing according to the distance data is executed as in step S1708 of the first notification effect control processing (FIG. 39).

  Thereafter, in step S1809, it is determined whether or not a second notification effect operation has occurred. The second notification effect operation is indicated by a two-dot chain line from a state in which the forefinger FG1 and the thumb FG2 of the hand H are closed as shown by solid lines in front of the movable object unit 38 as shown in the explanatory view of FIG. It is an operation to make it open. Therefore, it is determined whether or not the second notification effect operation has occurred using a plurality of imaging results on the imaging substrate 71, and the processing in steps S1801 to S1808 is positive until the determination in step S1809 is affirmative. It needs to be run multiple times. In the sound light side RAM 95, it is possible to store the finger shape extracted from the imaging result of the imaging substrate 71 for a plurality of imaging processes, and based on the finger shape for a plurality of times, the fourth shown in FIG. 2 It is determined whether an operation for notification effect has occurred.

  In this case, the operation effective range is set to the image for one frame based on the distance data stored in the distance image storage area 95a of the sound light side RAM 95 as in the first notification effect control process (FIG. 39). It is determined that the second notification effect operation is performed by performing the above operation in a state where a part of the hand image portion is included in the operation effective range. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is determined that the second notification effect operation is performed by performing the above operation in a state in which a predetermined ratio or more is included, such as 50% of the hand image portion. It is good also as composition, and it is good also as composition judged that operation for the 2nd notice effects was performed by performing the above-mentioned operation in the state where the whole image part of a hand was included.

  Incidentally, when the second notification effect occurs, the symbol display device 61 performs the second notification effect operation, and when the effect movable objects 38a and 38b are arranged at the limit open position, the jackpot result is obtained in the game round. It is configured that an explanation of the occurrence will be made.

  If it is determined that the second notification effect operation is occurring, the value of the condition satisfaction frequency counter provided in the sound light side RAM 95 is incremented by one in step S1810. The condition satisfaction number counter is a counter for specifying the number of times the second notification effect operation has been generated by the sound light side MPU 93. In the following step S1811, various data at the time of the second notification effect operation are read out.

  The various data at the time of the second notification occurrence includes movable object data at the time of the second notification effect operation. The movable object data is read out from the sound light side ROM 94 to the sound light side RAM 95, whereby the movable object data is referred to in the movable object control process (step S505) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14). After the movable objects 38a, 38b for rendering move halfway to the open position, they return to the initial position. As a result, it becomes possible for the player to recognize that the second notification effect operation has been effectively recognized, and the effect movable object 38a, 38b is finally arranged at the limit open position. It is possible to suitably enhance the sense of expectation.

  After that, by determining whether or not the value of the condition satisfaction frequency counter of the sound light side RAM 95 is “5” or more in step S 1812, the second notification rendering operation is performed over the condition satisfaction frequency or more. It is determined whether or not it has been received. When an affirmative determination is made in step S1812, in step S1813, both the corresponding imaging command flag and the second notification effect flag of the sound light side RAM 95 are cleared to "0".

  Thereafter, in step S1814, it is determined whether or not the current game play is a game result of a big hit. If it is the game time of the jackpot result, in step S1815, after reading various data at the time of the notification occurrence, the present second notification effect control processing is ended. The various data at the time of notification occurrence is the same data as the various data at the time of notification occurrence which is read out in step S1711 in the first notification effect control process (FIG. 39). Therefore, the effect movable objects 38a and 38b of the movable object unit 38 move to the limit open position. In addition, light emission at the time of notification occurrence is performed in the display light emitting unit 23, and a sound at the time of notification occurrence is output from the speaker unit 24. Furthermore, display effect at the time of notice occurrence is performed by the symbol display device 61.

  When it is not the game time of the jackpot result, in step S1816, after reading various data at the time of notification non-occurrence, the present second notification effect control processing is ended. The various data when the notification is not generated does not include movable object data for moving the effect movable objects 38a and 38b of the movable object unit 38 to the limit open position. Therefore, the effect movable objects 38a and 38b are maintained at the initial position. On the other hand, various data at the time of notification non-generation includes light emission data and sound output data at the time of notification non-generation, and the light emission data and sound output data are the light emission control process (step 14) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) By referring to S503) and the sound output control process (step S504), the light emitting unit 23 emits light when the notification is not generated and the speaker unit 24 outputs the sound when the notification is not generated.

  On the other hand, if the negative determination is made in step S1802, the negative determination is made in step S1805, the positive determination is made in step S1806, the negative determination is made in step S1809, or the negative determination is made in step S1812. If YES, it is determined in step S1817 whether or not the operation effective period of the second notification effect operation has elapsed. In the operation effective period, measurement is started when “1” is set in the second notification effect flag of the sound light side RAM 95 in step S1605 in the notification effect setting process (FIG. 38). The operation valid period is optional, but is set to, for example, 120 seconds.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1817, the second notification effect control processing is directly ended. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1817, both the imaging command flag and the second notification effect flag corresponding to the sound and light side RAM 95 are cleared to “0” in step S1818, and then the second notification effect control process is performed. finish.

  As described above, by performing the second notification effect control process, it is not determined that the second notification effect operation has been performed simply by extending the hand toward the movable object unit 38, and a predetermined operation with a finger is performed. By performing the operation, it is determined that the second notification effect operation has been performed. As a result, it becomes possible to require a complicated operation as the operation for moving the effect movable objects 38a and 38b of the movable object unit 38 toward the limit open position, as compared with the operation for the first notification effect, It becomes possible to make the aspect of presentation operation novel.

  In addition, in the case of the second notification effect operation, an operation as if the effect movable objects 38a and 38b are opened toward the limit open position is required. As a result, when the effect movable objects 38a and 38b move to the limit opening position with the second notification effect operation, the player can generate the movement to the limit opening position by the operation of the player. It is possible to give the player the impression of

  In addition, in order to move the movable objects for presentation 38a and 38b to the limit open position along with the operation for the second notification effect in the game round that results in the big hit, it is necessary to perform the operation for the second notification effect a plurality of times . In this case, whenever the second notification effect operation is performed, the effect movable objects 38a and 38b move to the halfway open position and then return to the initial position. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the second notification effect operation is effective through the operation of the effect movable objects 38a and 38b.

<Divided production>
Next, the content of the divided effect and the control content for enabling execution of the divided effect will be described. FIG. 45 (a-1) is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of the divided effect.

  The split effect is set as a kind of reach effect in the game production, and the symbol display device 61 is a split display for enabling the player to select the execution content of the reach effect after the predetermined branch timing. It is an effect that is displayed and the reach effect selected by the player is executed after the branch timing. At the time of divided display, as shown in FIG. 45 (a-1), an effect GA selection image GA for selecting execution of selection effect A, and an effect B selection image for selecting execution of selection effect B GB is displayed.

  The effect A selection image GA and the effect B selection image GB are displayed so as to partition a part of the display surface of the symbol display device 61, and these selection images GA and GB have the same or substantially the same area. It will be displayed as Further, the effect A selection image GA and the effect B selection image GB are displayed on the display surface of the symbol display device 61 so as to be aligned in the lateral direction at predetermined heights at the same height position.

  When it is specified based on the imaging result of the imaging substrate 71 that the player has extended his hand to the image A for selection for presentation A in front of the pachinko machine 10 in front of the window panel 22, the selection effect A is subsequently performed. It will be executed. On the other hand, if it is specified based on the imaging result of the imaging substrate 71 that the player has extended his hand toward the effect B selection image GB in front of the pachinko machine 10 in front of the window panel 22, the selection effect is subsequently made. B will be executed. Both the selection effect A and the selection effect B are continued until the end timing of the effect for the game run to be executed. In addition, in selection effect A and selection effect B, displays such as the type of character displayed during the effect, the type of background image, the presence or absence of a moving image, the type of moving image, the presence or absence of a real shot image, and the type of a real shot image The contents will be different.

  In addition, although the degree of expectation to becoming a jackpot result in the selection effect A and the selection effect B is the same, it may be different. In the case of making the degree of expectation different, at least one of the selected effect A and the selected effect B can be executed with effects different from the divided effects, and the occurrence ratio of the jackpot result when executed as the different effects Need to make a difference.

  The flow of the division effect will be described with reference to the time charts of FIG. 45 (b-1) to FIG. 45 (b-3). 45 (b-1) shows the execution period of the effect before selection, FIG. 45 (b-2) shows the execution period of the selection effect A, and FIG. 45 (b-3) shows the execution period of the selection effect B. .

  As shown in FIG. 45 (b-1), an effect before selection is performed at a timing of t1 which is a state in which effects for a game are being executed and a reach effect is started. In the effect before selection, divided display shown in FIG. 45 (a-1) is performed. Then, the effect before the selection is continued until the timing t2, and the content of the effect after the timing t2 is determined based on the imaging result up to that point on the imaging substrate 71.

  Specifically, in the case where it is specified that the operation for selecting the effect A selection image GA has been performed by the player, or in the case where any selection operation has not been performed, it is shown in FIG. As shown, the selection effect A is started at the timing of t2. On the other hand, when it is specified that the operation for selecting the effect B selection image GB has been performed by the player, as shown in FIG. 45 (b-3), the selected effect B is started at the timing of t2. .

  Here, in either case of the selection effect A and the selection effect B, the selection effect ends at the timing of t3 as shown in FIG. 45 (b-2) and FIG. 45 (b-3). As a result, even if either of the selection effect A and the selection effect B is executed, it is possible to make the time until the effect is finished constant. The display continuation time of the effect for game circulation is determined by the special figure fluctuation start process (FIG. 13) of the main MPU 83. The sound light side MPU 93 and the display control device 96 control the display light emitting unit 23, the speaker unit 24, and the symbol display device 61 so that the effects for the game play are executed over the display duration time. Thereby, the execution period of the variation display of the pattern in the special drawing unit 62 directly controlled by the main side MPU 83, and the execution period of the presentation for the game circulation in the display light emitting unit 23, the speaker unit 24 and the symbol display device 61. And can be synchronized. In this case, the divided effect is executed after the effect for the game run is started, and either the selected effect A or the selected effect B is selected depending on the operation mode of the player during the effect before the selection of the divided effect. If the execution durations of the selected effect A and the selected effect B are different from each other, the adjustment of the end timing of the effect for the game run becomes complicated. On the other hand, as described above, even if either of the selection effect A and the selection effect B is executed, the time until the end of these effects is constant, so no such inconvenience occurs. It will be possible to

  As described above, in the split effect, the split display is basically performed as shown in FIG. 45 (a-1), but when the reference switch 91a is disposed in the ON position, the imaging substrate 71 Accuracy in capturing an image of one frame in And if division display is performed under such a situation, there is a concern that either one of the selection effect A and the selection effect B will be selected regardless of the selection operation of the player. Therefore, when the reference switch 91a is disposed at the ON position, the division display is not performed, and the selection display is performed by the symbol display device 61 as shown in FIG. 45 (a-2).

  At the time of selection display, as shown in FIG. 45 (a-2), a single selection image GC for selecting execution of the selection effect B is displayed. The single selection image GC is displayed so as to divide a part of the display surface of the symbol display device 61, and the single selection image GC is an image A for selection for effect A and an image GB for selection for effect B in split display. It is displayed so that the area is larger than any of them. Furthermore, the single selection image GC is displayed to be equal to or larger than the total area of the effect A selection image GA and the effect B selection image GB in divided display.

  When it is specified based on the imaging result of the imaging substrate 71 that the player has extended his hand toward the single selection image GC in front of the pachinko machine 10 in front of the window panel 22, the selection effect B is subsequently performed. It will be executed. On the other hand, when the player does not perform the selection operation, the selection effect A is executed thereafter. The contents of the selection effect A and the selection effect B are as described above.

  Next, division effect setting processing for causing division effect to be started will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The division effect setting process is performed each time the operation effect control process (step S512) is executed once in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14).

  First, in step S1901, it is determined whether "1" is set in the restriction flag of the sound light side RAM 95 or not. When "1" is set in the restriction flag, the main divided effect setting process ends. As described above, the restriction flag is set to “1” when it is specified that the cancellation monitoring target is generated in the cancellation monitoring process (FIG. 25). Then, the situation where the restriction flag is set to “1” may be a situation where the imaging substrate 71 can not normally capture an image of one frame. In this case, by making an affirmative determination in step S1901 and terminating the division effect setting process as it is, it is possible to prevent the division effect from being executed in a situation where imaging can not be normally performed.

  If "1" is not set in the restriction flag, it is determined in step S1902 whether the start condition of the divided effect is satisfied. The start condition of the split effect is the case where the sound data side RAM 95 reads out the data table of the effect for game circulation, and the pointer data indicating the contents of the control object in the data table indicates the start of the split effect It holds true when it corresponds to data. If a negative determination is made in step S1902, the main dividing effect setting process is ended as it is, and if a positive determination is made in step S1902, the process proceeds to step S1903.

  In step S1903, it is determined whether "1" is set in the reference flag of the sound light side RAM 95 or not. That is, it is determined whether the reference switch 91a is disposed at the ON position. If "1" is not set in the reference flag, various data for divided display are read out in step S1904. The various data for divided display includes light emission data and sound output data for divided display, and the light emission control process (step S 503) and sound of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) are included in the light emission data and the sound output data. By referring to the output control process (step S504), light emission is performed in the display light emitting unit 23 in the divided display pattern, and sound is output from the speaker unit 24 in the divided display pattern. Furthermore, in step S1904, a display command for divided display is transmitted to the display control device 96. The display control device 96 causes the symbol display device 61 to perform divided display as shown in FIG. 45 (a-1) by receiving the display command.

  On the other hand, when “1” is set in the reference flag, various data for selection display are read out in step S1905. Various data for selection display includes light emission data and sound output data for selection display, and the light emission data and sound output data are used for the light emission control process (step S 503) and sound of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14). By referring to the output control process (step S504), light emission is performed in the display light emitting unit 23 in the selection display pattern, and sound is output from the speaker unit 24 in the selection display pattern. Furthermore, in step S1905, a display command for selective display is transmitted to the display control device 96. The display control device 96 causes the symbol display device 61 to perform selection display as shown in FIG. 45 (a-2) by receiving the display command.

  When the process of step S1904 or step S1905 is executed, “1” is set in both the imaging command flag and the split effect flag corresponding to the split effect in the sound light side RAM 95 in step S1906, and then the main split effect setting is made. End the process. By setting “1” to the imaging command flag, as described above, the irradiation instruction signal is transmitted toward the imaging substrate 71 in the imaging control process (FIG. 21), and imaging is started in the imaging substrate 71. Ru.

  Next, division effect control processing for performing execution control of division effect will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The divided effect control process is executed each time the operation effect control process (step S512) is executed once in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14).

  When “1” is set in both the division effect flag and the imaging completion flag of the sound light side RAM 95 (step S2001 and step S2002: YES), imaging of an image of one frame for use in division effect is completed It means that you are doing. In this case, the process proceeds to the image use process for the divided effect after step S2003.

  In the image use process for divided effect, first, at step S2003, the imaging completion flag of the sound light side RAM 95 is cleared to "0". In the subsequent step S2004, the hand data extraction process is executed as in step S1704 of the first notification effect control process (FIG. 39).

  Thereafter, in step S2005, it is determined whether extraction of hand data is completed. If extraction of hand data is completed, whether or not the distance of hand data corresponds to the reference target distance or more in step S2006, as in step S1706 of the first notification effect control process (FIG. 39) Determine

  If a negative determination is made in step S2006, in step S2007, as in step S1707 of the first notification effect control process (FIG. 39), the process of setting the operation effective range corresponding to the height position group is performed. At the same time, in step S2008, position correction processing according to the distance data is executed as in step S1708 of the first notification effect control processing (FIG. 39).

  Thereafter, in step S2009, it is determined whether or not an effective operation for split effect has occurred. Here, the processing content for determining whether or not the effective operation for the split effect has occurred will be described with reference to the explanatory views of FIG. 48A and FIG. As described above, in the divided effect, divided display is performed when the reference switch 91a is disposed at the OFF position, and selective display is performed when the reference switch 91a is disposed at the ON position. Corresponding to this, the operation effective range set in the image G for one frame based on the distance data stored in the distance image storage area 95a of the sound light side RAM 95 is the case where divided display is performed and the selective display It differs from the case where it is performed.

  Specifically, when divided display is performed, after the process of step S2007 is performed, the image G for one frame corresponds to the effect GA selection image GA as shown in FIG. An effective operation range EA1 for effect A selection to be performed and an effective operation range EA2 for effect B selection corresponding to the effect B selection image GB are set. These operation effective ranges EA1 and EA2 are set to occupy a partial area in the image G for one frame, and the area occupied by them is the same. The operation effective ranges EA1 and EA2 are set at the same position in the vertical direction in the image G for one frame, and are set to be aligned in the horizontal direction at a predetermined interval. If the image portion of the hand after the correction processing of step S2008 is performed is included in the operation effective range EA1, it is determined that the selection effect A is selected, and the image portion of the hand is included in the operation effective range EA2. When it is determined, it is determined that the selected effect B is selected. When the presence of the hand is specified simultaneously in both the effective operation range EA1 and the effective operation range EA2, the selection operation of the selection effect B is prioritized, and the effect operation is performed toward the effect B selection image GB Treat with

  On the other hand, when the selective display is performed, after the process of step S2007 is performed, as shown in FIG. 48B, the image G for one frame corresponds to a single corresponding to the single selection image GC. An operation effective range EA3 for selection is set. The operation effective range EA3 for single selection is set to occupy a partial area in the image G for one frame, and the occupied area is for the operation effective area EA1 for selection of effect A and the effect B for selection The area is set to be larger than any of the operation effective range EA2. Furthermore, the operation effective range EA3 for single selection is set to be equal to or larger than the total area of the operation effective range EA1 for effect A selection and the area of the operation effective range EA2 for effect B selection Ru. It is determined that the selection operation has been performed when the image portion of the hand after the correction processing of step S2008 is performed is included in the operation effective range EA3.

  In step S2009, it is determined that the target operation is performed by including a part of the hand image portion in the set operation effective range EA1 to EA3. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and it may be determined that the target operation is performed by including a predetermined ratio or more, such as 50% of the hand image portion, By including the whole, it may be determined that the target operation has been performed.

  If it is determined that the effective operation for the divided effect has been performed, it is determined in step S2010 whether or not the effective operation for the first notification effect operation has occurred. In the pachinko machine 10, the period in which the divided effect is performed may overlap with the period in which the first notification effect is performed. Then, when the two rendering periods overlap and occur, as shown in FIGS. 48 (a) and 48 (b), the first of the images G for one frame in which the operation effective ranges EA1 to EA3 are set An operation effective range EA4 for notification effect is set. In this case, the effective operation ranges EA1 to EA3 on the split effect side are set as a range for determining that the operation of extending the hand toward the selection images GA, GB, and GC displayed on the symbol display device 61 is effective. On the other hand, the operation effective range EA4 for the first notification effect is set as a range for determining that the operation of extending the hand toward the movable object unit 38 existing above the symbol display device 61 is effective. Ru. Therefore, the operation effective range EA4 for the first notification effect is set at a position above the operation effective ranges EA1 to EA3 on the divided effect side.

  As described above, when the operation effective ranges EA1 to EA4 are set in the vertical direction, if the height position of the hand performing the operation can not be accurately specified, the operation intended by the player and the operation on the side of the pachinko machine 10 And will not match. On the other hand, as described above, in the height position monitoring process (FIG. 30), the height group corresponding to the height position of the player's face is specified in advance, and the operation is performed according to the specified height group. The adjustment process of the effective range (step S1707, step S2007) is executed, and the position correction process (step S1708, step S2008) according to the distance data is executed for the image portion of the hand. As a result, it becomes possible to specify the height position of the hand performing the operation, and it is possible to make the operation intended by the player coincide with the operation on the pachinko machine 10 side.

  When the split effect and the first notification effect are generated in an overlapping manner, the symbol display device 61 explains that the operation corresponding to the split display or the selection display is performed, and the operation for the first notification effect It is explained that the jackpot result is generated in the game round by the effect movable objects 38a and 38b being placed in the limit open position.

  When it is determined that the effective operation has not occurred on the first notification effect side (step S2010: NO), in step S2011, both the corresponding imaging command flag and the divided effect flag of the sound light side RAM 95 are "0. "clear. In the subsequent step S2012, it is determined whether “divided display or selective display is being executed in the present divided presentation by judging whether“ 1 ”is set in the reference flag of the sound light side RAM 95 or not. Do.

  If “1” is not set in the reference flag, it is determined in step S2013 whether or not the operation performed this time is the operation of selecting the selected effect B, that is, the operation effective range EA2 for the effect B selection It is determined whether an event including an image portion of H has occurred. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2013, various data for selection effect B are read out from the sound light side ROM 94 to the sound light side RAM 95 in step S2014, and then the main divided effect control processing ends.

  Various data for selection effect B includes light emission data and sound output data for selection effect B, and the light emission data and sound output data are light emission control processing of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14) (step S 503) By referring to the sound output control process (step S504), the light emission corresponding to the selected effect B is performed in the display light emitting unit 23, and the sound corresponding to the selected effect B is output from the speaker unit 24. Furthermore, in step S2014, a display command for the selection effect B is transmitted to the display control device 96. The display control device 96 causes the symbol display device 61 to perform the display effect of the selection effect B by receiving the display command.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2013, the operation performed this time is the operation of selecting the selected effect A, that is, an event in which the hand image portion is included in the operation effective range EA1 for effect A selection It means that it occurred. Therefore, after the various data for the selection effect A are read out from the sound light side ROM 94 to the sound light side RAM 95 in step S2015, the divided effect control process is ended.

  Various data for selection effect A includes light emission data and sound output data for selection effect A, and the light emission data and sound output data are light emission control processing of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14) (step S 503) By referring to the sound output control process (step S504), the light emission corresponding to the selected effect A is performed in the display light emitting unit 23, and the sound corresponding to the selected effect A is output from the speaker unit 24. Furthermore, in step S2014, a display command for the selection effect A is transmitted to the display control device 96. The display control device 96 causes the symbol display device 61 to perform the display effect of the selection effect A by receiving the display command.

  Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 45 (b-1), since the execution period of the effect before selection in which divided display or selective display is performed is constant, even if the processing of step S2014 or step S2015 is executed, the selected effect B or the selection effect A is not started immediately, but at the timing when the execution period of the effect before the selection has elapsed, the selection effect B or the selection effect A in each of the display light emitting unit 23, the speaker unit 24 and the symbol display device 61 Is started. In addition, during the execution period of the effect before selection and in the period after the processing of step S2014 or step S2015 is executed, an image to the effect that selection effect B or selection effect A is selected is displayed on symbol display device 61 Is displayed.

  If it is determined in step S2012 that "1" is set in the reference flag, various data for selection effect B is read out in step S2014, and the main divided effect control process is ended. When “1” is set in the reference flag, the selection display is performed as described above. Therefore, the effective range for single selection is the effective range for single selection It means that an event in which the image part of the hand is included in EA3 has occurred. In this case, the selection effect B is executed as described above.

  When a negative determination is made in step S2002, a negative determination is made in step S2005, a negative determination is made in step S2006, a negative determination is made in step S2009, or a negative determination is made in step S2010. In step S2016, it is determined whether the execution period of the effect before selection has elapsed. In the execution period, measurement is started when “1” is set in the division effect flag of the sound light side RAM 95 in step S1906 in the division effect setting process (FIG. 46). Although the execution period is arbitrary, for example, it is set to 60 seconds.

  When a negative determination is made in step S2016, the main divided effect control process is ended as it is. When an affirmative determination is made in step S2016, in step S2017, both the corresponding imaging command flag and the divided effect flag of the sound light side RAM 95 are cleared to "0". Thereafter, various data for the selection effect A are read out from the sound light side ROM 94 to the sound light side RAM 95 in step S2015, and the main divided effect control processing ends.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 48 (a), in the interval between the operation effective range EA1 for effect A selection and the operation effective range EA2 for effect B selection in the split display, the image portion corresponding to the adult's hand is simultaneously It is set to the extent that it does not enter. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 48 (a) and 48 (b), the interval between the operation effective range EA4 for the first notification effect and the operation effective ranges EA1 to EA3 on the divided effect side corresponded to the hand of an adult. It is set to the extent that the image part enters simultaneously.

  On the other hand, in the divided effect control process, as described above, even if it is determined that the effective operation for the divided effect is generated (step S2009: YES), the effective operation is generated on the first notification effect side If it is determined that there is (step S2010: YES), the effective operation for the split effect is invalidated. Thereby, when the operation for the split effect and the operation for the first notification effect are simultaneously performed in the situation where the division effect and the first notification effect are executed in an overlapping manner, the operation for the first notification effect is performed. It becomes possible to give priority.

  The contents of this operation will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 49 (a) is an execution period of the first notification effect, FIG. 49 (b) is an execution period of the divided effect, and FIG. 49 (c) is an execution period of the first notification effect operation. (D) is the execution period of the split effect operation, FIG. 49 (e) is the execution period of the notice generation effect, and FIG. 49 (f) is that either the selection effect A or the selection effect B is selected It is a display period of the selection completion image which shows.

  First, in the case where only the split rendering operation is performed, the first notification rendering and the split rendering are simultaneously started as shown in FIGS. 49 (a) and 49 (b) at the timing of t1. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 49 (d), only the split rendering operation is performed at time t2. As a result, as shown in FIG. 49 (f), at the timing of t2, a selection complete image indicating that either the selected effect A or the selected effect B has been selected is displayed on the symbol display device 61, and the player Recognizes that the split rendering operation is effective.

  Next, to explain the case where the split rendering operation and the first notification rendering operation are performed simultaneously, as shown in FIGS. 49 (a) and 49 (b), the first notification rendering and the split rendering are performed at timing t3. And will be started at the same time. Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 49C and 49D, the first notification effect operation and the division effect operation are simultaneously started at timing t4. In this case, since the first notification effect operation is prioritized, the notification occurrence effect is started as shown in FIG. 49 (e), and the display of the selection completion image is not started as shown in FIG. 49 (f).

  Thereafter, even after the first notification effect operation ends at time t5, the division effect operation is continued as shown in FIG. 49 (d), and it is determined that the division effect operation is valid at time t6. As a result, as shown in FIG. 49 (f), the display of the selection completion image is started.

  As described above, by performing the divided effect, it is possible to execute the effect according to the player's selection operation. In this case, when the reference switch 91a is disposed at the OFF position, divided display in which a plurality of selection ranges are generated is performed, whereas when the reference switch 91a is disposed at the ON position, the selection range is provided. A single selection display is performed. Thereby, basically, while performing diversification of selection operation by performing split display in which a plurality of selection ranges occur, selection operation in a situation where the accuracy of imaging an image for one frame in imaging substrate 71 is lowered By simplifying the aspect of the invention, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the effect will be selected regardless of the operation aspect.

  Further, at the time of split display, the effect A selection image GA and the effect B selection image GB are displayed side by side on the display surface of the symbol display device 61 instead of the vertical direction, corresponding to that In the image G, the operation effective range EA1 for selecting the effect A and the operation effective range EA2 for selecting the effect B are set side by side in the horizontal direction. This makes it possible to reduce the influence of the height position of the hand at the time of selection operation in the split display, and the player has performed an operation for selecting one of the selection effect A and the selection effect B. The possibility of the other effect being executed is reduced.

  Further, in the configuration in which the first notification effect and the divided effect can be executed in an overlapping manner, the first notification effect operation is prioritized when the first notification effect operation and the divided effect operation are simultaneously performed. . As a result, the hand trying to perform the first notification effect operation has not only entered the first operation effect range EA4 for the first notification effect but also the operation effect range EA1 to EA3 of the divided effect side. Also, it is possible to determine that the first notification effect operation has been performed while determining that the division effect operation has not been performed. In particular, since the movable object unit 38 is present directly above the symbol display device 61, there is a possibility that the hand performing the first notification effect operation may enter the operation effective range EA1 to EA3 side of the divided effect side. However, according to this configuration, it is possible to appropriately cope with the intrusion.

<Stop operation effect>
Next, the contents of the stop operation effect and the control contents for enabling the execution of the stop operation effect will be described. FIG. 50 is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of the stop operation effect.

  The stop operation effect is set as a kind of promotion effect in the effect for the open / close execution mode. The promotion effect is either when the stop result displayed stopped on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 61 in the game round that results in the big hit is the low probability big hit result or the most advantageous big hit result Even if there is a stop result in which combinations of big hit results by even symbols are stopped and displayed on one effective line, the success or failure lottery mode after the open / close execution mode becomes the high probability mode during the open / close execution mode It is an effect indicating whether or not. In the opening / closing execution mode after becoming the most advantageous big hit result, promotion occurrence presentation is performed as the promotion effect, and in the opening / closing execution mode after becoming the low probability jackpot result, the promotion non-occurrence presentation is performed as the promotion effect.

  In the stop operation effect, although there is in the open / close execution mode, as shown in FIG. 50 (a), the multi-row display in which the variable display of symbols is performed in each of the plurality of variable display areas CA1 to CA3 is displayed on the symbol display device 61 Be done. Three variation display areas CA1 to CA3 are set in the same manner as the number of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the game circulation effect. Specifically, the variable display areas CA1 to CA3 are set side by side in the horizontal direction, and a left fluctuation display area CA1, a middle fluctuation display area CA2, and a right fluctuation display area CA3 exist.

  The left variation display area CA1 corresponds to the upper symbol row Z1 in the effect for game use, and the symbols variably displayed in the upper symbol row Z1 are variably displayed in the same order. In this case, the same image data is used as image data for displaying a design. Further, the middle variation display area CA2 corresponds to the middle symbol row Z2 in the effect for game use, and the symbols variably displayed in the middle symbol row Z2 are variably displayed in the same order. In this case, the same image data is used as image data for displaying a design. Further, the right fluctuation display area CA3 corresponds to the lower figure design row Z3 in the effect for game use, and the symbols variably displayed in the lower figure design array Z3 are variably displayed in the same order. In this case, the same image data is used as image data for displaying a design.

  Here, in the effect for game use, as shown in FIG. 6, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are arranged in parallel in the vertical direction, and the symbols are variably displayed in the horizontal direction in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. On the other hand, in the stop operation effect, as shown in FIG. 50, the variable display areas CA1 to CA3 are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction, and in each of the variable display areas CA1 to CA3, the symbols are displayed in the vertical direction. That is, in the stop operation effect, the symbol is variably displayed in a direction different from that of the effect for the game use, more specifically, in a direction orthogonal to the case of the effect for the game use. This makes it possible for the player to clearly distinguish between the stop operation effect and the variable display of the symbol in the effect for game use.

  In the stop operation effect, the player performs a stop operation of extending the hand toward the respective variable display areas CA1 to CA3 ahead of the window panel 22 by the pachinko machine 10, and thus the variable display area targeted for the stop operation. The fluctuation display of symbols is stopped in CA1 to CA3. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 50 (a), the stop operation is performed toward the left fluctuation display area CA1 in a state where the fluctuation display of symbols is performed in all the fluctuation display areas CA1 to CA3. As shown in FIG. 50 (b), the fluctuation display of symbols is stopped in the left fluctuation display area CA1, and the symbols with the numeral "7" are stopped and displayed. By performing the stop operation toward the right fluctuation display area CA3 in that state, the fluctuation display of the symbol is stopped in the right fluctuation display area CA3 as shown in FIG. 50 (c), and the numeral "7" is given. The stopped symbol is displayed. As a result, the reach display by the symbol with the numeral "7" is performed. By performing the stop operation toward the middle variation display area CA2 in that state, the variation display of the symbols is stopped in the middle variation display area CA2 as shown in FIG. 50 (d-1) and FIG. 50 (d-2) Be done. In this case, as shown in FIG. 50 (d-1), in the middle variation display area CA2, the symbol attached with the number "7" is stopped and displayed if it is a promotion occurrence effect. In each of the variable display areas CA1 to CA3, the symbol attached with the numeral "7" is stopped and displayed, and the result is informed that the success or failure lottery mode after the open / close execution mode is the high probability mode. On the other hand, in the case of the promotion non-occurrence effect, as shown in FIG. 50 (d-2), symbols different from symbols attached with the number "7" are stopped and displayed in the middle variation display area CA2. The same symbol will not be stopped and displayed in each of the variable display areas CA1 to CA3, and it is informed that the success or failure lottery mode after the open / close execution mode is the low probability mode through the result.

  As described above, a multi-row display is basically performed as shown in FIG. 50 in the stop operation effect, but when the reference switch 91a is disposed at the ON position, one frame is displayed on the imaging substrate 71. The accuracy of capturing an image of a minute decreases. Then, when displaying in a plurality of columns under such a situation, there is a concern that the variable display of symbols will be stopped regardless of the player's selection operation. Therefore, when the reference switch 91a is disposed at the ON position, a single-row display is performed by the symbol display device 61 as shown in FIG. 51 (a) instead of performing the multiple-row display.

  Specifically, in single row display, as shown in FIG. 51A, variable display of symbols is performed in a single variable display area CA4. In the single variable display area CA4, although the variable display of the symbols is performed in the vertical direction as in the case of the multi-row display, the types of the variably displayed symbols are different from those in the multi-row display. The high probability corresponding symbol "high probability !!" as shown in FIG. 51 (b-1) alternates with the low probability corresponding symbol "low probability !!" as shown in FIG. 51 (b-2) Is displayed as it appears on the screen. As described above, in the situation where the symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the player performs a stop operation of extending the hand toward the single variable display area CA4 in front of the pachinko machine 10 further than the window panel 22 by the player. The variation display of symbols is stopped in one variation display area CA4. And if it is promotion occurrence production, as shown in FIG. 51 (b-1), the high probability corresponding symbol will be stopped and displayed, and the success or failure lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode is the high probability mode through the result It is informed. On the other hand, if it is a promotion non-occurrence effect, as shown in FIG. 51 (b-2), the low probability corresponding symbol will be stopped and displayed, and through the result, the chance lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode is the low probability mode Is notified.

  Next, stop operation effect setting processing for causing the stop operation effect to be started will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The stop operation effect setting process is executed each time the operation effect control process (step S512) is executed once in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14).

  First, in step S 2101, it is determined whether “1” is set in the restriction flag of the sound light side RAM 95. When "1" is set in the restriction flag, the main divided effect setting process ends. As described above, the restriction flag is set to “1” when it is specified that the cancellation monitoring target is generated in the cancellation monitoring process (FIG. 25). Then, the situation where the restriction flag is set to “1” may be a situation where the imaging substrate 71 can not normally capture an image of one frame. In this case, by making an affirmative determination in step S2101 and terminating the stop operation effect setting process as it is, it is possible to prevent the stop operation effect from being executed in a situation where imaging can not be normally performed. Become.

  If "1" is not set in the restriction flag, it is determined in step S2102 whether the start condition of the stop operation effect is satisfied. The start condition of the stop operation effect is the case where the sound data side RAM 95 reads out the data table of the effect for the open / close execution mode, and the pointer data indicating the content of the control object in the data table is the stop operation effect This holds true when the data indicates the start. When a negative determination is made in step S2102, the main stop operation effect setting process is ended as it is, and when a positive determination is made in step S2102, the process proceeds to step S2103.

  In step S2103, it is determined whether "1" is set in the reference flag of the sound light side RAM 95 or not. That is, it is determined whether the reference switch 91a is disposed at the ON position. If “1” is not set in the reference flag, various data for displaying a plurality of columns are read in step S2104. The various data for multi-column display includes light emission data and sound output data for multi-column display, and the light emission control processing of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) (step S 503) And by referring to in the sound output control process (step S 504), light emission is performed in the display light emitting unit 23 in a pattern for displaying a plurality of lines, and sound is output in a pattern for displaying a plurality of lines from the speaker unit 24. . Furthermore, in step S2104, a display command for multi-column display is transmitted to the display control apparatus 96. The display control device 96 causes the symbol display device 61 to perform multi-row display as shown in FIG. 50A by receiving the display command.

  On the other hand, when “1” is set in the reference flag, various data for single column display are read in step S2105. Various data for single column display includes light emission data and sound output data for single column display, and the light emission control processing of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14) (step S503) And, by referring to the sound output control process (step S 504), light emission is performed in the display light emitting unit 23 in the pattern for single column display, and the sound is output in the pattern for single column display from the speaker unit 24. . Furthermore, in step S2105, a display command for single row display is transmitted to the display control device 96. The display control device 96 causes the symbol display device 61 to perform single-row display as shown in FIG. 51A by receiving the display command.

  When the process of step S2104 or step S2105 is executed, “1” is set in both the imaging command flag and the stop operation effect flag corresponding to the stop operation effect in the sound light side RAM 95 in step S2106. The stop operation effect setting process is ended. By setting “1” to the imaging command flag, as described above, the irradiation instruction signal is transmitted toward the imaging substrate 71 in the imaging control process (FIG. 21), and imaging is started in the imaging substrate 71. Ru.

  Next, the stop operation effect control process for performing the execution control of the stop operation effect will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The stop operation effect control process is executed each time the operation effect control process (step S512) is executed once in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14).

  When “1” is set in both the stop operation effect flag and the imaging completion flag of the sound light side RAM 95 (step S2201 and step S2202: YES), imaging of an image of one frame to be used in the stop operation effect Means that it is complete. In this case, the process proceeds to the image use processing for the stop operation effect after step S2203.

  In the image use processing for effecting stop operation, first, in step S2203, the imaging completion flag of the sound light side RAM 95 is cleared to "0". In the subsequent step S2204, the hand data extraction process is executed as in step S1704 of the first notification effect control process (FIG. 39).

  Thereafter, in step S2205, it is determined whether extraction of hand data is completed. When extraction of hand data is completed, whether or not the distance of hand data corresponds to the reference target distance or more in step S2206 as in step S1706 of the first notification effect control process (FIG. 39) Determine

  When a negative determination is made in step S2206, in step S2207, similarly to step S1707 of the first notification effect control process (FIG. 39), the setting process of the operation effective range corresponding to the height position group is performed. At the same time, in step S2208, position correction processing according to the distance data is executed as in step S1708 of the first notification effect control processing (FIG. 39).

  Thereafter, in step S2209, it is determined whether the reference flag in the sound light side RAM 95 is set to “1”, which of the multiple-row display and the single-row display is being executed as the stop operation effect Determine If a negative determination is made in step S2209, this means that multi-row display is being performed as the stop operation effect. In this case, the process proceeds to step S2210.

  In step S2210, it is determined whether or not the effective operation for the stop operation effect has occurred in the situation where the multiple-row display is performed. Here, with reference to the explanatory view of FIG. 54 (a), the processing content for determining whether or not the effective operation for the stop operation effect has occurred in the situation where the multi-column display is performed will be described.

  When the variable display of symbols is performed in all the variable display areas CA1 to CA3, after the process of step S2207 is performed, as shown in FIG. The left operation effective range EA5 corresponding to the left fluctuation display area CA1, the middle operation effective range EA6 corresponding to the middle fluctuation display area CA2, and the right operation effective range EA7 corresponding to the right fluctuation display area CA3 It is set. These operation effective ranges EA5 to EA7 are set so as to occupy a partial region in the image G for one frame, and the area occupied by them is the same. The operation effective ranges EA5 to EA7 are set at the same position in the vertical direction in the image G for one frame, and are set to be aligned in the horizontal direction at a predetermined interval. On the other hand, when the variable display of symbols is already stopped in some of the variable display areas CA1 to CA3, operation effective ranges EA5 to EA7 corresponding to the stopped variable display areas CA1 to CA3 are not set.

  If the image portion of the hand after the correction process of step S2208 is performed is included in the left operation effective range EA5, it is determined that the stop operation has been performed on the left fluctuation display area CA1, and the hand image When the portion is included in the middle operation effective range EA6, it is determined that the stop operation is performed on the middle variation display area CA2, and the hand image portion is included in the right operation effective range EA7. If it is determined that the stop operation is performed on the right fluctuation display area CA3.

  In step S2210, it is determined that the target operation has been performed by including a part of the hand image portion in the set operation effective range EA5 to EA7. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and it may be determined that the target operation is performed by including a predetermined ratio or more, such as 50% of the hand image portion, By including the whole, it may be determined that the target operation has been performed.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 54 (a), in the image G for one frame, the left operation effective range EA5 and the middle operation effective range EA6 are set to be adjacent in the horizontal direction, but The interval between the left operation effective range EA5 and the middle operation effective range EA6 is set to such an extent that an image portion corresponding to an adult's hand enters at the same time. Further, in the image G for one frame, the middle operation effective range EA6 and the right operation effective range EA7 are set to be horizontally adjacent to each other, but the middle operation effective range EA6 and the right The interval with the operation effective range EA7 is set to such an extent that an image portion corresponding to an adult's hand enters at the same time. In this case, if the variable display of symbols in the plurality of variable display areas CA1 to CA3 is simultaneously stopped by one stop operation, the number of times the stop operation is performed against the player's intention may be reduced. is there. In addition, it is also assumed that the stop operation is performed so that the player intentionally stops the variable display of the symbols in the plurality of variable display areas CA1 to CA3 simultaneously. In this case, when the variable display of the symbols in the plurality of variable display areas CA1 to CA3 is simultaneously stopped by one stop operation, the plurality of variable display areas CA1 to CA3 are set and the symbols are displayed according to the stop operation. It will be against the meaning of the effect of the multi-row display to try to stop the variable display sequentially.

  On the other hand, even if the image portions of the hand simultaneously enter the plurality of operation effective ranges EA5 to EA7 by executing the processes of step S2211 and step S2212 in the stop operation effect control process (FIG. 53), Only the variation display of the symbols in the variation display areas CA1 to CA3 is to be stopped. Specifically, in step S2211, the operation that is triggered to determine that there is a valid operation in step S2210 is the fluctuation display during the fluctuation display of the symbols in the plurality of fluctuation display areas CA1 to CA3. It is determined whether or not the image portion of the hand is simultaneously included in the plurality of operation effective ranges EA5 to EA7 corresponding to the display areas CA1 to CA3.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2211, the stop priority data stored in the stop priority data storage area 94a of the sound light side ROM 94 is read out in step S2212. FIG. 55 is an explanatory diagram for describing stop priority data.

  As shown in FIG. 55, in the situation where symbol variation display is performed in all variation display areas CA1 to CA3, when all operation effective ranges EA5 to EA7 include the hand image part, the left The variable display area CA1 is set as a target to be preferentially stopped. In addition, at least the left variation display area CA1 and the middle variation display area CA2 in which the symbol variation display is performed, the image portion of the hand is included in the left operation effective range EA5 and the middle operation effective range EA6. In this case, the left variation display area CA1 is set as a target to be preferentially stopped. In addition, at least the left variation display area CA1 and the right variation display area CA3 in which the symbol variation display is performed, the image portion of the hand is included in the left operation effective range EA5 and the right operation effective range EA7. In this case, the left variation display area CA1 is set as a target to be preferentially stopped. In addition, the image area of the hand is included in the mid-use operation effective range EA6 and the right-hand operation effective range EA7 in a situation where the symbol variation display is performed at least in the middle variation display area CA2 and the right variation display area CA3. If it is, the right fluctuation display area CA3 is set as a target to be preferentially stopped.

  After referring to the stop priority data in step S2212, the corresponding various data are read out in step S2213. Also in the case where a negative determination is made in step S2212, the corresponding various data are read out in step S2213.

  The various data read out in step S2213 is common stop time data for light emission data and sound output data even when any of the variation display areas CA1 to CA3 is a stop target. By referring to the common stop time data in the light emission control process (step S503) and the sound output control process (step S504) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14), the display light emitting unit 23 is a pattern at the time of symbol stop Light emission is performed and a sound corresponding to the pattern at the time of symbol stop is output from the speaker unit 24. In step S2213, the display control device 96 transmits a display command indicating the occurrence of a stop, but the contents of the display command at the time of the stop differ depending on the fluctuation display areas CA1 to CA3 to be stopped. By receiving the display command, the display control device 96 causes the variation display areas CA1 to CA3 that are to be stopped this time to display symbols of a stop result. In this case, when the current stop operation effect is executed as the promotion occurrence effect, the number “7” is displayed regardless of the stop order of the variable display areas CA1 to CA3 targeted for the current stop. The symbol with "" will be displayed stopped. On the other hand, when the current stop operation effect is executed as the promotion non-occurrence effect, “7” when the variable display areas CA1 to CA3 targeted for the current stop are the first or second stop order. In the third stop order, a symbol different from the symbol attached with the numeral “7” is displayed in a stopped state.

  Thereafter, in step S2214, it is determined whether or not fluctuation display of symbols has been stopped in all of the fluctuation display areas CA1 to CA3. When an affirmative determination is made in step S2214, corresponding various data are read out in step S2215.

  When the processing at step S2215 is executed when the current stop operation effect is a promotion occurrence effect, light emission data and sound output data for the promotion occurrence are included. By referring to these data in the light emission control process (step S503) and the sound output control process (step S504) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14), the light emission of the pattern according to the data read in step S2213 After the sound output is performed, light emission is performed in the display light emitting unit 23 in the pattern at the time of promotion occurrence, and the sound corresponding to the pattern at the time of promotion occurrence is output from the speaker unit 24. Also, the display control unit 96 transmits a display command at the time of promotion occurrence to the display control unit 96. When the display control device 96 receives the display command, the display light emitting unit 23 starts light emission according to the pattern at the time of promotion occurrence and at the timing when output of sound by the pattern at the time of promotion occurrence is started from the speaker unit 24 The display control of the symbol display device 61 is performed so that the display effect indicating that the promotion has occurred is started.

  On the other hand, when the process of step S2215 is executed when the current stop operation effect is the promotion non-occurrence effect, light emission data and sound output data for the non-promotion state are included. By referring to these data in the light emission control process (step S503) and the sound output control process (step S504) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14), the light emission of the pattern according to the data read in step S2213 After the sound output is performed, light emission is performed in the pattern at the time of promotion non-occurrence in the display light emitting unit 23, and a sound corresponding to the pattern at the time of promotion non-occurrence is output from the speaker unit 24. Also, it transmits a display command at the time of promotion non-occurrence to the display control unit 96. When the display control device 96 receives the display command, the light emission by the display light emitting unit 23 is started to emit light and the speaker unit 24 is started to output the sound by the pattern when the promotion is not generated. At the timing, the display control of the symbol display device 61 is performed so that the display effect indicating that the promotion has not occurred is started.

  After the process of step S2215 is performed, the process proceeds to step S2216. In step S2216, both the corresponding imaging command flag and stop operation effect flag of the sound light side RAM 95 are cleared to "0". Thereafter, the present stop operation effect control process is ended.

  If it is determined in step S2209 that "1" is set in the reference flag, in step S2217, whether or not an effective operation for stop operation effect has occurred in a situation where single row display is being performed. Determine Here, with reference to the explanatory view of FIG. 54 (b), the processing content for determining whether or not the effective operation for the stop operation effect has occurred in the situation where single row display is performed will be described.

  When variation display of symbols is performed in a single variation display area CA4, after the process of step S2207 is performed, as shown in FIG. 54 (b), the image G for one frame is single A single operation effective range EA8 corresponding to one variation display area CA4 is set. The operation effective range EA8 for single use is set to occupy a partial region in the image G for one frame, and the occupied region is the operation effective range EA5 for the left, the operation effective range EA6 for the middle, and the right The area is set to be larger than any of the operation effective range EA7 for the operation. Furthermore, the operation effective range EA8 for single use is equal to or more than the total area of the operation effective range EA5 for the left, the area of the operation effective range EA6 for the middle, and the area of the operation effective range EA7 for the right Is set as If the image portion of the hand after the correction processing of step S2208 is performed is included in the operation effective range EA8, it is determined that the stop operation has been performed on the single variable display area CA4.

  In step S2217, it is determined that the stop operation has been performed because part of the hand image portion is included in the single-use operation effective range EA8. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be determined that the stop operation is performed by including a predetermined ratio or more such as 50% of the hand image portion, and the whole hand image portion may be It may be determined that the stop operation has been performed by being included. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2217, the corresponding various data are read out in step S2218, and then the process of step S2216 is performed, and the main stop operation effect control process is ended.

  If the process of step S2218 is executed when the current stop operation effect is a promotion occurrence effect, light emission data and sound output data for the promotion occurrence are read out. By referring to these data in the light emission control process (step S503) and the sound output control process (step S504) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14), light emission is performed in the pattern at the time of promotion occurrence in the display light emitting unit 23. At the same time, the speaker unit 24 outputs a sound corresponding to the pattern at the time of promotion occurrence. Also, the display control unit 96 transmits a display command at the time of promotion occurrence to the display control unit 96. When the display control device 96 receives the display command, the symbol display is performed so that the display effect indicating that the promotion has occurred is started after the high probability corresponding symbol is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 5 sec). The display control of the device 61 is performed.

  On the other hand, when the process of step S2218 is executed when the current stop operation effect is the promotion non-occurrence effect, the light emission data and sound output data for the non-promotion state are read out. By referring to these data in the light emission control process (step S503) and the sound output control process (step S504) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14), the light emission is performed in the pattern when the promotion does not occur. The speaker unit 24 outputs a sound corresponding to the non-promotion pattern. Also, it transmits a display command at the time of promotion non-occurrence to the display control unit 96. When the display control device 96 receives the display command, the display effect indicating that the promotion has not occurred is started after the low probability corresponding symbol is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds). The display control of the symbol display device 61 is performed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2202, a negative determination is made in step S2205, a positive determination is made in step S2206, a negative determination is made in step S2210, a negative determination is made in step S2214, Alternatively, if a negative determination is made in step S2217, it is determined in step S2219 whether the operation effective period has elapsed. In the operation effective period, measurement is started when “1” is set in the stop operation effect flag of the sound light side RAM 95 in step S2106 in the stop operation effect setting process (FIG. 52). The operation effective period is optional, but is set to, for example, 60 seconds.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2219, the main stop manipulation effect control process ends. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2219, the corresponding various data are read out in step S2220, and then the processing in step S2216 is performed, and the main stop operation effect control processing is ended.

  The various data read out in step S 2220 includes light emission data and sound output data for when the operation is not completed. By referring to these data in the light emission control process (step S503) and the sound output control process (step S504) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14), the light emission is performed in the pattern when the operation is not completed. The speaker unit 24 outputs a sound corresponding to the pattern when the operation is not completed. In addition, the display control device 96 transmits a display command when the operation is not completed. When the display control device 96 receives the display command, after the multi-row display and the single-row display performed up to that time are ended, if the current stop operation effect is a promotion occurrence effect, promotion occurs. Display control is performed so that the display effect indicating that is started, and the display effect indicating that the promotion has not occurred is started when the current stop operation effect is the promotion occurrence effect The display control of the symbol display device 61 is performed.

  As described above, by performing the stop operation effect, it is possible to execute an effect in which the variable display of the symbol is stopped according to the stop operation of the player. In particular, the player puts his hand toward the variable display areas CA1 to CA3 to be stopped at the time of the stop operation. It becomes possible to clearly associate the variation display areas CA1 to CA3 to be stopped with the aspect of the stop operation. This makes it possible to give the player the impression of actively participating in the game in the pachinko machine 10.

  In this case, when the reference switch 91a is arranged in the OFF position, a plurality of variable display areas CA1 to CA3 are displayed in a plurality of lines, whereas the reference switch 91a is arranged in the ON position. In this case, a single column display is performed in which a single variable display area CA4 is generated. As a result, basically, while performing diversification of stop operations by performing multiple-row display in which a plurality of variable display areas CA1 to CA3 are generated, the accuracy of capturing an image of one frame in the imaging substrate 71 decreases. In the situation, by simplifying the mode of the stop operation, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the variable display of the symbol is stopped regardless of the operation mode.

  Further, at the time of multi-row display, the respective variable display areas CA1 to CA3 are displayed side by side not in the vertical direction but in the horizontal direction on the display surface of the symbol display device 61. Ranges EA5 to EA7 are set side by side in the horizontal direction. This makes it possible to reduce the influence of the height position of the hand at the time of the stop operation in the multi-row display, and the player performs the operation for stopping the fluctuation display of the symbols in the predetermined fluctuation display areas CA1 to CA3. Nevertheless, the possibility of stopping the variable display of the symbol in the different variable display area is reduced.

  Further, in the configuration in which stop operations for a plurality of variable display areas CA1 to CA3 can be simultaneously executed, when the stop operation is simultaneously performed as such, one of the variable display areas CA1 to CA3 is performed according to a predetermined priority. Only the variation display of the symbol is stopped. Thus, for example, even if the hand trying to perform the stop operation in the left fluctuation display area CA1 enters not only the left operation effective range EA5 but also the middle operation effective area EA6 side, the left fluctuation It becomes possible to stop only the variable display of the symbols in the display area CA1.

<Continuous production>
Next, the content of continuous rendering and the control content for enabling execution of continuous rendering will be described.

  In the continuous effect, if the special information holding area 85b of the main side RAM 85 stores the holding information not targeted for the start of the game, it is highly probable that the holding information is likely to trigger a jackpot result. It is a series of effects to be performed in the game times executed prior to the game times triggered by the hold information, as well as the game times triggered by the hold information. In the game session in which the continuous effects are to be executed, effects using the same effect image are performed.

  The contents of the continuous effect will be described in detail. In this pachinko machine 10, as shown in the explanatory views of FIG. 56 (a) and FIG. 56 (b), fluctuation of symbols in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 in the symbol display device 61 as effects for game use. At the stage where the display is stopped and the reach display is started, a fish school effect exists in which the plurality of fish characters CH1 flow from the right end to the left end of the display surface. When the fish school effect is generated, a jackpot result is generated in the game round with a probability of 50%, so the player is expected to generate the fish group effect.

  In the continuous performance, an image used in the fish school effect is used. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 56A, a plurality of fish characters CH1 are displayed on the symbol display device 61 in the game run that is executed before the game run corresponding to the holding information that triggered the execution of the continuous effect. An advance notice effect of returning to the right end of the object appearing from the right end of the display surface to the halfway position in the lateral direction and becoming non-display is performed. The advance notice effect is performed in a situation where the variable display of symbols is performed in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the corresponding gaming round. In addition, the advance notice effect is executed in the game round corresponding to the hold information stored in the special view hold area 85b at the timing when the hold information serving as an execution trigger for the continuous effect is acquired. In addition, prior notice production occurs regardless of whether reach display occurs in the corresponding game times.

  On the other hand, in the game round corresponding to the hold information that has triggered the execution of the continuous effect, the final effect is executed. As a final effect, if a big hit result occurs in the game turn, a complete effect is performed in which a plurality of fish characters CH1 flow from the right end to the left end of the display surface of the symbol display device 61 as shown in FIG. . If the jackpot result does not occur in the game turn corresponding to the holding information that triggered the execution of the continuous effect, the completion effect shown in FIG. 56 (b) will be performed as the final effect if the execution lottery is performed in the execution lottery process On the other hand, if the execution lottery process is not performed, as shown in FIG. 56 (a), the fish characters CH1 appear from the right end of the display surface to the halfway position in the horizontal direction and return to the right end of the An incomplete effect to be displayed is performed as a final effect. In order to match the start timing of the effect with respect to the start timing of the game turn with the advance notice effect, the final effect is all symbols in the corresponding game turn regardless of whether or not the completion effect shown in FIG. 56 (b) is executed. It is performed in the condition where the variable display of the symbol is performed in the columns Z1 to Z3.

  The flow of the continuous effects will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 57 (a) shows the execution period of the game, FIG. 57 (b) shows the number of pieces of holding information stored in the special view holding area 85b, and FIG. 57 (c) continues the execution state of continuous effect FIG. 57 (d) shows an execution period of the advance notice effect, and FIG. 57 (e) shows an execution period of the final effect.

  At the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. In this case, as shown in FIG. 57 (b), the number of pieces of reservation information is reduced from two to one. Hold information is newly acquired as shown in FIG. 57 (b) at timing t2, timing t3 and timing t4 during a period in which the game circulation effect is continuing. As a result, the number of pending information items becomes four, which is the upper limit number. In this case, as shown in FIG. 57C, setting is made to a state in which continuous rendering should be performed for the hold information acquired at the timing of t4.

  After that, at each of the timing t5, the timing t6 and the timing t7, the effects for a new game cycle are started as shown in FIG. 57 (a), and as shown in FIG. 57 (d) The prior notice effect is executed. Then, at the timing of t8, the game round corresponding to the holding information which became the execution trigger of the continuous effect is started, so that the final effect is executed as shown in FIG. 57 (e) and the current continuous effect is ended. Do.

  Hereinafter, the processing content for performing continuous rendition will be described. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing setting processing of the hold command executed by the main MPU 83. In the process of setting the hold command, in the acquisition process of the hold information in step S301 in the special figure special power control process (FIG. 12), winning of the first operation port 54 or the second operation port 55 occurs and the hold information is new. Executed when acquired by In addition, the setting process of a pending | holding command is performed whenever new acquisition of pending | holding information is performed once.

  In the setting process of the hold command, first, in step S2301, numerical information corresponding to the big hit random number counter C1 is read out from the hold information acquired this time and newly stored in the special map hold area 85b. In the following step S2302, the main ROM 84 reads out a success or failure table corresponding to the current success or failure lottery mode. Then, in step S2303, it is determined whether the numerical information corresponding to the big hit random number counter C1 read out in step S2301 is the numerical information corresponding to the big hit result in the success or failure table read out in step S2302. If an affirmative determination is made in step S 2303, the hold command corresponding to the jackpot is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93 in step S 2304, and the setting process of the hold command is ended.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2303, the process proceeds to step S2305. In step S2305, numerical value information corresponding to the reach random number counter C3 is read out from the hold information acquired this time and newly stored in the special map hold area 85b. Thereafter, in step S2306, the outreach generation determination table is read from the main ROM 84, and it is determined whether the numerical information corresponding to the reach random number counter C3 read out in step S2305 corresponds to the occurrence of outreach. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2306, a reach-supporting hold command is transmitted to the sound-side MPU 93 in step S2307, and the setting process of the hold command is ended. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2306, the hold command corresponding to the disconnection is transmitted to the sound-side MPU 93 in step S2308, and the setting process of the hold command is ended.

  Next, continuous effect setting processing for causing continuous effect to be started will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The continuous effect setting process is executed each time the operation effect control process (step S512) is executed once in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14).

  First, in step S 2401, it is determined whether “1” is set in the restriction flag of the sound light side RAM 95. When "1" is set to the restriction flag, the main continuous effect setting process is ended as it is. As described above, the restriction flag is set to “1” when it is specified that the cancellation monitoring target is generated in the cancellation monitoring process (FIG. 25). Then, the situation where the restriction flag is set to “1” may be a situation where the imaging substrate 71 can not normally capture an image of one frame. In this case, by performing an affirmative determination in step S2401 and ending the continuous effect setting process as it is, it is possible to prevent the continuous effect from being executed in a situation where imaging can not be normally performed.

  If "1" is not set in the restriction flag, it is determined in step S2402 whether any pending command has been received from the main MPU 83 or not. If no hold command has been received, the main continuous effect setting process is ended, and if any hold command is received, the continuous lottery effect lottery process is executed in step S 2403.

  In an execution lottery process of continuous effects, numerical information of a counter for continuous effects periodically updated in the sound light side RAM 95 is read, and it is determined whether or not the read numerical information corresponds to the execution winning of continuous effects. . If the hold command received this time is a big hit response hold command, execution will be won with a probability of 1/2, and if it is a reach response hold command, execution won will be with a probability of 1/5, You will win the game with a probability of 1/20. In the following step S2404, it is determined whether the result of the lottery process in step S2403 is an execution winning. If it is not an execution winning, the main continuous effect setting process is ended as it is, and if it is an execution winning, the process proceeds to step S2405.

  In step S2405, it is determined whether the hold command received this time is a jackpot-compatible hold command. When an affirmative determination is made in step S2405, "1" is set in the completion effect flag provided in the sound light side RAM 95 in step S2406. The completion effect flag is a flag for specifying in the sound light side MPU 93 that the completion effect shown in FIG. 56 (b) should be executed as the final effect. If it is a hold command corresponding to the jackpot, by setting “1” to the completion effect flag, as a final effect when it becomes the execution state of the continuous effect triggered by the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result Completion effect is executed surely.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2405, it is determined in step S2407 whether the hold command received this time is a hold command for reach. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2407, an execution lottery process of completion effect is executed in step S2408. In the execution lottery process of the completion effect, the numerical information of the completion effect counter periodically updated in the sound light side RAM 95 is read, and it is determined whether the read numerical information corresponds to the execution winning of the completion effect. . In the execution lottery process, the completion effect is selected with a probability of 1/10. In the following step S2409, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery process in step S2408 is an execution winning. If the player has won the execution, the completion effect flag of the sound light side RAM 95 is set to "1" in step S2406. As a result, when the continuous effect is in an execution state triggered by the holding information corresponding to the execution of the outreach, the completion effect is executed with a predetermined probability (specifically, 1/10).

  If the process of step S2406 is executed, if the negative determination is made in step S2407, or if the negative determination is made in step S2409, continuous effect is provided to the number-of-executions counter provided in the sound light side RAM 95 in step S2410 A value corresponding to the number of games for which (previous notice effect and final effect) is executed is set. The total number of pending information when the pending information that triggered the sending of the pending command is acquired for the jackpot-compliant pending command, reach-compliant pending command, and off-going pending command transmitted from the main MPU 83 Is set. In step S 2410, information indicating the total number is read from the hold command received this time, and a value corresponding to the read numerical information is set in the execution number counter. The value set in the number-of-executions counter is decremented by one each time the game run in which the continuous effect is performed is finished.

  Thereafter, in step S 2411, “1” is set in both the continuous effect flag in the sound light side RAM 95 and the imaging command flag corresponding to the continuous effect, and the present continuous effect setting process is ended. By setting “1” in the continuous effect flag, the advance notice effect is executed in each game session until the value of the execution frequency counter of the sound light side RAM 95 becomes “1”. Specifically, the light emission data and the sound output data for the advance notice effect are read out, and the light emission data and the sound output data are the light emission control process (step S503) and the sound output control process (FIG. 14) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14). By referring to step S504, light emission is performed in the display light emitting unit 23 in the pattern for the advance notice effect, and the sound is output from the speaker unit 24 in the pattern for the advance notice effect. Furthermore, by transmitting a display command for the advance notice effect to the display control device 96, the advance notice effect is performed in the symbol display device 61. On the other hand, the final effect of this time is executed in the gaming round in which the value of the execution frequency counter of the sound light side RAM 95 is “1”. Specifically, the light emission data and sound output data for the final effect of this time are read out, and the light emission data and the sound output data are the light emission control processing (step S503) and the sound output control processing of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14). By referring to (Step S504), light emission is performed in the display light emitting unit 23 in the pattern for final effect of this time, and sound is output from the speaker unit 24 in the pattern for final effect of this time. Furthermore, when the display command for the final effect of this time is transmitted to the display control device 96, the final effect of this time is performed in the symbol display device 61. Further, by setting “1” to the imaging command flag, as described above, the irradiation instruction signal is transmitted toward the imaging substrate 71 in the imaging control process (FIG. 21) and imaging is performed on the imaging substrate 71. It is started.

  Next, continuous effect control processing for executing control for using the imaging result of the imaging substrate 71 in continuous effect will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The continuous effect control process is executed each time the operation effect control process (step S512) is executed once in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14).

  When "1" is set in the continuous effect flag of the sound light side RAM 95 (step S2501: YES), control is performed in the data table of the effect for game circulation read out to the sound light side RAM 95 in step S2502. It is determined whether or not the pointer data indicating the content of the object corresponds to the data indicating that the execution corresponding period of the continuous effect is in progress. That is, it is determined whether or not it is a period in which the advance notice effect or the final effect is performed in the game round in which the advance notice effect or the final effect is executed. If the negative determination is made in step S2502, the main continuous effect control process is ended, and if the positive determination is made in step S2502, the process proceeds to step S2503.

  In step S2503, by determining whether the value of the execution number counter of the sound light side RAM 95 is “1”, it is determined whether or not the current continuous effect is the final effect. If a negative determination is made in step S2503, the processing for advance notice effect shown in steps S2504 to S2513 is executed.

  In the advance notice rendering process, first, at step S2504, it is determined whether "1" is set in the imaging completion flag of the sound light side RAM 95 or not. When "1" is not set in the imaging completion flag, the continuous effect control process is ended. When “1” is set in the imaging completion flag, it means that imaging of an image of one frame for use in the advance notice effect is completed. In this case, the imaging completion flag is cleared to “0” in step S2505.

  In the subsequent step S2506, the hand data extraction process is executed as in step S1704 of the first notification effect control process (FIG. 39). Thereafter, in step S2507, it is determined whether extraction of hand data is completed. When extraction of hand data is completed, in step S2508, similarly to step S1707 of the first notification effect control process (FIG. 39), the process of setting the operation effective range corresponding to the height position group At the same time, in step S2509, position correction processing according to the distance data is executed as in step S1708 of the first notification effect control processing (FIG. 39).

  Thereafter, in step S2510, it is determined whether or not the effective operation for the advance notice effect has been performed. Here, how the advance notice effect is performed using the imaging result of the imaging substrate 71 will be described with reference to the explanatory view of FIG.

  At the timing at which the advance notice effect is started, as shown in FIG. 61 (a), the fish character CH1 performing the advance notice effect appears on the display surface of the symbol display device 61 more than the initial line IL Side). The initial line IL is set at an intermediate position in the movement direction of the fish character CH1 on the display surface, that is, an intermediate position in the lateral direction, and specifically, 1/1 from the end on the appearance source side in the lateral direction of the display surface. It is set to position 5.

  In the advance notice effect, the fish character CH1 appearing up to the position of the initial line IL is displayed on the display surface in accordance with the position of the hand arranged in front of the symbol display device 61 in front of the pachinko It is pulled out to the lateral center side. For example, in the case where the player's hand is taken out toward a location corresponding to a position 1/3 from the end on the appearance side in the horizontal direction of the display surface, as shown in FIG. The fish character CH1 appearing up to the position of the line IL is pulled out to the position of the operation line HL.

  However, if the fish character CH1 is pulled out to the end on the movement destination side or in the vicinity thereof in accordance with the operation of the player's hand, there is a possibility that the player may misidentify that the completion effect has been executed. Will occur. Therefore, the position where the fish character CH1 is pulled out in response to the player's operation for continuous effect is limited to be the position on the movement source side relative to the end on the movement destination side in the lateral direction of the display surface. In the pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. 61 (c), a limit line BL is set at the center position in the lateral direction of the display surface. As a result, even when the player's hand is extended to the right end position of the display surface, the fish character CH1 appears only up to the position of the limit line BL.

  Returning to the description of the continuous effect control process (FIG. 60), in the situation where the continuous effect is being executed, symbols are displayed in an image of one frame based on the distance data stored in the distance image storage area 95a of the sound light side RAM 95. A range corresponding to the entire display surface of the device 61 is set as the operation effective range. In step S2510, it is determined that the operation for prior notice effect has been performed by including a part of the image portion of the hand in the operation effective range. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be determined that an operation for prior notice effect is performed by including a predetermined ratio or more such as 50% of the hand image portion, It is good also as composition judged with operation for prior notice production being performed by including the whole. By the way, if the advance notice effect occurs, the symbol display device 61 explains that the expectation for generating a big hit result is high when the sink operation is performed and the fish character CH1 flows to the end on the movement destination side. It is configured to be performed. If a negative determination is made in step S2510, the main continuous effect control process ends, and if a positive determination is made in step S2510, the process proceeds to step S2511.

  In step S 2511, it is determined whether the position of the player's hand is within the restriction range. Specifically, in an image of one frame based on the distance data, whether or not the hand image part is located on the moving destination side of the initial line IL and on the occurrence source side of the limit line BL. Determine

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S 2511, the process corresponding to the position of the hand is performed in step S 2512, and the continuous effect control process is ended. Specifically, a display command for causing the fish character CH1 to appear to the operation line HL corresponding to the position of the hand this time is transmitted to the display control device 96. As a result, as shown in FIG. 61 (b), the symbol display device 61 causes the fish character CH1 to appear up to the operation line HL.

  If a negative determination is made in step S 2511, the process corresponding to the restricted position is executed in step S 2513, and the continuous effect control process is ended. Specifically, when the position of the hand this time is the position of the initial line IL or the end portion side of the appearance source with respect to the initial line IL, a display command for causing the fish character CH1 to appear to the initial line IL is displayed It transmits to the control device 96. As a result, as shown in FIG. 61A, the symbol display device 61 displays an image in which the fish character CH1 appears up to the initial line IL. Further, when the position of the hand this time is the position of the limit line BL or the end of the movement destination beyond the limit line BL, the display control device 96 for causing the fish character CH1 to appear up to the limit line BL is displayed. Send to As a result, as shown in FIG. 61 (c), an image in which the fish character CH1 appears up to the limit line BL of the symbol display device 61 is displayed.

  Here, the execution corresponding period of the continuous effect is set to, for example, 10 seconds in each game turn, but during the execution corresponding period, it follows the position of the player's hand between the initial line IL and the limit line BL The fish character CH1 moves to. In this case, when the player moves the hand from the end on the appearance side of the fish character CH1 on the display surface of the symbol display device 61 toward the end on the movement destination as a sink operation described later, the initial line The fish character CH1 moves so as to follow the player's hand between IL and the limit line BL, but the position of the limit line BL remains at the top without following the position beyond the limit line BL. . In addition, when the execution corresponding period of the continuous effect has elapsed in the game time when the advance notice effect is executed, the advance notice effect of the game time is ended at that point, and the position where the fish character CH1 is displayed Is hidden in the

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2503, that is, if the current continuous effect is the final effect, the final effect control process is executed in step S2514, and the present continuous effect control process is ended. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing final effect control processing.

  First, in step S 2601, it is determined whether “1” is set in the imaging completion flag of the sound light side RAM 95. When “1” is set in the imaging completion flag, it means that imaging of an image of one frame to be used in the final effect is completed. In this case, the imaging completion flag is cleared to "0" in step S2602.

  In the subsequent step S2603, the hand data extraction process is executed as in step S1704 of the first notification effect control process (FIG. 39). Thereafter, in step S2604, it is determined whether extraction of hand data is completed. When extraction of hand data is completed, in step S2605, similarly to step S1707 of the first notification effect control process (FIG. 39), the process of setting the operation effective range corresponding to the height position group At the same time, in step S2606, position correction processing according to the distance data is executed as in step S1708 of the first notification effect control processing (FIG. 39).

  Thereafter, in step S2607, it is determined whether or not the player has performed a flow operation. The flow operation is an operation of moving the hand in the direction in which the fish character CH1 moves in the fish school effect in front of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the window panel 22. The movement distance is set to be equal to or larger than the dimension in the movement direction of the fish character CH1 on the display surface of the symbol display device 61, ie, equal to or larger than the dimension in the lateral direction. Therefore, since it is determined whether or not the hand has moved in the lateral direction by a predetermined distance or more when determining whether or not the flow operation has been performed, the flow operation is performed using a plurality of imaging results of the imaging substrate 71. It is determined whether or not. In the sound light side RAM 95, it is possible to store lateral position information of the hand extracted from the imaging result of the imaging substrate 71 for a plurality of imaging processes, and the flow is performed based on the plurality of positional information. It is determined whether an operation has been performed.

  When the final effect is started, an image for one frame based on the distance data stored in the distance image storage area 95a of the sound side RAM 95 is displayed on the display surface of the symbol display 61 as in the case of the prior notice effect. Although the range corresponding to the whole is set as the operation effective range, it is determined that the flow operation is performed by performing the above operation in a state where a part of the hand image part is included in the operation effective range. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be determined that the flow operation is performed by performing the above operation in a state where a predetermined ratio or more is included, such as 50% of the hand image portion. The configuration may be such that it is determined that the flow operation is performed by performing the above operation in a state where the entire image portion of the hand is included. By the way, when the final effect is generated, if the sink character is operated and the fish character CH1 flows to the end of the movement destination side, the symbol display device 61 explains that the expectation for generating the big hit result is high. It has become

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2607, it is determined whether "1" is set in the completion effect flag of the sound light side RAM 95 in step S2608. When an affirmative determination is made in step S2608, various data for completion effect is read out in step S2609. The various data for the completion effect include light emission data and sound output data for the completion effect. By referring to these data in the light emission control process (step S503) and the sound output control process (step S504) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14), light emission is performed in the pattern for the effect effect in the display light emitting unit 23. At the same time, the speaker unit 24 outputs a sound corresponding to the pattern for the final effect. In step S2609, a display command for completion effect is transmitted to the display control device 96. When the display control device 96 receives the display command, the display control device 96 performs display control of the symbol display device 61 so that the completion effect is performed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2608, various data for uncompleted effects are read out in step S2610. The various data for incomplete rendering includes light emission data and sound output data for incomplete rendering. By referring to these data in the light emission control process (step S503) and the sound output control process (step S504) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14), light emission is performed in the pattern for the incomplete effect in the display light emitting unit 23. At the same time, the speaker unit 24 outputs a sound corresponding to the pattern for the incomplete effect. In step S2610, the display control device 96 transmits a display command for the incomplete effect. When the display control device 96 receives the display command, the display control device 96 performs display control of the symbol display device 61 so that the incomplete effect is performed.

  When the process of step S2609 or step S2610 is executed, in step S2611, all the corresponding imaging command flag, continuous effect flag, and complete effect flag of the sound light side RAM 95 are cleared to “0”. Thereafter, the final effect control process ends.

  On the other hand, if the negative determination is made in step S2601, the negative determination is made in step S2604, or the negative determination is made in step S2607, whether or not the execution corresponding period of the final effect has passed in step S2612. Determine if During the execution corresponding period of the final effect, the measurement is started when the game turn for which the final effect is to be executed is started. Although the execution corresponding period of the final effect is arbitrary, it is set, for example, to 10 seconds.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2612, the final effect control process ends. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2612, the final imaging control process is performed after all corresponding imaging command flags, the continuous effect flag, and the complete effect flag of the sound and light side RAM 95 are cleared to "0" in step S2611. Finish. In this case, regardless of whether the completion effect flag is set to "1" or not, the symbol display device 61 displays an image showing how the fish character CH1 is drawn from the end on the appearance source side to the outside of the display surface Be done.

  As described above, by performing the continuous rendition, it is possible to suitably enhance the expectation for the generation of the jackpot result through repetition of the same rendition over a plurality of game times. In this case, when the advance notice effect is being executed, the fish character CH1 appears up to the position corresponding to the hand the player has issued for the advance notice effect. Thereby, it is possible to perform the advance notice effect in a mode according to the operation of the player, and it is possible to diversify the mode of the advance notice effect, and the advance notice effect is continuously performed over a plurality of game times. Even if it occurs, it is possible to prevent the prior notice effect from being bored.

  Even if the fish character CH1 appears up to the position according to the player's operation during the advance notice effect, it limits the limit line BL set in the middle of the moving direction of the fish character CH1 on the display surface of the symbol display device 61. Done as. This makes it possible to prevent the fish character CH1 from flowing to the end on the movement destination side in the situation where the prior notice effect is being executed, and the fish character CH1 is placed at the position according to the operation as described above. While making it possible to make it appear, it is possible to prevent the player from falsely recognizing that the completion effect has been executed although the completion effect has not actually been performed.

  When the completion effect is executed as the final effect, the completion effect is executed on condition that the player has performed the flow operation. As a result, it is possible for the player to think that the effect of causing the fish character CH1 to flow to the end on the movement destination side is generated by the player's own operation, and to enhance the sense of superiority when the completion effect is executed. It becomes possible.

  In the configuration in which the player can not recognize which game turn is the execution target of the final presentation when the continuous presentation is being executed, the situation is one in which the prior notice presentation and the final presentation are being executed. Also in the symbol display device 61, it is informed that the flow operation should be performed. In this way, in the situation where the continuous effects are being executed, it is possible to perform the flow operation while expecting the completion effects to occur in each game time. In this case, in the advance notice effect, the fish character CH1 moves toward the end on the movement destination side in response to the player's flow operation, but as already described, the limit line is located at an intermediate position in the movement direction. By setting the BL, it is possible to make the player clearly recognize that it is different from the completion effect while making the player expect the occurrence of the completion effect until halfway through the flow operation.

  Even if the player's hand is disposed outward of the end on the appearance side of the fish character CH1 on the display surface of the symbol display device 61 during the execution corresponding period of the continuous effect of each game run, the fish character CH1 Is not retracted more than the initial line IL. As a result, it is possible to maintain the notification that it is the execution corresponding period of the continuous effect regardless of the player's operation mode.

  In the continuous effect control process, it is not determined whether the extracted hand data corresponds to the reference target distance set in the other effect control process or more. The operation for moving the fish character CH1 is an operation for bringing out the hand toward the front of the pachinko machine 10 with a predetermined position as a first notification rendering operation, a second notification rendering operation, a division rendering operation, and a stop operation as a target. Is an operation to move the hand laterally. The operation is assumed not only to be performed before the surface 22 a of the window panel 22 but also to be performed at a position away from the surface 22 a to the front of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, as described above, by not performing the determination as to whether or not the distance is the reference target distance, it is possible to grasp the operation in the continuous rendering without omission.

<Confrontation production>
Next, the contents of the confrontation effect and the control contents for enabling the execution of the confrontation effect will be described.

  In the confrontation effect, when the selection object result presented by the player with respect to the appearance object result displayed on the pachinko machine 10 at the determination timing of the confrontation result is a victory result, the effect on the winning side is executed thereafter to draw It is an effect that executes an effect on the non-victim side after that if the result or the defeat result. The confrontation effect is set as a kind of effect for game use, and can be executed as a notice effect effect in a situation where the variable display of symbols is performed in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 61, and the upper symbol It can be executed as reach effect in a situation where the variable display of symbols is stopped and the reach display is performed in the row Z1 and the lower row design row Z3. When the confrontation effect is performed, the execution content of the effect after the determination timing of the confrontation result is set to either the content corresponding to the winning result or the content corresponding to the non-winning result.

  Specifically, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. When the game is played, the opponent character CH2 is displayed on the symbol display device 61 and the result area WE is displayed. The confrontation partner character CH2 presents any one of "Goo", "Choki" and "Par" as an appearance target result of the pachinko machine 10 side at the determination timing of the confrontation result. On the other hand, in the result area WE, the selection target result (any one of "goo", "choki" and "par") presented by the player before the determination timing of the confrontation result is displayed. In the case of FIG. 63 (a), since "Goo" is displayed in the result area WE while the confrontation partner character CH2 outputs "Goo", a non-winning result is obtained. On the other hand, in the case of FIG. 63 (b), since the opponent character CH2 is producing "par" while "tiki" is displayed in the result area WE, a winning result is obtained.

  Next, a confrontation effect setting process for causing the confrontation effect to be started will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The confrontation effect setting process is performed each time the operation effect control process (step S512) is executed once in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14).

  First, in step S 2701, it is determined whether “1” is set in the restriction flag of the sound light side RAM 95. If the restriction flag is set to “1”, the match presentation effect setting process is ended. As described above, the restriction flag is set to “1” when it is specified that the cancellation monitoring target is generated in the cancellation monitoring process (FIG. 25). Then, the situation where the restriction flag is set to “1” may be a situation where the imaging substrate 71 can not normally capture an image of one frame. In this case, by making an affirmative determination in step S2701 and ending the confrontation effect setting process as it is, it becomes possible to prevent the confrontation effect from being executed in a situation where imaging can not be normally performed.

  If "1" is not set in the restriction flag, it is determined in step S2702 whether the start condition of the first confrontation effect is satisfied. The first confrontation effect is performed as reach effect in a situation where the variable display of symbols is stopped in upper symbol row Z1 and lower symbol row Z3 of symbol display device 61 and reach display is performed. In the reach effect, while the variable display of the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is reduced, while a movie effect using the effect A character is being performed, a premium effect in which the occurrence of the jackpot result is determined occurs. Instead of the special reach A effect for premium that will eventually be a big hit result and the fluctuation display of symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 being animated, a movie effect using a character for effect A is performed and a premium effect occurs. There is a special reach A effect for outliers that will eventually result in an outlier. The special reach A effect for premium and the special reach A effect for deviating are effects that can occur even in situations other than the first confrontation effect. In addition, for special reach A production for premium and special reach A production for removal, the variation display of symbols is stopped in upper symbol row Z1 and lower row symbol row Z3 of symbol display device 61, and the variation of symbols in middle symbol row Z2 This is an effect to be performed after the normal reach effect for displaying is performed, and the execution durations of the special reach A effect for premium and the special reach A effect for deviating are the same. When the winning result is obtained in the first confrontation effect, special reach A effect for premium is executed, and when the non-winning result is obtained in the first confrontation effect, special reach A effect for losing is executed.

  The start condition of the first confrontation effect is the case where the sound data side RAM 95 reads out the data table of the effect for the game circulation, and the point data indicating the content of the control object in the data table is the first confrontation effect It corresponds to the case where it corresponds to the data indicating the start of. When an affirmative determination is made in step S2702, in step S2703, "1" is set in the forcible effect flag provided in the sound light side RAM 95. The forcible effect flag is a flag for specifying in the sound and light side MPU 93 that the forcible effect should be executed as the confrontation effect. A forced effect is an effect that occurs when the content of the effect for the game circulation after the confrontation effect is decided regardless of the selection object result selected by the player at the confrontation effect, and the victory result and the non-win result are It is an effect that is determined regardless of the selection target result that the player selects.

  Thereafter, in step S2704, various data for confrontation effect are read out from the sound side ROM 94 to the sound side RAM 95. The various data for confrontation effect includes light emission data and sound output data for confrontation effect, and the light emission data and the sound output data are the light emission control process (step S 503) and sound of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) As referred to in the output control process (step S504), light emission is performed in the display light emitting unit 23 in the pattern for confrontation effect, and the sound is output from the speaker unit 24 in the pattern for confrontation effect. Furthermore, in step S2704, a display command for confrontation effect is transmitted to the display control device 96. The display control device 96 causes the symbol display device 61 to perform a confrontation effect as shown in FIG. 63 (a) and FIG. 63 (b) by receiving the display command.

  Thereafter, in step S2705, after setting “1” to the imaging command flag corresponding to the confrontation effect in the sound light side RAM 95, the present confrontation effect setting process is ended. By setting “1” to the imaging command flag, as described above, the irradiation instruction signal is transmitted toward the imaging substrate 71 in the imaging control process (FIG. 21), and imaging is started in the imaging substrate 71. Ru.

  If the start condition of the first confrontation effect is not satisfied (step S2702: NO), it is determined in step S2706 whether the start condition of the second confrontation effect is satisfied. The second confrontation effect is performed as a notice effect in a situation in which the variable display of the symbols is performed in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 61. In the notice effect, there are a small bubble effect in which many small bubbles are displayed on the display surface of the symbol display device 61 and a large bubble effect in which many large bubbles are displayed on the display surface of the symbol display device 61 There is. These small bubble effects and large bubble effects are effects that can occur even in situations other than the second confrontation effect, and in situations other than the second confrontation effect, the small bubble effect is better when the large bubble effect is executed. The appearance frequency is set so that the degree of expectation that will be the reach display thereafter and the degree of expectation that will result in the jackpot result will be higher than when executed. When the winning result is obtained in the second confrontation effect, the large bubble effect is executed, and when the non-winning result is obtained in the second confrontation effect, the small bubble effect is executed.

  The start condition of the second confrontation effect is the case where the sound data side RAM 95 reads out the data table of the effect for the game circulation, and the pointer data indicating the contents of the control object in the data table is the second confrontation effect It corresponds to the case where it corresponds to the data indicating the start of.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2706, a lottery process of appearance targets is executed in step S2707. In the appearance target lottery process, the appearance target result displayed by the confrontation partner character CH2 is determined by lottery. Specifically, numerical information of the counter for appearance targets periodically updated in the sound light side RAM 95 is read out, and the read out numerical information corresponds to any one of "goo", "choki" and "par". Determine the In this case, the probability that "goo" is selected, the probability that "choki" is selected, and the probability that "par" is selected are the same. In the following step S2708, the result of the lottery process of the appearance target in step S2707 is stored in the appearance target storage area 95f provided in the sound light side RAM 95.

  Thereafter, at step S2709, the post-play enable flag provided in the sound-side RAM 95 is set to "1", and at step S2704 various data for confrontation effect are read out. At step S2705, the sound-side RAM 95 After setting “1” to the corresponding imaging command flag in, the match presentation effect setting process is ended. The post-out possible flag is a flag for specifying in the sound light side MPU 93 that the post-out possible effect should be executed as the confrontation effect. The after-drawable effect is an effect that occurs when the content of the effect for the game circulation after the confrontation effect can be changed according to the selection target result selected by the player in the confrontation effect, and further, the pachinko machine 10 side A period in which the player can select the selection target result after confirming the appearance target result is a collateralized effect.

  If the start condition of the second confrontation effect is not satisfied (step S2706: NO), it is determined whether or not the start condition of the third confrontation effect is satisfied in step S2710. The third confrontation effect is performed as reach effect in a situation where the variable display of symbols is stopped in upper symbol row Z1 and lower symbol row Z3 of symbol display device 61 and reach display is performed. In the reach effect, while the variable display of the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is reduced, a premium effect is generated in which the occurrence of the jackpot result is determined in the situation where the moving image effect using the effect B character is being performed. In addition to the special reach B effect for premium that will eventually be a big hit result, and the variation display of the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 being reduced, an animation effect using a character for effect B is performed and a premium effect occurs. Instead of the special reach B effect for the big hit that will eventually be a big hit result and the variation display of the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 being reduced, a movie effect using the effect B character is performed and finally it is There is a special reach B effect for outliers that results in outliers. These special reach B effects for premium and special reach B effects for jackpot are effects that can occur even in situations other than the third confrontation effect. In addition, special reach B production for premium and special reach B production for big hit are stopped in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower row symbol row Z3 of the symbol display device 61, and the symbol variation in the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped. These are effects performed after the normal reach effect for displaying is performed, and the execution durations of the special reach B effect for premium and the special reach B effect for jackpot are the same. When the victory result is obtained in the third confrontation effect, special reach B effect for premium is executed, and when the non-winning result is obtained in the third confrontation effect, special reach B effect for jackpot is executed.

  The start condition of the third confrontation effect is the case where the sound data side RAM 95 reads out the data table of the effect for game circulation, and the point data indicating the content of the control object in the data table is the third confrontation effect It corresponds to the case where it corresponds to the data indicating the start of.

  When a negative determination is made in step S2710, the final match presentation effect setting process is ended as it is, and when a positive determination is made in step S2710, the process proceeds to step S2711. In step S 2711, a lottery process of whether or not to postout is performed.

  In the lottery process of whether or not the post-out is made, it is determined whether the post-drawable effect described above is performed or the late-out impossible effect is to be performed as the current confrontation effect. The post-impossible-to-out effect is an effect that occurs when the content of the effect for the game circulation after the confrontation effect can be changed according to the selection target result selected by the player in the confrontation effect, and further, the pachinko machine 10 side It is an effect that the period for enabling the player to select the selection target result after confirming the appearance target result is not secured. In the lottery process of post-production permission or absence, numerical information of the post-production availability counter periodically updated in the sound light side RAM 95 is read, and it is determined whether or not the read-out numerical information corresponds to the post-production possible effect. Do. In this case, the late-out possible effect is selected with a probability of 1/3, and the late-out impossible effect is selected with a probability of 2/3.

  In step S2712, it is determined whether or not the post-out possible effect has been selected in the post-out possibility lottery process in step S2711. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2712, the process proceeds to step S2707, and a process for executing a post-out possible effect as a confrontation effect is executed. If a negative determination is made in step S2712, a lottery process for an appearance target is executed in step S2713, and the lottery result is stored in the sound light side RAM 95 in step S2714. The processing content of these step S2713 and step S2714 is the same as step S2707 and step S2708.

  After that, in step S2715, the post-production disable flag provided in sound-side RAM 95 is set to "1", and in step S2704 various data for confrontation effect is read out, and in step S2705 sound-side RAM 95 After setting “1” to the corresponding imaging command flag in, the match presentation effect setting process is ended. The late-out impossibility flag is a flag for specifying in the sound light side MPU 93 that the late-out impossibility effect should be executed as the confrontation effect.

  In addition, even if any of forced presentation, late departure possible presentation and late departure impossible effect is executed, the effect contents in the display light emitting unit 23, the speaker unit 24 and the symbol display device 61 during the execution period of the confrontation effect are It is common contents. Therefore, even if the player visually recognizes the contents of the confrontation effect, it is not possible to identify which one of the forced effect, the late turnout effect and the late turnout effect is being executed.

<Forced production>
Next, forced presentation control processing for executing control for using the imaging result of the imaging substrate 71 in forced presentation in the confrontation presentation will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The forcible effect control process is executed each time the operation effect control process (step S512) is executed once in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14).

  When "1" is set to the forced effect flag of the sound light side RAM 95 (step S2801: YES), control is performed in the data table of the effect for game circulation read out to the sound light side RAM 95 at step S2802. It is determined whether the pointer data indicating the content of the object corresponds to the data indicating that the first confirmation period is in progress.

  In the forced effect, as shown in the time chart of FIG. 66, when the forced effect is started at the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 66 (b), the confrontation effect is started in the symbol display device 61 and An explanation period is started in which it is explained that the player corresponding to the confrontation effect wins the effect corresponding to the victory. When the explanation period ends at the timing of t2, as shown in FIG. 66C, the period before the game in which the display of “Janken” is performed is performed from the timing of t2 to the timing of t4, and is called “pong”. A game determination period in which display is performed is performed from timing t4 to timing t5. When the game determination period ends, both the appearance target result on the pachinko machine 10 side and the selection target result on the player side are displayed on the symbol display device 61, and the confrontation effect is ended at the timing of t6. Among them, the first confirmation period is set from the timing t3 which is the middle timing of the pre-match period to the timing t5 which is the end timing of the match determination period. Although the length of the first confirmation period is arbitrary, the pachinko machine 10 is set to 2 seconds.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2802, it is determined in step S2803 whether "1" is set in the imaging completion flag of the sound light side RAM 95 or not. If the imaging completion flag is not set to “1”, the present compulsory presentation control processing is ended as it is, and if the imaging completion flag is set to “1”, one frame worth for use in the compulsory presentation It means that the imaging of the image of is completed. In this case, the imaging completion flag is cleared to "0" in step S2804.

  In the following step S2805, the hand data extraction process is executed as in step S1704 of the first notification effect control process (FIG. 39). When the confrontation effect is executed, the range corresponding to the entire display surface of the symbol display device 61 is effective for the image for one frame based on the distance data stored in the distance image storage area 95a of the sound light side RAM 95 In step S2805, an image portion of the hand which is entirely included in the operation effective range is extracted. The contents of the hand data extraction process are the same as in the case of steps S2905 and S3005 described later. Thereafter, in step S2806, it is determined whether extraction of hand data is completed. If the extraction of the hand data is completed, the collation process of the selection object is executed in step S2807.

  In the collation process of the selection object, it is collated whether the hand data extracted in step S2805 corresponds to “Go”, “Choki” or “Par” which is the selection object of the player. In this case, if the extracted hand data matches 90% or more as the shape of the hand of "goo", it is specified that the selection object is "goo", and the extracted hand data is the hand of "chow" When 90% or more matches as the shape of the object, the selection target is identified as "Choki", and when the extracted hand data matches 90% or more as the shape of the hand of "par", it is selected Identify the subject as a "par". Thereafter, in step S2808, it is determined whether the extraction of the selection target is completed. When the extraction of the selection object has not been completed, the present forced presentation control process is ended as it is. If the extraction of the selection object has been completed, this forced presentation control process is ended after the selection object data extracted this time is overwritten in the selection object storage area 95g provided in the sound and light side RAM 95 in step S2809. Do. The selection target storage area 95g is initialized when the confrontation effect ends, and the selection target data is not stored.

  On the other hand, if it is not in the first confirmation period, a negative determination is made in step S2802, and the process proceeds to step S2810. In step S 2810, pointer data indicating the content of the control target in the data table of the effect for game circulation read out to the sound light side RAM 95 corresponds to the data indicating that the first confirmation period of the forced effect has passed. Determine if there is. If a negative determination is made in step S 2810, the present compulsory presentation control processing is ended as it is, and if a positive determination is made in step S 2810, the process proceeds to step S 2811.

  In step S2811, it is determined whether selection target data is stored in the selection target storage area 95g of the sound light side RAM 95. If the selection target data is stored, the setting processing of the selection target data is executed in step S2812. In the selection target data setting process, the selection target data stored in the selection target storage area 95g is read, and a display command corresponding to the read selection target data is transmitted to the display control device 96. When the display control device 96 receives the display command, the selection target result corresponding to the selection target data currently stored in the result area WE of the symbol display device 61 is displayed.

  That is, in the result area WE of the symbol display device 61, the image of the extracted hand data is not displayed as it is, but the image data of the selection object result stored in advance in the character ROM of the display control device 96 The image read out and corresponding to the read out image data is displayed as an image of the selection target result. The image data includes image data for displaying an image of "goo", image data for displaying an image of "chuki", and image data for displaying an image of "par". ing. The imaging substrate 71 is configured such that the image based on the image data set in advance corresponding to each of the selection target results is displayed instead of the image of the hand data extracted in this way being displayed as it is. It becomes possible to clearly show the selection target result of the player specified in the pachinko machine 10 regardless of the accuracy of the image of one frame taken in the above.

  Thereafter, in step S2813, it is determined whether or not an effect corresponding to the winning result is executed in the current game round. As already explained, the compulsory presentation is executed as the first confrontation presentation, and the special reach A presentation for premium is executed when the victory result is obtained in the first confrontation production, and the non-winning result is performed. An off special reach A effect is executed. Then, which of the special reach A effect for premium and the special reach A effect for losing is executed is the main side command corresponding process (FIG. 15) when the effect for the game cycle is started this time. It is determined based on the display duration time of the game times. Therefore, when forced rendering is started, it is already decided which of the winning result and the non-winning result will occur. In step S2813, it is determined whether or not special reach A effect for premium is executed in the current game run by referring to the data table of the game run effect read out to the sound light side RAM 95. Then, it is determined whether or not it corresponds to the victory result.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S2813, setting processing of appearance target data for winning is executed in step S2814. Specifically, the current selection target data is read out from the selection target storage area 95g, and the appearance target data in which the selection target data is a winning result is selected. Then, the display control device 96 transmits a display command corresponding to the appearance target data. The display control device 96 causes the confrontation partner character CH2 of the symbol display device 61 to display the appearance target result corresponding to the appearance target data by receiving the display command. In addition, the display of the selection target result in the result area WE of the symbol display device 61 and the display of the appearance target result in the confrontation partner character CH2 are simultaneously performed.

  In addition, in step S2814, after the display of the selection target result and the display of the appearance target result are performed for a predetermined period, a light emission for performing an effect indicating that the player has won in the confrontation effect is performed. Data and sound output data are read out from the sound side ROM 94 to the sound side RAM 95. By referring to these data in the light emission control process (step S503) and the sound output control process (step S504) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14), light emission is performed with the winning pattern in the display light emitting unit 23. The speaker unit 24 outputs a sound corresponding to the winning pattern. In addition, when the display control device 96 receives a display command corresponding to the appearance target data, the display control device 96 performs display control of the symbol display device 61 so that a display effect indicating that winning is performed after the result display is performed. In addition, after these effects for victory are over, special reach A effects for premium are started. The data indicating that the special reach A effect for the premium should be executed is set in the data table of the effect for the game time at the start of the game time.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2813, in step S2815, a setting process of non-win response target data is executed. Specifically, the current selection target data is read out from the selection target storage area 95g, and appearance target data in which the selection target data is a non-winning result is selected. In this case, it is determined by lottery whether the selection target data is selected to be a defeated result or whether a selection result is selected. Then, the display control device 96 transmits a display command corresponding to the appearance target data. The display control device 96 causes the confrontation partner character CH2 of the symbol display device 61 to display the appearance target result corresponding to the appearance target data by receiving the display command. In addition, the display of the selection target result in the result area WE of the symbol display device 61 and the display of the appearance target result in the confrontation partner character CH2 are simultaneously performed.

  Also, in step S2815, after the display of the selection target result and the display of the appearance target result are performed for a predetermined period, an effect indicating that the player has not won in the confrontation effect is performed. Light emission data and sound output data are read from the sound light side ROM 94 to the sound light side RAM 95. By referring to these data in the light emission control process (step S503) and the sound output control process (step S504) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14), light emission is performed in the non-wining pattern in the display light emitting unit 23. At the same time, the speaker unit 24 outputs a sound corresponding to the non-winning pattern. In addition, when the display control device 96 receives the display command corresponding to the appearance target data, the display control device 61 controls the display of the symbol display device 61 so that the display effect indicating that the user did not win after the result display is performed. Do. Incidentally, after these non-winning effects are ended, the special reach A effects for falling off are started. The data indicating that the special reach A effect for the removal should be performed is set in the data table of the effect for the game cycle at the start of the game cycle.

  If the process of step S2814 has been executed, or if the process of step S2815 has been executed, in step S2816 both of the corresponding imaging command flag and the forcible effect flag of the sound light side RAM 95 are cleared to "0". The present forced presentation control process is ended.

  On the other hand, when the selection target data is not stored in the selection target storage area 95g and a negative determination is made in step S2811, the setting process of confrontation avoidance is executed in step S2817. In the setting process, a display command corresponding to the confrontation avoidance is transmitted to the display control device 96. By receiving the display command, the display control device 96 causes the symbol display device 61 to display a message indicating that no confrontation was finally made. Thereafter, in step S2816, both the corresponding imaging command flag and the forcible effect flag of the sound light side RAM 95 are cleared to “0”, and then the forcible effect control process is ended.

  Next, how forced presentation is performed will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 67 (a) shows an execution period of forced presentation, FIG. 67 (b) shows a first confirmation period, and FIG. 67 (c) shows a timing at which a storage process of a selection object is executed. Shows the timing when the appearance target result is selected, and FIG. 67 (e) shows the execution period of the result display.

  Forced presentation is started as shown in FIG. 67 (a) at timing t1, and a first confirmation period is started as shown in FIG. 67 (b) at timing t2. The first confirmation period continues up to the timing of t7. In this period, as shown in FIG. 67 (c), the storage process of the selection target is performed at each of the timing of t3, the timing of t4, the timing of t5, and the timing of t6. To be executed. That is, in the first confirmation period, whenever the hand data capable of extracting the selection target result is imaged on the imaging substrate 71, the selection target data corresponding to the hand data at that time is overwritten on the selection target storage area 95g. . Thus, even if selection target data can not be extracted from the player's hand in the game determination period, it is possible to display the selection target result using the selection target data stored up to that point. Become.

  Thereafter, when the first confirmation period ends as shown in FIG. 67 (b) at the timing of t7, appearance target data corresponding to final selection target data is selected as shown in FIG. 67 (d). Ru. Then, as shown in FIG. 67 (e), the result display is performed from the timing of t8 to the timing of t9, and the forcible effect is ended as shown in FIG. 67 (a) at the timing of t9.

<Post-playable effect>
Next, the post-out possible control process of executing control for using the imaging result of the imaging substrate 71 in the post-out possible effect of the confrontation effect will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. It is to be noted that the post-payout possible control process is executed each time the operation effect control process (step S512) is executed once in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14).

  When "1" is set to the post-playout possible flag of the sound light side RAM 95 (step S2901: YES), in the data table of the effect for the game circulation read out to the sound light side RAM 95 in step S2902. It is determined whether or not pointer data indicating the content of the control target corresponds to data indicating that the second confirmation period is in progress.

  In the post-drawable effect, as shown in the time chart of FIG. 69, when the post-drawable effect is started at the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 69 (b), in the symbol display device 61, the confrontation effect is started An explanation period is started in which it is described that the player can win the game by winning and the game is played by the player in the confrontation game. When the explanation period is ended at the timing t2, as shown in FIG. 69 (c), the period before the game where the display of "Janken" is performed is performed from the timing t2 to the timing t4, The game determination period in which the display “is displayed” is performed from the timing t4 to the timing t5. When the game determination period ends, the appearance target result on the pachinko machine 10 side is displayed on the symbol display device 61, and the timing after the game determination period ends and before the confrontation effect is ended at the timing of t7. The selected result on the player side is displayed on the symbol display device 61 at time t6. Among these, the second confirmation period is set from the timing of t3 which is the middle timing of the pre-match period to the timing of t6 which is after the progress of the match determination period and before the confrontation effect is ended. ing. Although the length of the said 2nd confirmation period is arbitrary, it is set to 3 sec in this pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2902, it is determined in step S2903 whether "1" is set in the imaging completion flag of the sound light side RAM 95 or not. When “1” is set in the imaging completion flag, it means that imaging of an image of one frame for use in the post-playable effect is completed. In this case, the imaging completion flag is cleared to "0" in step S2904.

  In the following step S2905, the hand data extraction process is executed as in step S1704 of the first notification effect control process (FIG. 39). Thereafter, in step S2906, it is determined whether extraction of hand data is completed. If extraction of the hand data is completed, in step S2907, as in step S2807 of the forcible effect control process (FIG. 65), the collation process of the selection object is executed.

  Thereafter, in step S2908, it is determined whether the extraction of the selection target has been completed. If the extraction of the selection object is completed, the selection object data extracted this time is overwritten in the selection object storage area 95g of the sound light side RAM 95 in step S2909.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2903, a negative determination is made in step S2906, or a negative determination is made in step S2908, the game time being read out to the sound and light side RAM 95 in step S2910. It is determined whether or not pointer data indicating the content of the control target in the data table for the effect corresponds to data indicating the display timing of the appearance target result. If a negative determination is made in step S2910, the book back-out possible control process is ended as it is, and if a positive determination is made in step S2910, an appearance target data setting process is performed in step S2911 and then this paper out End the possible control process.

  In the setting process of the application object data, the appearance object data stored in the appearance object storage area 95f of the sound light side RAM 95 in step S2708 of the confrontation effect setting process (FIG. 64) is read out, and the display command corresponding to the appearance object data is displayed. It transmits to the display control device 96. The display control device 96 causes the confrontation partner character CH2 of the symbol display device 61 to display the appearance target result corresponding to the appearance target data by receiving the display command. Since the selection of the selection target result of the player is not decided at this timing, the display of the appearance target result in the result area W of the symbol display device 61 is not performed.

  On the other hand, when a negative judging is carried out at Step S2902, it progresses to Step S2912. In step S2912, whether or not pointer data indicating the content of the control target corresponds to data indicating that the second confirmation period has elapsed in the data table of effects for game circulation read in the sound light side RAM 95 Determine If a negative determination is made in step S2912, the post-pickup possibility control process is terminated, and if a positive determination is made in step S2912, the process proceeds to step S2913.

  In step S2913, it is determined whether selection target data is stored in the selection target storage area 95g of the sound light side RAM 95. If the selection target data is stored, the setting processing of the selection target data is executed in step S2914. In the selection target data setting process, the selection target data stored in the selection target storage area 95g is read, and a display command corresponding to the read selection target data is transmitted to the display control device 96. By receiving the display command, the display control device 96 causes the selection target result corresponding to the selection target data currently stored in the result region WE of the symbol display device 61 to be displayed. At this timing, the display of the appearance target result corresponding to the current appearance target data in the confrontation partner character CH2 of the symbol display device 61 is continued.

  Thereafter, in step S2915, the selected target result selected by the player this time appears corresponding to the data stored in the appearing target storage area 95f of the sound side RAM 95 in step S2708 of the confrontation effect setting process (FIG. 64). The target result is compared and determined to be either a win result or a non-win result. Then, in step S2916, it is determined whether the comparison determination result is a victory result.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2916, various data on the winning side are read out in step S2917. For these various data, light emission data and sound output data for causing an effect indicating that the player has won by the confrontation effect are read out from the sound side ROM 94 to the sound side RAM 95. These data are referred to after the display of the selection target result and the display of the appearance target result are performed for a predetermined period, and the light emission control processing (step S503) and the sound of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14) By referring to the output control process (step S 504), the display light emitting unit 23 emits light in a winning pattern and the speaker unit 24 outputs a sound corresponding to the winning pattern. In step S2917, a display command corresponding to the player winning is transmitted to the display control device 96. When the display control device 96 receives the display command, the display control device 96 performs display control of the symbol display device 61 so that a display effect indicating that the user has won after the result display is performed.

  In step S2917, setting is made to enable the execution of the effect after the execution of the effect for victory. Specifically, when the back-off possible effect this time is the second confrontation effect, the sound light side RAM 95 reads the current condition setting for causing the large bubble effect to be executed after the effect for victory. It performs on the data table of the effect for the game circulation being issued. In addition, when the backout possible effect this time is the third confrontation effect, the sound light side RAM 95 presents the setting for the special reach B effect for premium to be executed after the effect for victory. It is performed on the data table of the effect for the game play being read out. Thereby, in the case of the second confrontation effect, various data settings are performed so that the large bubble effect is started at the timing set as the start timing of the bubble effect at the start of the current game run, and the third confrontation is made In the case of the effect, various data settings are performed so that the premium special reach B effect is started at the timing set as the start timing of the special reach B effect at the start of the current game run.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2916, various data on the non-winning side are read out in step S2918. For these various data, light emission data and sound output data for causing an effect indicating that the player has not won in the confrontation effect are read out from the sound side ROM 94 to the sound side RAM 95. These data are referred to after the display of the selection target result and the display of the appearance target result are performed for a predetermined period, and the light emission control processing (step S503) and the sound of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14) By referring to the output control process (step S504), the display light emitting unit 23 emits light in a non-wining pattern and the speaker unit 24 outputs a sound corresponding to the non-wining pattern. In step S2918, a display command corresponding to the player not winning is sent to the display control device 96. When the display control device 96 receives the display command, the display control device 96 performs display control of the symbol display device 61 so that a display effect indicating that the player did not win after the result display is performed.

  In step S2918, setting is made to enable the execution of the effect after the non-wining effect is performed. Specifically, when the post-dropout possible effect this time is the second confrontation effect, the sound light side RAM 95 currently has a setting for causing the small bubble effect to be executed after the non-wining effect. It is performed on the data table of the effect for the game play being read out. In addition, when the backout possible effect this time is the third confrontation effect, setting for the special reach B effect for the jackpot to be executed after the above non-wining effect, in the sound light side RAM 95 It is performed with respect to the data table of the effect currently read out for the game occasion. Thereby, in the case of the second confrontation effect, various data settings are performed so that the small bubble effect is started at the timing set as the start timing of the bubble effect at the start of the current game run, and the third confrontation In the case of the effect, various data settings are performed so that the jackpot special reach B effect is started at the timing set as the start timing of the special reach B effect at the start of the current game run.

  If the process of step S2917 is executed, or if the process of step S2918 is executed, after clearing both the corresponding imaging command flag and the post-play enable flag of the sound light side RAM 95 in step S2919, "0". , The post-playable control process ends.

  On the other hand, when the selection target data is not stored in the selection target storage area 95g and a negative determination is made in step S2913, a setting process of confrontation avoidance is performed in step S2920. In the setting process, a display command corresponding to the confrontation avoidance is transmitted to the display control device 96. By receiving the display command, the display control device 96 causes the symbol display device 61 to display a message indicating that no confrontation was finally made. Then, after the display is performed until the end timing of the confrontation effect, setting for enabling the execution of the effect after the non-wining effect is performed is performed. Specifically, when the backout possible effect this time is the second confrontation effect, the current state reading to the sound light side RAM 95 is a setting for a small bubble effect to be executed after the effect of confrontation avoidance. It does to the data table of the effect for game circulation which is done. In addition, when the backout possible effect this time is the third confrontation effect, the setting for the special reach B effect for the big hit is executed after the effect of confrontation avoidance, the current condition reading to the sound light side RAM 95 It performs on the data table of the effect for the game circulation being issued. Thereby, in the case of the second confrontation effect, various data settings are performed so that the small bubble effect is started at the timing set as the start timing of the bubble effect at the start of the current game run, and the third confrontation In the case of the effect, various data settings are performed so that the jackpot special reach B effect is started at the timing set as the start timing of the special reach B effect at the start of the current game run. Thereafter, in step S2919, after clearing “0” to both the corresponding imaging command flag and the post-play enable flag of the sound light side RAM 95, the post-play enable control process is ended.

  Next, with reference to the time chart of FIG. 70, the situation in which the backout possible effect is executed will be described. FIG. 70 (a) shows the execution period of the backout possible effect, FIG. 70 (b) shows the second confirmation period, FIG. 70 (c) shows the display period of the appearance target result, and FIG. 70 (d) FIG. 70 (e-1) shows the display period of the selection result, and FIG. 70 (e-2) shows the non-win result when the win result is generated. Shows the execution period of the effect after the confrontation effect in.

  As shown in FIG. 70 (a), post-playable effects are started at timing t1, and a second confirmation period is started at timing t2 as shown in FIG. 70 (b). Then, the display of the appearance target result is started as shown in FIG. 70 (c) at the timing of t3 which is the timing during which the second confirmation period is continuing. That is, since the appearance target result is displayed on the symbol display device 61 before the second confirmation period elapses, the player can select and present the selection target result after confirming the appearance target result. . That is, it is possible to post-select the selection target result with respect to the display of the appearance target result.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 70 (b), display of the selection target result is started as shown in FIG. 70 (d) at timing t4 which is the timing when the second confirmation period ends. Then, at the timing of t5, the display of the appearance target result is ended as shown in FIG. 70 (c), and the display of the selection target result is ended as shown in FIG. 70 (d).

  Thereafter, at the timing of t6, the post-playable effect is ended as shown in FIG. 70 (a), and the effect on the winning side is started as shown in FIG. 70 (e-1), or FIG. As shown in (e-2), the effect on the non-victim side is started. Then, the effect on the winning side or the effect on the non-winning side is ended at the timing of t7. In this case, T1 which is a period in which the winning side effect is executed and T2 which is a period in which the non-wining side effect is executed are the same period. As a result, even if either of the win-side effect and the non-win-side effect is executed, it is possible to prevent the display duration of the game cycle from fluctuating. When the setting of confrontation avoidance is performed, the effect on the non-victim side is started at the timing of t6 as in the case of the non-victim result, and the effect on the non-victim side is ended at the timing of t7. , The display duration of the game cycle does not change.

<Post-out impossible production>
Next, the post-drawout impossible control process of executing control for using the imaging result of the imaging substrate 71 in the post-drawout impossible effect of the confrontation effect will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The post-playback impossible control process is performed each time the operation effect control process (step S512) is performed once in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14).

  When "1" is set in the post-playout impossible flag of the sound light side RAM 95 (step S3001: YES), in the data table of the effect for the game circulation read out to the sound light side RAM 95 in step S3002. It is determined whether or not pointer data indicating the content of the control target corresponds to data indicating that the first confirmation period is in progress. The first confirmation period is the same as in the case of the forcible effect control process (FIG. 65).

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3002, it is determined in step S3003 whether "1" is set in the imaging completion flag of the sound light side RAM 95 or not. If “1” is not set in the imaging completion flag, the post-submission disabling control process ends. When “1” is set in the imaging completion flag, it means that imaging of an image of one frame for use in post-production disabling effect is completed. In this case, the imaging completion flag is cleared to "0" in step S3004.

  In the subsequent step S3005, the hand data extraction process is executed as in step S1704 of the first notification effect control process (FIG. 39). Thereafter, in step S3006, it is determined whether extraction of hand data is completed. If the extraction of the hand data is not completed, the post-delivery disable control process is ended as it is. If extraction of the hand data is completed, in step S3007, the collation process of the selection target is executed as in step S2807 of the forcible effect control process (FIG. 65).

  Thereafter, in step S3008, it is determined whether the extraction of the selection target has been completed. If the extraction of the selection target has not been completed, the post-delivery disable control processing is ended as it is. If the extraction of the selection object has been completed, the selected object data extracted this time is overwritten in the selection object storage area 95g of the sound and light side RAM 95 in step S3009, and the post-production disable control process is ended.

  On the other hand, when a negative judging is carried out at Step S3002, it progresses to Step S3010. In step S3010, whether or not pointer data indicating the content of the control target in the data table of effects for game circulation read in the sound light side RAM 95 corresponds to data indicating that the first confirmation period has elapsed. Determine If the negative determination is made in step S3010, the post- paper rollout impossible control process is ended as it is, and if the positive determination is made in step S3010, the process proceeds to step S3011.

  In step S3011, it is determined whether selection target data is stored in the selection target storage area 95g of the sound light side RAM 95. If selection target data is stored, setting processing of appearance target data and selection target data is executed in step S3012. In the setting process, the appearance target data stored in the appearance target storage area 95f of the sound light side RAM 95 in step S2714 of the confrontation effect setting process (FIG. 64), and the selection target storage area 95g of the sound light side RAM 95 in step S3009. The selection target data stored in is read out, and a display command corresponding to the readout appearance target data and selection target data is transmitted to the display control device 96. The display control device 96 causes the confrontation partner character CH2 of the symbol display device 61 to display the appearance target result corresponding to the present appearance target data by receiving the display command, and the symbol display device 61. The selection object result corresponding to the selection object data currently stored is displayed in the result region WE.

  Thereafter, in step S3013, the selected object result selected by the player this time appears corresponding to the data stored in the appearing object storage area 95f of the sound side RAM 95 in step S2714 of the confrontation effect setting process (FIG. 64). The target result is compared and determined to be either a win result or a non-win result. Then, in step S3014, it is determined whether the comparison determination result is a victory result.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3014, various data on the winning side are read out in step S3015. For these various data, light emission data and sound output data for causing an effect indicating that the player has won by the confrontation effect are read out from the sound side ROM 94 to the sound side RAM 95. These data are referred to after the display of the selection target result and the display of the appearance target result are performed for a predetermined period, and the light emission control processing (step S503) and the sound of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14) By referring to the output control process (step S 504), the display light emitting unit 23 emits light in a winning pattern and the speaker unit 24 outputs a sound corresponding to the winning pattern. In step S3015, a display command corresponding to the player winning is transmitted to the display control device 96. When the display control device 96 receives the display command, the display control device 96 performs display control of the symbol display device 61 so that a display effect indicating that the user has won after the result display is performed.

  In step S3015, setting is made to enable the execution of the effect after the execution of the effect for victory. Specifically, a setting for a special reach B effect for premium to be executed after the above-mentioned effect for victory, a data table for effect for game circulation currently being read out to the sound light side RAM 95 Do against As a result, various data settings are performed such that premium special reach B effect is started at the timing set as the start timing of the special reach B effect at the start of the current game run.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3014, various data on the non-winning side are read out in step S3016. For these various data, light emission data and sound output data for causing an effect indicating that the player has not won in the confrontation effect are read out from the sound side ROM 94 to the sound side RAM 95. These data are referred to after the display of the selection target result and the display of the appearance target result are performed for a predetermined period, and the light emission control processing (step S503) and the sound of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14) By referring to the output control process (step S504), the display light emitting unit 23 emits light in a non-wining pattern and the speaker unit 24 outputs a sound corresponding to the non-wining pattern. In step S3016, a display command corresponding to the player not winning is transmitted to the display control device 96. When the display control device 96 receives the display command, the display control device 96 performs display control of the symbol display device 61 so that a display effect indicating that the player did not win after the result display is performed.

  In step S3016, setting is made to enable the execution of the effect after the non-wining effect is performed. Specifically, data for the game circulation data currently being read out to the sound light side RAM 95 for setting for the special reach B effect for the jackpot to be executed after the non-winning effect for the above Do it against the table. As a result, various data settings are performed so that the jackpot special reach B effect is started at the start timing of the special reach B effect at the start of the current game run.

  If the process of step S3015 has been executed, or if the process of step S3016 has been executed, in step S3017 after clearing both the corresponding imaging command flag and the post-play enable flag of the sound light side RAM 95 to “0”. , And the post-delivery control processing ends.

  On the other hand, when the selection target data is not stored in the selection target storage area 95g and a negative determination is made in step S3011, the setting process of confrontation avoidance is executed in step S3018. In the setting process, a display command corresponding to the confrontation avoidance is transmitted to the display control device 96. By receiving the display command, the display control device 96 causes the symbol display device 61 to display a message indicating that no confrontation was finally made. Then, after the display is performed until the end timing of the confrontation effect, setting for enabling the execution of the effect after the non-wining effect is performed is performed. Specifically, setting for a special hit B effect for the jackpot to be executed after the effect of confrontation avoidance is shown in the data table of the game effect for which the current situation is read out to the sound light side RAM 95. Do against. As a result, various data settings are performed so that the jackpot special reach B effect is started at the start timing of the special reach B effect at the start of the current game run. Thereafter, in step S3017, after clearing “0” to both of the corresponding imaging command flag and the post-play enable flag of the sound light side RAM 95, the post-delivery disable control process is ended.

  Next, referring to the time chart of FIG. 72, the situation in which the late-out impossible effect is executed will be described. FIG. 72 (a) shows the execution period of the late-out impossible effect, FIG. 72 (b) shows the first confirmation period, FIG. 72 (c) shows the display period of the appearance target result, and FIG. 72 (d) FIG. 72 (e-1) shows the display period of the selection result, and FIG. 72 (e-2) shows the non-win result when the win result is generated. Shows the execution period of the effect after the confrontation effect in.

  As shown in FIG. 72 (a) at the timing of t1, post-production impossible effect is started, and as shown in FIG. 72 (b), the first confirmation period is started at the timing of t2. Then, at timing t3 when the first confirmation period ends, display of the appearance target result is started as shown in FIG. 72 (c), and as shown in FIG. 72 (d), the selection target result The display of will start.

  Thereafter, at timing t4, the display of the appearance target result is ended as shown in FIG. 72 (c), and the display of the selection target result is ended as shown in FIG. 72 (d). Thereafter, at the timing of t5, the after-drawout impossible effect is ended as shown in FIG. 72 (a), and the effect on the victory side is started as shown in FIG. 72 (e-1), or FIG. As shown in (e-2), the effect on the non-victim side is started. Then, the effect on the winning side or the effect on the non-winning side is ended at the timing of t6. In this case, T1 which is a period in which the winning side effect is executed and T2 which is a period in which the non-wining side effect is executed are the same period. As a result, even if one of the winning side effect and the non-wining side effect is executed, it is possible to make the effect of the game circulation not fluctuate. When the setting of confrontation avoidance is performed, the effect on the non-victim side is started at the timing of t56 as in the case of the non-victim result, and the effect on the non-victim side is ended at the timing of t6. , The display duration of the game cycle does not change.

  As described above, by the execution of the confrontation effect, the contents of the effect to be performed thereafter are different according to the result of the confrontation performed with the opposing opponent character CH2 displayed on the symbol display device 61. Become. As a result, the player is expected to recognize that the contents of the subsequent effects have been changed according to the result selected by the player as the confrontation effect, and it is possible to give the impression that they are actively participating in the game. The interest of the game is improved.

  According to the embodiment described above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  Since the processing for various effects and the processing for various monitoring are executed using the distance data derived based on the imaging result in the imaging device 73, the operation or the player of the player recognized in a non-contact manner Can be used for various effects and various monitoring.

  In the signal processing circuit 75, when the intensity of the imaging signal received by the imaging device 73 is less than the reference intensity, the arithmetic processing of the distance data is not performed. This makes it possible to prevent distance data caused by noise or the like from being used in the sound light side MPU 93.

  When the distance data derived by the imaging substrate 71 corresponds to the distance on the side of the imaging substrate 71 relative to the surface of the window panel 22, the sound light side MPU 93 performs the monitoring process for cancellation except when performing the monitoring process for cancellation. The distance data is treated as cancellation target distance data, and a blank area is set in the distance image storage area 95a. This makes it possible to prevent an object on the imaging substrate 71 side from the surface of the window panel 22 from being recognized as the occurrence of the rendering operation.

  Further, instead of invalidating all of the image G for one frame including distance data to be canceled, only the portion corresponding to the distance data to be canceled in the image G for one frame is invalidated. Because of this, it is possible to early obtain an image G of one frame for use in various processes.

  On the other hand, when the cancellation monitoring process is performed, even when the distance data derived by the imaging substrate 71 corresponds to the distance on the imaging substrate 71 side of the surface of the window panel 22, The blank area is not set without treating the distance data as distance data to be canceled. As a result, in the cancel monitoring process, it is possible to monitor whether or not ball clogging has occurred in the game area PA, and monitor whether or not a fraudulent jig is inserted in the game area PA. Become.

  Further, as described above, the signal processing circuit 75 prevents the derivation of distance data due to noise or the like, and the sound light side MPU 93 blanks the distance data on the imaging substrate 71 side of the surface of the window panel 22. By making the setting, compared to the configuration in which the signal processing circuit 75 excludes all cancellation targets, the sound-side MPU 93 can execute the above-described cancellation monitoring process, and all cancellation targets are excluded from the sound. The processing load of the sound light side MPU 93 can be reduced as compared with the configuration performed in the light side MPU 93.

  Since the distance data is derived instead of capturing a monochrome image or a color image, it is necessary to specify whether or not the data is a cancellation target data in relation to the distance from the distance measurement reference such as the window panel 22. Is possible.

  When the distance data corresponding to the side of the imaging substrate 71 further than the window panel 22 continuously exists, the distance data derived by the imaging substrate 71 is restricted so as not to be used for effect. As a result, it becomes possible to prevent the distance data from being used for effects or the like despite the occurrence of some abnormality in the derivation of the distance data.

  In addition, even when distance data corresponding to the imaging substrate 71 side continuously exists from the position slightly ahead of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the surface 22a of the window panel 22, the imaging substrate 71 is used. The derived distance data is restricted so as not to be used for performance. This makes it possible to prevent distance data corresponding to fingerprints and foreign matter from being used for effects etc. when fingerprints or foreign matter adheres to the window panel 22.

  When the distance data corresponding to the imaging substrate 71 side continues from the position slightly ahead of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the surface 22 a of the window panel 22, the abnormality notification is performed. Thereby, confirmation as to whether or not fingerprints or foreign matter is attached to the surface 22a of the window panel 22, confirmation as to whether or not a fraudulent jig is inserted into the game area PA, or within the game area PA It is possible to urge a game hall manager or the like to check whether or not a ball jam or the like has occurred.

  A situation in which the distance data corresponding to the imaging substrate 71 side rather than the window panel 22 is longer than the longest period assumed to be required for the game ball to pass through the monitoring range by the imaging substrate 71 In the case of continuing the above, use restriction of the distance data as described above and notification of abnormality are executed. As a result, when the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area PA passes the monitoring range, it is possible to prevent the use restriction of the distance data and the abnormal notification as described above from being executed.

  A reference switch 91a is electrically connected to the sound light side MPU 93, and according to the state of the reference switch 91a, the derivation mode of distance data based on the light reception result in the imaging device 73 and the utilization mode of the derived distance data are Be changed. This makes it possible to appropriately use distance data in accordance with the environment of the monitoring range of the imaging device 73.

  A signal strength serving as a reference as to whether or not an imaging signal received by the imaging device 73 is to be a target of distance data whether the reference switch 91a is disposed at the ON position or is disposed at the OFF position. Is changed. This makes it possible to adjust the accuracy of the distance data according to the environment of the monitoring range of the imaging device 73. For example, when the radio wave goth prevention sheet PS is not attached to the window panel 22, the accuracy of the distance data When the radio wave goth prevention sheet PS is attached, it is possible to derive the distance data of the monitoring target present ahead of the pachinko machine 10 further than the window panel 22 even in the situation. There is.

  Further, when the reference switch 91 a is disposed at the ON position, distance data based on light reception from an object present closer to the imaging substrate 71 than the window panel 22 is transmitted from the signal processing circuit 75 to the sound light side MPU 93. Not sent to. Thereby, for example, when the radio wave goth prevention sheet PS is attached to the back surface of the window panel 22, the distance data of the radio wave goth prevention sheet PS itself is prevented from being used by the sound side MPU 93. It becomes possible.

  The change of the manner of deriving the distance data as described above is performed by the operation of the reference switch 91a. Thereby, it becomes possible to determine on the game hall side which way of deriving the distance data.

  When the reference switch 91a is disposed in the ON position, the setting mode of the operation effective range EA is set as the restriction mode. Specifically, the split display is not performed during the divided effect, and the selection display is performed, and the multiple-row display is not performed during the stop operation effect, and the single-row display is performed. In this way, even when the accuracy of the distance data is lowered while the limitation on the derivation of the distance data is given, it is possible to execute the rendering using the distance data of the imaging substrate 71 while the accuracy is lowered. By reducing the number of effective operation ranges EA, it is possible to reduce the possibility of the occurrence of an erroneous recognition of the rendering operation by the player.

  The sound-light side MPU 93 executes height position monitoring processing to grasp the height position of the face of the player seated in the chair provided in front of the pachinko machine 10, and performs first notification effect control processing, 2 In the notification effect control process, the divided effect control process, the stop operation effect control process, and the continuous effect control process, the operation effective range is set at a position corresponding to the height position. As a result, the player's hand recognized in front of the pachinko machine 10 relative to the window panel 22 is different from the window panel 22 because the angle of the hand for performing the rendering operation is different because the height position of the face is different depending on the player. Even when the height position is different, it is possible to appropriately recognize each rendering operation.

  In the height position monitoring process, the height position is grasped using the distance data derived in the imaging substrate 71. Thereby, it becomes possible to grasp the height position by using the configuration for grasping the presence or absence of the rendering operation as it is. In addition, it becomes possible to grasp the height position under the condition in which the presence or absence of the rendering operation is specified, and the effect of adjusting the position of the operation effective range using the height position can be enhanced.

  Since the position of the operation effective range is adjusted instead of the hand performing the rendering operation based on the information of the height position of the face grasped in the height position monitoring process, the player who may exist at any position There is no need to make adjustments according to the hand data. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load when the adjustment is performed.

  In the configuration in which the display for selection indicating the position where the rendering operation is to be performed is performed in the symbol display device 61, based on the information of the height position of the face grasped in the height position monitoring process, not the display for selection but the operation effective range Since the configuration is such that the position is adjusted, the processing load can be reduced as compared with the configuration where both positions are adjusted, and the adjustment can be performed compared with the configuration where only the position of the selection display limited to the range of the display surface is adjusted. Freedom is enhanced.

  The sound light side MPU 93 is configured to specify that the rendering operation has been performed when it is specified that the player's hand is in the operation effective range based on the distance data derived by the imaging substrate 71. Thereby, it is possible to diversify the aspect of the rendering operation according to the method of setting the operation effective range and the method of setting the operation aspect to be recognized as the rendering operation. This makes it possible to increase the degree of attention to the effect.

  At the time of division effect or stop operation effect, an image indicating a position where the effect operation should be performed is displayed on the symbol display device 61. As a result, the position where the rendering operation should be performed becomes clear to the player.

  The sound light side MPU 93 is configured to set a plurality of operation effective ranges at one time. As a result, it is possible to perform the rendering operation such as 2 options or 3 options depending on the position where the player takes out the hand, and it is possible to enhance the operability of the rendering operation. Further, since a plurality of operation effective ranges are set in relation to the distance data, it is possible to set a plurality of operation effective ranges by one configuration for deriving distance data, and the operation effective range Thus, the configuration can be simplified in that there is no need to increase the number of configurations for operation detection according to the number.

  When a plurality of operation effective ranges are set at one time for the stop operation effect, the operation effective ranges are set in the lateral direction. Thereby, even if the height position of the viewpoint is different depending on the player, the influence of the height position on the positional relationship between the height position of the hand of the player performing rendering operation and the operation effective range It becomes possible to make it hard to receive the problem, and it becomes possible to reduce the possibility of the occurrence of misrecognition of the player's rendering operation. In addition, such a configuration is effective not only for the symbol display device 61 having the horizontally long display surface but also for a symbol display device having a square display surface and a symbol display device having a vertically long display surface. .

  When multiple operation effective ranges are set at one time, a non-effective range is set between the operation effective ranges. As a result, it becomes difficult for the player's hand to simultaneously enter into a plurality of operation effective ranges, which may cause an event that the effect generated for the effect operation does not correspond to the effect operation intended by the player. Reduced.

  The number of effective operation ranges is different according to the type of effect. Thereby, while diversification of the aspect of the operation presentation is achieved, it is possible to set the operation effective range in the aspect corresponding to each presentation, and the freedom degree of the design of the presentation is enhanced.

  When a plurality of operation effective ranges are set and the player's hand is simultaneously included in the plurality of operation effective ranges, the sound-light side MPU 93 determines that the operation with respect to each operation effective range is effective. Instead, it is determined that the operation on the higher priority side determined in advance is valid. This makes it possible to prevent a plurality of effects from being simultaneously performed while giving priority to a predetermined effect operation.

  When the sound light side MPU 93 specifies that the operation for the first notification effect and the operation for the divided effect occur simultaneously at the same time when the first notification effect and the divided effect are generated at the same time, for the first notification effect It is determined that the operation is valid, and the split rendering operation is determined to be invalid. As a result, it is possible to increase the chance of the occurrence of the effect at the time of the notification occurrence notifying the confirmation of the big hit result while preventing the effects corresponding to the respective effect operations from being generated simultaneously.

  In particular, since the movable object unit 38 to be subjected to the first notification effect operation is disposed immediately above the symbol display device 61 to be subjected to the divided effect operation during the split effect, the first notification effect operation is performed. The player's hand may accidentally enter the effective range of the split rendering operation. On the other hand, since the first notification effect operation is prioritized, it is possible to enhance the opportunity for the effect to be generated when the notification occurs to notify the determination of the jackpot result, and it is intended that the split effect operation is performed. The possibility of being recognized is reduced.

  When the sound-light side MPU 93 displays a plurality of lines in the stop operation effect, the priority is set to the operation effective range in which the plurality of change display areas CA1 to CA3 correspond one to one. As a result, even if the player's hand is simultaneously included in a plurality of operation effective ranges, it is possible to stop the variable display of the pattern in accordance with the predetermined priority. Then, by setting the priority, it becomes possible to sequentially stop the fluctuation display of the pattern for each of one fluctuation display area CA1 to CA3 with respect to one rendering operation.

  Further, in the configuration in which three variable display areas CA1 to CA3 are set, when the variable display of the pattern in one of the variable display areas CA1 to CA3 is stopped, the priority is changed accordingly. This makes it possible to appropriately cope with an event in which the player's hand is simultaneously included in a plurality of operation effective ranges regardless of the stop order of the pattern variation display.

  The sound light side MPU 93 adjusts the position of the player's hand on the virtual two-dimensional plane extracted based on the distance data derived by the imaging substrate 71 based on the distance data. Thereby, in a configuration in which the position in the vertical direction or the position in the horizontal direction in the virtual two-dimensional plane can be varied according to the distance from the imaging device 73, the position of the player's hand in the virtual two-dimensional plane It becomes possible to recognize as a position based on the distance.

  In addition, since the position of the player's hand is adjusted instead of the position of the operation effective range on the virtual two-dimensional plane, the position of the operation effective range is fixed even when a plurality of player's hands are recognized. However, the positions of those hands can be adjusted individually, and the positional relationship of each player's hand to the operation effective range can be appropriately grasped.

  When adjusting the position of the player's hand based on the distance data, the entire hand data is adjusted, so it is possible to appropriately grasp the positional relationship of the operation effective range with respect to the entire hand data. Become.

  In the situation where the first notification effect, the second notification effect, the divided effect, and the stop operation effect are performed, the sound light side MPU 93 performs an operation effective range when the position of the player's hand is separated by the reference target distance or more. It does not specify whether it is included in. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing even the operation performed regardless of the rendering operation as the rendering operation.

  On the other hand, in the situation where the continuous rendering and the confrontation rendering are performed, the sound light side MPU 93 recognizes the action of the hand corresponding to each rendering as the rendering operation regardless of whether it is the reference target distance or more. In continuous rendering, the player performs an action of paying his hand sideways, and in confrontation rendering, the player performs an operation for Janken. Since these operations are highly likely to be performed for effect, by recognizing the occurrence of these operations as the occurrence of the rendering operation regardless of the distance, the player's rendering operation is invalidated against the intention. There is a reduced chance of being

  When the advance notice effect is being executed, the fish character CH1 appears up to the position corresponding to the hand the player has issued for the advance notice effect. Thereby, it is possible to perform the advance notice effect in a mode according to the operation of the player, and it is possible to diversify the mode of the advance notice effect, and the advance notice effect is continuously performed over a plurality of game times. Even if it occurs, it is possible to prevent the prior notice effect from being bored.

  Even if the fish character CH1 appears up to the position according to the player's operation during the advance notice effect, it limits the limit line BL set in the middle of the moving direction of the fish character CH1 on the display surface of the symbol display device 61. Done as. This makes it possible to prevent the fish character CH1 from flowing to the end on the movement destination side in the situation where the prior notice effect is being executed, and the fish character CH1 is placed at the position according to the operation as described above. While making it possible to make it appear, it is possible to prevent the player from falsely recognizing that the completion effect has been executed although the completion effect has not actually been performed.

  When the completion effect is executed as the final effect, the completion effect is executed on condition that the player has performed the flow operation. As a result, it is possible for the player to think that the effect of causing the fish character CH1 to flow to the end on the move destination side is generated by the player's own operation, and to enhance the sense of superiority when the completion effect is executed. It becomes possible.

  In the configuration in which the player can not recognize which game turn is the execution target of the final presentation when the continuous presentation is being executed, the situation is one in which the prior notice presentation and the final presentation are being executed. Also in the symbol display device 61, it is informed that the flow operation should be performed. In this way, in the situation where the continuous effects are being executed, it is possible to perform the flow operation while expecting the completion effects to occur in each game time. In this case, in the advance notice effect, the fish character CH1 moves toward the end on the movement destination side in response to the player's flow operation, but as already described, the limit line is located at an intermediate position in the movement direction. By setting the BL, it is possible to make the player clearly recognize that it is different from the completion effect while making the player expect the occurrence of the completion effect until halfway through the flow operation.

  Even if the player's hand is disposed outward of the end on the appearance side of the fish character CH1 on the display surface of the symbol display device 61 during the execution corresponding period of the continuous effect of each game run, the fish character CH1 Is not retracted more than the initial line IL. As a result, it is possible to maintain the notification that it is the execution corresponding period of the continuous effect regardless of the player's operation mode.

  By executing the confrontation effect, the contents of the effect to be performed thereafter differ depending on the result of the confrontation performed with the opposing opponent character CH2 displayed on the symbol display device 61. As a result, the player is expected to recognize that the contents of the subsequent effects have been changed according to the result selected by the player as the confrontation effect, and it is possible to give the impression that they are actively participating in the game. The interest of the game is improved.

  In the configuration in which the player's selection target result is specified from the image portion of the player's hand imaged by the imaging substrate 71, an opportunity to specify the selection target result using the imaging result occurs a plurality of times consecutively The confirmation period is set to, and the latest selection target result specified by the final timing of the confirmation period is used as a result selected by the player in the confrontation effect. This makes it possible to use the selection object result presented by the player on the side closer to the final timing of the confirmation period as a confrontation effect while making it difficult to generate an acquisition omission of the selection object result.

  In the confrontation effect, the content of the confrontation result fluctuates according to the forcible effect in which the content of the confrontation result is determined in advance regardless of the result selected by the player, and the result selected by the player, and the selection result of the player And a post-out possible effect in which the content of the confrontation result fluctuates according to the result selected by the player and the post-selection result of the player is possible according to the result selected by the player. Existing. Thereby, diversification of the aspect of confrontation production is achieved.

  Not only forcible effects and late-out impossible effects, but also because late-out possible effects exist, by performing late-out of the selection target result, the player's own choice of the effect content after the confrontation effect is performed It becomes possible to set by this, and it becomes possible to raise a player's attention to a confrontation production.

  In the case where the third confrontation effect is executed, a post-dropout possible effect can be executed, and a situation occurs in which a jackpot result is obtained after the player's victory result. As a result, it is expected that the player recognizes that the jackpot result is obtained by winning by himself in the confrontation effect, and it is possible to increase the player's attention to the confrontation effect. Furthermore, by causing a situation in which a jackpot result is generated by post-rolling in this way, it is an impression that the jackpot result could not be obtained due to post-dropout failure even if forced rendering is performed. Can be given to the player, which also makes it possible to increase the player's attention to the confrontation effect.

  In addition, when the third confrontation effect is executed, the lottery process (step S2711) of whether or not the post-out is possible in the confrontation effect setting process (FIG. 64) is performed, and any of the post-out possible effect and the post-out impossible effect It is decided to execute. As a result, it is possible to irregularly generate a backout possible effect.

  In addition, when the third confrontation effect is executed, a jackpot result occurs finally even if the confrontation result is a win result or a non-win result. This makes it possible to give the player an impression that a jackpot result will occur even if the confrontation result is a non-winning result, and the timing to the confrontation result becomes a non-winning result to that game time. It becomes possible to prevent attention from disappearing.

  In the configuration in which the second confrontation effect and the third confrontation effect having different presentation contents after the confrontation effect are set according to the player's selection target result, any of the second confrontation effect and the third confrontation effect is executed The result of whether or not it will be a jackpot result in that game time will not be changed. This makes it possible to execute the confrontation effect while not affecting the probability of occurrence of the jackpot result.

  In the configuration in which the second confrontation effect and the third confrontation effect having different presentation contents after the confrontation effect are set according to the player's selection target result, any one of the second confrontation effect and the third confrontation effect is executed. Even if the game duration display duration is not changed. Thereby, it is possible to execute the confrontation effect while not affecting the game repetition rate.

  In the confrontation effect, in the configuration in which the result of the selection object of the player is displayed in the result area WE of the symbol display device 61, the result area WE is not the image captured by the imaging substrate 71 but the display control device 96. An image corresponding to the image data stored in advance in the ROM and corresponding to the shape of the player's hand is displayed. As a result, even if the resolution of the image of the imaging substrate 71 is not high, it is possible to clearly display the selection target result.

  When a draw result is obtained in the confrontation effect, the confirmation period is not set again, but the effect on the non-victim side is executed similarly to the defeat result. As a result, it is possible to set the period required for the confrontation effect to end to be a predetermined period regardless of the outcome of the confrontation.

  When the return button 28 is operated to eject the storage medium in which the information corresponding to the number of usable gaming balls is stored, the sound light side MPU 93 determines whether the operation has been performed by a legitimate player. If the player is not a legitimate player, notification is executed. Thereby, when a person who is not a legitimate player tries to acquire a storage medium illegally, it becomes possible to cope with it in the game hall.

  When the information corresponding to the number of usable gaming balls is newly set, the sound-light side MPU 93 uses the face data acquired based on the imaging result of the imaging board 71 and the imaging when the return button 28 is operated. The face data acquired based on the imaging result of the substrate 71 is collated, and it is determined whether or not the operation of the return button 28 has been performed by the authorized player. This makes it possible to directly authenticate the owner of the storage medium and the executor of the ejection operation.

  The sound-side MPU 93 does not prevent the storage medium from being discharged even if the result of face recognition is abnormal. This makes it possible to complete the ejection of the storage medium even if the face authentication is not correctly performed and the result of the face authentication becomes abnormal. On the other hand, since notification is performed when the result of face recognition becomes abnormal, it becomes possible to call attention to a game hall manager or the like.

  The face authentication process when the return button 28 is operated is started before the ejection of the storage medium is started, so it is possible to start the notification early if the return operation is performed illegally. Become.

  The acquisition of face data was not performed when information corresponding to the number of usable gaming balls was newly set, or the acquisition of face data was not performed when the return button 28 was operated. Notification is also performed when face authentication is not normally performed due to a cause. This makes it possible to alert the game hall manager or the like if there is any abnormality in face authentication. Further, even in this situation, since the storage medium is discharged, it is possible to prevent the regular player from feeling discomfort.

  The sound light side MPU 93 executes notification when it is specified that the state of being seated in front of the pachinko machine 10 continues without playing a game, based on the imaging result of the imaging substrate 71. . This makes it possible to urge the game hall manager to confirm whether the person should be left. If there is a person sitting without playing a game, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 decreases accordingly, which is an undesirable event for the game hall, and such an event has occurred In some cases, it is preferable to prompt leaving.

  Further, the notification in the case where the state in which a person is sitting is continued without playing a game is performed using the display light emitting unit 23, and the notification is not performed in the speaker unit 24 and the symbol display device 61. This makes it possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the authorized player is merely resting between games.

  The sound light side MPU 93 executes notification when the operation of the player grasped based on the image pickup result of the image pickup substrate 71 corresponds to the abnormality correspondence data stored in advance in the sound light side ROM 94. As a result, if there is a possibility that the pachinko machine 10 has been tampered with, it is possible to urge the game hall manager to confirm it.

  Further, the notification when the operation corresponding to the abnormality correspondence data is performed is performed using the display light emitting unit 23, and the notification is not performed in the speaker unit 24 and the symbol display device 61. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the authorized player is merely performing the operation corresponding to the abnormal response data for a reason different from the cheating. Become.

  The imaging substrate 71 is provided at a position where it can not be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. This makes it possible for the player not to know that the imaging substrate 71 is present. If it is known that the imaging board 71 is provided on the pachinko machine 10 and that it is imaging the player itself, the player may feel uncomfortable and may refrain from playing the game. According to this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to give such a sense of discomfort.

  The stage member 68 is formed as a half mirror so as to have a beam splitter function, and the imaging substrate 71 is provided on the back side of the stage member 68. As a result, it becomes possible to make the imaging device 73 invisible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 while enabling light reception in the imaging device 73.

  An imaging substrate 71 is provided on the back side of the stage member 68 provided in the game area PA. As a result, while including the player facing the window panel 22 in the monitoring range, it is possible to hide the imaging substrate 71 using a member that generates the game area PA.

  In particular, the stage member 68 is provided so as to extend in the front-rear direction across the display surface of the symbol display device 61 and the board surface of the game board 51 below the symbol display device 61. By providing the imaging substrate 71 on the back side of the member 68, a space in the front-rear direction between the display surface and the board surface exists above the imaging device 73, and light reception in the imaging device 73 becomes easy.

  Since the stage member 68 functions as a half mirror even when the front door frame 14 is opened forward of the pachinko machine 10 and the stage member 68 can be directly viewed, the imaging substrate 71, the light emitting device 72, and imaging The device 73 can not be viewed visually. As a result, even when it is necessary to open the front door frame 14 in order to eliminate ball clogging etc. in the game area PA, imaging is performed using the imaging substrate 71. It is possible to prevent the player from recognizing.

  Not only the stage member 68 is formed as a half mirror, but the substrate pedestal 69 is formed to be colored and opaque. Then, even if the gaming machine body 12 is opened forward of the pachinko machine 10 and the back pack unit 15 is separated from the body frame 13 to expose the back face of the game board 51, the imaging substrate 71, the light emitting device 72 and the imaging device 73 can not be viewed. Therefore, even an employee of the game hall can be prevented from recognizing that imaging is performed using the imaging substrate 71.

Second Embodiment
In the present embodiment, the configuration for performing imaging control of the imaging substrate 71 and various controls using imaging results is different from the first embodiment. The different configurations will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 73 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration for performing imaging control of the imaging substrate 71 and various controls using imaging results.

  In this embodiment, an imaging command to the imaging substrate 71 is transmitted not only from the sound light side MPU 93 but also from the main side MPU 83, and the imaging result on the imaging substrate 71 is not only to the sound light side MPU 93 but to the main side MPU 83 Will also be sent. That is, the imaging control of the imaging substrate 71 and various controls using imaging results are executed by the main MPU 83 and the sound light MPU 93, respectively. In detail, the sound light side MPU 93 performs the reference switch monitoring process, the cancellation monitoring process, the height position monitoring process, and the first situation monitoring in the sound light side MPU 93 in the processes performed by the MPUs 83 and 93. While the process, the second situation monitoring process, the operation effect control process, and the imaging control process are executed, the main side MPU 83 performs the face authentication process in the first embodiment and the imaging control process. Is executed. Further, the main MPU 83 externally outputs a signal corresponding to the result of the face authentication process to the hall computer HC through the external terminal plate 109.

  Next, the face authentication process executed by the main MPU 83 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S3101, it is determined whether “1” is set in the post-return operation flag provided in the main RAM 85 or not. Here, the MPU 113 of the payout control device 111 operates the return button 28 of the ball lending operating device 26 in a state where information corresponding to the number of usable gaming balls is stored in the ball lending device Y or the storage medium. , And sends a return instruction generation command to the main MPU 83. When the main MPU 83 receives the return instruction generation command, the main MPU 83 sets “1” in the flag after the return operation.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3101, that is, if a return operation is not performed, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the face authentication monitoring flag provided in the main RAM 85 in step S3102. Determine The face authentication monitoring flag is used to capture an image of one frame on the imaging substrate 71 in order to obtain an image of the player's face when information for allowing game balls to be borrowed is newly added. It is a flag for specifying with main side MPU 83 that it is the situation where is done.

  If “1” is not set in the face authentication monitoring flag, it is determined in step S3103 whether “1” is set in the face authentication request flag provided in the main RAM 85. Here, as a result of the insertion of a bill into the ball lending device Y and the insertion of a storage medium, the MPU 113 of the payout control device 111 has information corresponding to the number of gaming balls usable in the ball lending device Y or the storage medium. When newly set or increased, a lending information addition command is transmitted to the main MPU 83. When the main MPU 83 receives the lending information addition command, it sets “1” to the face authentication request flag. If the negative determination is made in step S3103, the real face authentication process ends, and if the positive determination is made in step S3103, the process proceeds to step S3104.

  In step S3104, it is determined whether the waiting time for face authentication monitoring has elapsed. The waiting time for face authentication monitoring is arbitrary, but is set to 300 msec in the present embodiment. When execution of the face authentication monitoring is completed on the image for one frame acquired in response to the imaging command being issued in the face authentication process, the measurement of the standby time is started. The measurement of the standby time is also started immediately after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on.

  If the waiting time for face authentication monitoring has not elapsed, the processing for real face authentication is terminated, and if the waiting time for face authentication monitoring has elapsed, the process advances to step S3105. In step S3105, the imaging command flag provided in the main RAM 85 is set to “1”, and the face authentication monitoring flag in the main RAM 85 is set to “1”. Thereafter, the face authentication process ends. By setting “1” to the imaging command flag, an irradiation instruction signal is transmitted toward the imaging substrate 71 in the imaging control processing of the main MPU 83, and imaging on the imaging substrate 71 is started. The processing content of the imaging control processing is the same as the content of the imaging control processing (FIG. 21) in the first embodiment.

  By setting “1” to the face authentication monitoring flag, an affirmative determination is made in step S3102, and the process advances to step S3106. In step S3106, it is determined whether "1" is set in the imaging completion flag of the main RAM 85 or not. That is, it is determined whether or not imaging of an image for one frame for acquiring a face image in advance is completed. If the negative determination is made in step S3106, the real face authentication process ends, and if the positive determination is made in step S3106, the process proceeds to step S3107.

  In step S3107, the face authentication monitoring flag and the imaging completion flag in the main RAM 85 are cleared to "0". In the following step S3108, face data extraction processing is executed. In the face data extraction processing, the image data of one frame is grasped based on the distance data stored in the distance image storage area of the main side RAM 85, and the data of the grasped image is It is determined whether or not corresponding image data exists. In the determination, a range corresponding to the outline of the face corresponding to an elliptical shape, a circular shape, an elliptical shape or the like is extracted, and a range corresponding to the eyes, nose, mouth or ear exists in the extracted range. In the case, the extracted range is recognized as a face.

  Thereafter, it is determined in step S3109 whether or not extraction of face data is completed. If face data extraction has not been completed, the real face authentication process ends. If face data extraction is completed, the extracted face data is stored in the prior data storage area provided in the main RAM 85 in step S3110. After that, the face authentication request flag in the main RAM 85 is cleared to “0” in step S3111, and the real face authentication process is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3101 that a return operation is being performed, the authentication process at the time of the return operation is performed in step S3112, and the process for real face authentication is ended. FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing an authentication process at the time of the return operation.

  In step S3201, it is determined whether the return time authentication monitoring flag provided in the main RAM 85 is set to "1". The return-time authentication monitoring flag is mainly used to capture an image of one frame with the imaging substrate 71 in order to obtain an image of the player's face when the return operation is performed. It is a flag for specifying in the side MPU 83. When a negative determination is made in step S3201, in step S3202, the imaging command flag corresponding to the return authentication in the main RAM 85 is set to "1", and the return authentication flag in the main RAM 85 is set. After “1” is set, this authentication process is ended. By setting “1” to the imaging command flag, an irradiation instruction signal is transmitted toward the imaging substrate 71 in the imaging control processing of the main MPU 83, and imaging on the imaging substrate 71 is started.

  When “1” is set in the return-time authentication monitor flag, an affirmative determination is made in step S3201, and the process proceeds to step S3203. In step S3203, it is determined whether “1” is set in the imaging completion flag of the main RAM 85 or not. That is, it is determined whether imaging of an image for one frame for performing face authentication has been completed. If a negative determination is made in step S3203, the present authentication processing is ended as it is, and if a positive determination is made in step S3203, the process proceeds to step S3204.

  In step S3204, the imaging completion flag of the main RAM 85 is cleared to "0". In the following step S3205, face data extraction processing is executed. The contents of the extraction process are the same as the extraction process of step S3108 in the face authentication process (FIG. 74).

  Thereafter, in step S3206, it is determined whether extraction of face data is completed. If face data extraction has not been completed, the present authentication process ends. If face data extraction is completed, the extracted face data is stored in the collation data storage area provided in the main RAM 85 in step S3207.

  In the following step S3208, both the corresponding imaging command flag of the main RAM 85 and the post-return operation flag are cleared to "0". Here, when “1” is set in the imaging command flag in the authentication process at the time of return operation, the imaging command flag is not cleared “0” only when the imaging on the imaging substrate 71 is completed. When face data is stored in the comparison data storage area, “0” is cleared. Thus, imaging is repeated on the imaging substrate 71 until face data for matching is obtained, and face data for matching can be reliably obtained. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when face data can not be extracted before the face authentication monitoring period has elapsed since the corresponding imaging command flag was set to “1” in step S3202. As in step S3208, various flags may be cleared to "0", and a process for alarming may be executed in step S3212 and step S3213 described later.

  Thereafter, in step S3209, the face data stored in the advance data storage area of the main RAM 85 and the face data stored in the collation data storage area of the main RAM 85 are collated. In this case, the line of the jaw is extracted in each face data, and the relative position of the eye, nose, mouth or ear with respect to the line of the jaw, and the outer shape of the eye, nose, mouth or ear are 90% or more in both face data. If yes, it is determined that the face data match. In addition, as long as authentication of face data can be performed, the specific method of authentication of these face data is arbitrary.

  In the subsequent step S3210, it is determined whether the result of the matching process in step S3209 is a match result. If face data is not stored in the advance data storage area, it is treated that the face data do not match. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3210, a return permission command is transmitted to the MPU 113 of the payout control device 111 in step S3211. When the MPU 113 of the payout control device 111 receives the return permission command from the main MPU 83, the MPU 113 transmits, to the ball lending device Y, a return instruction signal indicating that the storage medium storing the lendable information should be ejected. As a result, the storage medium in which the lendable information is stored is discharged from the ball lending device Y.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S3210, a warning command is transmitted to the sound side MPU 93 in step S3212. The sound light side MPU 93 reads the alarm light emission data from the sound light side ROM 94 to the sound light side RAM 95 by receiving the alarm command. By reading out the alarm light emission data, the alarm light emission data is referred to in the light emission control process (step S 503) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14), and the face light can not be normally recognized in the display light emitting unit 23 Light emission is performed in the mode which shows that. This makes it possible to prompt the manager of the game hall to check whether the storage medium has been returned to the authorized player.

  Thereafter, after the alarm external output process is executed in step S3213, the present authentication process is ended. In the alarm external output process, a signal indicating that the collation of the face data with respect to the return operation of the storage medium is not matched is output to the hall computer HC through the external terminal plate 109. As a result, it becomes possible for the hole computer HC to recognize that the abnormality has occurred.

  According to the embodiment described above, even if the return button 28 of the ball lending operating device 26 is operated to eject the storage medium storing the lendable information, the storage medium is not immediately ejected. If the face data matches, the storage medium is discharged. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an act of unauthorized acquisition of the storage medium.

  In the present embodiment, the second situation monitoring process in the first embodiment may be executed by the main MPU 83. In this case, when an affirmative determination is made in the process corresponding to step S1513 in the second situation monitoring process (FIG. 36), in addition to or instead of the configuration in which the abnormality notification is performed by the pachinko machine 10, the progress of the game It is good also as composition which performs processing for making it stop. For example, by making an affirmative determination in step S206 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) of the main side MPU 83, the progress of the game is such that the game ball is stopped firing and the special view special power control process is cancelled. It may be configured to be stopped. Further, in addition to or in place of the processing for stopping the progress of the game, a signal indicating that the operation for dealing with the abnormality is specified may be externally output to the hall computer HC of the game hall.

Third Embodiment
In the present embodiment, the configuration of the imaging substrate 71 is different from that of the first embodiment. The different configurations will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 76 is a block diagram for describing an electrical configuration of the imaging substrate 71 in the present embodiment.

  A light emitting device 72, a control circuit 74, an imaging device 131, and a signal processing circuit 141 are provided in the imaging substrate 71 of the present embodiment. The configurations of the light emitting device 72 and the control circuit 74 are the same as those of the imaging substrate 71 in the first embodiment.

  Unlike the imaging substrate 71 in the first embodiment, the imaging device 131 is configured to be able to capture not only distance data but also a visible image. Specifically, the imaging device 131 is provided with a distance data imaging sensor 132 and a visible image imaging sensor 133.

  The distance data imaging sensor 132 is the same as the imaging sensor 73 a in the first embodiment. A signal acquired by the distance data imaging sensor 132 is transmitted to the distance data signal processing circuit 142 provided in the signal processing circuit 141, and the distance data signal processing circuit 142 derives distance data.

  As the visible image pickup sensor 133, a CCD sensor, a MOS sensor or a CMOS sensor is used so that a monochrome image can be obtained. The signal acquired by the visible image pickup sensor 133 is transmitted to the visible image signal processing circuit 143 provided in the signal processing circuit 141, and the visible image signal processing circuit 143 derives a monochrome image. The visible image pickup sensor 133 may be configured to pick up a color image.

  The distance data imaging sensor 132 and the visible image imaging sensor 133 are arranged in parallel at near positions, and the same or substantially the same range is the imaging range. According to this configuration, it becomes possible to acquire distance data for each unit data which is the minimum unit for determining color information in a visible image, and it becomes possible to recognize the visible image as a three-dimensional image.

  The imaging result of the imaging substrate 71 in the present embodiment is the cancellation monitoring process, height position monitoring process, face authentication process, first situation monitoring process, second situation monitoring process, and operation effect process in the first embodiment. Used in each of the control processes. In this case, not only the distance data but also the visible image is acquired, it is possible to accurately extract face data and hand data. Further, not only the visible image but also the distance data is acquired, for example, it is possible to cancel the image portion based on the surface 22a of the window panel 22 as in the first embodiment.

  In the present embodiment, face data of a person to be monitored is stored in advance in the sound light side ROM 94 as reference face data, and, for example, the player's face data extracted in the second situation monitoring process; The reference face data may be collated, and when the collation result is coincident, the matching process may be executed. As the matching process, for example, notification may be performed in the pachinko machine 10 itself, or an external output corresponding to the matching may be performed on the hall computer of the game hall, or at least at least the process for controlling the progress of the game. The configuration may be such that the progress of the game is limited by not being partially executed. As a result, for example, it becomes possible to make the administrator of the game hall recognize that a person registered as a fraudster has appeared, or to prevent the person from playing a game.

Fourth Embodiment
In the present embodiment, the execution mode of the operation effect in the situation where the restriction flag of the sound light side RAM 95 is set to “1” in the cancellation monitoring process (FIG. 25) is different from the first embodiment. The different configurations will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing the division effect setting process in the present embodiment.

  First, in step S3301, it is determined whether the start condition of the divided effect is satisfied. The start condition of the split effect is the case where the sound data side RAM 95 reads out the data table of the effect for game circulation, and the pointer data indicating the contents of the control object in the data table indicates the start of the split effect It holds true when it corresponds to data. When a negative determination is made in step S3301, the main dividing effect setting process is ended as it is, and when a positive determination is made in step S3301, the process proceeds to step S3302.

  In step S3302, it is determined whether "1" is set in the reference flag of the sound light side RAM 95 or not. That is, it is determined whether the reference switch 91a is disposed at the ON position. In step S3303, it is determined whether “1” is set in the restriction flag of the sound light side RAM 95 or not.

  If a negative determination is made in both step S3302 and step S3303, various data for divided display are read out in step S3304. The various data for divided display includes light emission data and sound output data for divided display, and the light emission control process (step S 503) and sound of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) are included in the light emission data and the sound output data. By referring to the output control process (step S504), light emission is performed in the display light emitting unit 23 in the divided display pattern, and sound is output from the speaker unit 24 in the divided display pattern. Furthermore, in step S3304, a display command for split display is transmitted to the display control device 96. The display control device 96 causes the symbol display device 61 to perform divided display as shown in FIG. 45 (a-1) by receiving the display command.

  On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in either step S3302 or step S3303, various data for selection display are read out in step S3305. Various data for selection display includes light emission data and sound output data for selection display, and the light emission data and sound output data are used for the light emission control process (step S 503) and sound of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14). By referring to the output control process (step S504), light emission is performed in the display light emitting unit 23 in the selection display pattern, and sound is output from the speaker unit 24 in the selection display pattern. Furthermore, in step S3305, a display command for selective display is transmitted to the display control device 96. The display control device 96 causes the symbol display device 61 to perform selection display as shown in FIG. 45 (a-2) by receiving the display command.

  When the process of step S3304 or step S3305 is executed, “1” is set in both the imaging command flag and the split effect flag corresponding to the split effect in the sound light side RAM 95 in step S3306, and then the main split effect setting is made. End the process. By setting “1” to the imaging command flag, as described above, the irradiation instruction signal is transmitted toward the imaging substrate 71 in the imaging control process (FIG. 21), and imaging is started in the imaging substrate 71. Ru.

  According to the present embodiment described above in detail, in the situation where the restriction flag is set to “1”, not the divided display but the selective display is performed as the divided effect. As described above, the restriction flag is set to “1” when it is specified that the cancellation monitoring target is generated in the cancellation monitoring process (FIG. 25). Then, the situation where the restriction flag is set to “1” may be a situation where the imaging substrate 71 can not normally capture an image of one frame. In this case, by not performing split display, it is not necessary to finely distinguish selection operations in a situation where imaging can not be normally performed. On the other hand, it is possible to generate an operation effect even in a situation where the restriction flag is set to “1” by performing selection display instead of not performing division effect at all. Become.

  In the stop operation effect setting process (FIG. 52), when the restriction flag is not set to “1”, the multi-row display is performed as the stop operation effect, and the restriction flag is set to “1”. In this case, a single row display may be performed as the stop operation effect.

Fifth Embodiment
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of height position monitoring processing is different from that of the first embodiment. The different configurations will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing height position monitoring processing in the present embodiment.

  In the height position monitoring process in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the target extraction is completed in the height position target extraction process (step S3411) (step S3412: YES), the height position group identification process (always) is performed. Step S3414) is not executed, the height position when it is specified that the distance data corresponding to the extracted height position is the distance data within the specific target range in step S3413 Group identification processing (step S3414) is executed. In this case, the player's face is present when the player sitting in a chair provided in front of the pachinko machine 10 views the window panel 22 with his / her back in the specified target range The specific target range is determined by experiments in the design stage of the pachinko machine 10. In this case, the specific target range is set as a range not larger than the first target distance than the window panel 22 and smaller than a second target distance farther than the first target distance.

  The processing contents of the height position monitoring processing are the same as the height position monitoring processing (FIG. 30) in the first embodiment except that the processing of step S 3413 is executed.

  According to the above configuration, since the group at the height position is specified when the face of the player is present at the position that should be present when performing the rendering operation, the height position group in the various effect control processing is It becomes possible to appropriately carry out the corresponding operation effective range setting process (step S1707, etc.).

Sixth Embodiment
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the cancellation monitoring process is different from that of the first embodiment. The different configurations will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  As shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 79, in the pachinko machine 10, a predetermined position (for example, a predetermined position on the back surface of the window panel 22) within the gaming area PA and not interfering with the gaming balls flowing down the gaming area PA. In the lower region, a plate P to which predetermined information is attached may be arranged. Examples of the predetermined information given to the plate P include the specification of the pachinko machine 10 and the explanation of the contents of the effects. In the case where the plate P is disposed, and the cancellation monitoring process is performed as in the first embodiment, the imaging result of the imaging substrate 71 is displayed due to the presence of the plate P. The restriction of the execution of the used effect and the notification of abnormality will be executed. On the other hand, the plate P may or may not be arranged in the game hall even if it is a pachinko machine 10 of the same type and the same type, and the area in which the plate P is provided in the monitoring process for cancellation is It is not desirable to exclude from monitoring.

  Hereinafter, a processing configuration for enabling the cancellation monitoring to be appropriately performed even when the plate P is disposed will be described. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the cancellation monitoring process in the present embodiment.

  In steps S3501 to S3508, the same processes as steps S1001 to S1008 of the cancel monitoring process (FIG. 25) in the first embodiment are executed. If it is determined in step S3509 that distance data corresponding to the monitoring distance or less is present, it is determined in step S3510 whether the exclusion setting switch is ON.

  The exclusion setting switch is provided at a position that can be operated when the gaming machine main body 12 is opened forward with respect to the outer frame 11 such as the sound emission control device 91, and between the ON position and the OFF position. Switching operation is possible. The exclusion setting switch is electrically connected to the sound light side MPU 93, and the sound light side MPU 93 is disposed at any one of the ON position and the OFF position of the exclusion setting switch by the electric signal received from the exclusion setting switch. It is possible to recognize the

  If the exclusion setting switch is in the ON position, an affirmative determination is made in step S3510, and the process advances to step S3511. In step S511, it is determined whether the distance data determined to correspond to the monitoring distance or less is included in the exclusion target range in the image G for one frame corresponding to the virtual two-dimensional plane. The data of the exclusion target range is stored in advance in the sound light side ROM 94, and is set corresponding to the position where the plate P is disposed in the design stage of the pachinko machine 10.

  When the exclusion setting switch is arranged at the OFF position (step S3510: NO) or when the distance data determined to correspond to the monitoring distance or less is not included in the exclusion target range (step S3511: NO) In step S3512 to step S3517, it is specified whether or not the distance data is cancellation target distance data, and a process for dealing with it is executed. Note that the processing contents of step S 3512 to step S 3517 are the same as the processing contents of step S 10 10 to step S 10 15 of the cancellation monitoring process (FIG. 25) in the first embodiment.

  On the other hand, if the exclusion setting switch is disposed at the ON position (step S3510: YES), and if the distance data determined to correspond to the monitoring distance or less is included in the exclusion target range ((step S3510) In step S 3511: YES, the processing shown in step S 3512 to step S 3517 is not executed.

  With the above configuration, when the plate P is disposed in the game area PA, the plate P can be ignored for cancellation monitoring, and for example, due to the presence of the plate P, the imaging substrate 71 It is possible to prevent the regulation of the execution of effects using the imaging result and the notification of an abnormality from being performed.

  In addition, there is an exclusion setting switch that can be manually operated by the game hall manager, and when the exclusion setting switch is placed in the OFF position, the monitoring range in which the plate P is originally disposed is also a target for cancellation monitoring It is assumed. Thereby, in the game hall where the plate P is not disposed, it is possible to widen the range of the monitoring for cancellation.

  It should be noted that the color of plate P is designated in the configuration for acquiring an image of one frame based on capturing a monochrome image or a color image instead of the configuration for acquiring an image G for one frame based on distance data. It is also possible to exclude it from the target of the monitoring for cancellation by storing it.

Other Embodiments
In addition, it is not limited to the description content of embodiment mentioned above, A various deformation | transformation improvement is possible within the range which does not deviate from the meaning of this invention. For example, it may be changed as follows. Incidentally, the configurations of the following different embodiments may be applied individually to the configuration of the above embodiment, or may be applied in combination.

  (1) As shown in the modification of FIG. 81 (a), in the division display in the symbol display device 61, the selection images GA to GD may be displayed side by side not only in the horizontal direction but also in the vertical direction. . Specifically, the effect GA selection image GA and the effect B selection image GB are displayed side by side without intervals, and the effect C selection image GC and the effect D selection image GD are displayed. The image A for selection A and the image for selection C for selection C are displayed vertically without any space, and the image B for selection B is also displayed. The GB and the effect D selection image GD are displayed side by side in the vertical direction without intervals. Then, operation effective ranges EA11 to EA14 are set in one-to-one correspondence with the selection images GA to GD at positions corresponding to the front of the selection images GA to GD.

  In this case, the operation effective range EA11 for selecting the effect A arranged in the lateral direction and the operation effective range EA12 for selecting the effect B are set to be arranged in the lateral direction at a predetermined interval, similarly to the lateral direction. The operation effective range EA13 for effect C selection and the operation effective range EA14 for effect D selection arranged in parallel are set to be arranged in the lateral direction at a predetermined interval. In addition, the operation effective range EA11 for effect A selection arranged in the vertical direction and the operation effective range EA13 for effect C selection are set to be arranged in the longitudinal direction with a predetermined interval, and similarly in the vertical direction The operation effective range EA12 for the effect B selection and the operation effective range EA14 for the effect D selection, which are arranged side by side, are set to be arranged in the vertical direction at a predetermined interval. With the above configuration, the possibility of simultaneously recognizing the occurrence of an operation in the plurality of operation effective ranges EA11 to EA14 is reduced while securing the display range of the selection images GA to GD as wide as possible.

  In particular, the interval IY of the operation effective ranges EA11 to EA14 aligned in the vertical direction is wider than the interval IX of the operation effective ranges EA11 to EA14 aligned in the horizontal direction. Thus, due to the positional relationship between the imaging substrate 71 and the symbol display device 61 and the difference in the height of the player's eyes, the position at which the player actually performed the rendering operation and the imaging of the imaging substrate 71 It is possible to improve the accuracy of the operation recognition in the vertical direction which is easily deviated from the operation position grasped based on the result.

  The selection images GA to GD are not limited to two in each of the vertical direction and the horizontal direction, and may be set to three, four or five or more in each of the vertical direction and the horizontal direction. The configuration may be such that a plurality of selection images are displayed side by side in each of the vertical direction and the horizontal direction, and the number of vertical directions and the number of horizontal directions are different. In this case, the positional relationship between the imaging substrate 71 and the symbol display device 61 by making the number of selection images displayed side by side in the horizontal direction larger than the number of selection images displayed in the vertical direction, and With regard to the vertical direction in which the position where the player actually performed the rendering operation and the operation position grasped based on the imaging result of the imaging substrate 71 are easily deviated due to the difference in the height of the eyes of the player It is possible to improve the accuracy of Thus, the configuration in which the number of selection images displayed side by side in the horizontal direction is larger than the number of selection images displayed in the vertical direction is only for the symbol display device 61 having a horizontally long display surface. The present invention is also effective to a symbol display device having a square display surface and a symbol display device having a vertically long display surface.

  (2) In the modification shown in FIG. 81 (b), when displaying a plurality of columns in the stop operation effect, the plurality of variable display areas CA1 to CA3 are displayed side by side, not in the horizontal direction, In each of the variable display areas CA1 to CA3, symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the horizontal direction. Thereby, it becomes possible to perform variation display of symbols in the same manner as the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the effects for game use.

  In this case, operation effective ranges EA21 to EA23 corresponding to the respective variable display areas CA1 to CA3 are also arranged in the vertical direction in correspondence with the display of the respective variable display areas CA1 to CA3 arranged in the vertical direction. . These operation effective ranges EA21 to EA23 are set in the vertical direction at predetermined intervals. Thereby, the possibility of simultaneously recognizing the occurrence of the operation in the plurality of operation effective ranges EA21 to EA23 is reduced.

  (3) The antireflective agent may be applied to a member disposed in the game area PA and not included in the imaging range of the imaging device 73, or an antireflective sheet may be laminated. As a result, it is possible to suppress the reflection of light around the imaging device 73, and it becomes possible to accurately derive distance data in the imaging substrate 71.

  (4) The sound data side ROM 94 stores the image data corresponding to the game ball in advance, and the image portion extracted as an object present on the side of the imaging substrate 71 from the window panel 22 corresponds to the game ball If it corresponds to the image data, it may be excluded from the cancellation monitoring target. In this case, it is possible to directly exclude game balls flowing down the game area PA from the targets for cancellation monitoring.

  (5) The imaging substrate 71 may be electrically connected to the display control device 96 instead of the sound light side MPU 93. In this case, the display control device 96 may be configured to execute various monitoring processes and various effect processes using the imaging result of the imaging substrate 71 in the above embodiment. Further, in the present configuration, since it is possible to display the result of imaging on the imaging substrate 71 as it is on the symbol display device 61, for example, in the confrontation effect, the image of the player's hand captured is directly displayed on the symbol display device It may be displayed at 61. In particular, in the configuration in which not only distance data but also a visible image such as a monochrome image or a color image is captured as in the third embodiment, the result of imaging by the imaging substrate 71 is displayed as it is by the symbol display device 61 As a result, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the image from being degraded.

  (6) The imaging substrate 71 may be electrically connected not only to the sound light side MPU 93 but also to the display control device 96. In this case, while the sound light side MPU 93 performs various monitoring processing and processing for various effects using the imaging result of the imaging substrate 71 in the above embodiment, the symbol display device 61 picks up the result of imaging in the imaging substrate 71. Can be displayed as it is.

  (7) The main body that performs imaging control of the imaging substrate 71 is not borne by an MPU provided to execute control other than imaging control such as the sound light side MPU 93, but a dedicated MPU that performs the imaging control is provided. It is good also as composition which is carried out. In this case, the dedicated MPU extracts the target image portion from the image G for one frame and performs face authentication, and the authentication result is transmitted to the main MPU 83 or the sound side MPU 93 and these MPUs 83 and 93 A process corresponding to the authentication result may be executed. In addition, a dedicated MPU determines whether or not the image portion of the hand is included in the operation effective range, the determination result is transmitted to the sound side MPU 93, and the sound side MPU 93 corresponds to the rendering operation. The configuration may be such that execution control of the effect is performed.

  (8) The signal processing circuit 75 periodically acquires the distance data corresponding to the image G for one frame regardless of whether or not it is necessary to use the imaging result of the imaging substrate 71 (for example, 10 msec. Periodically). If it is necessary to use the imaging result in the sound light side MPU 93, the imaging result corresponding to the image G for one frame may be read out from the signal processing circuit 75. In this case, it is possible to shorten the time from the timing when it becomes necessary to use the imaging result in the sound light side MPU 93 to the timing when the imaging result becomes actually available.

  (9) The position at which the imaging substrate 71 is provided is not limited to the position in the above embodiment, and may be provided, for example, in the roof unit 66 of the center frame 65, provided at the lower part of the game area PA. It is good also as composition which is carried out. Moreover, it may be configured to be provided on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 instead of the rear of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the window panel 22. For example, the upper bulging portion 31 may be provided, the lower bulging portion 32 may be provided, or the upper door frame 14 may be provided at an upper portion. As described above, even in the configuration in which the imaging substrate 71 is provided on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to derive distance data in the imaging substrate 71 by providing a covering member that transmits light around the substrate. It is possible to make the substrate 71 difficult to visually recognize.

  (10) The timing at which the cancel monitoring process, height position monitoring process, face authentication process, first situation monitoring process and second situation monitoring process are performed is not limited to the timing in the above embodiment, but is optional. is there. For example, any processing may be performed only when the demonstration screen is displayed on the symbol display device 61, or may be performed only when the firing of the gaming ball is stopped. It may be configured to be performed only in a situation where the presentation for the game circulation and the presentation for the opening / closing execution mode are not performed at 61. In addition, in the configuration in which the above-described processing is executed even in the situation where the effects for gaming are executed, the configuration is performed in the situation where the variable display of symbols is performed in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. It is good also as composition which is performed until reach production is started.

  (11) In the signal processing circuit 75, when the signal strength received from the imaging device 73 is too high than expected, the signal processing circuit 75 transmits an intensity abnormal signal to the sound side MPU 93. The sound light side MPU 93 may be configured to execute a process for performing an abnormality notification corresponding to that. As a result, when an abnormality occurs in the imaging substrate 71 itself, it is possible to prompt the manager of the gaming hall to cope with it. In addition, when the sound light side MPU 93 receives the above-mentioned intensity abnormality signal, the processing using the imaging result of the imaging substrate 71 is not executed, so that the abnormal imaging result is not used. Is possible.

  (12) The monitoring reference distance may be set in a plurality of stages in the cancellation monitoring process, and the processing content to be executed thereafter may be different depending on which monitoring reference distance the distance data is less than. . For example, when distance data from a position slightly ahead of the front surface 22a of the window panel 22 to the back surface 22b of the window panel 22 is acquired, execution restriction and notification of effects using the imaging result are performed, and the window panel When distance data corresponding to the presence of a foreign object behind the pachinko machine 10 behind the back surface 22b of 22 is acquired, the game is prevented by preventing execution of at least a part of processing for advancing the game. It is good also as composition which stops progress and reports. In addition, since it is necessary to perform processing for stopping progress of a game in the main side MPU 83, in addition to or instead of the sound side MPU 93, the imaging result of the imaging board 71 is sent to the main side MPU 83 Is preferred. According to the above configuration, it is possible to take measures of levels corresponding to each monitoring result.

  (13) When the reference switch 91a is disposed in the ON position, the reference switch 91a is disposed in the ON position instead of the configuration in which the number of operation effective ranges decreases and the operation effective range is set wide. In this case, the number of operation effective ranges is not changed, but each operation effective range may be set wider than in the case where the operation effective range is disposed at the OFF position. In this case, it is possible to easily recognize the occurrence of the rendering operation while preventing the number of selections at the time of the divided rendering or the stop operation rendering being reduced.

  (14) When the reference switch 91a is disposed at the ON position, the operation effective range may be set narrow instead of the configuration in which the operation effective range is set wide. When the reference switch 91a is disposed at the ON position, the signal intensity serving as a reference for deriving distance data in the signal processing circuit 75 is set lower than that when the reference switch 91a is disposed at the OFF position. It may be easy to pick up noise when deriving data. On the other hand, by setting the operation effective range narrow, the possibility that the noise is recognized as occurrence of the rendering operation is reduced.

  (15) The reference distance from which the distance data is derived when the reference switch 91a is disposed at the ON position is a distance farther from the imaging device 73 than the back surface 22b of the window panel 22, and the surface 22a of the window panel 22 Instead of the configuration in which the distance is set closer to the imaging device 73, the distance may be set farther from the imaging device 73 than the surface 22 a of the window panel 22. In this case, even when the radio wave goth prevention sheet PS is attached not only to the back surface 22b of the window panel 22 but also to the front surface 22a, the use of the distance data derived by the imaging substrate 71 can be made compatible with that. It becomes.

  (16) When the reference switch 91a is disposed at the ON position, the signal processing circuit 75 is modified from the case where the signal strength reference of whether or not to be the target of distance data derivation is disposed at the OFF position. In addition, distance data corresponding to less than the reference distance is not transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93, but only one of them may be performed.

  (17) In the first situation monitoring process, when it is identified that the game is not continuously performed despite the fact that the player is seated in front of the pachinko machine 10, the notification in the pachinko machine 10 itself Alternatively, an external output corresponding to the situation may be provided to the hall computer of the game hall without being performed. In this case, it is possible to make the administrator of the game hall aware of the situation while preventing the person sitting in front of the pachinko machine 10 from being notified directly. . The external output may be performed by the sound-light MPU 93 in the first embodiment, or may be performed by the main MPU 83 in the second embodiment.

  (18) In the game hall, it is possible to set a period required for the notification to be started when the game is not continuously performed even though the player is seated in front of the pachinko machine 10 The configuration may be possible. This makes it possible to monitor according to the game hall.

  (19) In the first situation monitoring process, when it is specified that the game is not continued to be performed despite the seat in front of the pachinko machine 10, it is determined from the speaker 24 that An alarm sound such as “Please move if not performed” may be output, and such a character may be displayed on the symbol display device 61.

  (20) If an error handling operation is specified in the second situation monitoring process, no notification is given in the pachinko machine 10 itself, and an external output corresponding to the situation is given to the game hall computer. It may be In this case, it is possible to make the administrator of the game hall aware of the situation, while not directly notifying the person who has become the target of specifying the operation corresponding to the abnormality. . The external output may be performed by the sound-light MPU 93 in the first embodiment, or may be performed by the main MPU 83 in the second embodiment.

  (21) When an operation corresponding to an abnormality is specified in the second condition monitoring process, a notification sound such as “The abnormal operation has been recognized” may be output from the speaker unit 24. In the symbol display device 61, Such characters may be displayed.

  (22) Instead of specifying the height position of the player's face in the height position monitoring process, the height position of the player's eyes may be specified. In this case, it is preferable to extract the eye itself from the image G for one frame, so that the imaging substrate 71 can pick up a visible image such as a monochrome image or a color image as in the third embodiment. It is preferable to do.

  (23) Instead of adjusting the position of the operation effective range in the virtual two-dimensional plane (the image G for one frame) in various effect control processing according to the height position of the face specified in the height position monitoring processing The position of the player's hand on the virtual two-dimensional plane may be adjusted. Further, the position of the selection image displayed on the symbol display device 61 may be adjusted according to the height position of the face specified in the height position monitoring process when the division effect is executed. In addition, two or more adjustments may be performed among adjustment of the position of the operation effective range in the virtual two-dimensional plane, adjustment of the position of the hand in the virtual two-dimensional plane, and adjustment of the position of the selection image.

  (24) In addition to or instead of the configuration in which the adjustment according to the height position of the player's face is performed, the adjustment according to the lateral position of the player's face may be performed. In this case, according to the identified lateral position, any one of the adjustment of the position of the operation effective range in the virtual two-dimensional plane, the adjustment of the position of the hand in the virtual two-dimensional plane, and the adjustment of the position of the selection image One adjustment may be performed, or two or more adjustments may be performed.

  (25) When the height position of the face is specified in the height position monitoring process, notification may be made that the specification is to be performed by the symbol display device 61 or the like. In this case, it is possible to specify the height position of the face in a situation in which the player is in an attitude when performing a rendering operation.

  (26) An operation unit operable by the player is provided on the front of the pachinko machine 10, and the height position monitoring process performs the height position monitoring process when the identification start operation of the height position is performed on the operation unit. The configuration may be specified.

  (27) The size and direction of the image displayed on the symbol display device 61 may be adjusted according to the result of specifying the face position and the eye position of the player. By applying this configuration to, for example, 3D image display for feeling the spread in the depth direction in the symbol display device 61, it becomes possible to perform 3D image display according to the position of the player's eyes, and visualizing the 3D image It is possible to enhance the effect.

  (28) A configuration for specifying the position of the player's face and the position of the eyes may be applied to the configuration for performing the dual view display by the symbol display device 61. In this case, dual view display can be performed according to the position of the player's eyes, and each image displayed as dual view can be appropriately viewed.

  (29) In the situation where the information on the number of lentable gaming balls is stored, the notification process is executed when it is specified that the player has left the seat based on the imaging result of the imaging substrate 71. It is also good. As the notification process, for example, a process for causing the display light emitting unit 23 to emit light in a predetermined mode, a process for causing the speaker unit 24 to output a predetermined notification sound, and a predetermined notification image displayed by the symbol display device 61 Processing for causing the game to be performed and processing for outputting the data to the hall computer of the game hall externally, any one of these processing may be executed, and a plurality of processing among these processing may be performed. It may be configured to be executed.

  (30) A configuration in which the notification process is executed when the face of the player recognized based on the imaging result of the imaging substrate 71 is changed in a situation where the information of the number of lentable gaming balls is stored. It may be As the notification process, for example, a process for causing the display light emitting unit 23 to emit light in a predetermined mode, a process for causing the speaker unit 24 to output a predetermined notification sound, and a predetermined notification image displayed by the symbol display device 61 Processing for causing the game to be performed and processing for outputting the data to the hall computer of the game hall externally, any one of these processing may be executed, and a plurality of processing among these processing may be performed. It may be configured to be executed.

  (31) When the return button 28 is operated, the payout control device 111 starts discharging the storage medium storing the information corresponding to the number of usable gaming balls after the predetermined wait period has elapsed. It may be configured to In this case, face authentication is completed in the predetermined wait period, and notification is started in the case of abnormality, so that when a person who is not a legitimate player operates the return button 28, storage for it. It becomes possible to start notification of abnormality before the discharge of the medium is started.

  (32) A part or all of the window panel 22 may be a liquid crystal panel capable of transmitting light, and a selection image indicating a position where the rendering operation should be performed may be displayed on the liquid crystal panel. In this case, the position at which the player takes a hand to perform rendering operation is closer to the position of the selection image than in the above embodiment, so the influence of the height position of the face on recognition of the height position of the hand is reduced. Be done.

  (33) In the configuration in which the window panel 22 is a touch panel and an image for selection operation is displayed on the window panel 22, a configuration may be applied in which the priority of rendering operation is set. Specifically, in the configuration in which a plurality of selection operation images are simultaneously displayed on the window panel 22, there is a possibility that a plurality of selection operation images may be simultaneously operated. On the other hand, it is possible to individually recognize each rendering operation in accordance with the predetermined priority by setting in advance the priority to be recognized as the occurrence of the rendering operation.

  (34) When the player's hands are simultaneously included in a plurality of operation effective ranges in the split effect or the stop operation effect, the image portion of the hand is included in the virtual two-dimensional plane (the image G for one frame) It may be configured to specify that the rendering operation has been performed with respect to the operation effective range on the side having a large area. Thereby, it is possible to determine that one rendering operation is effective without setting the priority in advance.

  (35) In the first notification effect control process, the divided effect control process, and the stop operation effect control process, when it is determined that the player's hand is included in the operation effective range, the generation operation is identified immediately as the effective operation. Instead of the above, when it is determined that the player's hand is included over the operation determination reference period (for example, 2 sec) or more, the configuration may be such that the generation of the effective operation is specified. This makes it possible to prevent the player from being identified as a rendering operation when the player moves his hand regardless of the rendering operation.

  (36) In the first notification effect control process, the second notification effect control process, the divided effect control process, and the stop operation effect control process, the distance data corresponding to the player's hand corresponds to the reference object distance or more. Is not the determination target of the effective operation, but instead, the distance data corresponding to the hand of the player is previously determined to correspond to the distance to a position slightly ahead of the surface 22 a of the window panel 22 If it corresponds to less than the predetermined distance, it may be excluded from the determination target of the effective operation. In this case, since it will not be determined that the operation is effective if the hand is brought too close to the window panel 22, the possibility of the surface 22a of the window panel 22 being touched is reduced. Further, when the distance data corresponding to the player's hand is equal to or more than the first distance and less than the second distance farther than the first distance, the configuration may be set as the determination target of the effective operation. Thereby, it becomes possible to set the operation effective range in the front-rear direction.

  (37) The reference target distance as to whether or not to be the determination target of the effective operation in each effect control process may be configured differently. For example, in the first notification effect control process, the second notification effect control process, the divided effect control process, and the stop operation effect control process, the same reference object distance as the above embodiment is set, and the continuous effect control process and the confrontation effect In the control process of the above, another object distance which is farther than the reference object distance of the above embodiment is set, and in the continuous effect control process and the control process of the confrontation effect, the hand operation corresponding to the other object distance or more is effective. It may be configured not to be determined.

  (38) The image displayed on the symbol display device 61 may be enlarged or reduced based on distance data of the hand when the rendering operation is performed. For example, when a hand is included in the size determination reference range, a predetermined image is displayed in an initial size, and when a hand is present at a position closer than the size determination reference range, a size larger than the initial size The predetermined image may be displayed, and the predetermined image may be displayed in a size smaller than the initial size when the hand is present at a position farther than the size determination reference range. Conversely, when a hand is present at a position closer than the size determination reference range, a predetermined image is displayed in a size smaller than the initial size, and a hand is present at a position farther than the size determination reference range In this case, a predetermined image may be displayed with a size larger than the initial size. Thereby, it is possible to display an image according to the position of the player's hand.

  (39) The number of selection images displayed in the symbol display device 61 at the time of divided effect is not limited to two, and may be three, four or five or more. In this case, by arranging all the selection images in the horizontal direction, it is possible to reduce the influence of the height position of the player's face when determining whether or not the rendering operation has been performed.

  (40) Although the first notification effect may be executed in the situation where the divided effect is being executed, the first notification effect may not be executed in the situation where the divided effect is being executed. In this case, the effective operation range is not set in the vertical direction in the virtual two-dimensional plane (the image G for one frame), and a plurality of effective operation ranges are always set in the horizontal direction. It is possible to reduce the influence of the height position of the player's face in the determination of whether or not the player has taken place.

  (41) In the case where display in a plurality of columns is performed as the stop operation effect, a configuration may be adopted in which symbols different from symbols displayed in variation in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed in each of the variation display areas CA1 to CA3. In addition, in the case where display of a plurality of rows is performed as the stop operation effect, the variation display direction of the symbols in each of the variation display areas CA1 to CA3 may be the same as the variation display direction of the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. Further, in the stop operation effect, the variable display of symbols may be performed at a speed at which the symbols can be identified in each of the variable display areas CA1 to CA3. In this case, the player performs the stop operation to stop the desired symbol. It will be.

  (42) When the final effect is executed in the continuous effect, the fish character CH1 may be gradually moved toward the destination according to the position of the player's hand performing the horizontal flow operation. In this case, the player can easily recognize that the fish character CH1 has moved by the player's own flow operation. In the configuration, in the case of the completion effect, the display is performed in which the fish character CH1 moves to the end on the movement destination side according to the position of the player's hand. On the other hand, if the effect is incomplete, the fish character CH1 follows the player according to the position of the player's hand up to the limit line BL, but when reaching the limit line BL, the fish character CH1 returns toward the end on the appearance side and the end The display is made to retract from the unit to the outside of the display surface.

  (43) The fish character CH1 may move to the end on the movement destination side according to the position of the player's hand. However, in order to distinguish from the final effect, in the prior notice effect, even if the end portion on the movement destination side is moved, the display disappears so as to move from the end portion on the movement destination side to the outside of the display surface It is preferable that the configuration is not made.

  (44) Instead of the display in which the moving amount of the fish character CH1 in the predetermined moving direction changes according to the position of the player's hand, the character is displayed on the display surface according to the position of the player's hand. The display effect may appear on the display surface or disappear from the display surface, and the character appears on the display surface when the movement of the player's hand is the predetermined movement, or disappears from the display surface or the predetermined movement The display effect may be performed.

  (45) In the confrontation effect, when the draw result is obtained, the confrontation effect may be executed again. However, since it is not preferable that the display continuation time for game circulation fluctuates along with it, it is preferable to adopt a configuration in which the confrontation effect is executed within the range of a period defined as the execution period of the confrontation effect . For example, although the confrontation effect in which the appearance target result on the pachinko machine 10 side is selected regardless of the selection target result selected by the player is executed first, the selection target selected by the player when the result is a draw Based on the result, the appearance of the confrontation effect may be forcedly selected by selecting the appearance target result on the pachinko machine 10 side. In this case, when a draw result occurs a predetermined number of times (once or a plurality of times determined in advance), a finalization lottery process is executed in the next confrontation effect to determine either the victory result or the defeat result. Then, in the case of a winning result, an appearance target result in which the player's selection target result is a victory result is derived from the selection target result, and in the case of a defeat result, the player's selection target result is a defeat result. An appearance target result is derived from the selection target result. As a result, it becomes possible to settle the confrontation effect within the range of a predetermined period.

  (46) In the case where the post-out impossible effect is executed, the lottery process of the appearance target result is executed after the selection target result of the player is determined, and the image of the appearance target result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed It is also good. Even in this case, the contents of the effect to be executed thereafter will change in accordance with the selection object result selected by the player.

  (47) The lottery mode is the high probability mode, and the support mode can be the low frequency support mode, and it can not be recognized from the contents of the effect of the pachinko machine 10 that the transition occurs when the transition to the latent state is made Alternatively, the configuration may be difficult to recognize. In this case, the confrontation effect generated in the latent state is a winning result regardless of the selection target result selected by the player, and occurs in the non-hidden state in which the acceptance lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode. In the confrontation effect, it is possible to notify of whether or not it is in the latent state by utilizing the confrontation effect by adopting a configuration in which the non-win result is obtained regardless of the selection object result selected by the player. Also, instead of this, the confrontation effect generated in the latent state can be a winning result according to the selection target result of the player, and in the non-subtitling state, the victory effect is not won regardless of the selection target result of the player It may be a resulting configuration.

  (48) In the confrontation effect, the post-outward possible effect is executed with a predetermined probability in the game round of the jackpot result where the special reach A effect occurs, and the special reach A effect for premium is executed when it is the winning result, If it is a non-win result, a special reach A effect for a non-premium jackpot is executed, and a forced effect is executed in the game result of the off result where the special reach A effect occurs, and a non-win result occurs. It is good also as composition.

  (49) Limited to a configuration in which only the backout possible effect is executed when the start condition of the second confrontation effect in which one of the small bubble effect and the large bubble effect occurs as the advance notice effect according to the result of the confrontation effect is satisfied It may not be performed, but may be configured to be able to execute a forced effect, or may be configured to be able to execute a late-out impossible effect.

  (50) The contents of the notice effect performed according to the result of the second confrontation effect are not limited to the small bubble effect and the large bubble effect, and for example, in the case of a victory result, the fish school effect is performed If there is a non-wining result, the bubble effect is executed, and the configuration in which the types of characters used in the advance notice effect are completely different in the case of the winning result and the case of the non-winning result It may be

  (51) Instead of the configuration in which the "Junken effect" is executed as the confrontation effect, the "quiz effect" may be executed. In this case, the player expresses "o" or "x" by the movement of the hand for the quiz presented in the symbol display device 61, but the movement of the hand is taken by the imaging result of the imaging substrate 71. To identify the Then, if the quiz is correctly answered, the effect corresponding to the correct solution is subsequently executed, and if the quiz is incorrect, the effect corresponding to the incorrect solution is subsequently executed. In this case, as the post play effect, a correct answer is displayed on the symbol display device 61 before a limited period for the player to present an answer elapses.

  In addition, as the confrontation effect, "ahead and Hui effect" may be executed. In this case, a display is performed in which the confrontation partner character displayed on the symbol display device 61 moves the face either up, down, left, or right, while the player indicates either up, down, left, or right with a finger. A victory result is obtained when the face of the confrontation opponent character faces in the indicated direction, and a non-winning result is obtained when the face of the confrontation opponent character does not face in the direction indicated by the player. In this configuration, the direction in which the player's finger is pointing is specified based on the imaging result of the imaging substrate 71. In this case, as the post play effect, the face orientation of the opposing opponent character as the appearing target result is displayed before the limited period for presenting the selection target result of the player elapses. Also, contrary to the above configuration, the player moves the face up, down, left or right while the opponent character displayed on the symbol display device 61 indicates either up, down, left, or right with a finger. In the configuration, it is specified based on the imaging result of the imaging substrate 71 which direction the player's face is facing. In this case, as the post play effect, the direction of the finger of the confrontation opponent character to be the appearance target result is displayed before the limited period for presenting the selection target result of the player elapses.

  In addition, "card selection effect" may be executed as the confrontation effect. In this case, the symbol display device 61 simultaneously displays a hit card indicated to be hit on the surface and a release card indicated to be released on the surface, and the cards in a state in which the cards are turned over. If the card selected by the player after the shuffling of the arrangement position is a winning card, a winning result is obtained, and if the card selected by the player is an unplaced card, a non-winning result is obtained. In the configuration, it is specified based on the imaging result of the imaging substrate 71 which card the player has selected. In this case, the post-out effect includes a configuration in which shuffle display of the arrangement position is performed in a state where the front of the card is shown. In the case of this configuration, a plurality of operation effective ranges are set corresponding to the display position of each card when the player selects cards, but the operation effective range corresponding to the winning card deviates to correspond to the cards. It is preferable to set it as the structure by which the priority with respect to rendering operation is set high rather than the operation effective range. This makes it possible to prioritize the selection of the winning card even when the rendering operation is simultaneously performed on a plurality of operation effective ranges.

  In addition, a configuration may be adopted in which "choose selection effect" is executed as the confrontation effect. In this case, one symbol and a plurality of opaque cups are displayed on the symbol display device 61, and the player makes a selection after shuffling the placement positions of the plurality of cups in the state where the one cup covers the chick. If there is a chick in the cup, it will be a winning result, and if there is no chick in the cup selected by the player, it will be a non-winning result. In the configuration, which cup the player has selected is specified based on the imaging result of the imaging substrate 71. In this case, as a backout effect, it is displayed that a part of the chick is exposed from the cup containing the chick or the cup vibrates before the time limit for presenting the selection target result of the player elapses. There is a configuration to be performed.

  In addition, a configuration may be adopted in which “half effect” is executed as the confrontation effect. In this case, the symbol display device 61 displays a display for deciding a half, and the result of the player's selection among the half and the result finally displayed on the symbol display 61 of the half match The result is a victory result, and a non-winning result if the two results do not match. In the configuration, it is specified based on the imaging result of the imaging substrate 71 which of the two halves has been selected by the player. In this case, as the post play effect, there is a configuration in which the result of the half on the pachinko machine 10 side is displayed before the limited period for presenting the selection target result of the player elapses.

  (52) Although the game ball is not changed in expectation of winning by the winning result and the non-winning result in the confrontation production, the non-winning result is obtained when the winning result is achieved. The configuration may be advantageous to the player in view of the game ball's expectation for winning rather than the case. For example, the opening / closing execution mode may be generated when the winning result is obtained in the confrontation effect, and the opening / closing execution mode may not be generated when the non-winning result is obtained. In the opening and closing execution mode with a large number of round games may occur, and in the case of a non-winning result, the opening and closing execution mode with a small number of round games may be generated. In the case where the success or failure lottery mode is the high probability mode and the non-wining result is obtained, the success or failure lottery mode may be the low probability mode.

  (53) The first notification effect, the second notification effect, the split effect, the continuous effect, and the confrontation effect are not limited to the configuration to be executed as the effects for the game run, and the configuration to be executed as the effect for the opening / closing execution mode It may be In addition, the stop operation effect is not limited to the configuration to be executed as the effect for the opening / closing execution mode, and may be executed as the effect for the game.

  (54) In the case of a jackpot result, instead of switching to the open / close execution mode in which the expected acquisition rate of gaming balls per unit launch number is improved, payout of gaming balls may be generated.

  (55) The configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the stage member 68 is provided as a half mirror, and the configuration may be such that the stage member 68 is formed as colorless and transparent or colored and transparent and does not have a beam splitter function. .

  (56) The signal processing circuit 75 may be configured to set the reference intensity of the imaging signal as a reference for determining whether or not to derive distance data, not three steps, but three steps, four steps or five steps or more. In this case, it is preferable to make the number of operation positions of the reference switch 91a correspond one-to-one with the number of steps of the reference intensity so as to enable setting operation of each of a plurality of reference intensities.

  (57) Based on the imaging result of the imaging substrate 71 acquired when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on and the operation power supply is started, the reference switch 91a is arranged at the ON position in each of the above embodiments. Either of the process in the case of the process and the process in the case of being disposed at the OFF position may be performed. Specifically, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the distance data based on the first reference intensity is the same as the processing when the reference switch 91a is disposed at the OFF position in each of the above embodiments. Execute processing to derive. As a result, in each pixel of the pixel array unit 73c, the number of pixels for which distance data corresponding to the imaging device 73 side is derived from the window panel 22 is a predetermined number (for example, 50% of the number of pixels of the pixel array unit 73c). If the reference switch 91a is smaller than the predetermined number, the reference switch 91a is turned on in each of the above embodiments. Distance data is derived based on the processing in the case of being arranged at a position. As a result, even if the reference switch 91a is not provided, it is possible to automatically cope with the presence or absence of the radio wave goth prevention sheet PS. Moreover, it becomes possible to change the derivation | leading-out aspect of distance data according to whether the fingerprint has adhered to surface 22a of the window panel 22. FIG.

  (58) In the configuration in which the priority of the rendering operation is set when a plurality of operation effective ranges are set simultaneously, the priority depending on whether or not the game cycle in which the operation rendering occurs corresponds to the big hit result May be switched. For example, when two operation effective ranges are set in the lateral direction in the split effect, the operation effective range on the left side has higher priority than the operation effective range on the right side in game times not corresponding to the jackpot result In the game times set and corresponding to the jackpot result, the operation effective range on the right side may be set to have higher priority than the operation effective range on the left side. In this case, when the rendering operation is performed on the operation effective range on the right side, the rendering with a high degree of expectation in which the jackpot result is achieved is larger than the case where the rendering operation is performed on the operation effective range on the left side To give priority to the rendering operation corresponding to the effect on the side with lower expectation in the game times that do not correspond to the jackpot result, and the side with higher expectation in the game round that corresponds to the jackpot result It becomes possible to give priority to the rendering operation corresponding to the rendering of.

  (59) The configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the distance data is derived based on the light reception result in the imaging device 73. The configuration may be such that the distance data is derived based on the result received by the receiving unit using ultrasonic waves. In addition to this, the configuration may be such that the distance data is derived based on the result received by the reception unit using an electric field or a magnetic field.

  (60) A virtual two-dimensional plane (for one frame) according to the positional relationship between the player's actual viewpoint or virtual viewpoint and the selection operation target reference such as the selection image or the selection target member (for example, movable object unit 38) Position of the player's hand data in the image of FIG.

  For example, the height position of the viewpoint of the player is extracted in advance by height position monitoring processing or the like in each of the above-described embodiments, and a hand is drawn based on a virtual line connecting the extracted height position and the selection target standard. The height position and the lateral position of the data may be corrected. The hand approaches the position of the viewpoint as the position where the rendering operation is performed is farther to the front of the pachinko machine 10 than the window panel 22, so the hand to the surface 22a of the window panel 22 is Correct the height position and the lateral position of the hand data on the assumption that the position is extended.

  Also, for example, when data corresponding to the height position of the viewpoint of a general player is stored in advance in the sound light side ROM 94, hand data based on a virtual line connecting the viewpoint data and the selection target standard The height position and the lateral position of may be corrected.

  (61) Instead of the configuration in which the display control device 96 is controlled by the sound emission control device 91 based on the command output from the main control device 81, display control based on the command output from the main control device 81 The device 96 may be configured to control the sound emission control device 91. Further, instead of the configuration in which the sound emission control device 91 and the display control device 96 are separately provided, both control devices may be provided as one control device, and one function of the both control devices may be provided. May be integrated into the main control device 81, and both functions of both control devices may be integrated into the main control device 81. Further, the configuration of the command output from the main control device 81 to the sound emission control device 91 and the configuration of the command output from the sound emission control device 91 to the display control device 96 are also arbitrary.

  (62) The device on which the effect for the game is executed is not limited to the symbol display device 61, and the effect provided for the game is executed by operating the decorative member provided movable. It is good also as composition which an effect for game circulation is performed by making a predetermined light emission part turn on, and an effect of game circulation is performed by combination of all or a part of the above-mentioned each mode Good.

  (63) In the above embodiment, the special result display unit 62a is configured to display the stop result corresponding to each game result. However, instead of this, the special view display unit 62a may be defective. Even if it is a game result, the common stop result may be displayed in the special view display unit 62a, and the special view display unit 62a may be displayed by displaying the stop result randomly in the special view display unit 62a. It may not be possible to identify which game result from the display of.

  (64) Another type of pachinko machine or the like different from the above embodiment, for example, a pachinko machine in which the motorized role opens a predetermined number of times when the game ball enters a specific area of the special device The present invention can be applied to a pachinko machine which becomes a jackpot upon entering and becomes a jackpot, a pachinko machine provided with other features, an arrange ball machine, a game machine such as a ball ball, and the like.

  A non-ball-ball type game machine, for example, a plurality of reels having a plurality of kinds of symbols attached in the circumferential direction, starts the rotation of the reels by inserting medals and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated. If a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on an effective line visible from the display window after the reel is stopped by the passage of a predetermined time, a bonus such as payout of medals is given to the player The present invention can also be applied to slot machines.

  In addition, the gaming machine main body supported in an openable and closable manner by the outer frame is provided with the storage section and the loading device, and the start lever is operated after the predetermined number of gaming balls stored in the storage section are loaded by the loading device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated by starting to rotate the reels.

<About the invention group extracted from the above embodiment>
Hereinafter, the features of the invention group extracted from the above-described embodiment will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for ease of understanding, the corresponding configuration in the above embodiment is appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configuration illustrated in the parentheses or the like.

<Feature A group>
Features A1. Status information (distance data or one frame's worth of image G) of the monitoring range present ahead of the gaming machine based on the light reception result in the light receiving section (the imaging apparatus 73 in the first embodiment etc. and the imaging apparatus 131 in the third embodiment) Information deriving means (in the first embodiment etc., the signal processing circuit 75, in the third embodiment the signal processing circuit 141), and
Specific execution means (the cancellation monitoring process in the sound light side MPU 93, height position monitoring process, face authentication process, first situation monitoring process, and the like) which executes the specific process using the state information derived by the information deriving means A second condition monitoring process, an operation effect control process, and a function of executing an imaging control process);
Adjustment means (step S805 in the signal processing circuit 75) for preventing the state information from being derived from the light reception result for cancellation or for preventing the information for cancellation included in the state information from being used in the identification processing , A function of executing the processing of step S808 and step S810, and a function of executing the processing of step S910 to step S911 and step S1013 in the sound light side MPU 93);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature A1, since the specific process is executed using the state information derived based on the light reception result in the light receiving unit, it is possible to recognize the non-contact type of the player's operation or appearance without contact. Become. In this case, adjustment is performed so that the state information is not derived from the light reception result of the cancellation target, or adjustment is performed such that the information of the cancellation target included in the state information is not used in the identification process. As a result, it is possible to prevent the state information that is not appropriate for executing the specific process from being used as it is, and it is possible to appropriately execute the specific process using the state information.

Feature A2. The information deriving means derives the state information based on the light reception result which is not a light receiving side cancellation target among the light reception results in the light receiving section,
The adjusting means is
Cancellation target specifying means (function to execute the processing of step S910 and step S1009 in the sound light side MPU 93) for specifying whether the state information derived by the information deriving means includes the information of the state side cancellation target or not ,
When it is specified that the state information includes the information on the state side cancellation target by the cancellation object specifying means, the information on the state side cancellation target is not used in the specification process. Adjustment execution means (function of executing the processing of step S911 and step S1013 in the sound light side MPU 93);
The gaming machine according to feature A1, comprising:

  According to the feature A2, since the state information is derived based on the light reception result which is not the cancellation target, for example, when the light reception result including the noise is received, the state information corresponding to the noise portion is derived as it is It will be blocked. This makes it possible to properly derive the state information. Further, when the derived state information includes information on the cancellation target that is different from the cancellation target related to the light reception result, the information on the cancellation target is adjusted so as not to be used in the identification processing. Thereby, it becomes possible to appropriately execute the specific process using the state information.

  In particular, the processing for excluding the cancellation target is executed in the case of deriving the state information from the light reception result and in the case of using the derived state information in the specific process. As a result, compared with the configuration in which the exclusion of all the cancellation targets is performed at the time of derivation of the state information, it becomes possible to execute processing different from the specific processing using the state information including the cancellation target information. The processing load of the adjustment process can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which the exclusion is performed on the derived state information.

Feature A3. The specific execution means is
Performance-specific execution means (function for executing operation-effect control processing in the sound light side MPU 93) for executing performance-specific processing using the state information;
And an abnormality monitoring specific execution unit that executes an abnormality monitoring specific process using the state information (a function for executing the face authentication process, the first situation monitoring process, and the second situation monitoring process in the sound light side MPU 93) ,
The gaming machine according to feature A1 or A2, comprising:

  According to the feature A3, not only the effect identification processing but also the abnormality monitoring identification processing is executed using the state information. As a result, the configuration for deriving the state information in a non-contact manner can be used in both for effect and for abnormality monitoring, and the configuration can be effectively used.

  Feature A4. The adjustment unit is configured to prevent information on the cancellation target from being used in the specific process when the state information is used in the specific process for the effect, and the state information is for monitoring the abnormality. The gaming machine according to feature A3, wherein the information to be canceled is used in the specific process when it is used for the specific process.

  According to the feature A4, it is possible to execute the rendering using accurate state information by preventing the use of the information to be canceled in executing the rendering. On the other hand, the information to be canceled can be regarded as information different from the regular information, so by using the information to be canceled in the abnormality monitoring specific process, the information to be canceled is used. It becomes possible to monitor abnormalities.

Feature A5. The information deriving means has a plurality of the light receiving units so as to exist over a predetermined range, and derives the state information for the monitoring range by deriving unit state information based on the light reception result in each of the light receiving units. To be
The adjusting unit is configured to prevent unit state information corresponding to the information to be canceled among the unit state information acquired based on the light reception results in the plurality of light receiving units from being used in the identification process, The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A4, wherein unit state information not corresponding to information is used in the specific process.

  According to the feature A5, even if the state information includes information to be canceled, the information to be canceled is excluded and the state information is used in the identification process, so the information to be canceled is In comparison with a configuration in which the contained state information is not used at all in the specifying process, the specifying process using the state information can be performed earlier.

  Feature A6. The information deriving means is characterized in that position information corresponding to a distance to a monitoring target existing in front of the gaming machine is derived as the state information of the monitoring range based on the light reception result in the light receiving unit. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A5.

  According to the feature A6, the position information is derived based on the light reception result in the light receiving unit, and the specifying process is executed using the position information, so the specifying process is executed in relation to the distance from the distance measurement reference It is possible to

  Feature A7. The gaming machine according to feature A6, wherein the adjustment means treats position information whose distance from the distance measurement reference is less than the adjustment target distance as the information to be canceled.

  According to the feature A7, it is possible to prevent information corresponding to an object or the like present on the rear side of the gaming machine than a predetermined reference from being executed in the specific processing. As a result, it becomes possible to extract only the information corresponding to the monitoring target present ahead of the gaming machine than the predetermined reference and execute the specific processing.

Feature A8. It has a window panel (window panel 22) provided on the front of the gaming machine and viewed by the player to confirm the contents of the game.
The light receiving unit is provided on the game machine rear side with respect to the window panel unit,
The game according to the feature A6 or A7, wherein the adjustment means treats position information corresponding to being present on the rear side of the gaming machine with respect to the window panel portion as the information to be canceled. Machine.

  According to the feature A8, it is determined whether the position information is to be used in the identification process based on whether the game machine is located ahead of the window panel section. Thereby, even if the light receiving unit is provided on the game machine rear side than the window panel unit, an object or the like existing on the game machine rear side than the window panel unit is the monitoring target of the specific process. The possibility of misidentification is reduced.

  Feature A9. The adjustment means is located on the rear side of the gaming machine with respect to position information corresponding to being on the rear side of the gaming machine relative to the front side of the window panel portion or a position determined on the front side of the gaming machine than the front side. The gaming machine according to feature A8, wherein position information corresponding to the information is handled as the information to be canceled.

  According to the feature A9, when a fingerprint or a foreign substance is attached to the window panel portion, it is possible to prevent position information corresponding to the fingerprint or the foreign substance from being used in the identification process.

  Feature A10. When the event in which the light reception result corresponds to the cancellation target continues, or when the state information corresponding to the information on the cancellation target is continuously derived by the information deriving means, special processing is performed to execute special processing A game machine according to any one of features A1 to A9, comprising execution means (a function of executing the processing of step S1013 to step S1015 in the sound light side MPU 93).

  The situation where the information to be canceled is derived as the state information continues is when some abnormality has occurred. On the other hand, according to the configuration of the feature A10, the special processing is executed when such a situation continues, so that, for example, the administrator of the game hall can cause the situation to continue. It is possible to urge to resolve.

Characteristics A11. It has a window panel (window panel 22) provided on the front of the gaming machine and viewed by the player to confirm the contents of the game.
The light receiving unit is provided on the game machine rear side with respect to the window panel unit,
The information deriving means derives position information corresponding to a distance to a monitoring target existing in front of the gaming machine as state information of the monitoring range based on a light receiving result in the light receiving unit.
The adjusting unit is configured to handle, as the information to be canceled, position information corresponding to being present on the rear side of the gaming machine with respect to the window panel unit.
The special execution unit may be configured to continuously derive the position information corresponding to being present on the rear side of the gaming machine with respect to the window panel unit by the information derivation unit over an abnormality determination period or more. The gaming machine according to feature A10, characterized in that the processing is performed.

  If the foreign matter continues to exist on the rear side of the gaming machine with respect to the window panel portion, there is a possibility that fraudulent acts using the foreign matter are being performed. On the other hand, according to the configuration of the feature A11, the special processing is executed when such a situation continues, so, for example, the cause of causing the situation of the game hall manager to continue. It is possible to urge to resolve.

Feature A12. The game area where the game balls flow down can be viewed from the front of the game machine through the window panel unit,
When the game ball normally flows down the gaming area, the abnormality determination period is set as a period longer than the longest period assumed to be required for the game ball to pass through the monitoring range. The gaming machine according to the feature A11, which is a feature.

  According to the feature A12, it is possible to prevent the special processing from being executed when the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area passes the monitoring range.

Feature A13. The adjustment means is located on the rear side of the gaming machine with respect to position information corresponding to being on the rear side of the gaming machine relative to the front side of the window panel portion or a position determined on the front side of the gaming machine than the front side. Treat the position information corresponding to that as the information to be canceled,
The special execution means is located on the rear side of the gaming machine with respect to position information corresponding to being present on the rear side of the gaming machine relative to the front side of the window panel portion or a position defined on the front side of the gaming machine than the front side. The gaming machine according to the feature A11 or A12, characterized in that the special processing is executed when position information corresponding to the user is continuously derived by the information deriving means.

  According to the feature A13, when a fingerprint or a foreign substance is attached to the window panel portion, special processing is executed, so it is possible to urge, for example, a game hall manager or the like to cancel the state. .

  Feature A14. The gaming machine according to any one of features A10 to A13, wherein the special execution means is configured to prevent the specific process from being executed in the specific execution means as the special process.

  According to the feature A14, by preventing the specific process from being executed when any abnormality occurs, the specific process can be executed under an appropriate situation.

Feature A15. The specific execution means specifies, as the specific process, a process for specifying an action of the player using the state information and causing an effect corresponding to the action to be executed.
Any one of the features A10 to A14 characterized in that the special execution means performs a process for restricting the execution content or the presence or absence of execution of the effect using the state information as the special process. The gaming machine described in.

  According to the feature A14, in the case where an abnormality occurs in the derivation of the state information, a restriction is given to the execution of the effect using the state information. This makes it possible to prevent the effect from being executed using the abnormal state information.

Feature A15. The specific execution means specifies that the rendering operation is performed when the player's hand is present in the operation effective range ahead of the gaming machine as compared to the front of the gaming machine as the specific processing, and corresponds to the rendering operation It is to execute a process to make a presentation be performed,
The gaming machine according to feature A14, wherein the special execution means sets a setting mode of the operation effective range as a restriction mode as the special process.

  According to the feature A15, in the case where some abnormality has occurred with respect to the derivation of the state information, a restriction is given as to how to set the operation effective range. As a result, it is possible that the player's operation content does not correspond to the execution content of the effect while enabling the execution of the effect utilizing the state information even in the situation where the above abnormality occurs. It is possible to reduce.

  Feature A16. The special execution means executes, as the special process, a process for reducing the number of the operation effective ranges set at one time as compared to the case where the special process is not performed. The gaming machine described in.

  According to the feature A16, when there is an abnormality in the derivation of the state information, the number of operation effective ranges set at one time is limited so that one operation effective range is secured large. It becomes possible. As a result, it is possible that the player's operation content does not correspond to the execution content of the effect while enabling the execution of the effect utilizing the state information even in the situation where the above abnormality occurs. It is possible to reduce.

  Feature A17. The gaming machine according to any one of features A10 to A16, wherein the special execution means executes a process for causing a notification to be performed as the special process.

  According to the feature A17, when the situation in which the abnormal state information is derived is continuing, it is possible to urge the game hall manager to eliminate the cause.

Feature A18. The adjusting means is
First adjusting means (step S805 in the signal processing circuit 75) for causing the information deriving means to derive the state information when the light reception result in the light receiving unit corresponds to the signal strength equal to or higher than the first determination reference. Function to execute the processing of
A second adjusting unit (step S808 in the signal processing circuit 75) for causing the information deriving unit to derive the state information when the light reception result in the light receiving unit corresponds to the signal strength equal to or higher than a second determination reference; Function to execute the processing of
Equipped with
The specific execution means is characterized in that the execution content of the specific process is different between the case where the adjustment is performed by the first adjustment means and the case where the adjustment is performed by the second adjustment means. The gaming machine according to any one of A1 to A17.

  According to the feature A18, since the determination criterion of the signal strength that determines whether to derive the state information based on the light reception result is changed according to the situation, the light reception result to be a cancellation target is according to each situation It is possible to change. This makes it possible to derive the state information in accordance with each situation. In this case, the contents of execution of the specific process are different according to the determination criteria. As a result, it becomes possible to make the execution contents of the specific process different according to the accuracy of the state information, and it becomes possible to appropriately execute the specific process.

  Features A19. The specific execution means is characterized in that, as the specific process, a process for specifying an action of the player using the state information and executing an effect corresponding to the action is executed. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A18.

  In the configuration in which the player detects in a non-contact manner whether or not the player has performed a predetermined rendering operation, it is possible to achieve the operational effects as described above.

Feature A20. Status information (distance data or one frame's worth of image G) of the monitoring range present ahead of the gaming machine based on the reception result in the reception unit (the imaging device 73 in the first embodiment etc. and the imaging device 131 in the third embodiment) Information deriving means (in the first embodiment etc., the signal processing circuit 75, in the third embodiment the signal processing circuit 141), and
Specific execution means (the cancellation monitoring process in the sound light side MPU 93, height position monitoring process, face authentication process, first situation monitoring process, and the like) which executes the specific process using the state information derived by the information deriving means A second condition monitoring process, an operation effect control process, and a function of executing an imaging control process);
Adjustment means (step S805 in the signal processing circuit 75) for preventing the state information from being derived from the reception result of the cancellation target or for preventing the information for the cancellation target included in the state information from being used in the specific processing. , A function of executing the processing of step S808 and step S810, and a function of executing the processing of step S910 to step S911 and step S1013 in the sound light side MPU 93);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature A20, since the specific process is executed using the state information derived based on the reception result in the receiving unit, it is possible to recognize the non-contact type of the player's action or appearance without contact. Become. In this case, the configuration is adjusted such that the state information is not derived from the reception result of the cancellation target, or is adjusted so that the information of the cancellation target included in the state information is not used in the identification process. As a result, it is possible to prevent the state information that is not appropriate for executing the specific process from being used as it is, and it is possible to appropriately execute the specific process using the state information.

  In addition, the feature A1 to A20, the feature B1 to B11, the feature C1 to C11, the feature D1 to D8, the feature E1 to E13, the feature F1 to F8, the feature G1 to G16 with respect to the configuration of any one of the features A1 to A20. , Feature H1 to H6, feature I1 to I12, feature J1 to J24, feature K1 to K7, feature L1 to L4, feature M1 to M11, feature N1 to N9, feature O1 to O8, and any one or more configurations It may apply. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature B group>
Feature B1. Status information (distance data or one frame's worth of image G) of the monitoring range present ahead of the gaming machine based on the light reception result in the light receiving section (the imaging apparatus 73 in the first embodiment etc. and the imaging apparatus 131 in the third embodiment) Information deriving means (in the first embodiment etc., the signal processing circuit 75, in the third embodiment the signal processing circuit 141), and
Specific execution means (the cancellation monitoring process in the sound light side MPU 93, height position monitoring process, face authentication process, first situation monitoring process, and the like) which executes the specific process using the state information derived by the information deriving means A second condition monitoring process, an operation effect control process, and a function of executing an imaging control process);
When the light reception result of the light receiving unit is an abnormality correspondence result or when the state information corresponds to abnormality correspondence information, special execution means for executing special processing (steps S1013 to S1015 in the sound side MPU 93) Function to execute)
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature B1, since the specific process is executed using the state information derived based on the light reception result in the light receiving unit, it is possible to recognize the non-contact type of the player's action or appearance. Become. In this case, when the light reception result of the light receiving unit is an abnormality handling result or when the state information corresponds to the abnormality handling information, the special process is performed. As a result, in the case where some abnormality has occurred in relation to the derivation of the state information, it is possible to urge, for example, the game hall manager or the like to eliminate the cause of continuing the situation.

  Feature B2. The special execution means determines that the event in which the light reception result corresponds to the abnormality handling result continues over the abnormality determination period or the event in which the state information corresponds to the abnormality handling information is an abnormality determination. The gaming machine according to the feature B1, characterized in that the special processing is executed when continuing for a period of time or more.

  According to the feature B2, it is possible to prevent special processing from being performed for sudden noise and the like.

Feature B3. It has a window panel (window panel 22) provided on the front of the gaming machine and viewed by the player to confirm the contents of the game.
The light receiving unit is provided on the game machine rear side with respect to the window panel unit,
The information deriving means derives position information corresponding to a distance to a monitoring target existing in front of the gaming machine as state information of the monitoring range based on a light receiving result in the light receiving unit.
The special execution unit may be configured to continuously derive the position information corresponding to being present on the rear side of the gaming machine with respect to the window panel unit by the information derivation unit over an abnormality determination period or more. The gaming machine according to feature B1 or B2, characterized in that the processing is performed.

  If the foreign matter continues to exist on the rear side of the gaming machine with respect to the window panel portion, there is a possibility that fraudulent acts using the foreign matter are being performed. On the other hand, according to the configuration of the feature B3, the special processing is executed when such a situation continues, so, for example, the cause of causing the situation of the game hall manager to continue. It is possible to urge to resolve.

Feature B4. The game area where the game balls flow down can be viewed from the front of the game machine through the window panel unit,
When the game ball normally flows down the gaming area, the abnormality determination period is set as a period longer than the longest period assumed to be required for the game ball to pass through the monitoring range. The gaming machine according to the feature B3 characterized by the feature.

  According to the feature B4, it is possible to prevent the special processing from being executed when the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area passes the monitoring range.

  Feature B5. The special execution means is located on the rear side of the gaming machine with respect to position information corresponding to being present on the rear side of the gaming machine relative to the front side of the window panel portion or a position defined on the front side of the gaming machine than the front side. The gaming machine according to the feature B4, characterized in that the special processing is executed when positional information corresponding to the user is continuously derived by the information deriving means.

  According to the feature B5, when a fingerprint or a foreign substance is attached to the window panel portion, special processing is executed, so it is possible to urge, for example, a game hall manager or the like to cancel the state. .

  Feature B6. The gaming machine according to any one of the features B1 to B5, wherein the special execution means is configured to prevent the specific process from being executed in the specific execution means as the special process.

  According to the feature B6, it is possible to execute the specific process under an appropriate situation by preventing the specific process from being executed when any abnormality occurs in acquiring the state information. Become.

Feature B7. The specific execution means specifies, as the specific process, a process for specifying an action of the player using the state information and causing an effect corresponding to the action to be executed.
Any one of the features B1 to B6, wherein the special execution means executes, as the special process, a process for limiting the execution content or the presence or absence of execution of the effect using the state information. The gaming machine described in.

  According to the feature B7, in the case where some abnormality has occurred with respect to the derivation of the state information, a restriction is given to the execution of the effect using the state information. This makes it possible to prevent the effect from being executed using the abnormal state information.

Feature B8. The specific execution means specifies that the rendering operation is performed when the player's hand is present in the operation effective range ahead of the gaming machine as compared to the front of the gaming machine as the specific processing, and corresponds to the rendering operation It is to execute a process to make a presentation be performed,
The gaming machine according to Feature B7, wherein the special execution means sets a setting aspect of the operation effective range as a restriction aspect as the special processing.

  According to the feature B8, in the case where some abnormality has occurred with respect to the derivation of the state information, a restriction is given with respect to the setting mode of the operation effective range. As a result, it is possible that the player's operation content does not correspond to the execution content of the effect while enabling the execution of the effect utilizing the state information even in the situation where the above abnormality occurs. It is possible to reduce.

  Feature B9. The special execution means executes, as the special process, a process for reducing the number of the operation effective ranges set at one time as compared to the case where the special process is not performed. The gaming machine described in.

  According to the feature B9, when there is an abnormality in the derivation of the state information, the number of operation effective ranges set at one time is limited so that one operation effective range is secured large. It becomes possible. As a result, it is possible that the player's operation content does not correspond to the execution content of the effect while enabling the execution of the effect utilizing the state information even in the situation where the above abnormality occurs. It is possible to reduce.

  Feature B10. The gaming machine according to any one of the features B1 to B9, wherein the special execution means executes a process for causing a notification to be performed as the special process.

  According to the feature B10, when the situation in which the abnormal state information is derived is continuing, it is possible to urge the game hall manager to eliminate the cause.

Feature B11. Status information (distance data or one frame's worth of image G) of the monitoring range present ahead of the gaming machine based on the reception result in the reception unit (the imaging device 73 in the first embodiment etc. and the imaging device 131 in the third embodiment) Information deriving means (in the first embodiment etc., the signal processing circuit 75, in the third embodiment the signal processing circuit 141), and
Specific execution means (the cancellation monitoring process in the sound light side MPU 93, height position monitoring process, face authentication process, first situation monitoring process, and the like) which executes the specific process using the state information derived by the information deriving means A second condition monitoring process, an operation effect control process, and a function of executing an imaging control process);
When the reception result of the reception unit is an abnormality correspondence result or when the state information corresponds to abnormality correspondence information, special execution means for executing special processing (steps S1013 to S1015 in the sound side MPU 93) Function to execute)
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature B11, since the specific processing is executed using the state information derived based on the reception result in the reception unit, it is possible to recognize the player's operation or appearance without contact. Become. In this case, when the reception result of the receiving unit is an abnormality handling result or when the state information corresponds to the abnormality handling information, the special process is performed. As a result, in the case where some abnormality has occurred in relation to the derivation of the state information, it is possible to urge, for example, the game hall manager or the like to eliminate the cause of continuing the situation.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of any one of the features B1 to B11, the features A1 to A20, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C11, the features D1 to D8, the features E1 to E13, the features F1 to F8, the features G1 to G16 , Feature H1 to H6, feature I1 to I12, feature J1 to J24, feature K1 to K7, feature L1 to L4, feature M1 to M11, feature N1 to N9, feature O1 to O8, and any one or more configurations It may apply. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature C group>
Feature C1. Status information (distance data or one frame's worth of image G) of the monitoring range present ahead of the gaming machine based on the light reception result in the light receiving section (the imaging apparatus 73 in the first embodiment etc. and the imaging apparatus 131 in the third embodiment) Information deriving means (in the first embodiment etc., the signal processing circuit 75, in the third embodiment the signal processing circuit 141), and
Specific execution means (the cancellation monitoring process in the sound light side MPU 93, height position monitoring process, face authentication process, first situation monitoring process, and the like) which executes the specific process using the state information derived by the information deriving means A second condition monitoring process, an operation effect control process, and a function of executing an imaging control process);
Aspect setting means for setting a target aspect that is at least one of a derivation aspect when the state information is derived from the light reception result and a utilization aspect of the state information as any of a plurality of setting aspects (sound light side Function to execute the reference switch monitoring process in MPU 93),
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature C1, since the specific process is executed using the state information derived based on the light reception result in the light receiving unit, it is possible to recognize the non-contact type of the player's operation or appearance without contact. Become. In this case, at least one of the derivation mode and the usage mode of the state information can be changed according to the environment in which the gaming machine is used. As a result, it becomes possible to make the execution content of the specific process using the state information appropriate for the environment in which the gaming machine is used.

  Feature C2. The gaming machine according to the feature C1, wherein the specific execution means is configured to make the contents of execution of the specific process different according to the setting mode set by the mode setting means.

  According to the feature C2, the execution content of the specific process is different according to at least one of the derivation mode and the usage mode of the state information. As a result, it becomes possible to make the execution contents of the specific process different according to the accuracy of the state information, and it becomes possible to appropriately execute the specific process.

Feature C3. A manually operable setting operation means (reference switch 91a);
The gaming machine according to the feature C1 or C2, wherein the mode setting unit sets any one of the plurality of setting modes in accordance with an operation of the setting operation unit.

  According to the feature C3, at least one of the derivation mode and the usage mode of the state information can be changed by the manual operation of the setting operation means. Thus, it becomes possible for an administrator of the game hall or the like to change at least one of the derivation target of the state information and the use mode according to the environment in which the game machine is used.

Feature C4. The mode setting means is configured such that a restriction is given to the derivation of the state information in the case of the second state than in the case of the first state, or a setting in which the accuracy of the state information is lowered. It is what you do,
The specific execution means specifies, as the specific process, a process for specifying an action of the player using the state information and causing an effect corresponding to the action to be executed. The gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C3 characterized in that in the case of the second situation, the execution content or the presence or absence of the execution using the state information is restricted.

  According to the feature C4, when there is a restriction on the derivation of the state information or when the accuracy of the state information decreases, a restriction is given on the execution of the effect using the state information. Thereby, in the configuration in which the state information is derived in a mode corresponding to the environment in which the gaming machine is used, for example, even if the derivation level of the state information is lowered, the player's operation does not correspond to the contents of the effect It is possible to make it difficult to generate such inconveniences.

  Feature C5. The specific execution means specifies that the rendering operation is performed when the player's hand is present in the operation effective range ahead of the gaming machine as compared to the front of the gaming machine as the specific processing, and corresponds to the rendering operation A process for executing an effect is performed, and in the case of the second situation, a setting mode of the operation effective range is a restriction mode. The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature C5, in the case where a restriction is given to the derivation of the state information or when the accuracy of the state information decreases, the restriction is put on the setting mode of the operation effective range. Thereby, in the configuration in which the state information is derived in a mode corresponding to the environment in which the gaming machine is used, for example, even if the derivation level of the state information is lowered, the player's operation does not correspond to the contents of the effect It is possible to make it difficult to generate such inconveniences.

  Feature C6. In the case of the second situation, the specific execution means is configured to make the number of the operation effective range set at one time smaller than that in the first situation. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature C6, when the derivation level of the state information decreases, the number of operation effective ranges set at one time is limited so that one operation effective range can be largely secured. Become. Thereby, in the configuration in which the state information is derived in a mode corresponding to the environment in which the gaming machine is used, for example, even if the derivation level of the state information is lowered, the player's operation does not correspond to the contents of the effect It is possible to make it difficult to generate such inconveniences.

Feature C7. The information deriving means
First information deriving means for deriving the state information based on the light reception result when the light reception result in the light reception unit corresponds to the signal intensity equal to or higher than the first determination reference (processing of step S806 in the signal processing circuit 75 Function to execute)
The second information for deriving the state information based on the light reception result, when the light reception result in the light reception unit corresponds to the signal strength equal to or higher than the second judgment reference, in which the corresponding signal strength is lower than the first judgment reference. Deriving means (function of executing the process of step S809 in the signal processing circuit 75);
Equipped with
The mode setting means causes the first information deriving means to derive the state information in the first situation, and the second information deriving means causes the state information to be derived in the second situation. The gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C6 characterized in that:

  According to the feature C7, since the determination criterion of the signal strength that determines whether to derive the state information based on the light reception result is changed according to the situation, the light reception corresponding to the monitoring target in the light receiving unit It becomes possible to derive the state information according to the ease of operation.

Feature C8. The information deriving means derives position information corresponding to a distance to a monitoring target existing in front of the gaming machine as state information of the monitoring range based on a light receiving result in the light receiving unit.
The mode setting means is
First mode setting means (a function of executing the process of step S 807 in the signal processing circuit 75) for setting in a state where position information corresponding to a distance less than the reference distance from the distance measurement reference is used in the identification process When,
Second mode setting means for setting the position information corresponding to the distance whose distance from the distance measurement reference is equal to or less than the reference distance is not used in the specific process (function to execute the process of step S811 in the signal processing circuit 75) When,
A game machine according to any one of the features C1 to C7, comprising:

  According to the feature C8, it is possible to derive position information in a mode according to the environment in the range which is equal to or less than the reference distance.

Feature C9. It has a window panel (window panel 22) provided on the front of the gaming machine to allow the gaming area where the gaming balls flow down to be visible from the front of the gaming machine,
The light receiving unit is provided on the game machine rear side with respect to the window panel unit,
The gaming machine according to Feature C8, wherein the position corresponding to the reference distance is a position ahead of the gaming machine with respect to the rear surface of the window panel portion.

  A predetermined film may be affixed to the rear surface of the window panel portion for the purpose of preventing fraud. In this case, the predetermined information processing may be performed by specifying the position information corresponding to a distance equal to or less than the reference distance from the rear surface of the window panel portion to the front position of the gaming machine. When the film is not attached, the range of available position information is expanded in the specific process, while when the predetermined film is attached, the specific process is executed while stopping the influence of the film It is possible to

Feature C10. The information deriving means
First information deriving means for deriving the position information based on the light reception result when the light reception result in the light reception unit corresponds to the signal intensity equal to or higher than the first determination reference (processing of step S806 in the signal processing circuit 75 Function to execute)
The second information for deriving the position information based on the light reception result, when the light reception result in the light reception unit corresponds to the signal strength equal to or higher than the second judgment reference, in which the corresponding signal strength is lower than the first judgment reference. Deriving means (function of executing the process of step S809 in the signal processing circuit 75);
Equipped with
When the setting is performed by the first mode setting means, the mode setting means causes the first information deriving means to derive the position information, and the setting by the second mode setting means is a line The gaming machine according to the feature C9, characterized in that, in the case of being used, the second information deriving means is adapted to derive the position information.

  When the predetermined film is attached to the rear surface of the window panel portion, it is considered that the intensity of light received by the light receiving portion from the monitoring target present ahead of the gaming machine with respect to the window panel portion decreases. . In this case, when a predetermined film is attached, even if the light reception result corresponds to a low signal intensity, the position information is to be derived. As a result, even when a predetermined film is attached, it is possible to derive position information corresponding to the monitoring target present ahead of the gaming machine with respect to the window panel section.

Feature C11. Status information (distance data or one frame's worth of image G) of the monitoring range present ahead of the gaming machine based on the reception result in the reception unit (the imaging device 73 in the first embodiment etc. and the imaging device 131 in the third embodiment) Information deriving means (in the first embodiment etc., the signal processing circuit 75, in the third embodiment the signal processing circuit 141), and
Specific execution means (the cancellation monitoring process in the sound light side MPU 93, height position monitoring process, face authentication process, first situation monitoring process, and the like) which executes the specific process using the state information derived by the information deriving means A second condition monitoring process, an operation effect control process, and a function of executing an imaging control process);
Aspect setting means (a reference switch in the sound light side MPU 93) for setting a target aspect which is at least one of a derivation aspect when the state information is derived from the reception result and a utilization aspect of the state information Function to execute monitoring process),
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature C11, since the specific process is executed using the state information derived based on the reception result in the reception unit, it is possible to recognize the player's operation or appearance in a non-contact manner. Become. In this case, at least one of the derivation mode and the usage mode of the state information can be changed according to the environment in which the gaming machine is used. As a result, it becomes possible to make the execution content of the specific process using the state information appropriate for the environment in which the gaming machine is used.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of any one of the features C1 to C11, the features A1 to A20, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C11, the features D1 to D8, the features E1 to E13, the features F1 to F8, the features G1 to G16 , Feature H1 to H6, feature I1 to I12, feature J1 to J24, feature K1 to K7, feature L1 to L4, feature M1 to M11, feature N1 to N9, feature O1 to O8, and any one or more configurations It may apply. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to the features of the feature group A, the feature group B, and the feature group C, the following problems can be solved.

  Pachinko machines, slot machines and the like are known as a type of gaming machine. In these gaming machines, it is known that an internal lottery is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, and a bonus is provided to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. In addition, it is general that an effect for causing a player to predict or recognize the result of the internal lottery is performed.

  Specifically, for the pachinko machine, for example, a lottery is performed based on the game ball entering the ball entry portion provided in the game area, and the variation display of the pattern is performed on the display surface of the display device. It is known that when the winning result is obtained, the combination of the specific pattern etc. is displayed on the display surface as a final stop, and the configuration shifts to a special gaming state advantageous to the player. And when it shifts to the special game state, for example opening and closing of the ball entry device etc which are provided in the game territory is started, due to the ball entry to the said ball entry device and the like the payout etc of the game sphere comes to be done ing.

  Here, by providing a configuration capable of non-contact recognition of the action or behavior of the player, for example, it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the action by the non-contact of the player, and in addition to that, for example, a game machine It is possible to monitor the presence of fraudulent In this case, it is necessary to be able to preferably perform non-contact type recognition of the player's action and appearance, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. Position specifying means (a function for executing height position monitoring processing in the sound light side MPU 93) for specifying the position of the recognition target portion of the player;
Effect control means (a first notification effect control process in the sound light side MPU 93, a second notification effect, for performing an effect process in a mode corresponding to the position of the recognition target portion specified by the position specifying means Control processing, division effect control processing, stop operation effect control processing, and function to execute continuous effect control processing);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature D1, an effect can be performed in a mode corresponding to the position of the recognition target portion of the player. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the effect.

  Feature D2. The gaming machine according to the feature D1, wherein the position specifying means specifies a height position of a portion corresponding to the eyes or face of the player as the position of the recognition target portion.

  According to the feature D2, it is possible to adjust the visibility of the effect and the operability at the time of the effect according to the height position of the eyes, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the effect.

Feature D3. Status information (distance data or one frame's worth of image G) of the monitoring range present ahead of the gaming machine based on the light reception result in the light receiving section (the imaging apparatus 73 in the first embodiment etc. and the imaging apparatus 131 in the third embodiment) Information deriving means (in the first embodiment etc., the signal processing circuit 75, and in the third embodiment the signal processing circuit 141),
The position specifying means is
An extraction unit (a function of executing the processing of step S1111 in the sound light side MPU 93) for extracting the recognition target portion using the state information derived by the information derivation unit;
Position grasping means (function to execute the processing of step S1113 in the sound light side MPU 93) for grasping the position of the recognition target part using the extraction information extracted by the extraction means;
The gaming machine according to feature D1 or D2, comprising:

  According to the feature D3, the position of the recognition target portion can be specified in a noncontact manner without requiring the operation of the player.

  It should be noted that the information deriving means replaces the configuration capable of deriving the state information of the monitoring range present ahead of the gaming machine based on the light reception result in the light receiving part, and based on the reception result in the receiving part It is good also as composition which can derive state information.

Feature D4. The effect control means is
A process for specifying that the rendering operation has been performed when the player's hand is present in the effective operation range forward of the gaming machine than the front of the gaming machine, and performing the rendering corresponding to the rendering operation Operation corresponding control means (step S1709 to step S1711, step S1809 to step S1816, step S2009 to step S2015, step S2210 to step S2215, step S2510 to step S2513 and step S2607 to step S2610 in the sound light side MPU 93) And the ability to perform
A position correspondence adjustment means (step S1707 in the sound light side MPU 93, step S1807 for performing adjustment based on the identification result of the position identification means when specifying whether the player's hand is present in the operation effective range or not. , A function of executing the processing of step S2007, step S2207, step S2508 and step S2605),
A game machine according to any one of the features D1 to D3 characterized in that it comprises:

  According to the feature D4, it is possible to specify whether or not a hand is present in the operation effective range in accordance with the position of the recognition target portion of the player. The possibility of non-coincidence with the content of the effect to be performed is reduced.

Feature D5. Status information (distance data or one frame's worth of image G) of the monitoring range present ahead of the gaming machine based on the light reception result in the light receiving section (the imaging apparatus 73 in the first embodiment etc. and the imaging apparatus 131 in the third embodiment) Information deriving means (in the first embodiment etc., the signal processing circuit 75, and in the third embodiment the signal processing circuit 141),
The specification of the position of the recognition target portion by the position specification means and the specification of the position of the player's hand relative to the operation effective range by the operation correspondence control means are all performed using the state information. The gaming machine according to the feature D4.

  According to the feature D5, the state information can be used both in specifying the position of the recognition target portion and in specifying the presence or absence of the rendering operation, and the configuration can be simplified compared to the configuration in which each specifying is performed by another means. It is possible to In addition, since the specification of presence / absence of rendering operation is performed using state information used in specifying the position of the recognition target region, the position of the recognition target region is determined under the condition in which the presence / absence of rendering operation is specified. It becomes possible to perform specification, and the effect of using the specification result of the position of the recognition target part when specifying the presence or absence of rendering operation is enhanced.

  It should be noted that the information deriving means replaces the configuration capable of deriving the state information of the monitoring range present ahead of the gaming machine based on the light reception result in the light receiving part, and based on the reception result in the receiving part It is good also as composition which can derive state information.

  Feature D6. The gaming machine according to the feature D4 or D5, wherein the position correspondence adjusting means adjusts the position of the effective operation range based on a specification result of the position specifying means.

  According to the feature D6, the position of the operation effective range can be set to the position corresponding to the position of the recognition target portion of the player, and the presence or absence of the rendering operation can be specified accurately.

Feature D7. It is equipped with display means (symbol display device 61) on which effects are executed,
The effect control means is
A unit that causes a display for selection to be performed on the display unit (a function of executing the processing of step S1904, step S1905, step S2104 and step S2105 in the sound light side MPU 93);
A unit for setting the operation effective range at a position corresponding to the selection display (a function of executing the processing of step S2009, step S2210 and step S2217 in the sound light side MPU 93);
Equipped with
The position correspondence adjustment means does not change the position where the selection display is performed on the display surface based on the identification result of the position identification means, while setting the position of the operation effective range to the identification result of the position identification means The gaming machine according to any one of the features D4 to D6, which is adjusted based on the above.

  According to the feature D7, since the player's hand reaching for the selection display causes the hand to exist in the operation effective range, it is recognized that the player has performed the selection operation on the selection display. It will be. In this case, since the position of the operation effective range is adjusted while fixing the position of the selection display, the processing load can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which both are adjusted, and the display surface is limited. The degree of freedom of adjustment is enhanced as compared with a configuration in which only the position of the selection display is adjusted.

Feature D8. Information deriving means (in the first embodiment, etc., the signal processing circuit 75; in the third embodiment, the signal processing circuit 141) is provided which derives position information corresponding to the distance to the monitoring target existing ahead of the gaming machine. ,
The position specifying means specifies the position of the recognition target part when specifying that the recognition target part exists in the distance of the position specification target range based on the position information. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D7.

  According to the feature D8, when the player is in a position to play a game normally, it is possible to specify the position of the recognition target site, and effects are produced in a mode corresponding to the incorrect position as the position of the recognition target site. The possibility of being executed is reduced.

  In addition, the feature A1 to A20, the feature B1 to B11, the feature C1 to C11, the feature D1 to D8, the feature E1 to E13, the feature F1 to F8, the feature G1 to G16 with respect to the configuration of any one of the features D1 to D8. , Feature H1 to H6, feature I1 to I12, feature J1 to J24, feature K1 to K7, feature L1 to L4, feature M1 to M11, feature N1 to N9, feature O1 to O8, and any one or more configurations It may apply. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature E group>
Feature E1. Status information (distance data or one frame's worth of image G) of the monitoring range present ahead of the gaming machine based on the light reception result in the light receiving section (the imaging apparatus 73 in the first embodiment etc. and the imaging apparatus 131 in the third embodiment) Information deriving means (in the first embodiment etc., the signal processing circuit 75, in the third embodiment the signal processing circuit 141), and
It specifies that the rendering operation has been performed on the basis of the state information that the predetermined part of the player is present in the effective operation range of the gaming machine ahead of the front of the gaming machine, and that the rendering operation is performed. Effect control means (the first notification effect control process in the sound light side MPU 93, the second notification effect control process, the divided effect control process, the stop operation effect control for executing the process for causing the effect corresponding to the operation to be executed Processing and function to execute continuous effect control processing),
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature E1, since the specific process is executed using the state information derived based on the light reception result in the light receiving unit, the non-contact type recognition of the player's operation or appearance is possible. Become. In this case, when it is specified that the rendering operation is performed when it is specified that the predetermined portion of the player is present in the operation effective range, the mode of the rendering operation is determined according to the method of setting the operation effective range. Can be diversified. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the effect.

  Feature E2. The effect control means includes range setting means (a function for executing the processes of step S2009 and step S2210 in the sound light side MPU 93) for setting a plurality of the operation effective ranges at one time. Of gaming machines.

  According to the feature E2, since a plurality of operation effective ranges are set at one time, the player can perform the rendering operation such as 2 options or 3 options by moving the predetermined part, and the operability of the rendering operation is enhanced. It becomes possible. In addition, since the operation effective range is set in relation to the state information, one configuration for deriving the state information makes it possible to set a plurality of operation effective ranges, and the number of operation effective ranges can be set. Accordingly, the configuration can be simplified in that there is no need to increase the number of configurations for operation detection.

  Feature E3. The game machine according to the feature E2, wherein the range setting unit sets the operation effective range in the horizontal direction when the operation effective range is set more than one at a time.

  When a game is played in a gaming machine, it is common for the game to be played with the user seated in a chair provided in front of the gaming machine. In this case, although the height position of the viewpoint of the player is different according to the height of the player's back, if the height position of the viewpoint is different, the method of recognizing the operation effective range is different. Under such circumstances, according to the feature E3, when a plurality of operation effective ranges are set at one time, the operation effective ranges are set in the horizontal direction. As a result, when grasping the positional relationship between the predetermined part of the player and the operation effective range, it becomes easy to recognize which operation effective range is the operation without considering the height position of the viewpoint.

  Feature E4. When the range setting means sets a plurality of the operation effective ranges at one time, the setting is performed such that an ineffective range exists between the operation effective ranges, in the feature E2 or E3. The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature E4, when a plurality of operation effective ranges are set at one time, an ineffective range exists between the operation effective ranges. This makes it difficult for the predetermined part of the player to enter the plurality of operation effective ranges at the same time, which makes it difficult for the player to make a difference between the contents of the presentation operation and the contents of the presentation to be performed thereon. .

Feature E5. It is equipped with display means (symbol display device 61) on which effects are executed,
The effect control means is
Selection display execution means (a function of executing the processing of step S1904, step S1905, step S2104 and step S2105 in the sound light side MPU 93) which causes the display means to perform selection display;
Range setting means for setting the effective operation range at a position corresponding to the selection display (function of executing the processing of step S2009, step S2210 and step S2217 in the sound light side MPU 93);
The gaming machine according to any one of the features E1 to E4, comprising:

  According to the feature E5, since the predetermined part is present in the operation effective range by the player extending the predetermined part such as the hand toward the selection display, the selection operation for the selection display as the player It will be recognized as having done.

  Feature E6. The gaming machine according to any one of the features E1 to E5, wherein the effect control means changes the setting mode of the effective operation range according to the type of effect.

  According to the feature E6, since the setting mode of the operation effective range is different according to the type of effect, diversification of the modes of the operation effect can be achieved, and the operation effective range is set in the mode corresponding to each effect It is possible to increase the degree of freedom in the design of the presentation.

  Feature E7. The game machine according to any one of the features E1 to E6, wherein the effect control means changes the number of the effective operation ranges set at one time according to the type of effect.

  According to the feature E7, since the number of operation effective ranges is different according to the type of effect, diversification of the modes of the operation effect is achieved, and the operation effective range is set in an aspect corresponding to each effect. It is possible to increase the degree of freedom in the design of the presentation.

  Feature E8. The effect control means sets the operation effective range when the effect execution restriction state (a state in which “1” is set in the restriction flag, or a state in which “1” is set in the reference flag) is reached. The gaming machine according to any one of the features E1 to E7, characterized in that:

  According to the feature E8, when the effect execution limited state is reached, a restriction is given to the setting mode of the operation effective range, so the state information is used even if some abnormality occurs in the derivation of the state information. It is possible to reduce the possibility of the inconvenience that the player's operation content and the execution content of the rendering do not correspond while enabling the rendering to be performed.

  Feature E9. The effect control means executes processing for reducing the number of the operation effective ranges set at one time than the situation not in the effect execution restriction state when the effect execution restriction state is reached. The game machine according to Feature E8, wherein

  According to the feature E9, since the number of operation effective ranges set at one time is limited when the effect execution restriction situation is reached, one operation effective range can be largely secured. . As a result, it is possible for the player to execute the effect utilizing the state information even when some abnormality has occurred with respect to the derivation of the state information, but the operation content of the player does not correspond to the execution content of the effect. It is possible to reduce the possibility of occurrence.

  Feature E10. When the effect control means specifies that the predetermined portion of the player present in the effective operation range has performed the predetermined operation for a predetermined period, the effect corresponding to the predetermined operation is executed. A game machine according to any one of features E1 to E9, characterized in that it comprises means for performing a process for making

  According to the feature E10, it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to a predetermined action of the player.

  Feature E11. The information deriving means is characterized in that position information corresponding to a distance to a monitoring target existing in front of the gaming machine is derived as the state information of the monitoring range based on the light reception result in the light receiving unit. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E10.

  According to the feature E11, the position information is derived based on the light reception result in the light receiving unit, and the specific process is executed using the position information. Therefore, the operation presentation is supported in relation to the distance from the distance measurement reference It is possible to carry out the same effect.

Feature E12. It has a window panel (window panel 22) provided on the front of the gaming machine and viewed by the player to confirm the contents of the game.
The light receiving unit is provided on the game machine rear side with respect to the window panel unit,
The gaming machine according to feature E11, wherein the operation effective range is set ahead of the gaming panel than the window panel portion.

  According to the feature E12, whether or not to use the position information as an effect is determined based on whether or not the game machine exists ahead of the window panel section. Thereby, even if the light receiving unit is provided on the game machine rear side than the window panel unit, an object or the like present on the game machine rear side than the window panel unit is misidentified as the occurrence of the operation effect. The possibility of doing so is reduced.

Feature E13. Status information (distance data or one frame's worth of image G) of the monitoring range present ahead of the gaming machine based on the reception result in the reception unit (the imaging device 73 in the first embodiment etc. and the imaging device 131 in the third embodiment) Information deriving means (in the first embodiment etc., the signal processing circuit 75, in the third embodiment the signal processing circuit 141), and
It specifies that the rendering operation has been performed on the basis of the state information that the predetermined part of the player is present in the effective operation range of the gaming machine ahead of the front of the gaming machine, and that the rendering operation is performed. Effect control means (the first notification effect control process in the sound light side MPU 93, the second notification effect control process, the divided effect control process, the stop operation effect control for executing the process for causing the effect corresponding to the operation to be executed Processing and function to execute continuous effect control processing),
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature E13, since the specific processing is executed using the state information derived based on the reception result in the reception unit, the non-contact type recognition of the player's operation or appearance is possible. Become. In this case, when it is specified that the rendering operation is performed when it is specified that the predetermined portion of the player is present in the operation effective range, the mode of the rendering operation is determined according to the method of setting the operation effective range. Can be diversified. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the effect.

  In addition, the feature A1 to A20, the feature B1 to B11, the feature C1 to C11, the feature D1 to D8, the feature E1 to E13, the feature F1 to F8, the feature G1 to G16 with respect to the configuration of any one of the features E1 to E13. , Feature H1 to H6, feature I1 to I12, feature J1 to J24, feature K1 to K7, feature L1 to L4, feature M1 to M11, feature N1 to N9, feature O1 to O8, and any one or more configurations It may apply. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to each feature of the feature D group and the feature E group, the following problems can be solved.

  Pachinko machines, slot machines and the like are known as a type of gaming machine. In these gaming machines, it is known that an internal lottery is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, and a bonus is provided to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. In addition, it is general that an effect for causing a player to predict or recognize the result of the internal lottery is performed.

  Specifically, for the pachinko machine, for example, a lottery is performed based on the game ball entering the ball entry portion provided in the game area, and the variation display of the pattern is performed on the display surface of the display device. It is known that when the winning result is obtained, the combination of the specific pattern etc. is displayed on the display surface as a final stop, and the configuration shifts to a special gaming state advantageous to the player. And when it shifts to the special game state, for example opening and closing of the ball entry device etc which are provided in the game territory is started, due to the ball entry to the said ball entry device and the like the payout etc of the game sphere comes to be done ing.

  Here, in the gaming machine such as that illustrated above, effects for expecting to produce an advantageous result for the player are executed, but in order to improve the interest of the game, the degree of attention to the effects is There is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Feature F group>
Feature F1. Correspondence control means (step S1711, step S2014, step S2014, step S2015, and step S2213 of the sound-light side MPU 93) that executes processing corresponding to the predetermined operation when specifying that the predetermined operation of the player has been performed in the operation effective range. Function to execute the processing of
Priority setting means (for step S2010 in the sound light side MPU 93) for setting the priority in the case of specifying that the predetermined operation has been performed in the plurality of operation effective ranges in a situation where a plurality of operation effective ranges are set. And a function of executing the process of step S2212),
Equipped with
The corresponding control means is configured to specify that the predetermined operation is performed to the operation effective range on the high priority side when the predetermined operation is performed to a plurality of the operation effective ranges. A game machine characterized by

  According to the feature F1, since a plurality of operation effective ranges can be set simultaneously, it is possible to make the player perform a selective operation. In this case, in the situation where a plurality of operation valid ranges are set, since the priority in the case of specifying that a predetermined operation has been performed is set, the predetermined operation is simultaneously performed on a plurality of operation valid ranges. Even in this case, it is possible to execute processing corresponding to a predetermined operation performed on the operation effective range on the side of high priority that has been determined in advance.

Feature F2. Status information (distance data or one frame's worth of image G) of the monitoring range present ahead of the gaming machine based on the light reception result in the light receiving section (the imaging apparatus 73 in the first embodiment etc. and the imaging apparatus 131 in the third embodiment) Information deriving means (in the first embodiment etc., the signal processing circuit 75, and in the third embodiment the signal processing circuit 141),
The correspondence control means specifies that the predetermined operation is performed when it is specified based on the state information that the player's hand is present in the operation effective range ahead of the gaming machine on the front side of the gaming machine. The gaming machine according to feature F1, which is characterized in that

  According to the feature F2, it is specified that whether or not the predetermined operation has been performed in the operation effective range is specified using the state information derived based on the light reception result in the light receiving unit, and thus the player's behavior or appearance This enables non-contact recognition of In this case, when a plurality of the operation effective ranges are set, the player may not be able to clearly distinguish the plurality of operation effective ranges, and a predetermined operation is simultaneously performed on the plurality of operation effective ranges. It is feared that it will On the other hand, by providing the configuration of the feature F1, even if a predetermined operation is simultaneously performed on a plurality of operation effective ranges, the operation effective range on the higher priority side is determined in advance. It is possible to execute processing corresponding to the operation being performed.

  It should be noted that the information deriving means replaces the configuration capable of deriving the state information of the monitoring range present ahead of the gaming machine based on the light reception result in the light receiving part, and based on the reception result in the receiving part It is good also as composition which can derive state information.

  Feature F3. The corresponding control means executes a process for causing an effect corresponding to the operation effective range in which the predetermined operation is performed to be performed when it is determined that the predetermined operation is performed in the operation effective range. The gaming machine according to feature F1 or F2, characterized in that

  According to the feature F3, in the configuration in which the effect corresponding to the operation effective range is executed with respect to the predetermined operation performed on the operation effective range, it is possible to obtain the excellent effect as described above. It becomes.

Feature F4. The corresponding control means
First corresponding control means (step in the sound light side MPU 93) for performing the first operation corresponding rendering when the predetermined operation is performed in the first operation effective range among the plurality of set operation effective ranges A function of executing the processing of step S2014 and step S2015),
When the predetermined operation is performed in the second operation effective range out of the plurality of operation effective ranges set, the expectation for the player to be in a state more advantageous to the player than the first operation corresponding effect is high Second correspondence control means (a function of executing the processing of step S1711 in the sound light side MPU 93) for causing the second operation correspondence presentation to be performed;
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to feature F3, wherein the priority setting unit is configured to cause the second operation effective range to have a higher priority than the first operation effective range.

  According to the feature F4, in the case where the predetermined operation is performed simultaneously in both the first operation effective range and the second operation effective range, execution of the second operation corresponding rendering with a high degree of expectation is prioritized. As a result, it is possible to increase the opportunity for the second operation corresponding effect to be executed while preventing the first operation corresponding effect and the second operation corresponding effect from being generated simultaneously.

  Feature F5. The gaming machine according to feature F4, wherein the second operation effective range is set at a position above the first operation effective range.

  In the configuration in which the second operation effective range is provided above the first operation effective range, the predetermined operation is performed to the first operation effective range unintentionally despite the fact that the predetermined operation is performed on the second operation effective range. May be identified as having done On the other hand, when the predetermined operation is simultaneously performed on both the first operation effective range and the second operation effective range by providing the configuration of the feature F4, the second operation corresponding rendering with a high degree of expectation Since priority is given to the execution of the second operation, it is possible to perform the second manipulation corresponding presentation.

Feature F6. The corresponding control means
Variation display means (a function of executing the processing of step S2104 in the sound side MPU 93) for performing variation display of a pattern in each of a plurality of variation display areas (variation display areas CA1 to CA3);
Range setting means (a function of executing the processing of step S2210 in the sound light side MPU 93) for setting a plurality of the operation effective ranges corresponding to the variable display area;
Equipped with
When the predetermined operation is performed in the operation effective range, the fluctuation display means includes means for ending the fluctuation display of the pattern in the fluctuation display area corresponding to the operation effective range.
In any one of the features F3 to F5, the priority setting unit is configured to set the priority to a plurality of the operation effective ranges set corresponding to the variable display area. The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature F6, the variable display of the pattern is performed in the plurality of variable display areas, and the effect that the variable display of the pattern is stopped in the variable display area where the predetermined operation is performed is performed. In this case, since the priority is set to the plurality of operation effective ranges set corresponding to the variable display area, even if the predetermined operation is simultaneously performed on the plurality of operation effective ranges, the pattern It is possible to stop the variable display of in accordance with a predetermined priority.

Feature F7. The variation display means is configured to display three or more of the variation display areas when an effect to perform variation display of a pattern is started in each of the plurality of variation display areas.
The priority setting means changes the setting mode of the priority when the fluctuation display of the pattern in the fluctuation display area is stopped and the pattern display area in which the fluctuation display of the pattern is performed remains. The gaming machine according to feature F6, characterized in that:

  According to the feature F7, since the setting mode of the priority is changed as the variable display of the pattern is stopped, even if the variable display of the pattern in any of the variable display areas is stopped, a plurality of operation effective It is possible to appropriately cope with the simultaneous execution of the predetermined operation on the range.

  Feature F8. By setting the priority by the priority setting means, the fluctuation display of the symbols in the plurality of fluctuation display areas is stopped for each one fluctuation display area with respect to the predetermined operation. The gaming machine according to F6 or F7.

  According to the feature F8, it is possible to sequentially stop the variable display of the patterns in the plurality of variable display areas in accordance with the predetermined operation.

  In addition, the feature A1 to A20, the feature B1 to B11, the feature C1 to C11, the feature D1 to D8, the feature E1 to E13, the feature F1 to F8, the feature G1 to G16 with respect to any one of the features F1 to F8. , Feature H1 to H6, feature I1 to I12, feature J1 to J24, feature K1 to K7, feature L1 to L4, feature M1 to M11, feature N1 to N9, feature O1 to O8, and any one or more configurations It may apply. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to each feature of the feature F group, the following problems can be solved.

  Pachinko machines, slot machines and the like are known as a type of gaming machine. In these gaming machines, it is known that an internal lottery is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, and a bonus is provided to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. In addition, it is general that an effect for causing a player to predict or recognize the result of the internal lottery is performed.

  Specifically, for the pachinko machine, for example, a lottery is performed based on the game ball entering the ball entry portion provided in the game area, and the variation display of the pattern is performed on the display surface of the display device. It is known that when the winning result is obtained, the combination of the specific pattern etc. is displayed on the display surface as a final stop, and the configuration shifts to a special gaming state advantageous to the player. And when it shifts to the special game state, for example opening and closing of the ball entry device etc which are provided in the game territory is started, due to the ball entry to the said ball entry device and the like the payout etc of the game sphere comes to be done ing.

  Here, by providing a configuration that enables the player's operation to the operation effective range to be recognized, it is possible to execute an effect according to the player's operation, for example. In this case, it is necessary to be able to suitably recognize the action of the player, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature G group>
Feature G1. Position information (distance data) corresponding to the distance to the monitoring target existing ahead of the gaming machine based on the light reception result in the light receiving unit (the imaging device 73 in the first embodiment etc. and the imaging device 131 in the third embodiment) Or information deriving means (signal processing circuit 75 in the first embodiment etc., and signal processing circuit 141 in the third embodiment) capable of deriving an image G of one frame;
Operation specifying means (step S1709, step S1809, step S1809 in the sound light side MPU 93) for specifying whether the recognition target part of the player is included in the operation effective range using the position information derived by the information deriving means A function of executing the processing of S2009, step S2210, step S2217, step S2510 and step S2607),
Specification executing means (step S1711 in the sound light side MPU 93, step S1815 that executes the specifying process corresponding to the fact that the recognition target part is specified by the operation specifying means to be included in the operation effective range , Step S1816, step S2014, step S2015, step S2213, step S2218, step S2512, step S2513, step S2609 and a function of executing the process of step S2610),
Equipped with
The operation specifying means executes a specific adjustment process to make the method of specifying the recognition target part different based on the position information of the recognition target part (specific adjustment means (step S1706 in the sound light side MPU 93, step S1708, step A game machine having a function of executing the processing of S1806, step S1808, step S2006, step S2008, step S2206, step S2208, step S2509 and step S2606.

  According to the feature G1, since the specific process is executed by using the position information derived based on the light reception result in the light receiving unit, the non-contact type recognition of the player's operation or appearance is possible. Become. In addition, since position information corresponding to the distance to the monitoring target is used, the specific process can be executed in relation to the distance from the distance measurement reference. In this case, since the method of specifying the recognition target part is different based on the position information of the recognition target part, it becomes possible to appropriately specify the recognition target part based on the position information.

Feature G2. Position information (distance data) corresponding to the distance to the monitoring target existing ahead of the gaming machine based on the light reception result in the light receiving unit (the imaging device 73 in the first embodiment etc. and the imaging device 131 in the third embodiment) Or information deriving means (signal processing circuit 75 in the first embodiment etc., and signal processing circuit 141 in the third embodiment) capable of deriving an image G of one frame;
Operation specifying means (step S1709, step S1809, step S1809 in the sound light side MPU 93) for specifying whether the recognition target part of the player is included in the operation effective range using the position information derived by the information deriving means A function of executing the processing of S2009, step S2210, step S2217, step S2510 and step S2607),
Specification executing means (step S1711 in the sound light side MPU 93, step S1815 that executes the specifying process corresponding to the fact that the recognition target part is specified by the operation specifying means to be included in the operation effective range , Step S1816, step S2014, step S2015, step S2213, step S2218, step S2512, step S2513, step S2609 and a function of executing the process of step S2610),
Equipped with
The operation specifying means executes a specific adjustment process for adjusting the positional relationship between the recognition target part and the operation effective range based on the position information of the recognition target part (specific adjustment means (step S1708 in the sound light side MPU 93) A game machine having a function of executing the processing of step S1808, step S2008, step S2208, step S2509 and step S2606).

  According to the feature G2, since the specific process is executed using the position information derived based on the light reception result in the light receiving unit, it is possible to recognize the non-contact type of the player's operation or appearance without contact. Become. In addition, since position information corresponding to the distance to the monitoring target is used, the specific process can be executed in relation to the distance from the distance measurement reference. In this case, since the adjustment of the positional relationship is performed based on the positional information, it becomes possible to accurately grasp the positional relationship of the recognition target portion with respect to the operation effective range.

Feature G3. The operation specifying means specifies whether or not the information on the region to be recognized is included in the operation effective range in the virtual two-dimensional plane,
The gaming machine according to feature G2, wherein the specific adjustment means adjusts the position of the information of the recognition target portion on the virtual two-dimensional plane based on the position information.

  According to the feature G3, since the position of the information of the recognition target part in the virtual two-dimensional plane is directly adjusted based on the position information of the recognition target part, the position of the operation effective range in the virtual two-dimensional plane is recognized It is not necessary to adjust based on the position information of the target site, and even when there are a plurality of recognition target sites, it is possible to appropriately grasp the positional relationship of each recognition target site to the operation effective range.

  Feature G4. The gaming machine according to the feature G3, wherein the position adjustment on the virtual two-dimensional plane is performed on the entire information of the recognition target region.

  According to the feature G4, since the position adjustment is performed on the entire information of the recognition target part, it is possible to appropriately grasp the positional relationship of the operation effective range with respect to the entire recognition target part.

  Feature G5. The specific adjustment means specifies whether the distance from the distance measurement reference to the front of the gaming machine is included in the operation effective range as to the recognition target region corresponding to the position information corresponding to the outside of the reference object distance range. The gaming machine according to any one of the features G1 to G4 characterized in that it is outside.

  According to the feature G5, only the recognition target site to be referred to is specified in relation to the position information, so that the positional relation to the operation effective range is specified. Therefore, it is possible to select the recognition target site to be referred to. It becomes possible to appropriately grasp the positional relationship with the range.

  Feature G6. The specific adjustment means excludes the target for recognition as to whether or not the recognition target part corresponding to the position information corresponding to the reference target distance or more is included in the operation effective range. Feature G5 The gaming machine described in.

  According to the feature G6, for example, when the player's hand is the recognition target portion, when the player moves the hand without intending the operation in relation to the operation effective range, the operation to the operation effective range is performed It is possible to prevent it from being recognized as

  Feature G7. The specific adjustment means is characterized by being excluded from the specific target, when the position information corresponding to the closest distance among the recognition target parts corresponds to the reference target distance or more. The gaming machine described in.

  According to the feature G7, it is not necessary to determine whether or not all position information of the recognition target portion corresponds to the reference target distance or more, and whether or not one position information corresponds to the reference target distance or more It is possible to reduce the processing load in the case of specifying whether or not to be excluded from the specific target.

Feature G8. It has a window panel (window panel 22) provided on the front of the gaming machine and viewed by the player to confirm the contents of the game.
The gaming machine according to any one of the features G1 to G7, wherein the light receiving portion is provided on the gaming machine rear side with respect to the window panel portion.

  According to the feature G8, the position information of the recognition target portion of the player existing ahead of the gaming machine with respect to the window panel portion is derived using the light receiving portion provided on the gaming machine rear side than the window panel portion. As a result, the distance between the light receiving unit and the recognition target site is further increased. However, by providing the configuration of the feature G1, the recognition of the positional relationship between the recognition target site and the operation effective range based on the position information is appropriately performed. It will be possible to do.

  Feature G9. The specific execution unit is configured to execute an operation corresponding to the operation as the specific process based on the fact that the recognition target part is included in the operation effective range by the operation specifying unit. A game machine according to any one of the features G1 to G8, characterized in that the process for performing the process is performed.

  According to the feature G9, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above in the configuration in which the corresponding effect is executed when the recognition target part is included in the operation effective range.

Feature G10. There are a plurality of types of corresponding effects in which effects corresponding to the recognition target part being included in the operation effective range is executed,
The gaming machine according to feature G9, wherein the specific adjustment means changes the presence or absence or the execution mode of the specific adjustment process according to the type of the corresponding effect.

  According to the feature G10, since the method of specifying the recognition target portion is changed according to the type of the corresponding rendering, it becomes possible to appropriately specify the recognition target portion in a mode corresponding to the content of each corresponding rendering. .

  Feature G11. The specific adjustment means includes, as the specific adjustment process, a recognition target region corresponding to position information in which the distance from the distance measurement reference toward the front of the gaming machine corresponds to the outside of the reference distance range. It is characterized in that it performs non-target determination processing (a function of executing the processing of step S1706, step S1806, step S2006, and step S2206 in the sound light side MPU 93) for excluding the specification target of whether or not The gaming machine according to feature G10.

  According to the feature G11, for example, when the player's hand is the recognition target portion, when the player moves the hand without intending the operation in relation to the operation effective range, the operation to the operation effective range is performed It is possible to prevent it from being recognized as Further, by providing the configuration of the feature G10, the relationship between the reference target distance range and the recognition target portion can be made to correspond to the corresponding rendering, and the recognition target portion in the form corresponding to the contents of each corresponding rendering. It becomes possible to perform identification appropriately.

  Feature G12. The specific adjustment unit executes the off-target determination process when the type of the corresponding effect is the first corresponding effect (first notification effect, second notification effect, divided effect, and stop operation effect). The gaming machine according to the feature G11, wherein the non-target determination process is not executed when the type of the corresponding effect is the second corresponding effect (continuous effect and confrontation effect).

  According to the feature G12, when the recognition target site is included in the reference target distance range in the case of the first correspondence effect, it is specified whether the recognition target site is included in the operation effective range Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's operation from being unintentionally recognized as the rendering operation in the first corresponding rendering. On the other hand, in the case of the second correspondence effect, whether or not the recognition target site is included in the operation effective range is determined regardless of whether the reference target distance range includes the recognition target site. In the second correspondence effect, the player's operation can be easily recognized as the effect operation.

  Feature G13. When the specific execution means is the first corresponding effect, the operation specifying means specifies that the recognition target part is included in the operation effective range so that the corresponding effect is performed. And the second corresponding corresponding effect, when it is specified that the recognition target portion specified by the operation specifying means is included in the operation effective range, the corresponding effect The game machine according to feature G12, wherein the game is to be executed.

  In the first correspondence effect, it is specified that the recognition target site is included in the operation effective range, and the corresponding presentation is executed. Therefore, the recognition of the recognition target site is based on the player's active operation. It is preferable to know exactly if there is any. On the other hand, by providing the configuration of the feature G12, the positional relationship with the operation effective range is specified when the recognition target part is included in the reference target distance range in the first correspondence effect, It becomes possible to accurately grasp whether or not the recognition of the recognition target part is due to the player's positive operation. On the other hand, in the second correspondence effect, even if it is specified that the recognition target part is included in the operation effective range, it is specified that the recognition target part has performed the specific operation without being performed. In the case where the occurrence corresponding to the specific action is specified, it is highly likely that the action is the player's active operation, since the corresponding effect is executed. On the other hand, by providing the configuration of the feature G12, in the second correspondence effect, the positional relationship with the operation effective range is specified regardless of whether or not the recognition target portion is included in the reference target distance range. Therefore, when the specific operation is performed, it is possible to increase the chance that the corresponding rendering is performed.

Feature G14. It has a window panel (window panel 22) provided on the front of the gaming machine and viewed by the player to confirm the contents of the game.
The light receiving unit is provided on the game machine rear side with respect to the window panel unit,
The specific adjustment means is a process for setting as the exclusion target whether the recognition target region corresponding to the position information corresponding to the reference target distance or more is included in the operation effective range as the exclusion determination processing. To perform
The first corresponding effect is an effect in which the player's hand taken out toward the window panel unit is the recognition target portion,
The second correspondence effect is an effect in which a player's hand moved in a direction different from the front-rear direction in the front of the gaming machine with respect to the window panel portion is the effect as the recognition target portion. Feature G12 or G13 The gaming machine described in.

  In the first corresponding effect, since the player's hand taken out toward the window panel unit is recognized as the recognition target site, the hand treated by the player near the face is treated as the recognition target site and the corresponding rendering Is not preferred. On the other hand, by providing the configuration of the feature G12, the positional relationship with the operation effective range is specified when the recognition target part is included in the reference target distance range in the first correspondence effect, It becomes possible to accurately grasp whether or not the recognition of the recognition target part is due to the player's positive operation. On the other hand, in the second corresponding effect, the player's hand moved in a direction different from the front-rear direction is recognized as the recognition target portion, so when the occurrence of the operation in the direction is specified, it is the player's positive operation. There is a high possibility. On the other hand, by providing the configuration of the feature G12, in the second correspondence effect, the positional relationship with the operation effective range is specified regardless of whether or not the recognition target portion is included in the reference target distance range. Therefore, it is possible to increase the opportunity for the effect corresponding to the player's operation to be executed.

Feature G15. Position information (distance data) corresponding to the distance to the monitoring target existing ahead of the gaming machine based on the reception result in the reception unit (the imaging device 73 in the first embodiment etc. and the imaging device 131 in the third embodiment) Or information deriving means (signal processing circuit 75 in the first embodiment etc., and signal processing circuit 141 in the third embodiment) capable of deriving an image G of one frame;
Operation specifying means (step S1709, step S1809, step S1809 in the sound light side MPU 93) for specifying whether the recognition target part of the player is included in the operation effective range using the position information derived by the information deriving means A function of executing the processing of S2009, step S2210, step S2217, step S2510 and step S2607),
Specification executing means (step S1711 in the sound light side MPU 93, step S1815 that executes the specifying process corresponding to the fact that the recognition target part is specified by the operation specifying means to be included in the operation effective range , Step S1816, step S2014, step S2015, step S2213, step S2218, step S2512, step S2513, step S2609 and a function of executing the process of step S2610),
Equipped with
The operation specifying means executes a specific adjustment process to make the method of specifying the recognition target part different based on the position information of the recognition target part (specific adjustment means (step S1706 in the sound light side MPU 93, step S1708, step A game machine having a function of executing the processing of S1806, step S1808, step S2006, step S2008, step S2206, step S2208, step S2509 and step S2606.

  According to the feature G15, since the specific process is executed by using the position information derived based on the reception result in the reception unit, it is possible to recognize the player's operation or appearance without contact. Become. In addition, since position information corresponding to the distance to the monitoring target is used, the specific process can be executed in relation to the distance from the distance measurement reference. In this case, since the method of specifying the recognition target part is different based on the position information of the recognition target part, it becomes possible to appropriately specify the recognition target part based on the position information.

Feature G16. Position information (distance data) corresponding to the distance to the monitoring target existing ahead of the gaming machine based on the reception result in the reception unit (the imaging device 73 in the first embodiment etc. and the imaging device 131 in the third embodiment) Or information deriving means (signal processing circuit 75 in the first embodiment etc., and signal processing circuit 141 in the third embodiment) capable of deriving an image G of one frame;
Operation specifying means (step S1709, step S1809, step S1809 in the sound light side MPU 93) for specifying whether the recognition target part of the player is included in the operation effective range using the position information derived by the information deriving means A function of executing the processing of S2009, step S2210, step S2217, step S2510 and step S2607),
Specification executing means (step S1711 in the sound light side MPU 93, step S1815 that executes the specifying process corresponding to the fact that the recognition target part is specified by the operation specifying means to be included in the operation effective range , Step S1816, step S2014, step S2015, step S2213, step S2218, step S2512, step S2513, step S2609 and a function of executing the process of step S2610),
Equipped with
The operation specifying means executes a specific adjustment process for adjusting the positional relationship between the recognition target part and the operation effective range based on the position information of the recognition target part (specific adjustment means (step S1708 in the sound light side MPU 93) A game machine having a function of executing the processing of step S1808, step S2008, step S2208, step S2509 and step S2606).

  According to the feature G16, since the specific processing is executed by using the position information derived based on the reception result in the reception unit, it is possible to recognize the non-contact type of the player's operation or appearance without contact. Become. In addition, since position information corresponding to the distance to the monitoring target is used, the specific process can be executed in relation to the distance from the distance measurement reference. In this case, since the adjustment of the positional relationship is performed based on the positional information, it becomes possible to accurately grasp the positional relationship of the recognition target portion with respect to the operation effective range.

  In addition, the feature A1 to A20, the feature B1 to B11, the feature C1 to C11, the feature D1 to D8, the feature E1 to E13, the feature F1 to F8, the feature G1 to G16 with respect to the configuration of any one of the features G1 to G16. , Feature H1 to H6, feature I1 to I12, feature J1 to J24, feature K1 to K7, feature L1 to L4, feature M1 to M11, feature N1 to N9, feature O1 to O8, and any one or more configurations It may apply. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to each feature of the above-mentioned feature G group, it is possible to solve the following subject.

  Pachinko machines, slot machines and the like are known as a type of gaming machine. In these gaming machines, it is known that an internal lottery is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, and a bonus is provided to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. In addition, it is general that an effect for causing a player to predict or recognize the result of the internal lottery is performed.

  Specifically, for the pachinko machine, for example, a lottery is performed based on the game ball entering the ball entry portion provided in the game area, and the variation display of the pattern is performed on the display surface of the display device. It is known that when the winning result is obtained, the combination of the specific pattern etc. is displayed on the display surface as a final stop, and the configuration shifts to a special gaming state advantageous to the player. And when it shifts to the special game state, for example opening and closing of the ball entry device etc which are provided in the game territory is started, due to the ball entry to the said ball entry device and the like the payout etc of the game sphere comes to be done ing.

  Here, by providing a configuration capable of non-contact recognition of the action or behavior of the player, for example, it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the action by the non-contact of the player, and in addition to that, for example, a game machine It is possible to monitor the presence of fraudulent In this case, it is necessary to be able to preferably perform non-contact type recognition of the player's action and appearance, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature H group>
Feature H1. Position information (distance data) corresponding to the distance to the monitoring target existing ahead of the gaming machine based on the light reception result in the light receiving unit (the imaging device 73 in the first embodiment etc. and the imaging device 131 in the third embodiment) Or information deriving means (signal processing circuit 75 in the first embodiment etc., and signal processing circuit 141 in the third embodiment) capable of deriving an image G of one frame;
Operation specifying means (step S1709, step S1809, step S1809 in the sound light side MPU 93) for specifying whether the recognition target part of the player is included in the operation effective range using the position information derived by the information deriving means A function of executing the processing of S2009, step S2210, step S2217, step S2510 and step S2607),
Specific execution means (step in the sound light side MPU 93) for causing the effect corresponding to the operation to be executed based on the fact that the recognition target part is included in the operation effective range by the operation specifying means S1711, step S1815, step S1816, step S2014, step S2015, step S2213, step S2218, step S2512, step S2513, step S2609 and a function of executing the process of step S2610),
Specific adjustment means (step S1706, step S1708, step S1806 in the sound light side MPU 93) to execute the specific adjustment process so as to make the way of specifying the recognition target part different in the operation specifying means based on the position information of the recognition target part. , A function of executing the processing of step S1808, step S2006, step S2008, step S2206, step S2208, step S2509 and step S2606),
Equipped with
There are a plurality of types of corresponding effects in which effects corresponding to the recognition target part being included in the operation effective range is executed,
A game machine characterized in that the specific adjustment means changes the presence or absence or the execution mode of the specific adjustment process according to the type of the corresponding effect.

  According to the feature H1, whether or not the recognition target region is included in the operation effective range is specified using the position information derived based on the light reception result in the light receiving unit, and is included in the operation effective range Based on what has been identified, the corresponding rendering is performed. This makes it possible to recognize the rendering operation of the player in a noncontact manner. Moreover, since it is the structure which utilizes a positional information, it becomes possible to specify the presence or absence of operation presentation by relationship with the distance from a distance measurement reference | standard. In this case, since the method of specifying the recognition target part is different based on the position information of the recognition target part, it becomes possible to appropriately specify the recognition target part based on the position information. In addition, since the method of specifying the recognition target portion is changed according to the type of the corresponding rendering, it becomes possible to appropriately specify the recognition target portion in a mode corresponding to the content of each corresponding rendering.

  Feature H2. The specific adjustment means includes, as the specific adjustment process, a recognition target region corresponding to position information in which the distance from the distance measurement reference toward the front of the gaming machine corresponds to the outside of the reference distance range. It is characterized in that it performs non-target determination processing (a function of executing the processing of step S1706, step S1806, step S2006, and step S2206 in the sound light side MPU 93) for excluding the specification target of whether or not The gaming machine according to the feature H1.

  According to the feature H2, for example, when the player's hand is the recognition target portion, when the player moves the hand without intending the operation in relation to the operation effective range, the operation to the operation effective range is performed It is possible to prevent it from being recognized as Further, the relationship between the reference target distance range and the recognition target portion can be made to correspond to the corresponding rendering, and the recognition target portion can be appropriately identified in an aspect corresponding to the content of each corresponding rendering.

  Feature H3. The specific adjustment unit executes the off-target determination process when the type of the corresponding effect is the first corresponding effect (first notification effect, second notification effect, divided effect, and stop operation effect). The gaming machine according to the feature H2, wherein the non-target determination process is not executed when the type of the corresponding effect is the second corresponding effect (continuous effect and confrontation effect).

  According to the feature H3, when the recognition target site is included in the reference target distance range in the case of the first correspondence effect, it is specified whether the recognition target site is included in the operation effective range Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's operation from being unintentionally recognized as the rendering operation in the first corresponding rendering. On the other hand, in the case of the second correspondence effect, whether or not the recognition target site is included in the operation effective range is determined regardless of whether the reference target distance range includes the recognition target site. In the second correspondence effect, the player's operation can be easily recognized as the effect operation.

  Feature H4. When the specific execution means is the first corresponding effect, the operation specifying means specifies that the recognition target part is included in the operation effective range so that the corresponding effect is performed. And the second corresponding corresponding effect, when it is specified that the recognition target portion specified by the operation specifying means is included in the operation effective range, the corresponding effect The game machine according to feature H3, wherein the game is to be executed.

  In the first correspondence effect, it is specified that the recognition target site is included in the operation effective range, and the corresponding presentation is executed. Therefore, the recognition of the recognition target site is based on the player's active operation. It is preferable to know exactly if there is any. On the other hand, by providing the configuration of the feature H3, when the recognition target part is included in the reference target distance range in the first corresponding rendering, the positional relationship with the operation effective range is specified, It becomes possible to accurately grasp whether or not the recognition of the recognition target part is due to the player's positive operation. On the other hand, in the second correspondence effect, even if it is specified that the recognition target part is included in the operation effective range, it is specified that the recognition target part has performed the specific operation without being performed. In the case where the occurrence corresponding to the specific action is specified, it is highly likely that the action is the player's active operation, since the corresponding effect is executed. On the other hand, by providing the configuration of the feature H3, the positional relationship with the operation effective range is specified regardless of whether or not the recognition target portion is included in the reference target distance range in the second correspondence effect. Therefore, when the specific operation is performed, it is possible to increase the chance that the corresponding rendering is performed.

Feature H5. It has a window panel (window panel 22) provided on the front of the gaming machine and viewed by the player to confirm the contents of the game.
The light receiving unit is provided on the game machine rear side with respect to the window panel unit,
The specific adjustment means is a process for setting as the exclusion target whether the recognition target region corresponding to the position information corresponding to the reference target distance or more is included in the operation effective range as the exclusion determination processing. To perform
The first corresponding effect is an effect in which the player's hand taken out toward the window panel unit is the recognition target portion,
The second corresponding effect is an effect in which a player's hand moved in a direction different from the front-rear direction in the front of the gaming machine than the window panel portion is the effect to be the recognition target portion H3 or H4 The gaming machine described in.

  In the first corresponding effect, since the player's hand taken out toward the window panel unit is recognized as the recognition target site, the hand treated by the player near the face is treated as the recognition target site and the corresponding rendering Is not preferred. On the other hand, by providing the configuration of the feature H3, when the recognition target part is included in the reference target distance range in the first corresponding rendering, the positional relationship with the operation effective range is specified, It becomes possible to accurately grasp whether or not the recognition of the recognition target part is due to the player's positive operation. On the other hand, in the second corresponding effect, the player's hand moved in a direction different from the front-rear direction is recognized as the recognition target portion, so when the occurrence of the operation in the direction is specified, it is the player's positive operation. There is a high possibility. On the other hand, by providing the configuration of the feature H3, the positional relationship with the operation effective range is specified regardless of whether or not the recognition target portion is included in the reference target distance range in the second correspondence effect. Therefore, it is possible to increase the opportunity for the effect corresponding to the player's operation to be executed.

Feature H6. Position information (distance data) corresponding to the distance to the monitoring target existing ahead of the gaming machine based on the reception result in the reception unit (the imaging device 73 in the first embodiment etc. and the imaging device 131 in the third embodiment) Or information deriving means (signal processing circuit 75 in the first embodiment etc., and signal processing circuit 141 in the third embodiment) capable of deriving an image G of one frame;
Operation specifying means (step S1709, step S1809, step S1809 in the sound light side MPU 93) for specifying whether the recognition target part of the player is included in the operation effective range using the position information derived by the information deriving means A function of executing the processing of S2009, step S2210, step S2217, step S2510 and step S2607),
Specific execution means (step in the sound light side MPU 93) for causing the effect corresponding to the operation to be executed based on the fact that the recognition target part is included in the operation effective range by the operation specifying means S1711, step S1815, step S1816, step S2014, step S2015, step S2213, step S2218, step S2512, step S2513, step S2609 and a function of executing the process of step S2610),
Specific adjustment means (step S1706, step S1708, step S1806 in the sound light side MPU 93) to execute the specific adjustment process so as to make the way of specifying the recognition target part different in the operation specifying means based on the position information of the recognition target part. , A function of executing the processing of step S1808, step S2006, step S2008, step S2206, step S2208, step S2509 and step S2606),
Equipped with
There are a plurality of types of corresponding effects in which effects corresponding to the recognition target part being included in the operation effective range is executed,
A game machine characterized in that the specific adjustment means changes the presence or absence or the execution mode of the specific adjustment process according to the type of the corresponding effect.

  According to the feature H6, it is specified whether or not the recognition target part is included in the operation effective range using the position information derived based on the reception result in the receiving unit, and is included in the operation effective range. Based on what has been identified, the corresponding rendering is performed. This makes it possible to recognize the rendering operation of the player in a noncontact manner. Moreover, since it is the structure which utilizes a positional information, it becomes possible to specify the presence or absence of operation presentation by relationship with the distance from a distance measurement reference | standard. In this case, since the method of specifying the recognition target part is different based on the position information of the recognition target part, it becomes possible to appropriately specify the recognition target part based on the position information. In addition, since the method of specifying the recognition target portion is changed according to the type of the corresponding rendering, it becomes possible to appropriately specify the recognition target portion in a mode corresponding to the content of each corresponding rendering.

  In addition, the feature A1 to A20, the feature B1 to B11, the feature C1 to C11, the feature D1 to D8, the feature E1 to E13, the feature F1 to F8, the feature G1 to G16 with respect to the configuration of any one of the features H1 to H6. , Feature H1 to H6, feature I1 to I12, feature J1 to J24, feature K1 to K7, feature L1 to L4, feature M1 to M11, feature N1 to N9, feature O1 to O8, and any one or more configurations It may apply. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature I group>
Feature I1. Status information (distance data or one frame's worth of image G) of the monitoring range present ahead of the gaming machine based on the light reception result in the light receiving section (the imaging apparatus 73 in the first embodiment etc. and the imaging apparatus 131 in the third embodiment) Information deriving means (in the first embodiment etc., the signal processing circuit 75, in the third embodiment the signal processing circuit 141), and
Display control means (a function for executing continuous effect control processing in the sound side MPU 93) to display and control the display means (the symbol display device 61) so as to be the display content corresponding to the player's operation specified based on the state information When,
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature I1, since the state information is derived based on the light reception result in the light receiving unit, the non-contact type recognition of the operation of the player or the like becomes possible. In this case, since the display corresponding to the action of the player specified based on the state information is performed, diversification of the display effect in the display means is achieved, and the action of the player is reflected in the content of the display effect. It becomes possible to give the player the impression that they are actively participating in the game.

Feature I2. The display means comprises a display surface for displaying an individual image for presentation,
The display control means controls the display means to display a specific individual image (fish character CH1) at the position of the display surface corresponding to the position of the recognition target portion of the player specified based on the state information. The gaming machine according to feature I1, characterized in that:

  According to the feature I2, since the specific individual image is displayed at the position corresponding to the position of the player's hand or the like, it is possible to perform the display effect closely related to the operation of the player.

  Feature I3. The display control means performs display control of the display means such that a display effect of moving the specific individual image from the position on the appearance source side to the position corresponding to the recognition target part is performed. The gaming machine according to feature I2.

  According to the feature I3, it is possible to move the specific individual image so as to follow the position of the recognition target portion, and it is easy to give the player an impression that the specific individual image has moved according to the operation of the player.

  Feature I4. The display control means is configured to start a display effect to display the specific individual image at a position corresponding to the recognition target site from a state where the specific individual image is displayed at an initial display position on the display surface. The gaming machine according to feature I3, characterized in that

  According to the feature I4, since the specific individual image moves from the state displayed at the initial display position to the position corresponding to the recognition target site, an impression that the specific individual image has moved according to the operation of the player Is easy to give to the player.

  Feature I5. Even if the display control means specifies that the recognition target portion is present at a position closer to the appearance source than the initial display position in a situation where the specific individual image is displayed at the initial display position, The gaming machine according to the feature I4, characterized in that the display of the specific individual image at the initial display position is continued.

  According to the feature I5, even when the recognition target region is present at a position corresponding to the outside of the display surface, it is possible to continue the display of the specific individual image at the initial display position. Even if the player's hand or the like is arranged unintentionally at a position corresponding to the outside, it is possible to make the player recognize that the display effect using the specific individual image is being executed. Become.

Feature I6. The display control means includes means for controlling the display of the display means so that the display effect of moving the specific individual image in a predetermined direction is performed regardless of the position of the recognition target part.
The gaming machine according to any one of the features I3 to I5, wherein when the specific individual image moves toward the position of the recognition target part, the specific individual image moves in the predetermined direction.

  According to the feature I6, it is possible to give the player an impression that the specific individual image moves in a predetermined direction, and the player does not feel discomfort when the specific individual image moves toward the position of the recognition target portion It will be possible to

  Feature I7. The display control means restricts the display position of the specific individual image corresponding to the position of the recognition target part within a display restriction range which is a part of the display surface (steps S2511 to S2511 in the sound light side MPU 93) A game machine according to any one of features I2 to I6, characterized in that the game machine has a function of executing the process of step S2513.

  According to the feature I7, it is possible to cause a situation where the display position in the case where the specific individual image is displayed is limited corresponding to the action of the player, and it is prevented that the content of the display effect becomes too irregular. It is possible to

Feature I8. The display control means is configured to be capable of performing a display effect in which the specific individual image moves from the position of the appearance source on the display surface to the position of the movement destination.
The display limit range is set as a range from the position of the appearance source to the intermediate position in the movement direction when the specific individual image moves from the position of the movement destination to the position of the movement destination. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature I8, it is possible to distinguish the display effect in which the specific individual image is displayed corresponding to the operation of the player from the effect in which the specific individual image passes from the appearance source position to the movement destination position.

  Feature I9. The display control means is a non-restriction means for displaying the specific individual image at a position outside the display restriction range on the display surface without causing a restriction by the display restriction means when a specific condition is satisfied. A game machine according to feature I7 or I8, comprising the function of executing the process of step S2609 in the sound-light side MPU 93.

  According to the feature I9, whether or not the specific condition is satisfied depending on whether or not the display position of the specific individual image is restricted in the case where the specific individual image is displayed corresponding to the action of the player It is possible to teach the player.

Feature I10. The display control means is configured to be capable of performing a display effect in which the specific individual image moves from the position of the appearance source on the display surface to the position of the movement destination.
The display restriction range is set as a range up to an intermediate position in the movement direction when the specific individual image moves from the position of the appearance source to the position of the movement destination,
The non-restriction means can execute display effect in which the specific individual image moves past the halfway position to the position of the movement destination according to the position of the recognition target part, when the specific condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to feature I9, which is characterized in that

  According to the feature I10, even when the display position of the specific individual image is restricted, the specific individual image moves in the same direction as in the case where the intermediate position is not restricted. It is possible to make the player expect that the specific condition is established until it is done.

  Feature I11. The information deriving means is characterized in that position information corresponding to a distance to a monitoring target existing in front of the gaming machine is derived as the state information of the monitoring range based on the light reception result in the light receiving unit. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I10.

  According to the feature I11, the position information is derived based on the light reception result in the light receiving unit, and the specific process is executed using the position information. Therefore, the display content is determined in relation to the distance from the distance measurement reference. It is possible to execute processing for

Feature I12. Status information (distance data or one frame's worth of image G) of the monitoring range present ahead of the gaming machine based on the reception result in the reception unit (the imaging device 73 in the first embodiment etc. and the imaging device 131 in the third embodiment) Information deriving means (in the first embodiment etc., the signal processing circuit 75, in the third embodiment the signal processing circuit 141), and
Display control means (a function for executing continuous effect control processing in the sound side MPU 93) to display and control the display means (the symbol display device 61) so as to be the display content corresponding to the player's operation specified based on the state information When,
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature I12, since the state information is derived based on the reception result in the receiving unit, the non-contact type recognition of the operation of the player or the like is possible. In this case, since the display corresponding to the action of the player specified based on the state information is performed, diversification of the display effect in the display means is achieved, and the action of the player is reflected in the content of the display effect. It becomes possible to give the player the impression that they are actively participating in the game.

  For any one of the features I1 to I12, features A1 to A20, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C11, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E13, features F1 to F8, features G1 to G16 , Feature H1 to H6, feature I1 to I12, feature J1 to J24, feature K1 to K7, feature L1 to L4, feature M1 to M11, feature N1 to N9, feature O1 to O8, and any one or more configurations It may apply. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature J group>
Feature J1. Selection period setting means (a function for executing a confrontation effect setting process in the sound side MPU 93) for generating a selection period (a first confirmation period, a second confirmation period) enabling the player to perform a selection operation;
Granting means for causing the player to be awarded a bonus after the selection operation to be the bonus generation mode is performed in the selection period (performing the process of step S2814, step S2917 and step S3015 in the sound-light side MPU 93 Function),
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature J1, since the benefit is awarded after the selection operation to be the benefit generation mode is performed in the selection period, the player who expects the provision of the benefit selects the benefit generation mode in the selection operation performed in the selection period It is expected to be an operation, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Feature J2. Selection period setting means (a function for executing a confrontation effect setting process in the sound side MPU 93) for generating a selection period (a first confirmation period, a second confirmation period) enabling the player to perform a selection operation;
Status information (distance data or one frame's worth of image G) of the monitoring range present ahead of the gaming machine based on the light reception result in the light receiving section (the imaging apparatus 73 in the first embodiment etc. and the imaging apparatus 131 in the third embodiment) Information deriving means (in the first embodiment etc., the signal processing circuit 75, in the third embodiment the signal processing circuit 141), and
Assigning means for specifying the mode of the selection operation based on the state information and enabling the player to be given a bonus after the selection operation to be the bonus generation mode is performed in the selection period (the sound light side MPU 93 Function in step S2814, step S2917 and step S3015 in
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature J2, since the benefit is awarded after the selection operation to be the benefit generation mode is performed in the selection period, the player who expects the provision of the benefit selects the benefit generation mode in the selection operation performed in the selection period It is expected to be an operation, and the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, since the player's selection operation is specified using the state information derived based on the light reception result in the light receiving unit, the result of non-contact recognition of the player's movement itself is treated as the selection operation. It is possible to make the contents of the selection operation innovative. Thereby, the interest of the game can be improved.

  It should be noted that the information deriving means replaces the configuration capable of deriving the state information of the monitoring range present ahead of the gaming machine based on the light reception result in the light receiving part, and based on the reception result in the receiving part It is good also as composition which can derive state information.

Feature J3. Aspect storage means (selection target storage area 95g) for storing the aspect of the selection operation specified based on the state information;
Mode storage execution means for storing the mode of the specified selection operation in the mode storage unit when the selection operation is specified based on the state information (steps S2809, S2909 and S3009 in the sound side MPU 93) Function to execute)
Equipped with
The giving means specifies the mode of the selection operation lastly performed in the selection period as the current player's selection action by referring to the information stored in the mode storage means. The game machine according to Feature J2, characterized in that

  According to the feature J3, the selection operation performed in the selection period is sequentially stored, and the finally stored selection operation is specified as the selection operation of the current selection period. It is possible to respect the player's final decision while suppressing.

Feature J4. The shape specifying means for specifying the shape of the player's hand based on the state information (a function of executing the processing of step S2807, step S2907 and step S3007 in the sound light side MPU 93)
When the shape of the hand specified by the shape specifying means is the shape of the benefit generation mode, the applying means specifies that the selection operation to be the benefit generation mode is performed. Feature J2 Or the gaming machine described in J3.

  According to the feature J4, since the mode of the selecting operation is specified by the shape of the hand, it is possible to facilitate the operation when the player performs the selecting operation while diversifying the modes of the selecting operation. .

Feature J5. Data storage means (display control device 96) for storing image data corresponding to the mode of the selection operation in advance;
Data reading means for reading from the data storage means the image data corresponding to the mode of the player's selection operation decided in the selection period (function to execute the processing of step S2812, step S2914 and step S3012 in the sound side MPU 93, display Controller 96),
Image display execution means (display control device 96) for displaying an image corresponding to the image data read by the data reading means on the display means (symbol display device 61);
A game machine according to any one of the features J2 to J4, which comprises:

  According to the feature J5, the mode of the selection operation performed by the player is displayed on the display means, whereby the player grasps the mode of the selection operation recognized by the gaming machine which is the selection operation performed by the player. It is possible to In this case, the display of the mode of the selection operation is performed by the image corresponding to the image data read out from the data reading means. This makes it possible to clearly display the mode of the selection operation as compared with the configuration in which the image of the mode of the selection operation extracted from the state information is displayed as it is. In addition, regardless of the derivation accuracy of the state information in the information derivation means, it is possible to clearly display the mode of the selection operation.

  Feature J6. The information deriving means is characterized in that position information corresponding to a distance to a monitoring target existing in front of the gaming machine is derived as the state information of the monitoring range based on the light reception result in the light receiving unit. The gaming machine according to any one of features J2 to J5.

  According to the feature J6, position information is derived based on the light reception result in the light receiving unit, and the mode of the selection operation is grasped using the position information, so the game is performed in relation to the distance from the distance measurement reference It becomes possible to recognize the hand etc. of the person, and it becomes possible to correctly recognize the hand etc.

Feature J7. It has a predetermined notification control means (a function to execute the processing of step S2814, step S2815, step S2911 and step S3012 in the sound light side MPU 93, display control device 96) for performing predetermined notification from the gaming machine,
There are multiple types of player selection actions,
The game according to any one of the features J1 to J6, wherein when the selection operation corresponding to the privilege generation mode is performed on the predetermined notification, the selection operation is the selection operation of the privilege generation mode Machine.

  According to the feature J7, it is possible to recognize whether the player's selection operation corresponds to the benefit generation mode in relation to the predetermined notification.

  In addition, it is good also as a structure in which the kind of selection operation corresponding as a privilege generation | occurrence | production aspect is defined with respect to the kind of predetermined alerting | reporting.

  Feature J8. Selection mode display control means (step S2812, step S2914, and step S3012 in the sound-light side MPU 93) for displaying the mode of the player's selection operation decided in the selection period on the display means (the symbol display device 61) A game machine according to any one of the features J1 to J7, comprising a function and display control device 96).

  According to the feature J8, the mode of the selection operation performed by the engineer is displayed on the display means, whereby the player grasps the mode of the selection operation recognized by the gaming machine which is the selection operation performed by the player. It is possible to

Feature J9. Profit generating means (a function of executing the processing of step S309 to step S312 in the main MPU 83) that generates a profit when a profit generating condition is established;
Effect control means for generating an expected effect for expecting whether or not the profit is generated (function to execute the processing of step S306 to step S308 in the main MPU 83, and processing of step S601 to step S609 in the sound light side MPU 93 Function),
Equipped with
The selection period is a configuration that occurs in the expected effect, and the configuration is such that the presence or absence of the benefit is determined regardless of whether or not the selection operation to be the benefit generation mode is performed. The gaming machine according to any one of J8.

  According to the feature J9, it is possible to generate a selection period while not affecting the rate of occurrence of profit.

  Feature J10. When the selection operation to be the bonus generation mode is performed, the giving unit is configured to perform an effect in which the generation expectation degree of the profit is higher than that in the case where the selection operation is performed in the expectation effect. The gaming machine according to feature J9, wherein the gaming machine is characterized in that

  According to the feature J10, in the configuration in which the selection period is generated while the generation rate of the profit is not affected, when the selection operation to be the privilege generation mode is performed, the effect that the generation expectation of the profit is high Since it is executed, it is possible to raise the player's awareness of performing the selection operation in the bonus generation mode.

Feature J11. The effect control means is a period determining means (function of executing the process of step S409 in the main side MPU 83) for determining the effect continuation period from the start to the end of the expected effect when the expected effect is generated. Equipped
A game machine according to feature J10, wherein the effect continuation period determined by the period determination means does not change regardless of whether or not the selection operation to be the bonus generation mode is performed.

  According to the feature J11, it is possible to execute the effect corresponding to the selection operation while not affecting the digestibility of the expected effect.

Feature J12. As a selection result for the player's selection operation in the selection period, there are a player's victory result, a player's defeat result, and a draw result.
The gaming machine according to any one of the features J1 to J11, wherein the giving unit does not generate the selection period again when the drawing result is obtained.

  According to the feature J12, in the configuration in which the selection result in the selection period is arbitrarily changed according to the player's selection operation, the selection period is ended even when the draw result is obtained, so the selection period It is possible to set the period required for the termination of the period to be a predetermined period.

  Feature J13. The mode determining means (the rear side of the sound light side MPU 93 performs the determination of whether or not to make the player's selection operation a bonus generation mode without taking into account the mode of the player's selection operation determined in the selection period A game machine according to any one of the features J1 to J12, characterized in that the game machine has a function of executing playable control processing and post-dropout impossible control processing.

  According to the feature J13, since the selection operation to be the bonus generation mode is randomly determined, it is determined whether or not the bonus is given by the player's selection, and the consciousness to select the selection operation It is possible to raise

Feature J14. Profit generating means (a function of executing the processing of step S309 to step S312 in the main MPU 83) that generates a profit when a profit generating condition is established;
Effect control means for generating an expected effect for expecting whether or not the profit is generated (function to execute the processing of step S306 to step S308 in the main MPU 83, and processing of step S601 to step S609 in the sound light side MPU 93 Function),
Equipped with
The selection period is a configuration that occurs in the expected effect, and the configuration is such that the presence or absence of the profit is determined regardless of whether or not the selection operation in which the benefit generation mode has been performed. The gaming machine described in.

  According to the feature J14, even if the selection operation to be the bonus generation mode is randomly determined, the generation status of the benefits does not change depending on whether the selection operation is to the bonus generation mode or not. It becomes possible to produce the effect described in the feature J13 while not affecting the rate.

Feature J15. Profit generating means (a function of executing the processing of step S309 to step S312 in the main MPU 83) that generates a profit when a profit generating condition is established;
Effect control means for generating an expected effect for expecting whether or not the profit is generated (function to execute the processing of step S306 to step S308 in the main MPU 83, and processing of step S601 to step S609 in the sound light side MPU 93 Function),
Equipped with
The selection period is a configuration that occurs in the expected effect,
When the selection operation to be the bonus generation mode is performed, the giving unit is configured to perform an effect in which the generation expectation degree of the profit is higher than that in the case where the selection operation is performed in the expectation effect. Yes,
The effect control means corresponds to the execution period of the effect to be performed corresponding to the selection operation to be the bonus generation mode and the selection period to be the bonus generation mode not to be performed. A game machine according to feature J13 or J14, comprising means for making the same as the execution period of the effect to be performed.

  According to the feature J15, when the selection operation to be the bonus generation mode is performed, the effect with the high generation expectation of the profit is performed, so the player's consciousness to perform the selection operation to be the bonus generation mode It is possible to raise In this case, even if the selection operation to be the bonus generation mode is randomly determined, the duration of the expected effect can be prevented from changing depending on whether the selection operation is to be the bonus generation mode. It becomes.

Feature J16. It has a predetermined notification control means (a function to execute the processing of step S2814, step S2815, step S2911 and step S3012 in the sound light side MPU 93, display control device 96) for performing predetermined notification from the gaming machine,
There are multiple types of player selection actions,
When the selection operation corresponding to the benefit generation mode is performed on the predetermined notification, the selection operation is a configuration for selecting the benefit generation mode,
The predetermined notification control means is characterized by comprising pre-end control means (function of executing the processing of step S2910 to step S2911 in the sound-light side MPU 93) for performing the predetermined notification before the end of the selection period. The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J15.

  According to the feature J16, the selection operation can be performed after the predetermined notification is performed, and the player side can be forced to be in the privilege generation mode. This makes it possible to increase the attention to the selection period.

  In addition, it is good also as a structure in which the kind of selection operation corresponding as a privilege generation | occurrence | production aspect is defined with respect to the kind of predetermined alerting | reporting.

  Feature J17. The predetermined notification control means is provided with a control means (function to execute the processing of step S3012 in the sound-light side MPU 93) for performing the predetermined notification after the selection period ends. Feature J16 The gaming machine described in.

  According to the feature J17, there are both a case where it is possible to perform the selection operation after the predetermined notification is performed and a case where it is not possible to perform the selection operation after the predetermined notification is performed. This makes it possible to diversify the aspect of the selection period.

  Feature J18. A control target lottery unit (function of executing the processing of step S2711 in the sound side MPU 93) for deciding which of the pre-termination control means and the post-termination control means to be the target for performing the predetermined notification The game machine according to Feature J17, comprising the game machine.

  According to the feature J18, since it is randomly determined that the selection operation can be performed after the predetermined notification is performed and the selection operation can not be performed after the predetermined notification is performed. It is possible to diversify the aspect of the period.

  Feature J19. The selection period setting means is the appearance of the selection period in any case where the control of the predetermined notification is performed by the pre-termination control device and when the control of the predetermined notification is performed by the post-termination control device. The game machine according to feature J17 or J18, wherein the game is performed in a common manner.

  According to the feature J19, it is possible to make the player perform the selection operation after confirming the predetermined notification in any selection period, and it is possible to increase the player's attention to the selection period .

Feature J20. Profit generating means (a function of executing the processing of step S309 to step S312 in the main MPU 83) that generates a profit when a profit generating condition is established;
Effect control means for generating an expected effect for expecting whether or not the profit is generated (function to execute the processing of step S306 to step S308 in the main MPU 83, and processing of step S601 to step S609 in the sound light side MPU 93 Function),
Equipped with
The selection period is a configuration that occurs in the expected effect,
A configuration according to any one of the features J16 to J19, wherein the profit can be generated in the expected effect for which the predetermined notification has been performed before the selection period is ended by the pre-termination control means. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature J20, even if it is possible to perform the selection operation after the predetermined notification has been made, a benefit can be generated, so that the player produces a benefit by performing the selection operation in the benefit generation mode. It is expected to recognize that it will be possible to increase the level of attention to the selection period.

  Feature J21. The gaming machine according to the feature J20, wherein the pre-termination control means causes the predetermined notification to be performed before the selection period ends in the expected effect corresponding to the generation of the profit. .

  According to the feature J21, since the situation in which the selection operation can be performed after the predetermined notification is performed occurs in the expected effect corresponding to the generation of the profit, the situation in which the generation rate of the profit is not affected. It is possible for the player to recognize that the selection has made a profit.

Feature J22. Profit generating means (a function of executing the processing of step S309 to step S312 in the main MPU 83) that generates a profit when a profit generating condition is established;
Effect control means for generating an expected effect for expecting whether or not the profit is generated (function to execute the processing of step S306 to step S308 in the main MPU 83, and processing of step S601 to step S609 in the sound light side MPU 93 Function),
Equipped with
The selection period is a configuration that occurs in the expected effect,
When the selection operation to be the bonus generation mode is performed, the giving unit is configured to perform an effect in which the generation expectation degree of the profit is higher than that in the case where the selection operation is performed in the expectation effect. Yes,
The effect control means corresponds to a selection operation to be the bonus generation mode in the expectation effect in which the predetermined notification is performed before the end of the selection period by the pre-termination control means. The apparatus is characterized by comprising means for making the execution period of the effect to be performed the same as the execution period of the effect to be performed correspondingly to the selection operation to be the benefit generation mode. The gaming machine according to any one of features J16 to J21.

  According to the feature J22, when the selection operation to be the bonus generation mode is performed, the effect with the high generation expectation of the profit is performed, so the player's consciousness to perform the selection operation to be the bonus generation mode It is possible to raise In this case, even if the player can force the selection operation to be the bonus generation mode, the duration of the expected effect does not change depending on whether or not the selection operation is the bonus generation mode. It will be possible to

  Feature J23. Forcing means (forcing effect control process in the sound light side MPU 93) for the giving means to be a selecting operation to be a bonus generation mode or a selecting operation not to be a bonus generation mode even if the player's selecting operation is any mode The game machine according to any one of J1 to J22, which has a function of performing

  According to the feature J23, it is possible to determine the presence or absence of the generation of the benefit regardless of the result of the selection period while recognizing that the player has generated the benefit by the selection of the player.

Feature J24. It has a predetermined notification control means (a function of executing the processing of step S2814 and step S2815 in the sound light side MPU 93, display control device 96) for performing predetermined notification from the gaming machine,
There are multiple types of player selection actions,
When the selection operation corresponding to the benefit generation mode is performed on the predetermined notification, the selection operation is a configuration for selecting the benefit generation mode,
The predetermined notification control means determines the content of the predetermined notification for the current selection period in accordance with the determined selection operation after the selection operation of the player in the selection period is determined in accordance with the determined selection operation (sound light A game machine according to Feature J23, comprising: a function of executing the processing of step S2813 to step S2815 in the side MPU 93.

  According to the feature J24, it is possible to perform predetermined notification corresponding to it in a configuration in which whether or not to be a bonus generation mode is forcibly determined on the gaming machine side.

  In addition, it is good also as a structure in which the kind of selection operation corresponding as a privilege generation | occurrence | production aspect is defined with respect to the kind of predetermined alerting | reporting.

  In addition, the feature A1 to A20, the feature B1 to B11, the feature C1 to C11, the feature D1 to D8, the feature E1 to E13, the feature F1 to F8, the feature G1 to G16 with respect to the configuration of any one of the features J1 to J24. , Feature H1 to H6, feature I1 to I12, feature J1 to J24, feature K1 to K7, feature L1 to L4, feature M1 to M11, feature N1 to N9, feature O1 to O8, and any one or more configurations It may apply. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature K group>
Feature K1. Selection period setting means (a function for executing a confrontation effect setting process in the sound side MPU 93) for generating a selection period (a first confirmation period, a second confirmation period) enabling the player to perform a selection operation;
Granting means for causing the player to be awarded a bonus after the selection operation to be the bonus generation mode is performed in the selection period (performing the process of step S2814, step S2917 and step S3015 in the sound-light side MPU 93 Function),
Predetermined notification control means (a function for executing the processing of step S2814, step S2815, step S2911 and step S3012 in the sound light side MPU 93, display control device 96) for performing predetermined notification from the gaming machine;
Equipped with
There are multiple types of player selection actions,
When the selection operation corresponding to the benefit generation mode is performed on the predetermined notification, the selection operation is a configuration for selecting the benefit generation mode,
The predetermined notification control means is characterized by comprising pre-end control means (function of executing the processing of step S2910 to step S2911 in the sound-light side MPU 93) for performing the predetermined notification before the end of the selection period. A gaming machine to be.

  According to the feature K1, since the benefit is awarded after the selection operation to be the benefit generation mode is performed in the selection period, the player who expects the provision of the benefit selects the benefit generation mode in the selection operation performed in the selection period It is expected to be an operation, and the interest of the game can be improved. Further, the selection operation can be performed after the predetermined notification has been performed, and the player side can be forced to set the bonus generation mode. This makes it possible to increase the attention to the selection period.

  Feature K2. The predetermined notification control means is provided with a control means (function to execute the processing of step S3012 in the sound-light side MPU 93) for performing the predetermined notification after the selection period is ended. The gaming machine described in.

  According to the feature K2, both the case where the selection operation can be performed after the predetermined notification is performed and the case where the selection operation can not be performed after the predetermined notification is performed exist. This makes it possible to diversify the aspect of the selection period.

  Feature K3. A control target lottery unit (function of executing the processing of step S2711 in the sound side MPU 93) for deciding which of the pre-termination control means and the post-termination control means to be the target for performing the predetermined notification The gaming machine according to feature K2, characterized in that it comprises.

  According to the feature K3, a selection is made randomly because it is possible to perform the selection operation after the predetermined notification is performed, and a case where the selection operation can not be performed after the predetermined notification is performed. It is possible to diversify the aspect of the period.

  Feature K4. The selection period setting means is the appearance of the selection period in any case where the control of the predetermined notification is performed by the pre-termination control device and when the control of the predetermined notification is performed by the post-termination control device. The game machine according to feature K2 or K3, wherein the game is performed in a common manner.

  According to the feature K4, it is possible to make the player perform the selection operation after confirming the predetermined notification in any selection period, and it is possible to increase the player's attention to the selection period .

Feature K5. Profit generating means (a function of executing the processing of step S309 to step S312 in the main MPU 83) that generates a profit when a profit generating condition is established;
Effect control means for generating an expected effect for expecting whether or not the profit is generated (function to execute the processing of step S306 to step S308 in the main MPU 83, and processing of step S601 to step S609 in the sound light side MPU 93 Function),
Equipped with
The selection period is a configuration that occurs in the expected effect,
A configuration according to any one of the features K1 to K4, characterized in that the profit can be generated in the expectation effect for which the predetermined notification has been performed before the selection period is ended by the pre-termination control means. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature K5, even if it is possible to perform the selection operation after the predetermined notification has been performed, a benefit can be generated. Therefore, the player generates a benefit by performing the selection operation in the benefit generation mode. It is expected to recognize that it will be possible to increase the level of attention to the selection period.

  Feature K6. The gaming machine according to the feature K5, wherein the pre-termination control means is configured to cause the predetermined notification to be performed before the selection period ends in the expectation effect corresponding to the generation of the profit. .

  According to the feature K6, since the situation in which the selection operation can be performed after the predetermined notification is performed occurs in the expected effect corresponding to the generation of the profit, while the influence rate of the profit is not affected, It is possible for the player to recognize that the selection has made a profit.

Feature K7. Profit generating means (a function of executing the processing of step S309 to step S312 in the main MPU 83) that generates a profit when a profit generating condition is established;
Effect control means for generating an expected effect for expecting whether or not the profit is generated (function to execute the processing of step S306 to step S308 in the main MPU 83, and processing of step S601 to step S609 in the sound light side MPU 93 Function),
Equipped with
The selection period is a configuration that occurs in the expected effect,
When the selection operation to be the bonus generation mode is performed, the giving unit is configured to perform an effect in which the generation expectation degree of the profit is higher than that in the case where the selection operation is performed in the expectation effect. Yes,
The effect control means corresponds to a selection operation to be the bonus generation mode in the expectation effect in which the predetermined notification is performed before the end of the selection period by the pre-termination control means. The apparatus is characterized by comprising means for making the execution period of the effect to be performed the same as the execution period of the effect to be performed correspondingly to the selection operation to be the benefit generation mode. The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K6.

  According to the feature K7, when the selection operation to be the bonus generation mode is performed, the effect with the high generation expectation of the profit is executed, so the player's consciousness to perform the selection operation to be the bonus generation mode It is possible to raise In this case, even if the player can force the selection operation to be the bonus generation mode, the duration of the expected effect does not change depending on whether or not the selection operation is the bonus generation mode. It will be possible to

  In addition, the feature A1 to A20, the feature B1 to B11, the feature C1 to C11, the feature D1 to D8, the feature E1 to E13, the feature F1 to F8, the feature G1 to G16 with respect to the configuration of any one of the features K1 to K7. , Feature H1 to H6, feature I1 to I12, feature J1 to J24, feature K1 to K7, feature L1 to L4, feature M1 to M11, feature N1 to N9, feature O1 to O8, and any one or more configurations It may apply. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature L group>
Feature L1. Selection period setting means (a function for executing a confrontation effect setting process in the sound side MPU 93) for generating a selection period (a first confirmation period, a second confirmation period) enabling the player to perform a selection operation;
Granting means for causing the player to be awarded a bonus after the selection operation to be the bonus generation mode is performed in the selection period (performing the process of step S2814, step S2917 and step S3015 in the sound-light side MPU 93 Function),
Equipped with
A mode determining means (the rear side of the sound light side MPU 93 performs the determination of whether or not to set the player's selection operation as the bonus generation mode without considering the mode of the player's selection operation determined in the selection period. A game machine characterized by having a function of executing an enabling control process and an enabling control process after withdrawal.

  According to the feature L1, since the benefit is awarded after the selection operation to be the benefit generation mode is performed in the selection period, the player who expects the grant of the benefit selects the benefit generation mode in the selection operation performed in the selection period It is expected to be an operation, and the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, since the selection operation to be the bonus generation mode is randomly determined, it is determined whether or not the bonus is given by the player's selection, and awareness of selecting the selection operation is increased. It becomes possible.

Feature L2. Profit generating means (a function of executing the processing of step S309 to step S312 in the main MPU 83) that generates a profit when a profit generating condition is established;
Effect control means for generating an expected effect for expecting whether or not the profit is generated (function to execute the processing of step S306 to step S308 in the main MPU 83, and processing of step S601 to step S609 in the sound light side MPU 93 Function),
Equipped with
The selection period is a configuration that occurs in the expected effect, and the configuration is such that the presence or absence of the benefit is determined regardless of whether or not the selection operation to be the benefit generation mode has been performed. The gaming machine described in.

  According to the feature L2, even if the selection operation to be the bonus generation mode is randomly determined, the generation status of the benefit does not change depending on whether the selection operation is to the bonus generation mode or not. It becomes possible to produce the effect described in the feature L1 while not affecting the rate.

Feature L3. Profit generating means (a function of executing the processing of step S309 to step S312 in the main MPU 83) that generates a profit when a profit generating condition is established;
Effect control means for generating an expected effect for expecting whether or not the profit is generated (function to execute the processing of step S306 to step S308 in the main MPU 83, and processing of step S601 to step S609 in the sound light side MPU 93 Function),
Equipped with
The selection period is a configuration that occurs in the expected effect,
When the selection operation to be the bonus generation mode is performed, the giving unit is configured to perform an effect in which the generation expectation degree of the profit is higher than that in the case where the selection operation is performed in the expectation effect. Yes,
The effect control means corresponds to the execution period of the effect to be performed corresponding to the selection operation to be the bonus generation mode and the selection period to be the bonus generation mode not to be performed. A game machine according to feature L1 or L2, comprising means for making the same as the execution period of the effect to be performed.

  According to the feature L3, when the selection operation to be the bonus generation mode is performed, the effect with the high generation expectation of the profit is performed, so the player's consciousness to perform the selection operation to be the bonus generation mode It is possible to raise In this case, even if the selection operation to be the bonus generation mode is randomly determined, the duration of the expected effect can be prevented from changing depending on whether the selection operation is to be the bonus generation mode. It becomes.

Feature L4. As a selection result for the player's selection operation in the selection period, there are a player's victory result, a player's defeat result, and a draw result.
The gaming machine according to any one of the features L1 to L3, wherein the giving unit does not generate the selection period again when the drawing result is obtained.

  According to the feature L4, in the configuration in which the selection result in the selection period is arbitrarily changed according to the player's selection operation, the selection period will end even if the draw result is obtained, so the selection period It is possible to set the period required for the termination of the period to be a predetermined period.

  In addition, the feature A1 to A20, the feature B1 to B11, the feature C1 to C11, the feature D1 to D8, the feature E1 to E13, the feature F1 to F8, the feature G1 to G16 with respect to the configuration of any one of the features L1 to L4. , Feature H1 to H6, feature I1 to I12, feature J1 to J24, feature K1 to K7, feature L1 to L4, feature M1 to M11, feature N1 to N9, feature O1 to O8, and any one or more configurations It may apply. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to each feature of the feature H group, the feature I group, the feature J group, the feature K group, and the feature L group, the following problems can be solved.

  Pachinko machines, slot machines and the like are known as a type of gaming machine. In these gaming machines, it is known that an internal lottery is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, and a bonus is provided to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. In addition, it is general that an effect for causing a player to predict or recognize the result of the internal lottery is performed.

  Specifically, for the pachinko machine, for example, a lottery is performed based on the game ball entering the ball entry portion provided in the game area, and the variation display of the pattern is performed on the display surface of the display device. It is known that when the winning result is obtained, the combination of the specific pattern etc. is displayed on the display surface as a final stop, and the configuration shifts to a special gaming state advantageous to the player. And when it shifts to the special game state, for example opening and closing of the ball entry device etc which are provided in the game territory is started, due to the ball entry to the said ball entry device and the like the payout etc of the game sphere comes to be done ing.

  Here, in the gaming machine as exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature M group>
Feature M1. Ejection operation specifying means (in the first embodiment, the processing of step S1201 in the sound light side MPU 93) for specifying that the ejection operation has been performed to eject the storage medium in which the information corresponding to the number of usable media is stored A function to be executed, and in the second embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S3101 in the main MPU 83);
Authentication execution means for executing an authentication process for specifying whether the discharge operation has been performed by a legitimate player when the discharge operation is specified by the discharge operation specifying means A function of executing the processing of step S1311 in the sound light side MPU 93 in the first embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S3209 in the main MPU 83 in the second embodiment),
Anomaly handling means (in the first embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S1313 in the sound light side MPU 93 in the first embodiment, the second embodiment) that brings about an anomaly response state when the result of the authentication process is not normal And the function of executing the processing of step S3212 to step S3213 in the main MPU 83),
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature M1, the authentication process is executed when the storage medium discharge operation is performed, and the abnormal correspondence state is established when the result of the authentication process is not normal. If a person who is not trying to acquire the storage medium illegally, for example, it becomes possible to cope with it in the game hall.

  Feature M2. The abnormality handling unit is characterized in that, when the result of the authentication process is not normal, the storage medium is not discharged as the abnormality handling state. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature M2, it is possible to prevent the storage medium from being ejected in response to the ejection operation performed by a person who is not a legitimate player.

Feature M3. The authentication execution means does not execute the process for preventing the storage medium from being discharged even if the result of the authentication process is not normal.
The gaming machine according to the feature M1 or M2, wherein the abnormality handling unit is configured to set the abnormality handling state by performing an abnormality handling notification.

  According to the feature M3, even if the result of the authentication process is not normal, the ejection of the storage medium is not prevented, so that the authentication process is not correctly executed and the result of the authentication process becomes abnormal. It is possible to complete the ejection of the storage medium. In addition, when the result of the authentication process becomes abnormal, the abnormality response notification is executed, so that it is possible to draw attention to the game hall manager or the like.

  Feature M4. In the feature M3, the authentication execution unit is configured to execute the authentication process before the ejection of the storage medium is started in response to the ejection operation when the ejection operation is performed. The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature M4, when the result of the process for authentication is abnormal, it is possible to start anomalous response notification early with respect to the occurrence of the discharge operation.

Feature M5. First acquisition means for acquiring authentication reference information when information corresponding to the number of usable media is newly set (in the first embodiment, the processing of step S1212 to step S1214 in the sound side MPU 93 is executed Function, in the second embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S3108 to step S3110 in the main MPU 83,
The authentication execution means is
Second acquisition means for acquiring authentication execution information when it is specified by the discharge operation specifying means that the discharge operation has been performed (in step S1307 to step S1309 of the sound light side MPU 93 in the first embodiment) A function of executing a process, and in the second embodiment, a function of executing the process of steps S3205 to S3207 in the main MPU 83);
Means for executing, as the authentication process, a process for specifying whether the authentication reference information acquired by the first acquisition means and the authentication execution information acquired by the second acquisition means match A function of executing the processing of step S1311 in the sound light side MPU 93 in the embodiment 1, a function of executing the processing of step S3209 in the main MPU 83 in the second embodiment),
A game machine according to any one of the features M1 to M4, comprising

  According to the feature M5, the authentication reference information acquired when the information corresponding to the number of usable media is newly set and the authentication execution information acquired when the ejection operation is performed are used. Since the authentication process is executed, it is possible to directly authenticate the owner of the storage medium and the executor of the ejection operation.

Feature M6. Status information (distance data or one frame's worth of image G) of the monitoring range present ahead of the gaming machine based on the light reception result in the light receiving section (the imaging apparatus 73 in the first embodiment etc. and the imaging apparatus 131 in the third embodiment) Information deriving means (in the first embodiment etc., the signal processing circuit 75, and in the third embodiment the signal processing circuit 141),
The authentication execution means checks, as the authentication process, whether or not the recognition target portion of the player specified based on the state information corresponds to the recognition target portion of the legitimate player. The game machine according to any one of features M1 to M5, which is characterized by the features.

  According to the feature M6, since the verification is performed using the state information derived based on the light reception result in the light receiving unit, it is not necessary to request the player to perform a complicated operation at the time of authentication.

  It should be noted that the information deriving means replaces the configuration capable of deriving the state information of the monitoring range present ahead of the gaming machine based on the light reception result in the light receiving part, and based on the reception result in the receiving part It is good also as composition which can derive state information.

Feature M7. A first acquisition unit (specifically, a first acquisition unit that specifies information of the recognition target region based on the state information and acquires the specified information as authentication reference information when information corresponding to the number of usable media is newly set; 1 has a function of executing the processing of step S1212 to step S1214 in the sound light side MPU 93, and has a function of executing the processing of step S3108 to step S3110 in the main MPU 83 in the second embodiment,
The authentication execution means is
A second acquisition of specifying information of the recognition target region based on the state information and acquiring the specified information as authentication execution information when the discharge operation is specified by the discharge operation specifying means. Means (in the first embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S1307 to step S1309 in the sound light side MPU 93; in the second embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S3205 to step S3207 in the main MPU 83);
Means for executing, as the authentication process, a process for specifying whether the authentication reference information acquired by the first acquisition means and the authentication execution information acquired by the second acquisition means match A function of executing the processing of step S1311 in the sound light side MPU 93 in the embodiment 1, a function of executing the processing of step S3209 in the main MPU 83 in the second embodiment),
A game machine according to feature M6, comprising:

  According to the feature M7, the authentication reference information acquired when the information corresponding to the number of usable media is newly set and the authentication execution information acquired when the ejection operation is performed are used. Since the authentication process is executed, it is possible to directly authenticate the owner of the storage medium and the executor of the ejection operation. Further, according to the present configuration, it is possible to obtain both the authentication reference information and the authentication execution information by using the state information, so that the configuration can be simplified and the player regarding the execution of the authentication processing can be achieved. It is possible not to require complicated operations.

Feature M8. The authentication execution means does not execute the process for preventing the storage medium from being discharged even if the result of the authentication process is not normal.
The gaming machine according to the feature M6 or M7, wherein the abnormality handling unit is configured to set the abnormality handling state by performing an abnormality handling notification.

  According to the feature M8, even if the result of the process for authentication is not normal, the ejection of the storage medium is not prevented, so that the result of the process for authentication is abnormal due to the state information being not correctly derived. It is possible to complete the ejection of the storage medium even if In addition, when the result of the authentication process becomes abnormal, the abnormality response notification is executed, so that it is possible to draw attention to the game hall manager or the like.

  Feature M9. The abnormality handling unit generates at least one event when the authentication standard information is not acquired by the first acquisition unit and when the authentication execution information is not acquired by the second acquisition unit. The gaming machine according to the feature M8 is characterized in that notification of abnormality response is performed also in the case.

  According to the feature M9, in the configuration in which the authentication reference information and the authentication execution information are acquired based on the state information, it is assumed that any information is not acquired when the authentication process is performed. On the other hand, since the storage medium is discharged even if the authentication process is not properly executed because the information is not obtained, it is possible to prevent the regular player from feeling uncomfortable. At the same time, since the abnormality countermeasure notification is executed, it becomes possible to cope with the illegal discharge operation.

  Feature M10. The information deriving means is characterized in that position information corresponding to a distance to a monitoring target existing in front of the gaming machine is derived as the state information of the monitoring range based on the light reception result in the light receiving unit. The gaming machine according to any one of features M6 to M9.

  According to the feature M10, the positional information is derived based on the light reception result in the light receiving unit, and the collation is performed using the positional information, so that the collation is executed in relation to the distance from the distance measurement reference. Is possible.

Feature M11. It has a window panel (window panel 22) provided on the front of the gaming machine and viewed by the player to confirm the contents of the game.
The gaming machine according to any one of features M6 to M10, wherein the light receiving unit is provided on the gaming machine rear side with respect to the window panel unit.

  According to the feature M11, it is possible to prevent the fraudulent act on the light receiving unit.

  In addition, the feature A1 to A20, the feature B1 to B11, the feature C1 to C11, the feature D1 to D8, the feature E1 to E13, the feature F1 to F8, the feature G1 to G16 with respect to the configuration of any one of the features M1 to M11. , Feature H1 to H6, feature I1 to I12, feature J1 to J24, feature K1 to K7, feature L1 to L4, feature M1 to M11, feature N1 to N9, feature O1 to O8, and any one or more configurations It may apply. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature N group>
Feature N1. Status information (distance data or one frame's worth of image G) of the monitoring range present ahead of the gaming machine based on the light reception result in the light receiving section (the imaging apparatus 73 in the first embodiment etc. and the imaging apparatus 131 in the third embodiment) Information deriving means (in the first embodiment etc., the signal processing circuit 75, in the third embodiment the signal processing circuit 141), and
Specific situation handling means for establishing a specific situation handling state when it is identified that a specific situation predetermined as an undesirable situation has occurred based on the state information derived by the information deriving means A function of executing the first situation monitoring process and the second situation monitoring process in the sound side MPU 93);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature N1, since it is configured to monitor whether or not the specific situation is generated using the state information derived based on the light receiving result in the light receiving unit, the monitoring is performed uniquely in the game machine It becomes possible. Then, when it is specified that the specific situation has occurred, it becomes possible to cope with it by becoming the specific situation corresponding state.

  Feature N2. The specific situation handling means is configured to be in the specific situation handling state when it is specified based on the state information that a person is continuously present in the monitoring range in a situation where a game is not being played. The gaming machine according to feature N1, which is characterized by being one.

  If a person stays in front of a gaming machine without playing a game, the operating rate of the gaming machine decreases because another person can not play a game on the gaming machine even though the gaming is not performed. As a result, the gaming hall suffers from disadvantages. On the other hand, according to the feature N2, whether or not a person is staying in front of the gaming machine without playing a game is monitored using state information, and the situation is Can be dealt with as it is in a specific situation response state.

Feature N3. The information storage means (sound light side ROM 94) which stores beforehand the specific situation information corresponding to the above-mentioned specific situation,
The specific situation handling means causes the specific situation handling state when the state information derived by the information deriving means corresponds to the specific situation information stored in the information storage means. The gaming machine according to feature N1 or N2 characterized in that

  According to the feature N3, when the derived state information corresponds to the specific situation information, the state corresponding to the specific situation is established. For example, when an operation having a possibility of an illegal act is performed, the situation is dealt with It becomes possible.

  Feature N4. Effect control means (the first notification effect control process in the sound light side MPU 93, the second notification effect control process, the divided effect control process, the stop process for executing effects process using the state information derived by the information deriving means The gaming machine according to any one of the features N1 to N3 having a function of executing operation effect control processing and continuous effect control processing.

  According to the feature N4, it is possible to monitor whether or not a specific situation has occurred, using the configuration for deriving the state information used for the effect.

  Feature N5. The specific situation handling means performs the process for notification (the process of step S1414 and step S1514 in the sound light side MPU 93) without blocking the progress of the game, thereby making the particular situation handling state. The gaming machine according to any one of the features N1 to N4.

  According to the feature N5, even if it is specified that the specific situation is generated based on the state information, the progress of the game is not blocked, so the specific situation is caused because the derivation of the state information was not accurately performed. Even if it has been identified that has occurred, it is possible to prevent the legitimate player from being disadvantaged. Further, when it is determined that the specific situation is occurring, the notification is executed, so that it is possible to call attention to the game hall manager or the like.

  Feature N6. The specific situation handling means performs the notification process (the process of step S 1414 and step S 1514 in the sound light side MPU 93) different from the notification sound output process without executing the notification sound output process. The gaming machine according to any one of the features N1 to N5, wherein the gaming machine is in a specific situation handling state.

  According to the feature N6, even if it is specified that the specific situation is generated based on the state information, the notification by the sound output is not executed, so the specification is caused because the derivation of the state information is not performed correctly. Even if the situation is identified as occurring, it is possible to make the regular player not feel uncomfortable. In addition, when it is specified that a specific situation has occurred, a notification different from the sound output is executed, so that it is possible to call a manager of the game hall or the like to pay attention.

  Feature N7. The information deriving means is characterized in that position information corresponding to a distance to a monitoring target existing in front of the gaming machine is derived as the state information of the monitoring range based on the light reception result in the light receiving unit. The gaming machine according to any one of features N1 to N6.

  According to the feature N7, since position information is derived based on the light reception result in the light receiving unit and the occurrence of the specific situation is monitored using the position information, the relationship with the distance from the distance measurement reference It is possible to execute the monitoring in

Feature N8. It has a window panel (window panel 22) provided on the front of the gaming machine and viewed by the player to confirm the contents of the game.
The gaming machine according to any one of the features N1 to N7, wherein the light receiving unit is provided on the gaming machine rear side with respect to the window panel unit.

  According to the feature N8, it is possible to prevent the fraudulent act on the light receiving unit.

Feature N9. Status information (distance data or one frame's worth of image G) of the monitoring range present ahead of the gaming machine based on the reception result in the reception unit (the imaging device 73 in the first embodiment etc. and the imaging device 131 in the third embodiment) Information deriving means (in the first embodiment etc., the signal processing circuit 75, in the third embodiment the signal processing circuit 141), and
Specific situation handling means for establishing a specific situation handling state when it is identified that a specific situation predetermined as an undesirable situation has occurred based on the state information derived by the information deriving means A function of executing the first situation monitoring process and the second situation monitoring process in the sound side MPU 93);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature N9, since it is configured to monitor whether or not a specific situation has occurred using the state information derived based on the reception result in the reception unit, the monitoring is performed uniquely in the gaming machine It becomes possible. Then, when it is specified that the specific situation has occurred, it becomes possible to cope with it by becoming the specific situation corresponding state.

  In addition, the feature A1 to A20, the feature B1 to B11, the feature C1 to C11, the feature D1 to D8, the feature E1 to E13, the feature F1 to F8, the feature G1 to G16 with respect to the configuration of any one of the features N1 to N9. , Feature H1 to H6, feature I1 to I12, feature J1 to J24, feature K1 to K7, feature L1 to L4, feature M1 to M11, feature N1 to N9, feature O1 to O8, and any one or more configurations It may apply. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to each feature of the feature M group and the feature N group, the following problems can be solved.

  Pachinko machines, slot machines and the like are known as a type of gaming machine. In these gaming machines, it is known that an internal lottery is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, and a bonus is provided to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. In addition, it is general that an effect for causing a player to predict or recognize the result of the internal lottery is performed.

  Specifically, for the pachinko machine, for example, a lottery is performed based on the game ball entering the ball entry portion provided in the game area, and the variation display of the pattern is performed on the display surface of the display device. It is known that when the winning result is obtained, the combination of the specific pattern etc. is displayed on the display surface as a final stop, and the configuration shifts to a special gaming state advantageous to the player. And when it shifts to the special game state, for example opening and closing of the ball entry device etc which are provided in the game territory is started, due to the ball entry to the said ball entry device and the like the payout etc of the game sphere comes to be done ing.

  Here, it is considered that in the gaming machine as illustrated above etc., an undesirable situation may occur to the gaming hall side. For example, in the case of a fraudulent act on a gaming machine, the gaming hall or the player suffers a disadvantage. In addition, for example, if the gaming machine is occupied despite the fact that a game is not performed, the operation rate of the gaming machine is lowered, and also in this case, the gaming hall suffers a disadvantage. It is necessary to provide a configuration that can suitably cope with such a situation that is not preferable to the game hall side.

<Feature O group>
Characteristics O1. Status information (distance data or one frame's worth of image G) of the monitoring range present ahead of the gaming machine based on the light reception result in the light receiving section (the imaging apparatus 73 in the first embodiment etc. and the imaging apparatus 131 in the third embodiment) Information deriving means (in the first embodiment etc., the signal processing circuit 75, in the third embodiment the signal processing circuit 141), and
Specific execution means (the cancellation monitoring process in the sound light side MPU 93, height position monitoring process, face authentication process, first situation monitoring process, and the like) which executes the specific process using the state information derived by the information deriving means A second condition monitoring process, an operation effect control process, and a function of executing an imaging control process);
Equipped with
A game machine characterized in that the light receiving section is provided at a position where it is not possible to visually recognize or difficult to visually recognize the front of the game machine.

  According to the feature O1, since the specific process is executed using the state information derived based on the light reception result in the light receiving unit, it is possible to recognize the non-contact type of the player's action or appearance. Become. In this case, since the light receiving unit is provided at a position where the light receiving unit is not visible or difficult to see from the front of the gaming machine, it is possible for the player to make it difficult or hard to understand that the light receiving unit is present. Become. For example, if it is known that a camera or the like is provided in a gaming machine and that it is imaging the player itself, the player may feel discomfort and may refrain from playing the game. According to the configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to feel such discomfort.

  Characteristics O2. The game machine according to the feature O1, wherein the light receiving unit is provided such that a plate unit (stage member 68) having a beam splitter function is interposed between a viewpoint in front of the game machine and the light receiving unit. Machine.

  According to the feature O2, it is possible to make the light receiving unit invisible or hard to visually recognize from the front of the gaming machine while enabling light reception in the light receiving unit.

Characteristics O3. A window panel unit (window panel 22) provided on the front face of the gaming machine (front door frame 14), which allows the gaming area where the gaming balls flow down to be visible from the front of the gaming machine;
The gaming machine according to the feature O1 or O2, wherein the light receiving unit is provided on the back side of a member (stage member 68) that generates the gaming area.

  According to the feature O3, while including the player facing the window panel section in the monitoring range, it is possible to hide the light receiving section using the member that generates the game area.

Characteristics O4. Display means (symbol display device 61) having a display surface at a position behind the gaming machine with respect to the board surface of the gaming board (gaming board 51) on which the gaming area where the gaming balls flow down is formed;
A stage (stage unit 67) provided so as to extend between the display surface and the board below the display means and having a rolling surface on which gaming balls roll;
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to any one of the features O1 to O3, wherein the light receiving unit is provided on the back side of a member (stage member 68) constituting the stage.

  According to the feature O4, the light receiving unit can be provided by using a stage having a predetermined dimension in the front-rear direction. Further, since the stage is provided to extend between the display surface and the panel below the display means, there is a space in the front-rear direction between the display surface and the panel above the light receiving section. It will be. This makes it easy to receive light in the light receiving unit.

Characteristic O5. A window panel unit (window panel 22) provided on the front face of the gaming machine (front door frame 14) and viewed by the player to confirm the contents of the game,
The light receiving unit according to any one of the features O1 to O4 characterized in that the light receiving unit is provided at a position where it is not visible or difficult to see even when the front face of the gaming machine is opened forward of the gaming machine. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature O5, even when the front face of the gaming machine is opened toward the front of the gaming machine for maintenance in a situation where a game is being performed, the light receiving portion can be made invisible or hard to visually recognize As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the presence of the light receiving unit.

Feature O6. A support (body frame 13) supported so as to be able to open and close on a support base (outer frame 11),
In any one of the features O1 to O5, the light receiving unit is provided at a position where the support is not visible or hard to recognize even when the support is opened with respect to the support base. The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature O6, even when the support is opened with respect to the support base, it is possible to make the light receiving part invisible or hard to visually recognize, for example, the light receiving part also to the employee of the game hall It is possible to make it hard to recognize the existence of

  Feature O7. The information deriving means is characterized in that position information corresponding to a distance to a monitoring target existing in front of the gaming machine is derived as the state information of the monitoring range based on the light reception result in the light receiving unit. The gaming machine according to any one of features O1 to O6.

  According to the feature O7, the position information is derived based on the light reception result in the light receiving unit, and the specifying process is executed using the position information, so the specifying process is executed in relation to the distance from the distance measurement reference It is possible to

Feature O8. Status information (distance data or one frame's worth of image G) of the monitoring range present ahead of the gaming machine based on the reception result in the reception unit (the imaging device 73 in the first embodiment etc. and the imaging device 131 in the third embodiment) Information deriving means (in the first embodiment etc., the signal processing circuit 75, in the third embodiment the signal processing circuit 141), and
Specific execution means (the cancellation monitoring process in the sound light side MPU 93, height position monitoring process, face authentication process, first situation monitoring process, and the like) which executes the specific process using the state information derived by the information deriving means A second condition monitoring process, an operation effect control process, and a function of executing an imaging control process);
Equipped with
A game machine characterized in that the reception unit is provided at a position where the game machine is not visible or difficult to see from the front of the game machine.

  According to the feature O8, since the specific process is executed using the state information derived based on the reception result in the receiving unit, it is possible to recognize the player's operation or appearance without contact. Become. In this case, since the receiving unit is provided at a position where it is not possible or difficult to visually recognize from the front of the gaming machine, it is possible for the player to make it difficult or hard to understand that the receiving unit is present. Become. For example, if it is known that a camera or the like is provided in a gaming machine and that it is imaging the player itself, the player may feel discomfort and may refrain from playing the game. According to the configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to feel such discomfort.

  In addition, the feature A1 to A20, the feature B1 to B11, the feature C1 to C11, the feature D1 to D8, the feature E1 to E13, the feature F1 to F8, the feature G1 to G16 with respect to the configuration of any one of the features O1 to O8. , Feature H1 to H6, feature I1 to I12, feature J1 to J24, feature K1 to K7, feature L1 to L4, feature M1 to M11, feature N1 to N9, feature O1 to O8, and any one or more configurations It may apply. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to each feature of the feature O group, the following problems can be solved.

  Pachinko machines, slot machines and the like are known as a type of gaming machine. In these gaming machines, it is known that an internal lottery is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, and a bonus is provided to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. In addition, it is general that an effect for causing a player to predict or recognize the result of the internal lottery is performed.

  Specifically, for the pachinko machine, for example, a lottery is performed based on the game ball entering the ball entry portion provided in the game area, and the variation display of the pattern is performed on the display surface of the display device. It is known that when the winning result is obtained, the combination of the specific pattern etc. is displayed on the display surface as a final stop, and the configuration shifts to a special gaming state advantageous to the player. And when it shifts to the special game state, for example opening and closing of the ball entry device etc which are provided in the game territory is started, due to the ball entry to the said ball entry device and the like the payout etc of the game sphere comes to be done ing.

  Here, by providing a configuration capable of non-contact recognition of the action or behavior of the player, for example, it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the action by the non-contact of the player, and in addition to that, for example, a game machine It is possible to monitor the presence of fraudulent In this case, it is necessary to be able to preferably perform non-contact type recognition of the player's action and appearance, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The basic configuration of the gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied or applied to each of the features is described below.

  Pachinko gaming machine: operation means operated by a player, game ball firing means for firing game balls based on the operation of the operation means, a ball passage for guiding the fired game balls to a predetermined game area, and a game A gaming machine comprising: each gaming component arranged in an area, and providing a bonus to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of the gaming components.

  Throttle type gaming machines such as slot machines: A pattern display device for variably displaying a plurality of patterns, variable display of the plurality of patterns is started due to the operation of the start operation means, and the cause is due to the operation of the stop operation means And / or a variable display of the plurality of symbols is stopped when a predetermined time elapses, and a game machine which provides a bonus to the player according to the symbols after the stop.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... Pachinko machine, 11 ... Outer frame, 13 ... Body frame, 14 ... Front door frame, 22 ... Window panel, 51 ... Game board, 61 ... Symbol display device, 67 ... Stage unit, 68 ... Stage member, 73 ... Imaging Apparatus 75 Signal processing circuit 83 Main side MPU 84 Main side ROM 85 Main side RAM 91a Reference switch 93 Sound light side MPU 94 Sound light side ROM 95 Sound light side RAM, 96: display control device, 131: imaging device, 141: signal processing circuit, CA1 to CA3: variation display area, CH1: fish character, G: image for one frame.

Claims (1)

Information deriving means capable of deriving position information corresponding to the distance to the monitoring target existing ahead of the gaming machine based on the light reception result in the light receiving section;
Operation specifying means for specifying whether or not the recognition target region of the player is included in the operation effective range using the position information derived by the information deriving means;
Specific execution means for executing specific processing corresponding to the recognition target portion being specified by the operation specifying means as being included in the operation effective range;
Equipped with
The operation specifying means is
A specific adjustment unit that executes a specific adjustment process for adjusting the positional relationship between the recognition target site and the operation effective range based on position information of the recognition target site;
The recognition target region corresponding to the position information corresponding to the position where the distance from the distance measurement standard to the front of the gaming machine is out of the specific range is excluded from the identification target whether or not it is included in the operation effective range;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

Images